JP2021013461A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance interest before executing a performance in a game machine for executing plural performances.SOLUTION: A performance pattern of a timer performance for performing subtraction operation of remaining time (remaining n seconds to remaining 0 second) shown by a timer image 10TM800 includes a first performance pattern in which a third vibration performance is executed at timing immediately after updating the timer image 10TM800 to a final mode "00:00", and a second performance pattern in which a cut-in notice performance is executed at timing immediately after updating the timer image 10TM800 to the final mode "00:00".SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 13-20

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine that executes an acquisition effect that notifies the acquisition of the execution right of any of a plurality of element effects when an operation of the effect operation unit is detected during the operation validity period. ing.

JP-A-2016-116654 (Fig. 58)

In a game machine in which a plurality of effects are executed, such as the game machine described in Patent Document 1, there is room for improving the interest before the effect is executed.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to improve the interest of a game machine in which a plurality of effects are executed before the effect is executed.

The game machine of means C1
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
Equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) for controlling the effect
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
It is possible to execute a plurality of types of advance notice effects (third vibration effect, strong development effect, cut-in advance notice effect, battle effect) suggesting that the control is controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state).
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to a predetermined type of advance notice effect including a predetermined vibration effect (single vibration effect (third vibration effect)) that vibrates the operation unit (stick controller 31A) (as shown in FIG. 13-20). , The timer image 10TM800 corresponding to the third vibration effect, strong development effect, or cut-in notice effect can be displayed),
When executing the predetermined type of advance notice effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect that changes the specific display to a specific mode (as shown in FIGS. 13-23 and 13-26, the remaining time (remaining time) indicated by the timer image. It is possible to execute a timer effect that performs a subtraction operation (countdown operation until the start of the battle effect) from n seconds to 0 seconds remaining),
The case where the predetermined type of advance notice effect is executed after the specific display is displayed is controlled to the advantageous state as compared with the case where the predetermined type of advance notice effect is executed without displaying the specific display. (As shown in FIG. 13-20, when the timer effect is executed and the notice effect (third vibration effect, strong development effect, cut-in notice effect) is executed after the timer image is displayed. The expectation of a big hit is higher than when the timer effect is not executed, the timer image is not displayed, and the notice effect is executed),
When the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed (as shown in FIGS. 13-16, the third vibration effect is executed). In the case, the big hit expectation is higher than in the case where the third vibration effect is not executed),
As the effect pattern of the specific effect, as shown in the first effect pattern (as shown in FIGS. 13-23 (7) and (8), the specific display changes to the specific mode when the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the timer The pattern in which the third vibration effect is executed at the timing immediately after the image 10TM800 is updated to the final mode "00:00") and the above-mentioned specificization when a notice effect different from the predetermined vibration effect is executed. The timer image 10TM800 has been updated to the final mode "00:00" as shown in the second effect pattern (FIGS. 13-26 (8) and 13-27 (9)) in which the display changes to the specific mode. A gaming machine characterized in that there is a pattern in which a cut-in notice effect is executed at the timing immediately after.
According to such a configuration, the specific display makes it possible to improve the effect of both the predetermined vibration effect and the advance notice effect different from the predetermined vibration effect, and in particular, when the specific display is changed to a specific mode. You can improve your interest.

The game machine of means C2
It is a game machine of means C1
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute the predetermined vibration effect in a plurality of modes (first vibration effect of the first aspect, first vibration effect of the third aspect).
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the mode of the predetermined vibration effect (as shown in FIG. 13-13, the first mode (expectation: low) <second mode (expectation: high) <th. The jackpot expectation is higher in the order of 3 modes (expectation: confirmed))
A game machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, attention can be paid to the mode of the predetermined vibration effect.

The game machine of means C3
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
It is possible to execute a vibration warning effect that announces that the predetermined vibration effect will be executed.
The predetermined vibration effect of the first aspect (the first vibration effect of the first aspect) in which the vibration period for vibrating the operation unit (stick controller 31A) is the first period (1500 ms), and the vibration period is the first period. Is capable of performing a predetermined vibration effect of the second aspect (first vibration effect of the second aspect), which is a different second period (3000 ms).
Regardless of which of the first aspect and the second aspect is used to execute the predetermined vibration effect, a common vibration notice effect can be executed (a vibration advance effect for which the first vibration effect is a notice target). When executed, the vibration notice effect of the common mode is executed regardless of whether the effect mode of the first vibration effect is the first mode (execution period: 1500 ms) or the second mode (execution period: 3000 ms). Has been)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the predetermined vibration effect by the vibration notice effect.

The game machine of means C4
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C3.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
A notification effect (winning effect) for notifying the control of the advantageous state (big hit game state) by the display means (image display device 5), and
After the notification effect, a special vibration effect (blessing effect) that vibrates the operation unit (stick controller 31A) can be executed.
It is possible to execute a light emitting effect that causes the light emitting device (operation unit LED) to emit light by a plurality of light emitting modes (light emitting color: white, light emitting color: red, light emitting color: rainbow color).
There is a case where a light emitting effect corresponding to the predetermined vibration effect (single vibration effect) is executed, and a case where a light emitting effect corresponding to the special vibration effect (blessing effect) is executed.
It is possible to execute the light emitting effect corresponding to the special vibration effect in the same light emitting mode as the light emitting effect corresponding to the predetermined vibration effect (as shown in FIGS. 13-3, 13-4, and 13-6). , In the single vibration effect (the first vibration effect, the second vibration effect, and the fourth vibration effect of the third aspect), the operation unit LED may be made to emit rainbow color, as shown in FIG. 13-9. , Even in a blessing production that involves vibration of the operation unit, the operation unit LED may emit rainbow colors),
It is possible to execute the light emitting effect corresponding to the special vibration effect in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting effect corresponding to the predetermined vibration effect (as shown in FIGS. 13-3 and 13-5, the single vibration effect (No. 1). In the first vibration effect of the first aspect, the first vibration effect of the second aspect, and the third vibration effect), the operation unit LED may be made to emit white or red light, as shown in FIG. 13-9. Even in a blessing production that involves vibration of the operation unit, the operation unit LED may emit rainbow colors.)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect.

The game machine of means C5
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C4.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
A notification effect (winning effect) for notifying the control of the advantageous state (big hit game state) by the display means (image display device 5), and
After the notification effect, a special vibration effect (blessing effect) that vibrates the operation unit (stick controller 31A) can be executed.
It is possible to make the vibration period of the operation unit different between the case of executing the predetermined vibration effect and the case of executing the special vibration effect (as shown in FIGS. 13-3 to 13-6). In the vibration effect, the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 1500 ms to 3000 ms is executed, while in the blessing effect, the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 6000 ms is executed.)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the vibration period of the operation unit is different between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect, so that the player can clearly distinguish and recognize the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect. The effect of each effect can be enhanced.

The game machine of means C6
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C5.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute the predetermined vibration effect at a plurality of timings (as shown in FIGS. 13-3 to 13-6, the execution timing of the first vibration effect varies. The display is started timing, the execution timing of the second vibration effect is the timing of establishing the reach state, the execution timing of the third vibration effect is the timing of super reach development, and the execution timing of the fourth vibration effect. Is the timing immediately before the notification of the production result in the super reach production is performed),
As shown in FIGS. 13-13, 13-14, 13-16, and 13-17, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed. The first vibration effect of the first aspect, the first vibration effect of the second aspect, and the third vibration effect are effects suggesting that the display result of the variation display is highly expected to be a big hit. The first vibration effect, the second vibration effect, and the fourth vibration effect of the third aspect are the big hit confirmation effects that notify that the display result of the fluctuation display has won the big hit).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed.

The game machine of means C7
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C6.
A determination means (CPU103) for determining whether or not to control the advantageous state (big hit game state), and
A determination means (starting prize determination process (step S101)) for determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is provided before the determination by the determination means.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
It is possible to execute a vibration warning effect that announces that the predetermined vibration effect will be executed.
The predetermined vibration effect (single vibration effect (first vibration effect)) can be executed based on the determination by the determination means (starting prize determination process (step S101)).
Vibration notice effect corresponding to the predetermined vibration effect based on the determination by the determination means (starting prize determination process (step S101)) (as shown in FIGS. 13-28, vibration notice effect for which the first vibration effect is a notice target). A game machine characterized by being capable of performing.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the predetermined vibration effect and the vibration notice effect.

The game machine of means C8
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C7.
A variable display means (CPU 120 for effect control) that executes variable display (variable display) is provided.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can display a corresponding display (active display, hold display) corresponding to the variable display on the display means (image display device 5).
The vibration notice effect includes an effect of operating the corresponding display (as shown in FIGS. 13-7 and 13-28, when the vibration notice effect is executed, the active display or the hold display vibrates up, down, left and right. Displayed in mode)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the vibration notice production.

The game machine of means C9
The gaming machine according to means C8.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) terminates the operation of the corresponding display in response to the execution of the predetermined vibration effect (as shown in FIGS. 13-7 and 13-28, a single vibration. With the end of the production, the active display or hold display is returned from the operating mode to the stationary mode)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player can easily grasp that the predetermined vibration effect, which is the target of the vibration notice effect, has been executed.

The game machine of means C10 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C9.
It can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) having different advantages for the player.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute the predetermined vibration effect in a manner suggesting a set value of the game machine (final display when the first vibration effect of the third aspect is executed). When the result is "missing", it is confirmed that the set value is at least either "5" or "6" (high set value)).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player can be interested in how the predetermined vibration effect is displayed.

For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-38019 (FIG. 5) discloses a gaming machine provided with a vibration means for the ball launching handle and a vibration warning means for notifying the player that the ball launching handle vibrates. ing. In the game machine described in JP-A-2007-38019 (FIG. 5), it is possible to notify the player that the hitting ball launch handle vibrates, but it improves the interest of the effect of vibrating the operation unit. There is room. The inventions relating to the means A1 to the means A12 and the means B1 to the means B12 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object thereof is to improve the interest of the effect of vibrating the operation unit.

The gaming machine of means A1 is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) for controlling the effect
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
A notification effect (winning effect) for notifying the control of the advantageous state (big hit game state) by the display means (image display device 5), and
After the notification effect, a special vibration effect (blessing effect) that vibrates the operation unit (stick controller 31A) and
A predetermined vibration effect that vibrates the operation unit (stick controller 31A) and is different from the special vibration effect (single vibration effect (first vibration effect, second vibration effect, third vibration effect, fourth vibration effect). ) And can be executed,
When the special vibration effect (blessing effect) and the predetermined vibration effect (single vibration effect) are executed, the predetermined vibration effect is executed before the special vibration effect (timing of T8 shown in FIGS. 13-22). The blessing production is executed at, and the single vibration production is executed before the timing of T8),
The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed (FIGS. 13-13, 13-14, 13-16, and FIG. As shown in 13-17, when the single vibration effect (first vibration effect, second vibration effect, third vibration effect, fourth vibration effect) is executed, it is better than when the single vibration effect is not executed. The jackpot expectation is high (including the jackpot confirmation effect), and even when the predetermined vibration effect is executed, it may not be controlled to the advantageous state (as shown in FIGS. 13-13 and 13-16, the first The first vibration effect of the aspect, the first vibration effect of the second aspect, and the third vibration effect can be executed when the display result is "off"),.
The effect control means can execute a vibration notice effect for notifying that the predetermined vibration effect will be executed (as shown in FIGS. 13-23 (2) to (8), the third vibration effect is to be announced. Vibration notice production is being executed)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, by executing the vibration notice effect, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the predetermined vibration effect is executed, while the special vibration effect is executed. By not giving notice until then, it is possible to appropriately generate the interest of each effect when there are a plurality of types of effects that vibrate the operation unit.

The game machine of means A2
It is a game machine of means A1 and
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute the predetermined vibration effect in a plurality of modes (first vibration effect of the first aspect, first vibration effect of the third aspect).
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the mode of the predetermined vibration effect (as shown in FIG. 13-13, the first mode (expectation: low) <second mode (expectation: high) <th. The jackpot expectation is higher in the order of 3 modes (expectation: confirmed))
A game machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, attention can be paid to the mode of the predetermined vibration effect.

The game machine of means A3
A gaming machine of means A1 or means A2,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
The predetermined vibration effect of the first aspect (the first vibration effect of the first aspect) in which the vibration period for vibrating the operation unit (stick controller 31A) is the first period (1500 ms), and the vibration period is the first period. Is capable of performing a predetermined vibration effect of the second aspect (first vibration effect of the second aspect), which is a different second period (3000 ms).
Regardless of which of the first aspect and the second aspect is used to execute the predetermined vibration effect, a common vibration notice effect can be executed (a vibration advance effect for which the first vibration effect is a notice target). When executed, the vibration notice effect of the common mode is executed regardless of whether the effect mode of the first vibration effect is the first mode (execution period: 1500 ms) or the second mode (execution period: 3000 ms). Has been)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the predetermined vibration effect by the vibration notice effect.

The game machine of means A4
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A3.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
It is possible to execute a light emitting effect that causes the light emitting device (operation unit LED) to emit light by a plurality of light emitting modes (light emitting color: white, light emitting color: red, light emitting color: rainbow color).
There is a case where a light emitting effect corresponding to the predetermined vibration effect (single vibration effect) is executed, and a case where a light emitting effect corresponding to the special vibration effect (blessing effect) is executed.
It is possible to execute the light emitting effect corresponding to the special vibration effect in the same light emitting mode as the light emitting effect corresponding to the predetermined vibration effect (as shown in FIGS. 13-3, 13-4, and 13-6). , In the single vibration effect (the first vibration effect, the second vibration effect, and the fourth vibration effect of the third aspect), the operation unit LED may be made to emit rainbow color, as shown in FIG. 13-9. , Even in a blessing production that involves vibration of the operation unit, the operation unit LED may emit rainbow colors),
It is possible to execute the light emitting effect corresponding to the special vibration effect in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting effect corresponding to the predetermined vibration effect (as shown in FIGS. 13-3 and 13-5, the single vibration effect (No. 1). In the first vibration effect of the first aspect, the first vibration effect of the second aspect, and the third vibration effect), the operation unit LED may be made to emit white or red light, as shown in FIG. 13-9. Even in a blessing production that involves vibration of the operation unit, the operation unit LED may emit rainbow colors.)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect.

The game machine of means A5
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A4.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can make the vibration period of the operation unit different depending on whether the predetermined vibration effect is executed or the special vibration effect is executed (FIG. 13-). As shown in FIGS. 3 to 13-6, the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 1500 ms to 3000 ms is executed in the single vibration effect, while the stick controller 31A is executed in the blessing effect as shown in FIG. 13-9. Is being vibrated for 6000 ms)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the vibration period of the operation unit is different between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect, so that the player can clearly distinguish and recognize the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect. The effect of each effect can be enhanced.

The game machine of means A6
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A5.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute the predetermined vibration effect at a plurality of timings (as shown in FIGS. 13-3 to 13-6, the execution timing of the first vibration effect varies. The display is started timing, the execution timing of the second vibration effect is the timing of establishing the reach state, the execution timing of the third vibration effect is the timing of super reach development, and the execution timing of the fourth vibration effect. Is the timing immediately before the notification of the production result in the super reach production is performed),
As shown in FIGS. 13-13, 13-14, 13-16, and 13-17, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed. The first vibration effect of the first aspect, the first vibration effect of the second aspect, and the third vibration effect are effects suggesting that the display result of the variation display is highly expected to be a big hit. The first vibration effect, the second vibration effect, and the fourth vibration effect of the third aspect are the big hit confirmation effects that notify that the display result of the fluctuation display has won the big hit).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed.

The game machine of means A7
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A6.
A determination means (CPU103) for determining whether or not to control the advantageous state (big hit game state), and
A determination means (starting prize determination process (step S101)) for determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is provided before the determination by the determination means.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
The predetermined vibration effect (single vibration effect (first vibration effect)) can be executed based on the determination by the determination means (starting prize determination process (step S101)).
Vibration notice effect corresponding to the predetermined vibration effect based on the determination by the determination means (starting prize determination process (step S101)) (as shown in FIGS. 13-28, vibration notice effect for which the first vibration effect is a notice target). A game machine characterized by being capable of performing.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the predetermined vibration effect and the vibration notice effect.

The game machine of means A8
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A7.
A variable display means (CPU 120 for effect control) that executes variable display (variable display) is provided.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can display a corresponding display (active display, hold display) corresponding to the variable display on the display means (image display device 5).
The vibration notice effect includes an effect of operating the corresponding display (as shown in FIGS. 13-7 and 13-28, when the vibration notice effect is executed, the active display or the hold display vibrates up, down, left and right. Displayed in mode)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the vibration notice production.

The game machine of means A9
The gaming machine according to means A8.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) terminates the operation of the corresponding display in response to the execution of the predetermined vibration effect (as shown in FIGS. 13-7 and 13-28, a single vibration. With the end of the production, the active display or hold display is returned from the operating mode to the stationary mode)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player can easily grasp that the predetermined vibration effect, which is the target of the vibration notice effect, has been executed.

The game machine of means A10
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A9.
It can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) having different advantages for the player.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute the predetermined vibration effect in a manner suggesting a set value of the game machine (final display when the first vibration effect of the third aspect is executed). When the result is "missing", it is confirmed that the set value is at least either "5" or "6" (high set value)).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player can be interested in how the predetermined vibration effect is displayed.

The game machine of means A11
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A10.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
Multiple types of notice effects (third vibration effect, strong development effect, cut-in notice effect, battle effect) can be executed.
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to a predetermined type of notice effect including the predetermined vibration effect among the plurality of types of advance notice effects (as shown in FIG. 13-20, a third vibration effect, a strong development effect, or a strong development effect. It is possible to display the timer image corresponding to the cut-in notice effect),
When executing the predetermined type of advance notice effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect that changes the specific display to a specific mode (as shown in FIGS. 13-23 (7) and 13-26 (8), a timer image. A timer effect that performs a subtraction operation (countdown operation until the start of the battle effect) of the remaining time (n seconds remaining to 0 seconds remaining) indicated by 10TM800 can be executed),
As the effect pattern of the specific effect, as shown in the first effect pattern (as shown in FIGS. 13-23 (7) and (8), the specific display changes to the specific mode when the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the timer The pattern in which the third vibration effect is executed at the timing immediately after the image 10TM800 is updated to the final mode "00:00") and the above-mentioned specificization when a notice effect different from the predetermined vibration effect is executed. The timer image 10TM800 has been updated to the final mode "00:00" as shown in the second effect pattern (FIGS. 13-26 (8) and 13-27 (9)) in which the display changes to the specific mode. A gaming machine characterized in that there is a pattern in which a cut-in notice effect is executed at the timing immediately after.
According to such a configuration, the specific display makes it possible to improve the effect of both the predetermined vibration effect and the advance notice effect different from the predetermined vibration effect, and in particular, when the specific display is changed to a specific mode. You can improve your interest.

The game machine of means A12
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A10.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
Multiple types of notice effects (third vibration effect, strong development effect, cut-in notice effect, battle effect) can be executed.
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to a predetermined type of notice effect including the predetermined vibration effect among the plurality of types of advance notice effects (as shown in FIG. 13-20, a third vibration effect, a strong development effect, or a strong development effect. It is possible to display the timer image corresponding to the cut-in notice effect),
When executing the predetermined type of advance notice effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect that changes the specific display to a specific mode (as shown in FIGS. 13-23 (7) and 13-26 (8), a timer image. A timer effect that performs a subtraction operation (countdown operation until the start of the battle effect) of the remaining time (n seconds remaining to 0 seconds remaining) indicated by 10TM800 can be executed),
As the effect pattern of the specific effect, the timer image 10TM800 is the final aspect, as shown in the first effect pattern (FIGS. 13-23 (7) and (8)) suggesting that the predetermined vibration effect is executed. A pattern in which the third vibration effect is executed at the timing immediately after "00: 00") and a second effect pattern (FIG. 13-26) suggesting that a notice effect different from the predetermined vibration effect is executed. As shown in (8) and FIG. 13-27 (9), there is a pattern in which the cut-in notice effect is executed at the timing immediately after the timer image 10TM800 reaches the final mode of "00:00"). A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of both the predetermined vibration effect and the advance notice effect different from the predetermined vibration effect by the specific display, and improve the interest when the specific display is displayed. be able to.

The game machine of means B1
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
Variable display means (CPU103, effect control CPU120) that executes variable display (variable display), and
A production control means (CPU 120 for production control) for controlling the production is provided.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
Corresponding display (active display, hold display) corresponding to variable display (variable display) can be displayed on the display means (image display device 5).
It is possible to execute a predetermined vibration effect (single vibration effect) that vibrates the operation unit (stick controller 31A).
The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed (FIGS. 13-13, 13-14, 13-16, and FIG. As shown in 13-17, the expectation of a big hit is higher when the single vibration effect is executed than when the single vibration effect is not executed).
As the display modes of the corresponding display (active display, hold display), a notice mode (blue mode, red mode) suggesting that the control is controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state), and the predetermined vibration effect (single vibration effect). ) Is executed, the gaming machine is characterized in that there is a special mode (operation mode).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest that the predetermined vibration effect is executed depending on the display mode of the corresponding display, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the effect of vibrating the operation unit.

The game machine of means B2
It is a game machine of means B1
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute the predetermined vibration effect in a plurality of modes (first vibration effect of the first aspect, first vibration effect of the third aspect).
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the mode of the predetermined vibration effect (as shown in FIG. 13-13, the first mode (expectation: low) <second mode (expectation: high) <th. The jackpot expectation is higher in the order of 3 modes (expectation: confirmed))
A game machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, attention can be paid to the mode of the predetermined vibration effect.

The game machine of means B3
A game machine of means B1 or means B2,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
The predetermined vibration effect of the first aspect (the first vibration effect of the first aspect) in which the vibration period for vibrating the operation unit (stick controller 31A) is the first period (1500 ms), and the vibration period is the first period. Is capable of performing a predetermined vibration effect of the second aspect (first vibration effect of the second aspect), which is a different second period (3000 ms).
Regardless of which of the first aspect and the second aspect is used to execute the predetermined vibration effect, the corresponding display can be displayed in the special aspect (vibration notice for which the first vibration effect is a notice target). When executing the effect, regardless of whether the effect mode of the first vibration effect is the first mode (execution period: 1500 ms) or the second mode (execution period: 3000 ms), the vibration notice effect of the common mode is used. Is running)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the predetermined vibration effect depending on the mode of the corresponding display.

The game machine of means B4
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B3.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
A notification effect (winning effect) for notifying the control of the advantageous state (big hit game state) by the display means (image display device 5), and
After the notification effect, a special vibration effect (blessing effect) that vibrates the operation unit (stick controller 31A) can be executed.
It is possible to execute a light emitting effect that causes the light emitting device (operation unit LED) to emit light by a plurality of light emitting modes (light emitting color: white, light emitting color: red, light emitting color: rainbow color).
There is a case where a light emitting effect corresponding to the predetermined vibration effect (single vibration effect) is executed, and a case where a light emitting effect corresponding to the special vibration effect (blessing effect) is executed.
It is possible to execute the light emitting effect corresponding to the special vibration effect in the same light emitting mode as the light emitting effect corresponding to the predetermined vibration effect (as shown in FIGS. 13-3, 13-4, and 13-6). , In the single vibration effect (the first vibration effect, the second vibration effect, and the fourth vibration effect of the third aspect), the operation unit LED may be made to emit rainbow color, as shown in FIG. 13-9. , Even in a blessing production that involves vibration of the operation unit, the operation unit LED may emit rainbow colors),
It is possible to execute the light emitting effect corresponding to the special vibration effect in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting effect corresponding to the predetermined vibration effect (as shown in FIGS. 13-3 and 13-5, the single vibration effect (No. 1). In the first vibration effect of the first aspect, the first vibration effect of the second aspect, and the third vibration effect), the operation unit LED may be made to emit white or red light, as shown in FIG. 13-9. Even in a blessing production that involves vibration of the operation unit, the operation unit LED may emit rainbow colors.)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect.

The game machine of means B5
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B4.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
A notification effect (winning effect) for notifying the control of the advantageous state (big hit game state) by the display means (image display device 5), and
After the notification effect, a special vibration effect (blessing effect) that vibrates the operation unit (stick controller 31A) can be executed.
It is possible to make the vibration period of the operation unit different between the case of executing the predetermined vibration effect and the case of executing the special vibration effect (as shown in FIGS. 13-3 to 13-6). In the vibration effect, the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 1500 ms to 3000 ms is executed, while in the blessing effect, the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 6000 ms is executed.)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the vibration period of the operation unit is different between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect, so that the player can clearly distinguish and recognize the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect. The effect of each effect can be enhanced.

The game machine of means B6
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B5.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute the predetermined vibration effect at a plurality of timings (as shown in FIGS. 13-3 to 13-6, the execution timing of the first vibration effect varies. The display is started timing, the execution timing of the second vibration effect is the timing of establishing the reach state, the execution timing of the third vibration effect is the timing of super reach development, and the execution timing of the fourth vibration effect. Is the timing immediately before the notification of the production result in the super reach production is performed),
As shown in FIGS. 13-13, 13-14, 13-16, and 13-17, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed. The first vibration effect of the first aspect, the first vibration effect of the second aspect, and the third vibration effect are effects suggesting that the display result of the variation display is highly expected to be a big hit. The first vibration effect, the second vibration effect, and the fourth vibration effect of the third aspect are the big hit confirmation effects that notify that the display result of the fluctuation display has won the big hit).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed.

The game machine of means B7
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B6.
A determination means (CPU103) for determining whether or not to control the advantageous state (big hit game state), and
A determination means (starting prize determination process (step S101)) for determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is provided before the determination by the determination means.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
The predetermined vibration effect (single vibration effect (first vibration effect)) can be executed based on the determination by the determination means (starting prize determination process (step S101)).
Based on the determination by the determination means (starting prize determination process (step S101)), the corresponding display can be displayed in the special mode (as shown in FIGS. 13-28, the vibration advance notice for which the first vibration effect is the advance notice target). A game machine characterized by being able to perform production).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the predetermined vibration effect and the mode of the corresponding display.

The game machine of means B8
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B7.
The special mode includes a mode in which the corresponding display operates (as shown in FIGS. 13-7 and 13-28, when the vibration notice effect is executed, the active display or the hold display vibrates up, down, left and right. Displayed in mode)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the corresponding display mode.

The game machine of means B9
The gaming machine according to means B8.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) terminates the operation of the corresponding display in response to the execution of the predetermined vibration effect (as shown in FIGS. 13-7 and 13-28, a single vibration. With the end of the production, the active display or hold display is returned from the operating mode to the stationary mode)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player can easily grasp that the predetermined vibration effect, which is the target of the vibration notice effect, has been executed.

The gaming machine of means B10
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B9.
It can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) having different advantages for the player.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute the predetermined vibration effect in a manner suggesting a set value of the game machine (final display when the first vibration effect of the third aspect is executed). When the result is "missing", it is confirmed that the set value is at least either "5" or "6" (high set value)).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player can be interested in how the predetermined vibration effect is displayed.

The gaming machine of means B11
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B10.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
Multiple types of notice effects (third vibration effect, strong development effect, cut-in notice effect, battle effect) can be executed.
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to a predetermined type of notice effect including the predetermined vibration effect among the plurality of types of advance notice effects (as shown in FIG. 13-20, a third vibration effect, a strong development effect, or a strong development effect. It is possible to display the timer image corresponding to the cut-in notice effect),
When executing the predetermined type of advance notice effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect that changes the specific display to a specific mode (as shown in FIGS. 13-23 (7) and 13-26 (8), a timer image. A timer effect that performs a subtraction operation (countdown operation until the start of the battle effect) of the remaining time (n seconds remaining to 0 seconds remaining) indicated by 10TM800 can be executed),
As the effect pattern of the specific effect, as shown in the first effect pattern (as shown in FIGS. 13-23 (7) and (8), the specific display changes to the specific mode when the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the timer The pattern in which the third vibration effect is executed at the timing immediately after the image 10TM800 is updated to the final mode "00:00") and the above-mentioned specificization when a notice effect different from the predetermined vibration effect is executed. The timer image 10TM800 has been updated to the final mode "00:00" as shown in the second effect pattern (FIGS. 13-26 (8) and 13-27 (9)) in which the display changes to the specific mode. A gaming machine characterized in that there is a pattern in which a cut-in notice effect is executed at the timing immediately after.
According to such a configuration, the specific display makes it possible to improve the effect of both the predetermined vibration effect and the advance notice effect different from the predetermined vibration effect, and in particular, when the specific display is changed to a specific mode. You can improve your interest.

The gaming machine of means B12
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B10.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
Multiple types of notice effects (third vibration effect, strong development effect, cut-in notice effect, battle effect) can be executed.
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to a predetermined type of notice effect including the predetermined vibration effect among the plurality of types of advance notice effects (as shown in FIG. 13-20, a third vibration effect, a strong development effect, or a strong development effect. It is possible to display the timer image corresponding to the cut-in notice effect),
When executing the predetermined type of advance notice effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect that changes the specific display to a specific mode (as shown in FIGS. 13-23 (7) and 13-26 (8), a timer image. A timer effect that performs a subtraction operation (countdown operation until the start of the battle effect) of the remaining time (n seconds remaining to 0 seconds remaining) indicated by 10TM800 can be executed),
As the effect pattern of the specific effect, the timer image 10TM800 is the final aspect, as shown in the first effect pattern (FIGS. 13-23 (7) and (8)) suggesting that the predetermined vibration effect is executed. A pattern in which the third vibration effect is executed at the timing immediately after "00: 00") and a second effect pattern (FIG. 13-26) suggesting that a notice effect different from the predetermined vibration effect is executed. As shown in (8) and FIG. 13-27 (9), there is a pattern in which the cut-in notice effect is executed at the timing immediately after the timer image 10TM800 reaches the final mode of "00:00"). A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of both the predetermined vibration effect and the advance notice effect different from the predetermined vibration effect by the specific display, and improve the interest when the specific display is displayed. be able to.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of each big hit. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for detachment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the random value value determination processing at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the cut-in effect determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the cut-in effect determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the cut-in effect determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination rate of an effect pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination rate of an effect pattern. It is explanatory drawing of the production pattern of a cut-in effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio in the cut-in effect pattern CI-3. It is a flowchart which shows the advance notice production decision processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution ratio of the advance notice effect and the determination rate of an effect pattern, and is explanatory drawing of the effect pattern of the advance notice effect. It is explanatory drawing of the notice production execution period for each variation pattern. It is explanatory drawing of the notice production execution period for each variation pattern. It is explanatory drawing of the notice production execution period for each variation pattern. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the advance notice effect in the variable display. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the cut-in effect in the variable display. It is a figure which shows the notification mode of the variable display result for every variation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the decision rate of the effect pattern in the modification 208SG-1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the decision rate of the effect pattern in the modification 208SG-2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the decision rate of the effect pattern in the modification 208SG-3. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the advance notice effect and the determination rate of an effect pattern in a modification 208SG-4. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the decision rate of the effect pattern in the modification 208SG-5. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the decision rate of the effect pattern in the modification 208SG-6. It is a figure which shows the execution period of the set value suggestion effect and the execution decision ratio of the set value suggestion effect in the modification 208SG-7. It is a front view of the game machine which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is explanatory drawing explaining the hit probability of the game machine which concerns on a feature part 027SH. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern of the game machine which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is explanatory drawing explaining the advance notice production. This is an example of each notice production. This is an example of each notice production. It is explanatory drawing explaining the determination ratio of the advance notice production. It is explanatory drawing explaining the item image production. This is a display example of each item image. It is explanatory drawing explaining the determination ratio of the item image production. It is explanatory drawing explaining various timings. This is a specific example of various timings. This is a specific example of various timings. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is explanatory drawing explaining the setting value suggestion in the game machine which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is explanatory drawing explaining the setting value suggestion in the game machine which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of each display information displayed on an image display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the change effect determination process executed at the time of a start winning a prize. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the final display mode of the active display, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining a change pattern of the active display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the change pattern of the hold display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process executed at the start of fluctuation. (G) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion, and (H1) and (H2) are expected degree notices used when executing the first setting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for deciding whether or not the effect is executed, and (I1) and (I2) are for deciding whether or not the expectation notice effect is executed, which is used when the first setting suggestion effect is not executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table of, (J) is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the effect mode of the 2nd change effect. (K) is an explanatory diagram showing a winning combination determination table of the expectation degree advance notice effect used when executing the first setting suggestion effect, and (L) is used when not executing the first setting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the establishment combination determination table of the expectation degree notice effect, and (M) is the explanatory diagram which shows the table for determining whether or not the second setting suggestion effect is executed. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of various effects. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode about various productions. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode about various productions. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the mini reel information. s It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination processing at the time of a change start. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to execute the expectation suggestion effect and an effect mode, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to execute the timer effect. , (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not the cut-in notice effect is executed and the effect mode, and (D) is a table for determining whether or not the cut-in suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode concerning the cut-in notice effect and the cut-in suggestion effect. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of a timer effect and a cut-in suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode concerning a timer effect and a cut-in suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode concerning a timer effect and a cut-in suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table which is referred in the low probability state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table which is referred in a high probability state. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for loss, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example about the advance notice production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production decision processing at the time of a start winning a prize. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production decision processing at the time of a start winning a prize. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the final display mode of active display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the change pattern of the change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the change pattern of the change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the change pattern of the change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the change pattern of the change effect. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to execute the operation unit vibration effect, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining a vibration pattern of the operation unit vibration effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the execution timing and the effect mode regarding the operation part vibration effect. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not the timer effect is executed, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining a timer display pattern of the timer effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution timing and the specific example of the effect mode regarding a timer effect. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to execute the special background effect, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining a background image display pattern of the special background effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the execution timing and the effect mode regarding a special background effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination processing at the time of a change start. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of the advance notice production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode regarding the advance notice production. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of the advance notice production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode regarding the advance notice production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode regarding the advance notice production. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of the advance notice production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode regarding the advance notice production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode regarding the advance notice production. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of the operation part vibration effect. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for loss, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode concerning the 1st vibration effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode concerning the 2nd vibration effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode concerning the 3rd vibration effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode concerning the 4th vibration effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode regarding the vibration advance notice production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode regarding a strong development production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode regarding the blessing production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode concerning the probability change notification effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination processing at the time of a change start. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination processing at the time of a change start. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for deciding whether or not the first vibration effect is executed and the effect mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for deciding whether or not the 2nd vibration effect is executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for deciding whether or not the strong development effect is executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for deciding whether or not the 3rd vibration effect is executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for deciding whether or not the 4th vibration effect is executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for deciding whether or not the cut-in notice effect is executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for deciding whether or not the vibration notice effect is executed and the single vibration effect to be noticed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for deciding whether or not the timer effect is executed and the corresponding notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for deciding whether or not the probabilistic change notification effect is executed and the effect mode. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of a single vibration effect and a vibration notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode concerning a single vibration effect, a notice effect, a vibration notice effect, and a timer effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode concerning a single vibration effect, a notice effect, a vibration notice effect, and a timer effect. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of a single vibration effect, a notice effect, and a timer effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode concerning a single vibration effect, a notice effect, and a timer effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode concerning a single vibration effect, a notice effect, and a timer effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode concerning the single vibration effect as a look-ahead notice effect.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). In addition, the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LED lights.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door (for special electric accessory) is in the off state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal pattern game.

On the left side of the image display device 5, a passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided at a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player on the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol (a symbol that is out of the normal symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol is "out of the normal symbol". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". In addition, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number cut (time cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, the time saving state is also called the low accuracy high base state, the probability variation state is called the high accuracy high base state, and the normal state is also called the low accuracy low base state. The high accuracy state and the low base state are also called the high accuracy low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like, turning off the light, operating the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol which is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern is in the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", the fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state in the same mode as small hit game state) and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach off") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach off"). In addition, when the display result is "off", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss"). The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as "") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "out of reach").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and then the variable display is restarted to make one variable display look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state having the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp on / off mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored to the state when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) intervals, and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, see See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, and the look-ahead determination is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or an outlier symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is specified, and it is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Includes processing to make settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "off", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for keeping the big winning opening in the open state and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this process during opening of the big hit, the process of measuring the elapsed time since the large winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like are used as the basis for the large winning opening. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. Ends processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). In addition, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the lookahead advance notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead advance notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the jackpot middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the jackpot game state is terminated. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as the game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature section 208SG)
Next, the game machine in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-1 to 8-27.

First, FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, and shows the layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-3, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into an outer frame 208SG001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape and a gaming board (gauge) constituting the game board surface. It is composed of a board) 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 208SG003 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 208SG003, between the door opening position where the glass door frame 208SG003a having a glass window opens the front surface of the game machine frame 208SG003 centering on the left side and the door closing position which closes the front surface. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 208SG003a, and when the glass door frame 208SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the game machine frame 208SG003 can be opened by inserting the door key owned by the game machine clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and the game machine frame 208SG003 and the glass can be opened by players other than the clerk. The door frame 208SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 208SG002L is a game area in which the (left-handed) game ball launched relatively weakly by the operation of the ball striking operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 208SG002R is the left game area 208SG002L by the operation of the ball striking operation handle 30. This is a game area in which a (right-handed) game ball launched stronger than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 208SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

Further, a general winning opening 10 is arranged in the left game area 208SG002L, and in the right game area 208SG002R, a passing gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a general winning ball device 6B are arranged from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right game area 208SG002R. A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 208SG002L can win a prize in the first starting winning hole formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 208SG002R is variable. It is possible to win a prize in the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10 and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and it is possible to pass through the passing gate 41.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 208SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 208SG002L cannot win the second start winning opening or the large winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 208SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, the main substrate 11 in the feature portion 208SG of the present embodiment is housed in the substrate case 208SG201 which is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the state. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 208SG051 for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state, a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the set value change state, and the like are used. A setting changeover switch 208SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value, and an open sensor 208SG090 that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 208SG003 are provided. The set value change state in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment is also a state in which a clerk of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state).

The setting switching main body unit provided with the operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the lock switch 208SG051 and the setting changeover switch 208SG052 is housed in the board case 208SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 208SG051 and the setting changeover switch 208SG052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the substrate case 208SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 208SG201.

Since the board case 208SG201 having the lock switch 208SG051 and the setting changeover switch 208SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate the gaming machine frame 208SG003 when the gaming machine frame 208SG003 is closed. It can be operated by opening the gaming machine frame 208SG003. Further, since the lock switch 208SG051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch 208SG051. Further, the lock switch 208SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later by a setting key. Although the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys, one key may be used in combination.

Further, in the substrate case 208SG201, a display monitor 208SG029 capable of displaying a set value and a base value described later is arranged. The display monitor 208SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case 208SG201. That is, the display monitor 208SG029 is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case 208SG201 when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 208SG003 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 208SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 208SG, if the lock switch 208SG051 and the release sensor 208SG09 are turned on when the power is turned on, the set value is changed and the set value is displayed on the display monitor 208SG029. Is displayed. At this time, by operating the setting changeover switch 208SG052, the numerical value (set value) displayed on the display monitor 208SG029 can be updated and displayed.

Then, by turning off the lock switch 208SG051 while any numerical value from 1 to 6 is displayed on the display monitor 208SG029, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 208SG029 is set as a new set value. To. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the CPU 103 sends a setting value designation command, which will be described later, to the effect control board 12 regardless of whether or not a new setting value is set (set). By doing so, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the set value designation command.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-2, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a predetermined position (for example, a lower left position of the gaming area) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment. 1 First special symbol display device 208SG004A capable of variable display of 1 special figure, 2nd special symbol display device 208SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special figure, 1st hold display capable of displaying 1st hold storage number Device 208SG025A, 2nd hold indicator 208SG025B capable of displaying the 2nd hold storage number, normal symbol display 208SG020 capable of executing variable display of the normal symbol, normal symbol hold indicator 208SG025C capable of displaying the normal symbol hold storage number, In the game state where the round display 208SG131 that can display the number of rounds (big hit type) of the big hit game during the big hit game, the game ball such as the high base state (time saving state) or the big hit game state is launched toward the right game area 208SG002R. A game information display unit 208SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 208SG 132 that lights up, a probability variation lamp 208SG 133 that lights up when in a probability variation state, and a time reduction lamp 208SG 134 that lights up in a high base state (time reduction state) are collectively arranged.

The first special symbol display device 208SG004A and the second special symbol display device 208SG004B are each composed of 8-segment LEDs. Further, in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A and the second special symbol display device 208SG004B, if the variable display result of the special symbol is out of place or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

In the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 208SG004A has a variable display result with two types of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. Derived display is possible. Further, in the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 208SG004B is variablely displayed by two kinds of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. The results can be derived and displayed.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 208SG004A and the second special symbol display device 208SG004B are all different, but the first special symbol display device 208SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed in the above and the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 208SG004B may overlap.

In the first hold indicator 208SG025A and the second hold indicator 208SG025B, LEDs of four segments are arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. In these first hold indicator 208SG025A and second hold indicator 208SG025B, if the number of hold storage is one, only the LED at the left end lights up, and each time the number of hold storage increases, it is the second from the left. The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Then, each time the variable display is executed, the LED on the hold display corresponding to the variable display is set in a predetermined shift direction (characteristic of the present embodiment) in response to the decrease (consumption) of the hold memory. In part 208SG, the lights are turned off toward the left).

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure holding memory and the second special figure holding storage exist, the variable display based on the second special figure holding storage is preferentially executed. It has become like. Therefore, for example, when there is one first special figure hold memory and two second special figure hold memories (only the LED at the left end of the first hold indicator 208SG025A is lit and the second hold is held. (When the two LEDs on the left of the display 208SG25B are lit), the first special figure hold is held after the second special figure hold memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure hold memory. Variable display based on memory is executed.

Further, the round display 208SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). As the jackpot types in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A which is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B which is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C which is a 15-round jackpot. Therefore, which segment of the segments constituting the round display 208SG131 is lit differs depending on the jackpot type.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 208SG321 and a second movable body 208SG322 that can operate between the origin position and the effect position during variable display and the like. The origin detection sensor 208SG331 that can detect that the 1 movable body 208SG321 is located at the origin position of the first movable body 208SG321 and the second movable body 208SG322 are located at the origin position of the second movable body 208SG322. The origin detection sensor 208SG332 capable of detecting this is connected to the origin detection sensor 208SG332.

FIG. 8-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 208SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 8-4 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 208SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". ) Or, different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state (high base state) in which the time reduction control is performed. , Time saving state) is used as the second game state specification command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) has been determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) can be notified by the error notification process described later.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the notification command while the big winning opening is open and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Will be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 208SG004B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number in order to display the special figure reserved storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (commands for designating a winning determination result) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" and the judgment result of the big hit type (probability change, non-probability change, or sudden change) as the judgment result at the time of winning. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category indicating a determination result of whether the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is the variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" as the determination result at the time of winning. It is a command.

The command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating the newly set setting value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides the area, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes the game control program to perform the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to perform, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103. The variable data read operation, the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed.

FIG. 8-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 8-5, in the feature unit 208SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR3 for determination, the random value MR4 for determining the display result of the general map, and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In the present embodiment, each random value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 8-5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each random value is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 8-6 shows the fluctuation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", and is variable. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit". Further, 1 variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a “small hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "out of reach" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "out of reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach in which a super reach effect such as super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, and super reach δ is executed. There is a fluctuation pattern. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Further, the super reach variation pattern may be provided with 5 or more super reach variation patterns.

As shown in FIG. 8-6, with respect to the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature portion 208SG of the present embodiment, the super reach fluctuation patterns, super reach α and super reach β, are shown. , Super reach γ, and super reach δ are set shorter. Further, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach production of the super reach such as super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, and super reach δ in the feature portion 208SG of the present embodiment is executed, the super reach The special figure fluctuation pattern is set longer in the order of δ, super reach γ, super reach β, and super reach α.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display result is set to be "big hit" in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach. Therefore, since the big hit expectation is set to be high, the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern and In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

However, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as a fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ, the variable display result is notified that the variable display result is a big hit after once notifying that the variable display result is out of order as the reach effect of the super reach γ. A variation pattern (PB1-5 shown in FIG. 8-6) for executing the revival effect is provided. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ that executes the revival effect is set to have a longer special figure fluctuation time than the normal fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ and a shorter special figure fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ. However, it is an exceptionally high fluctuation pattern (100%) with the highest expectation of big hits.

In the feature section 208SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into, for example, non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, and the like. Rather than determining the variation patterns to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the variation patterns belonging to the determined type after determining them first, only the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern type is provided to determine these fluctuations. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value for determining the pattern type, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-6, the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the fluctuation content (effect content) is predetermined for each fluctuation pattern, but the present invention illustrates this. The variation content (effect content) may be different depending on the set value, even if the variation pattern is the same. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 out of normal reach, if the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern is out of normal reach, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo-continuous effect is performed. As a fluctuation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach out of reach, when the set value is 3, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed three times to make a fluctuation pattern that is out of super reach.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as the work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-7 to 8-14, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 includes table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIGS. 8-7 and 8-8, and the second special figure display result determination shown in FIGS. 8-9 and 8-10. Table, jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 8-11 (A), jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8-11 (B), and jackpot fluctuation pattern determination A table, a small hit variation pattern determination table, an outlier variation pattern determination table, a general map display result determination table (not shown), a general map variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. More specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value is composed of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. In other words, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the amusement park side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is the more advantageous value for the amusement park side. Become.

8-7 to 8-10 are explanatory views showing a display result determination table. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as the display result determination table, individual display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

In FIG. 8-7 (A), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 1, and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or the time saving state (low probability high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1237 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 8-7 (B) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 1, and the gaming state is the probability variation state (high accuracy and high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1346 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 8-7 (C), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 2, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1253 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 8-7 (D) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 2, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, which is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, up to 1020-1383 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 8-7 (E), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 3, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020-1272 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 8-7 (F) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 3, and the gaming state is the probability variation state (high accuracy and high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1429 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 8-8 (A), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 4, and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or the time saving state (low probability high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1292 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 8-8 (B) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 4, and the gaming state is the probability variation state (high accuracy and high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1487 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33049 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 8-8 (C), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 5, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020-1317 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 8-8 (D) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 5, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020-1556 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 8-8 (E), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 6, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1346 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 8-8 (F) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 6, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1674 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 8-9 (A), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 1, and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or the time saving state (low probability high base state). This is a display result determination table for the second special figure selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1237 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place".

FIG. 8-9 (B) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 1, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). Display result judgment table. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1346 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 8-9 (C), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 2, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1253 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place".

FIG. 8-9 (D) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 2, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). Display result judgment table. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020-1383 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place".

In FIG. 8-9 (E), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 3, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the second special figure selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020-1272 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place".

FIG. 8-9 (F) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 3, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). Display result judgment table. In the second special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1429 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 8-10 (A), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 4, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the second special figure selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1292 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place".

FIG. 8-10 (B) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 4, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the second special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1487 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place".

In FIG. 8-10 (C), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 5, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the second special figure selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1317 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 8-10 (D) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 5, and the gaming state is the probability variation state (high accuracy and high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020-1556 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 8-10 (E), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 6, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the second special figure selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1346 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 8-10 (F) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 6, and the gaming state is the probability variation state (high accuracy and high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1674 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

As described above, in each display result judgment table, when the game state is in the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values than in the normal state or the time saving state are the special figures of "big hit". It is assigned to the display result. As a result, in the probabilistic state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 performs probabilistic change control, the probability that it is determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" in the big hit game state (the present embodiment). In the feature unit 208SG of, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and 1/240 when the set value is 4. Compared to 1/220 when the set value is 5 and 1/200 when the set value is 6, the probability that the special figure display result will be controlled as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state is higher (this). In the feature unit 208SG of the embodiment, when the set value is 1, 1/200, when the set value is 2, 1/180, when the set value is 3, 1/160, and when the set value is 4, 1 / 140, 1/120 when the set value is 5, 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state, the probability of being determined to control the jackpot gaming state is higher than in the normal state or the time saving state. , The determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-7 to 8-10, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is different according to each set value. Different (for example, if the set value is 1, the probability variation of the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the probability variation with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times. The jackpot probability multiplier in the state is about 1.56 times, and if the set value is 3, the jackpot probability multiplier in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state at each set value is constant (for example, 5 times). ) May be set.

Further, in each of the first special figure display result determination tables, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-7 and 8-8, in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the small hit game state is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the first special regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the values are the same as those in the display result judgment table for figures. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-9 and 8-10, in the display result determination table for the second special figure, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the small hit game state is set to 1/100.

It should be noted that the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" is the same regardless of the set value. The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be different depending on the set value. Further, the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" and the small hit gaming state is different according to the variable special map. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit gaming state may be the same probability regardless of the variable special figure.

Here, paying attention to the numerical range of the hit judgment values assigned to the "big hit" and the "small hit" in each display result judgment table, the display result for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. In the determination table, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values is common. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is in the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is in the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1674 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6, and 32767 is set as the reference value of the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value) of 32767 to 33094. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of the hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values is common. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, when the set value is 1, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the big hit judgment values are not included in the common numerical range. Numerical values within the range including the common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1674 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the set value, the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set based on the hit determination value 1020. The judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 consisting of is set as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the continuous numerical range of 1 is based on the hit judgment value 32767 regardless of the game state and the set value (common). The variable display result is judged by using the judgment value included in the numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit judgment value.

Further, in each of these display result judgment tables, when the fluctuation special figures are the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is Same). In addition, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (small in the display result judgment table for the first special figure). While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the second special figure is about 655. On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit determination value itself is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, there is a probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as the "big hit". Judgment values are assigned so that the lower the value and the larger the value of the set value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state (big hit probability: set value 6> set value). 5> Set value 4> Set value 3> Set value 2> Set value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 hits the jackpot (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is decided to be A to jackpot C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 8-7 to 8-10 indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A or the second special symbol display device 208SG004B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state, but the stop at the first special symbol display device 208SG004A or the second special symbol display device 208SG004B. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, a total of 6 set values of 1 to 6 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

8-11 (A) and 8-11 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Of these, FIG. 8-11 (A) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when you do. Further, FIG. 8-11 (B) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second starting winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is variably displayed). It is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature portion 208SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-12. In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot types include jackpot A (also referred to as non-probability variable jackpot) in which only the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state and the game shifts to the low probability high base state. After the end, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed, and the jackpot B and the jackpot C (also referred to as the probabilistic jackpot) for shifting to the high-accuracy high-base state are set.

The jackpot game state by "big hit A" is a normally open jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot game state by "B" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player.

The time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "big hit A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Figure Ends when the game is in a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot B or the jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is the big hit B or the big hit C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit game state, so that the big hit game state is continuous without going through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs in.

In the feature portion 208SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which three types of jackpots A to C are provided as jackpot types is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is 2. There may be less than one type, or four or more types.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 is assigned to the jackpot A. 100 to 249 are assigned to jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 is assigned to jackpot A. 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. That is, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the winning opening in which the game ball has won is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. , The jackpot type is determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is not limited to this. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result.

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern can be selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is predetermined to set the variable display result to "big hit" and the variable display result to be "small hit". The jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is determined in advance and the deviation pattern judgment table used when it is decided in advance that the variable display result is "off" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3), and the revival effect are executed. Not Super Reach γ Jackpot Fluctuation Pattern (PB1-4), Super Reach γ Jackpot Fluctuation Pattern (PB1-5), Super Reach δ Jackpot Fluctuation Pattern (PB1-6) On the other hand, a predetermined random value within the range that the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-13 (A), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table, 1 to 50 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are normal reach jackpot variation patterns (PB1). -1) is assigned, 51 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 201 to 400 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). It is assigned, and 401 to 650 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot (PB1-4) that does not execute the resurrection effect, and 651 to 700 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the resurrection effect. It is assigned to (PB1-5), and 701 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-6) of the super reach δ jackpot.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the fluctuation pattern for big hits is determined by using the fluctuation pattern determination table of 1, that is, the pachinko. Although the embodiment in which the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern is the same when the variable display result is a big hit regardless of the set value set in the game machine 1 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. , The determination ratio of each fluctuation pattern may be different for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-13 (B), in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, the variation pattern of small hits from 0 to 997 in the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 ( It is assigned to PC1-1). Although only PC1-1 is provided as the variation pattern of the small hit in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern of the small hit is 2 or more. Fluctuation pattern may be provided.

Further, the deviation pattern determination table includes the deviation pattern determination table A used when the number of reserved storages is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time reduction control, and the low base. The deviation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and the deviation variation used when the total number of reserved storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state. A pattern determination table C and a variation pattern determination table D for deviation used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed are prepared in advance.

In the deviation pattern determination table A, the non-reach deviation variation pattern without shortening (PA1-1), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super Random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is taken for the fluctuation pattern of reach β off (PA2-3), the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ off (PA2-4), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach δ off (PA2-5). A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value in the possible range.

As shown in FIG. 8-14 (A), in the deviation pattern determination table A (for a low-base medium total hold storage number of 1 or less), 1 to 450 of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3. Are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are out of super reach α. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 851 to 930 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β, and 931 to 970 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2) out of super reach γ. -4) is assigned, and 971 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-5) out of super reach δ.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super are corresponding to the total number of reserved storages of 2 to 4. Reach α out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), Super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) Super reach γ out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-4), Super reach δ out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-5) On the other hand, a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIG. 8-14 (B), in the deviation pattern determination table B (for 2 to 4 low-base medium total pending storage numbers), 1 to 1 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997. Up to 500 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are out of super reach α. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), 851 to 930 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β, and 913 to 970 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach γ. It is assigned to PA2-4), and 971 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-5) out of super reach δ.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table C, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super Fluctuation pattern of reach α off (PA2-2), fluctuation pattern of super reach β off (PA2-3), fluctuation pattern of super reach γ off (PA2-4), fluctuation pattern of super reach δ off (PS2-5) On the other hand, a predetermined random value within the range that the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIG. 8-14 (C), in the deviation pattern determination table C (for low-base medium total hold storage number of 5 or more), 1 to 550 out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997. Are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are out of super reach α. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 851 to 930 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β, and 931 to 970 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2) out of super reach γ. -4) is assigned, and 971 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-5) out of super reach δ.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α deviation variation pattern corresponding to the time reduction control are performed. (PA2-2), fluctuation pattern of super reach β out of alignment (PA2-3), fluctuation pattern of super reach γ out of alignment (PA2-4), fluctuation pattern of super reach δ out of alignment (PA2-5) A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in the range that the MR3 can take.

As shown in FIG. 8-14 (D), in the deviation pattern determination table D (for high base and medium), 1 to 550 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are non-reach deviation variations. It is assigned to the pattern (PA1-4), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2). 851 to 930 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β out of order (PA2-3), and 931 to 970 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of out of super reach γ (PA2-4). Therefore, 971 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-5) out of the super reach δ.

As described above, when the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio for determining the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern is set higher than the ratio for determining the super reach variation pattern. When the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, 701 to 850 of the determination values are the fluctuation patterns of the super reach α deviation, and 851 to 930 are the deviation patterns of the super reach β, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table. Fluctuation patterns, 931 to 970 are assigned to the fluctuation patterns of the super reach γ, and 971 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation patterns of the super reach δ, that is, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the super reach Since the fluctuation pattern is determined by a common determination ratio, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered due to the variable display according to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach not being executed.

In the feature portion 208SG of the present embodiment, as the deviation pattern, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α deviation, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β deviation, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ deviation, and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ deviation Although the respective determination ratios exemplify the completely same form between the set values, the present invention is not limited to this, and these fluctuation patterns of the super reach α deviation and the fluctuation of the super reach β deviation are illustrated. The determination ratios of the pattern, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ deviation, and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ deviation may be different for each set value.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the embodiment in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is the same is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. If the variable display result is out of alignment, the determination ratios of all the fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same, and the fluctuation of either non-reach and normal reach may be the same. Only the pattern determination rate may be the same.

The non-reach non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) has a shorter variation time than the non-reach non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2). The deviation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 8-6). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By winning a start prize while the player is in the game, it becomes difficult for a useless start prize that is not stored on hold to occur. By determining the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display time becomes longer, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being less interesting due to the variable display not being executed.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-14 (A) to 8-14 (C), variations are made using a variation pattern determination table for deviation, which differs depending on the total number of reserved storages. Although the form of determining the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first The variation pattern may be determined using a variation pattern determination table for deviation, which differs depending on the number of reserved memory of the special symbol and the number of reserved memory of the second special symbol when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Further, the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which there is a one-to-one correspondence between whether or not to execute the reach effect and which reach effect is to be executed for each determined fluctuation pattern. The present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the effect control CPU 120 executes the reach effect based on the special figure variation time of the variation pattern, the variable display result, etc., and which reach effect is executed. You may decide whether to do it by lottery.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 8-1 may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). To. In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area includes a first special figure holding storage unit, a second special figure holding storage unit, a normal drawing holding storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter. It has a setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

The first special figure reservation storage unit is a special figure in which the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but has not yet been started. The reserved data of the game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and satisfies the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc. extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on , Store until the number of stored items reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Will be the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and a starting winning (second starting winning) occurs, but the special drawing has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 208SG004B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and satisfies the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on , Store until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Will be the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 208SG020 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal map holding storage unit is associated with the hold numbers in the order in which the game balls pass through the passage gate 41, and is for determining the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 of the above is set as pending data, and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can update the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, a random number value not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and periodically according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated targetly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Further, the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The effect control data holding area includes an effect control flag setting unit, an effect control timer setting unit, an effect control counter setting unit, and an effect control buffer setting unit.

In the effect control flag setting unit, there are a plurality of types that can update the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In addition, the data constituting the start winning command buffer is stored in the predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit. The command buffer received at the time of starting winning corresponds to the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the first special figure reserved storage. A storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special figure during variable display is provided. Further, in the start winning command buffer, the storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage is stored. (Area corresponding to) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure during variable display are provided. When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command) or the hold memory number notification command ( Commands such as the first hold storage number notification command or the second hold storage number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the received command buffer at the time of starting winning associate these commands, and the first special figure hold memory and the second special figure hold storage Figure A storage area (entry) for storing separately from the reserved storage is secured.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. It is shifted up one by one so that it does.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold storage of the received command buffer at the time of starting winning. At the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure hold storage of the received command buffer at the time of starting winning. At the time of the start winning, the start opening prize designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, each command is stored in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. I will go.

Next, the process executed by the CPU 103 in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-15 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. In the start winning determination process, as shown in FIG. 8-15, the CPU 103 first receives a detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the first start port switch 22A is ON (208SGS501a). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (208SGS501a; Y), the number of reserved special figures reserved for the special figure game using the first special figure is the predetermined upper limit value (the number of reserved stored figures of the first special figure). For example, it is determined whether or not the upper limit storage number is "4") (208SGS502). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit. When the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is not the upper limit value (208SGS502; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit is set to "1" (208SGS503).

When the first start port switch 22A is off at 208SGS501a (208SGS501a; N), or when the first special figure hold storage number reaches the upper limit value at 208SGS502 (208SGS502; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B It is determined whether or not the second start port switch 22B is ON based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by the player (208SGS501b). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (208SGS501b; Y), the second special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value (. For example, it is determined whether or not the upper limit storage number is "4") (208SGS505). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit. When the second special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in 208SGS505 (208SGS505; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit is set to "2" (208SGS506).

When the second start port switch is not on (208SGS501b; N) or when the second special figure reserved storage number is the upper limit value (208SGS505; Y), the start winning determination process ends.

After executing any of the processes of 208SGS503 and 208SGS506, the special figure hold storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (208SGS507). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (208SGS508). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit, may be updated so as to be added by 1.

After executing the process of 208SGS508, the CPU 103 uses the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random number of the game control counter setting unit. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is extracted (208SGS509). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (208SGS510). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the first 2 Numerical data indicating random values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the special figure hold storage unit.

The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set as "big hit", and further, the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of 208SGS509, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used for determining the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol and the variable display mode including the variable display time.

Following the processing of the 208SGS510, the transmission setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (208SGS 511). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first start opening prize designation command to 12 is made. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 is used. Make settings to send the second start port winning designation command. The start port winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Will be done.

Following the process of 208SGS511, the random number value determination process at the time of winning is executed (208SGS512). After that, for example, the hold storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. (208SGS513). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Will be done.

After executing the process of 208SGS513, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (208SGS514). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (208SGS514; Y), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (208SGS515), and then the process proceeds to 208SGS501b. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (208SGS514; N), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (208SGS516), and then the start winning determination process is performed. To finish. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 8-16 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed by the 208 SGS 512 of FIG. 8-15 as the winning random number value determination process. When the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started in the feature unit 208SG, in the special symbol normal processing (step S22 of FIG. 5), the game state, the special symbol for executing the variable display, and the display according to the set value are displayed. Select the result judgment table (see FIGS. 8-7 to 8-10), and use the selected display result judgment table to set the special figure display result (variable display result of the special symbol) as a "big hit" and make a big hit game state. It is determined whether or not to control the game and whether or not to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" in the small hit game state.

On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination processing of 208SGS512 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). Therefore, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the predetermined display mode accompanied by super reach. Do. As a result, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit before the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, that is, at the start of the variable display. It is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" or "small hit" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the variable display mode of which category, and based on this judgment result. Then, as will be described later, the effect control CPU 120 or the like executes the pre-reading advance notice effect such as the hold display advance notice effect.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 8-16 (A), the CPU 103 first confirms the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in, for example, the game control flag setting unit 208SG152, for pachinko gaming. The current gaming state of the machine 1 is specified (208SGS521). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probability change state (high probability high base state) when the probability change flag is on, and is in the time saving state (low probability high base state) when the probability change flag is off and the time saving flag is on. When both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are off, it is sufficient to specify that the normal state (low probability low base state).

Following the processing of the 208SGS521, the CPU 103 specifies a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (208SGS522). Next, the display result determination table according to the current game state, the start opening buffer value, and the set value is selected and set (208SGS524).

Specifically, when the start port buffer value is "1", the set value is 1, and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the first special figure shown in FIG. 8-7 (A) is used. When the display result judgment table is set and the set value is 1 and the game state is the probability change state, the display result judgment table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 8-7 (B) is set and the set value is 2. When the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 8-7 (C) is set, the set value is 2, and the game state is the probable change state. If there is, set the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 8-7 (D), and if the set value is 3 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, FIG. 8-7 (E). ) Is set, and when the set value is 3 and the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the display result judgment table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 8-7 (F) is set. To set.

Further, when the start port buffer value is "1", the set value is 4, and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the first special figure display result determination shown in FIG. 8-8 (A) is determined. When the table is set and the set value is 4 and the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 8-8 (B) is set, and the set value is 5 and When the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 8-8 (C) is set, and when the set value is 5 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state. When the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 8-8 (D) is set and the set value is 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is shown in FIG. 8-8 (E). The display result determination table for the first special figure is set, and when the set value is 6 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 8-8 (F) is set. ..

Further, when the start port buffer value is "2", when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination for the second special figure shown in FIG. 8-9 (A) is determined. When the table is set and the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 8-9 (B) is set, and the set value is 2 and When the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 8-9 (C) is set, and when the set value is 2 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state. When the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 8-9 (D) is set and the set value is 3 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is shown in FIG. 8-9 (E). The display result judgment table for the second special figure is set, and when the set value is 3 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the display result judgment table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 8-9 (F) is set. ..

Further, when the start port buffer value is "2", when the set value is 4 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination for the second special figure shown in FIG. 8-10 (A) is determined. When the table is set and the set value is 4 and the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 8-10 (B) is set, and the set value is 5 and When the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 8-10 (C) is set, and when the set value is 5 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state. When the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 8-10 (D) is set and the set value is 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is shown in FIG. 8-10 (E). The display result judgment table for the second special figure is set, and when the set value is 6 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the display result judgment table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 8-10 (F) is set. ..

After setting the display result determination table, the variable display result determination module (208SGS525) performs a process of determining whether the special figure display result is "big hit", "small hit", or "missing". In the variable display result judgment module, the numerical range of the big hit judgment value or the small hit judgment value in the set variable display result judgment table is compared with the value of the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, and the disorder is described. If the value of the numerical value MR1 is within the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, the variable display result is judged as a big hit, and if the value of the random value MR1 is within the numerical range of the small hit judgment value, the variable display result is judged as a small hit. Then, if the value of the random number value MR1 is outside the numerical range of the big hit determination value and outside the numerical range of the small hit determination value, the variable display result may be determined to be out of range.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the 208SGS525 determines that the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS526). When it is determined that the hit is not a big hit (208SGS526; N), it is determined whether or not the variable display result is determined to be a small hit in the 208SGS525 (208SGS527). When it is determined that the small hit does not occur, that is, when it is determined that the variable display is out of alignment (208SGS527; N), the first symbol designation is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being "out of alignment". The command transmission setting is executed (208SGS527a), and it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (208SGS528).

When the time saving flag is not set (208SGS528; N), the deviation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 8-14 is selected and set, and the process proceeds to 208SGS536 (208SGS529). When the time saving flag is set. (208SGS528; Y) selects and sets the deviation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 8-14 (D), and proceeds to 208SGS536 (208SGS530).

When it is determined by the 208SGS526 that the variable display is a big hit (208SGS526; Y), the big hit type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type and the big hit type determination table (208SGS533). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the table data that composes the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

Further, a symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, a second symbol designation command when the jackpot is A, a third symbol designation command when the jackpot is B, and a fourth symbol when the jackpot is C. The transmission setting of the symbol designation command is executed (208SGS534), and then the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-13 (A) is selected and set as a table for determining the jackpot fluctuation pattern (208SGS535). ), Proceed to 208SGS536.

Further, when the 208SGS527 determines that a small hit is obtained in the variable display (208SGS527; Y), the transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being a "small hit". Is executed (208SGS531), the variation pattern determination table for small hits shown in FIG. 8-13 (B) is selected and set (208SGS532), and the process proceeds to 208SGS536.

In the feature unit 208SG, in the deviation pattern determination table A to the deviation variation pattern determination table D, determination values of 1 to 700 are commonly assigned to the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern. 701 to 997 are assigned a fluctuation pattern of super reach.

Therefore, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the variation pattern is determined using the deviation pattern determination table A or the deviation pattern determination table D, so that the determination of non-reach and super reach is the determination. Even if the number of reserved memories changes later, it will always be a non-reach or super reach fluctuation pattern. Therefore, in the determination at the time of starting winning, the deviation pattern determination table A or the deviation pattern determination table D is used to determine the variation pattern. Is to be judged.

After executing any of the processes of 208SGS529, 208SGS530, 208SGS532,208SGS535, the variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination are used to perform disturbance. The variation category according to the range of determination values including the numerical value MR3 is determined (208SGS536). In this feature unit 208SG, as shown in FIG. 8-16 (B), when at least the variable display result is “out of”, the variable display mode of “non-reach” is common regardless of the total number of reserved storages. Variable category, variable display mode of "super reach", variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach and small hit), and "other" variable category. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not the variable category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, after making a setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the processing of 208SGS536 to the effect control board 12 (208SGS537), the random number value determination process at the time of winning is terminated.

The symbol designation command and the variable category designation command are transmitted when the CPU 103 executes a command control process.

Next, the processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-17 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) shown in FIG. 7.

In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is set (208SGS271). When the first variable display start command reception flag is set (208SGS271; Y), it corresponds to the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer. The various command data and various flags that are attached and stored are shifted upward by one buffer number (S272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

If the first variable display start command reception flag is not set in the 208SGS271 (208SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is set (208SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is not set (208SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display 2 start command reception flag is set (208SGS273; Y). ), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the received command buffer at the time of starting winning are stored for one buffer number. It shifts to the upper side one by one (208SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

After executing the 208SGS272 or 208SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (208SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (208SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. To do.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, when the received display result specification command is the second variable display result specification command corresponding to the jackpot A, for example, a decorative symbol in which three symbols are arranged in an even number as a stop symbol Determine the combination (big hit symbol). Further, when the received display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the jackpot B, for example, as a stop symbol, a decorative symbol in which 3 symbols are arranged in odd numbers other than "7" and "3" Determine the combination (big hit symbol). Then, when the received display result specification command is the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to the jackpot C, for example, a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are aligned with "7" or "3" as stop symbols (big hit). Design) is decided. When the received display result specification command is the fifth variable table uncle result specification command indicating a small hit, for example, three consecutive numbers such as "123" and "246", and three consecutive even numbers (or three consecutive even numbers). Determine the combination of decorative symbols (small hit symbol) such as (odd number). Then, when the received display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command indicating loss, for example, a combination of decorative symbols (missing symbols) different from the above-mentioned large hit symbol or small hit symbol is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, a stop symbol determination table in which random numbers for determining stop symbols are extracted and data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

After the execution of the 208SGS276, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of the super reach (208SG277). Whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of super reach may be specified from the variation pattern specification command read out in 208SG275. When the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach (208SG277; Y), a cut for determining whether or not to execute the cut-in effect described later during the reach effect and the effect pattern of the cut-in effect. The in-effect determination process (208SGS278) is executed to proceed to 208SGS279. If the variable display variation pattern is not the super reach variation pattern (208SG277; N), the process proceeds to 208SGS279 without executing the process of 208SGS278.

Then, in the 208SGS279, the effect control CPU 120 executes a advance notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute the advance notice effect described later in the variable display and the effect pattern of the advance notice effect (208SGS279). As shown in FIGS. 8-27 to 8-29, the advance notice effect is an effect that can be executed during the variable display in the non-reach variable pattern, and the variable display starts in the normal reach or super reach variable pattern. It is a production that can be performed during the period from the end to the timing of reaching.

After executing 208SGS279, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command (208SGS280). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (208SGS281).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, and the like are arranged in order in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (208SGS282). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 208SG in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. May select the variation pattern to be used from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern specification command.

Then, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time (variable display time) specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is set in the fluctuation time timer (208SGS283). Further, a predetermined time is set in the fluctuation control timer (208SGS284). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Each time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image according to the signal to realize variable display of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (208 SGS285).

8-18 to 8-20 are flowcharts showing the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-17. In the cut-in effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern is a variation pattern of super reach α or super reach β (208SGS301). When the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach α or super reach β (208SGS301; Y), the cut-in effect determination process is terminated, and when the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach γ or super reach δ (208SGS301; Y). N) further determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach γ (208SGS302).

When the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ (208SGS301; Y), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern is PB1-5, that is, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ that executes the revival effect (208SGS303). .. When the fluctuation pattern is PB1-5 (208SGS303; Y), the effect control CPU 120 specifies the jackpot type (208SGS304) and determines whether or not the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS305). ..

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS305; Y), whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS306), and 208SGS308. Proceed to. In 208SGS306, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (A), the cut-in effect is not executed based on the fluctuation pattern being PB1-5 and the variable display result (big hit type) being jackpot A or jackpot B. Is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 55%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 5%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

As shown in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-31, the cut-in effect in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment displays the image of the push button 31B on the image display device 5 during the reach effect of the super reach γ. Then, the player is urged to operate the push button 31B. Then, when the push button 31B is operated during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, or when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B ends without the push button 31B being operated, each effect is displayed on the image display device 5. Display effects and cut-in images according to the pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 and 8-31, if the effect pattern is pattern CI-1, the image display device 5 displays the cut-in image 208SG005w together with the blue effect, and the effect pattern is If the pattern CI-2, the image display device 5 displays the cut-in image 208SG005x together with the red effect, and if the effect pattern is the pattern CI-3, the image display device 5 displays the cut-in image 208SG005y together with the golden effect. If the effect pattern is pattern CI-4, the cut-in image 208SG005z is displayed together with the rainbow-colored effect on the image display device 5.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (208SGS305; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and the effect pattern based on the jackpot type being jackpot C (208SGS307). Proceed to 208SGS308. In 208SGS307, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (A), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is 10% based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern is PB1-5 and the variable display result (big hit type) is big hit C. Determined by the ratio of. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 54%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 5%. The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 1%.

After the execution of the 208SGS306 or 208SGS307, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the cut-in effect is determined (208SGS308). When the execution of the cut-in effect is decided (208SGS308; Y), the determined effect pattern is stored and a value corresponding to the period until the start of the cut-in effect is set in the cut-in effect start waiting timer (208SGS309, 208SGS310). ), The cut-in effect determination process is completed.

Further, when the fluctuation pattern in the 208SGS303 is the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 or PB1-4) of the super reach γ that does not execute the revival effect (208SGS303; N), the effect control CPU 120 is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The set value is specified (208 SGS311), and it is determined whether or not the specified set value is any of 1 to 3 (208SGS312). The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be specified based on the set value designation command received from the CPU 103.

When the execution of the cut-in effect is determined in the cut-in effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the cut-in effect start waiting timer by -1 each time the variable display effect process (S172) is executed. When the timer for waiting for the start of the cut-in effect has timed out, the process table for the cut-in effect is set according to the determined effect pattern. After that, each time the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display, the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp) is in accordance with the contents of the data (process data) in the cut-in effect process table. The cut-in effect may be executed by controlling 9 etc.).

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3 (208SGS312; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (308SGS313). Whether or not the variable display result is a big hit may be determined by determining whether or not the fluctuation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit. When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS313; Y), the big hit type is specified (208SGS314), and it is determined whether or not the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (208SGS315).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS3315; Y), the cut-in effect is executed based on the setting value being any one of 1 to 3 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. (208SGS3316) is determined, and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS316, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (B), the cut-in is based on the fact that the set value is any of 1 to 3 and the variable display result (big hit type) is big hit A or big hit B. The non-execution of the production is determined at a rate of 10%. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (208SGS315; N), the effect control CPU 120 performs a cut-in effect based on the setting value being any one of 1 to 3 and the jackpot type being jackpot C. The presence / absence of execution and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS317), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS317, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (B), the cut-in effect is not produced based on the fact that the set value is any of 1 to 3 and the variable display result (big hit type) is big hit C. The execution is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the variable display result is out of alignment in 208SGS313 (208SGS313; N), the effect control CPU 120 cuts in based on the fact that the set value is one of 1 to 3 and the variable display result is out of alignment. Whether or not to execute the effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS318), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS318, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (B), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is 55% based on the fact that the set value is any of 1 to 3 and the variable display result is out of order. Determined by percentage. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 35%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 0%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 208SGS312 is any of 4 to 6 (208SGS312; N), the effect control CPU 120 has a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of 4. It is determined whether or not (208SGS221). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4 (208SGS321; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS322). Whether or not the variable display result is a big hit may be determined by determining whether or not the fluctuation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS322; Y), the big hit type is specified (208SGS323), and it is determined whether or not the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (208SGS324).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS324; Y), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern based on the setting value being 4 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. Is determined (208SGS325), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In 208SGS325, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (C), the cut-in effect is not executed at a rate of 10% based on the setting value of 4 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. decide. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (208SGS324; N), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the setting value of 4 and the jackpot type being jackpot C (the jack-in effect is executed). 208SGS326), 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS326, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (C), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10% based on the setting value of 4 and the jackpot type being jackpot C. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the variable display result is out of alignment in 208SGS322 (208SGS322; N), it is further determined whether or not the gaming state is a high-accuracy high-base state (208SGS327). The game state may be specified from the game state designation command received from the CPU 103.

When the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state (208SGS327; Y), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 4, the variable display result is out of order, and the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state. Whether or not to execute the in-effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS328), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS328, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (C), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 4, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the high accuracy and high base state. The non-execution of the in-effect is determined at a rate of 40%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 20%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the gaming state is the low accuracy high base state or the low accuracy low base state (208SGS327; N), the set value is 4, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the low accuracy high base. The presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the state or the low probability low base state (208 SGS 329), and the processes of 208 SGS 308 to 208 SGS 310 are executed. In 208SGS329, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (C), the set value is 4, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the low probability high base state or the low probability low base state. Based on this, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 59%. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 1%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 208SGS321 is not 4 (208SGS321; N), whether or not the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5 in the effect control CPU 120. Is determined (208SGS330). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5 (208SGS330; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS331). Whether or not the variable display result is a big hit may be determined by determining whether or not the fluctuation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS331; Y), the big hit type is specified (208SGS332), and it is determined whether or not the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (208SGS333).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS333; Y), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern based on the setting value being 5 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. (208SGS334), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In 208SGS334, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (D), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is performed at a rate of 10% based on the setting value of 5 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. decide. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (208SGS333; N), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the setting value of 5 and the jackpot type being jackpot C (the jack-in effect is executed). 208SGS335), 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS335, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (D), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10% based on the setting value of 5 and the jackpot type being jackpot C. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the variable display result is out of alignment in the 208SGS331 (208SGS331; N), it is further determined whether or not the gaming state is a high-accuracy high-base state (208SGS336). The game state may be specified from the game state designation command received from the CPU 103.

When the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state (208SGS336; Y), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 5, the variable display result is out of order, and the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state. Whether or not to execute the in-effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS337), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS337, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (D), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 5, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the high accuracy and high base state. The non-execution of the in-effect is determined at a rate of 35%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 25%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the gaming state is the low accuracy high base state or the low accuracy low base state (208SGS336; N), the set value is 5, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the low accuracy high base. The presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the state or the low probability low base state (208 SGS 338), and the processes of 208 SGS 308 to 208 SGS 310 are executed. In 208SGS338, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (D), the set value is 5, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the low probability high base state or the low probability low base state. Based on this, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 58%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 2%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 208SGS330 is not 5 (208SGS330; N), the effect control CPU 120 is variable, assuming that the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6. It is determined whether or not the display result is a big hit (208SGS339). Whether or not the variable display result is a big hit may be determined by determining whether or not the fluctuation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS339; Y), the big hit type is specified (208SGS340), and it is determined whether or not the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (208SGS341).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS341; Y), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern based on the setting value of 6 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. (208SGS342), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In 208SGS342, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (E), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is performed at a rate of 10% based on the setting value of 6 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. decide. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (208SGS341; N), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the setting value of 6 and the jackpot type being jackpot C (the jack-in effect is executed). 208SGS343), 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS343, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (E), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10% based on the setting value of 6 and the jackpot type of jackpot C. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

If the variable display result is out of sync with the 208SGS339 (208SGS339; N), it is further determined whether or not the gaming state is a high-accuracy high-base state (208SGS344). The game state may be specified from the game state designation command received from the CPU 103.

When the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state (208SGS344; Y), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 6, the variable display result is out of order, and the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state. Whether or not to execute the in-effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS345), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS345, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (E), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 6, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the high accuracy and high base state. The non-execution of the in-effect is determined at a rate of 30%. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 30%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the gaming state is the low accuracy high base state or the low accuracy low base state (208SGS344; N), the set value is 6, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the low accuracy high base. The presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the state or the low probability low base state (208 SGS 346), and the processes of 208 SGS 308 to 208 SGS 310 are executed. In 208SGS346, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (E), the set value is 6, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the low probability high base state or the low probability low base state. Based on this, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 57%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 3%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ (PS2-5 or PB1-6) in the 208SGS302 (202SGS302; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS351). .. Whether or not the variable display result is a big hit may be determined by determining whether or not the fluctuation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS351; Y), the big hit type is specified (208SGS352), and it is determined whether or not the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (208SGS353).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS353; Y), whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS354), and 208SGS308. ~ 208 The processing of SGS310 is executed. In 208SGS354, as shown in FIG. 8-22, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10% based on the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (208SGS353; N), whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the jackpot type being jackpot C (208SGS355), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are determined. To execute. In 208SGS355, as shown in FIG. 8-22, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10% based on the jackpot type being jackpot C. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the variable display result is out of alignment in 208SGS351 (208SGS351; N), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the fact that the variable display result is out of alignment (208SGS356), and 208SGS308 to 208SGS310. Executes the processing of. In 208SGS356, as shown in FIG. 8-22, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 35% based on the fact that the variable display result is out of alignment. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 25%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

As described above, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-21 and 8-22, when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ or the super reach δ, the cut-in is performed. When the effect is not executed, the ratio of the variable display result to the big hit (big hit expectation) is the lowest, and when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-1, the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-2. In this case, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit increases in the order of the case where the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-4. (Expected jackpot in cut-in effect: non-execution <pattern CI-1 <pattern CI-2 <pattern CI-3 <pattern CI-4).

In particular, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-4, it is determined that the variable display result is a big hit and the big hit type is a big hit C regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-21, 8-22, and 8-24, when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ or the super reach δ, the cut-in effect is performed by the pattern CI-3. Regarding the execution rate, the lowest setting (0%) is made when the set value is any of 1 to 3 and the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach γ and out of super reach δ. Then, when the fluctuation pattern is a super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect, the set value is one of 1 to 3 and the fluctuation pattern does not execute the revival effect-the set value when the per reach γ jackpot / super reach δ jackpot If is 4 and the fluctuation pattern is a super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the resurrection effect, the set value is 5 and the fluctuation pattern is a super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the resurrection effect, the setting value is 6 and the fluctuation pattern. Is set so that the ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 increases in the order of the case where is a super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the revival effect.

Further, paying attention when the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 and PB1-4) of the super reach γ that does not execute the revival effect, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1-3, While it is confirmed that the variable display result is a big hit (any of big hit A to big hit C) when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 When is 4 to 6, the variable display result may be out of alignment even when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3. That is, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, the cut-in is higher than when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3. The jackpot expectation when the effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 is set low. Therefore, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, when the reach effect of the super reach γ is executed and the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is out of order, the pachinko gaming machine 1 It is confirmed that the set value set in is one of 4 to 6.

On the other hand, paying attention to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot (PB1-5) that executes the revival effect, the cut-in effect is the pattern CI-3 rather than the fluctuation pattern (PB1-4) of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect. And the rate of execution in pattern CI-4 is set low. For this reason, in the case where the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the revival effect, the cut-in effect is executed by CI-3 and the disappointment is notified, so that the pachinko gaming machine Even though the player recognizes that the set value set to 1 is one of 4 to 6, the revival effect is executed later and the pachinko is notified that it is a big hit. It is suppressed that the player is discouraged because it is uncertain whether or not the set value set in the game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach γ (PA2-4 and PB1-4) that does not execute the revival effect. Attention is paid to the case where the variable display result is a big hit, the ratio of the cut-in effect being executed in the pattern CI-3 is set to be the same in all the set values, but the variable display result is out of order. The higher the set value, the higher the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 (the pattern CI-3 execution rate at the time of deviation when the set values 4 to 6 are set: the set value 4 < Set value 5 <Set value 6).

Therefore, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the higher the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3, and the variable display result is out of order. Since the frequency of the game becomes higher, the player can be expected that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the game interest can be improved. There is.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6 and the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach γ (PA2-4 and PB1-4) that does not execute the revival effect. If the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same and the variable display result is different, the gaming state is low accuracy and high base state or low accuracy in the place where the game state is high accuracy and high base state. The cut-in effect is set to be executed in the pattern CI-3 at a higher rate than in the low base state.

Therefore, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 in the variable display in the high accuracy and high base state, and the variable display result is out of order, so that the gaming state is low accuracy. Even after shifting to the low base state, the pachinko game machine 1 is set to any of 4 to 6 to encourage the player to continue the game, so that the game enjoyment can be improved. ing.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-21 (B) to 8-21 (E), paying attention to the case where the variable display result is out of alignment, the higher the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the higher the cut-in. The execution rate of the production is set high. That is, in this feature unit 208SG, it is suggested that the ratio itself at which the cut-in effect is executed when the variable display result is out of alignment is set to any of the set values of 4 to 6 in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, in addition to whether or not the cut-in effect is executed in the effect pattern with high expectation of big hits, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the cut-in effect is executed. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the cut-in effect shown in FIGS. 8-21 and 8-22 is only an example, and the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the cut-in effect is determined according to the gaming machine to which the present invention is applied. It may be different from the feature unit 208SG as appropriate. However, when the determination ratios of the effect patterns of these cut-in effects are appropriately different, the tendency of the jackpot expectation of each effect pattern (big hit expectation in the cut-in effect: non-execution <pattern CI-1 <pattern CI-2). By maintaining the <Pattern CI-3 <Pattern CI-4) itself, the player does not misunderstand the jackpot expectation according to the production pattern of the cut-in effect when executing the cut-in effect. Is desirable.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-21 and 8-22, when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ and the super reach δ, the pachinko gaming machine 1 Although a mode in which the ratio of executing the cut-in effect during the variable display is changed according to the set value and the variable display result set in is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. When the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the reach γ or the super reach δ, the cut-in effect may be always executed during the variable display. In the case where the cut-in effect is always executed during the variable display of the super reach γ and the super reach δ, if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, When the variable display result is out of order, the ratio assigned to non-execution of the cut-in effect (see FIGS. 8-21 (C) to 8-21 (E)) is the pattern CI-1 with a low jackpot expectation or By assigning to both the pattern CI-1 and the pattern CI-2, the ratio of the cut-in effect executed in the pattern CI-3 may be maintained so as not to be different from the feature unit 208SG. By doing so, the cut-in effect is excessively executed in the pattern CI-3 while improving the interest by executing the cut-in effect during the variable display of the super reach γ and the super reach δ. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from easily recognizing that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6.

FIG. 8-25 is a flowchart showing the advance notice effect determination process in FIG. 8-17. In the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (208SGS361). Then, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is a small hit (208SGS362). When the variable display result is a small hit (208SGS362; Y), the advance notice effect determination process is terminated, and when the variable display result is a big hit or a miss (208SGS362; N), the execution of the cut-in effect is further determined. Whether or not, that is, whether or not any of the effect patterns of the cut-in effect is stored is determined (208 SGS363).

When the execution of the cut-in effect is determined (208SGS363; Y), it is further determined whether or not the stored cut-in effect effect pattern is pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4 (208SGS364). ). When the effect pattern of the stored cut-in effect is pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4 (208SGS364; Y), the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4. , Whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect pattern are determined based on the specified variable display result and the variation pattern (208SGS365).

On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute the cut-in effect (208SGS363; N) or when the stored effect pattern is the pattern CI-1 or CI-2 (208SGS364; N), the variable display result is It is determined whether or not it is a big hit (208SGS366). When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS366; Y), the big hit type is specified (208SGS367), and whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect pattern are determined based on the specified big hit type (208SGS368).

When the variable display result is out of alignment (208SGS366; N), the presence / absence of execution of the advance notice effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the specified variable display result and the variation pattern (208SGS369).

Specifically, in the processing of 208SGS365, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (A), when the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 15%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 at a rate of 55%, and pattern YE-3 at a rate of 0%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. If the variable display result is out of alignment and the variation pattern is super reach (out of super reach), the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 50%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the variable display result is out of alignment and the fluctuation pattern is normal reach (out of normal reach), the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 80%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 15%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 5%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the variable display result is out of reach and the fluctuation pattern is non-reach (non-reach out of reach), the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 5%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 0%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

As described above, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the case where the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is out of order is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. This is a case where the set value is any of 4 to 6 and the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ deviation (PA2-4).

As shown in FIGS. 8-26 (C) and 8-30, the pattern YE-1 is an effect pattern for displaying the image 208SG005s of the character A together with the blue effect on the image display device 5, and the pattern YE-2 is an effect pattern. The image display device 5 is an effect pattern for displaying the image 208SG005t of the character B together with the red effect, and the pattern YE-3 is an effect pattern for displaying the image 208SG005u of the character C together with the golden effect on the image display device 5. The pattern YE-4 is an effect pattern for displaying the collective image 208SG005v of the characters A to C together with the rainbow-colored effect on the image display device 5.

Further, in the processing of 208SGS368, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (B), when the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 10%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 45%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 15%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. If the jackpot type is jackpot C, the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 10%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 at a rate of 40%, and pattern YE-3 at a rate of 15%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

Further, in the processing of 208SGS369, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (B), when the variable display result is out of alignment and the fluctuation pattern is super reach (out of super reach), the non-execution of the advance notice effect is 50%. Determined by percentage. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 at a rate of 15%, and pattern YE-3 at a rate of 5%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the variable display result is out of alignment and the fluctuation pattern is normal reach (out of normal reach), the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 80%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 15%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 5%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the variable display result is out of reach and the fluctuation pattern is non-reach (non-reach out of reach), the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 5%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 0%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

As described above, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the ratio (big hit expectation degree) at which the variable display result becomes the big hit is set to be the lowest when the notice effect is not executed during the variable display, and the notice effect is a pattern. Variable display in the order of execution in YE-1, the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-2, the advance notice effect is executed in YE-3, and the advance notice effect is executed in YE-4. The rate at which the result is a big hit is set to be high (expectation of big hit of notice effect: not execute notice effect <execute in pattern YE-1 <execute in pattern YE-2 <execute in pattern YE-3 <pattern Executed with YE-4).

In particular, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (B), when the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined or the cut-in effect is lower than the pattern CI-3 or the pattern CI-4, the pattern CI- When the execution in 1 or the pattern CI-2 is decided, the advance notice effect may be executed in the pattern YE-4 only when the jackpot type is the jackpot C. Therefore, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, in addition to whether or not the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-3, the game also determines whether or not the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-4. It is possible to draw people's attention.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (A), as the effect pattern of the cut-in effect, the pattern CI-3, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the pattern CI-1 and the pattern CI-2, or the variable display result is a big hit. When the pattern CI-4 that confirms that the jackpot type is jackpot C is determined, YE-3 or YE-4 is used as the effect pattern of the advance notice effect regardless of the variable display result or the fluctuation pattern. It is set so that it will not be executed. Therefore, when the variable display result is a big hit, the cut-in effect can be executed only by the pattern YE-1 and the pattern YE-2, so that the variable display result is a big hit, which is the start of the cut-in effect. It is prevented that the player recognizes the timing before the timing (the start timing of the advance notice effect). Further, when the variable display result is out of alignment, neither the advance notice effect nor the cut-in effect is executed in the effect pattern with high expectation of big hit, so that the player is excessively opposed to the variable display result being a big hit. It is prevented from expecting.

After executing any of the processes of 208SGS365, 208SGS368, and 208SGS369, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the advance notice effect is determined (208SGS370). When the execution of the advance notice effect is decided (208SGS370; Y), the effect pattern determined by any of the processes of 208SGS365, 208SGS368, and 208SGS369 is stored (208SGS371), and the advance notice effect start waiting timer is set to give a notice. The effect determination process is completed (208 SGS 372). When it is determined not to execute the advance notice effect (208SGS370; N), the advance notice effect determination process is terminated without executing the processes of 208SGS371 and 208SGS372.

When the execution of the advance notice effect is determined in the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the advance notice effect start waiting timer by -1 each time the variable display effect process (S172) is executed, and the advance notice is given. When the effect start waiting timer expires, the advance notice effect process table according to the determined effect pattern is set. After that, each time the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display, the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9) is in accordance with the contents of the data (process data) in the advance notice effect process table. Etc.), and the advance notice effect may be executed.

As described above, by making it possible to determine the execution of the cut-in effect and the advance notice effect within the variable display start setting process, as shown in FIGS. 8-27 (A) to 8-27 (C), non-reach In the out-of-range fluctuation pattern, the advance notice effect can be executed only in the pattern YE-1 during the variable display, and in the normal reach out-of-reach variation pattern, the advance notice effect is performed in the period before the reach during the variable display in the pattern YE-. It is possible to execute with 1 and pattern YE-2, and in the fluctuation pattern of super reach α off and super reach β off, the notice effect is given in the period before reach during variable display pattern YE-1 to pattern YE-. It can be executed in 3. It should be noted that the cut-in effect cannot be executed in the period after the reach in the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach deviation, the super reach α deviation, and the super reach γ deviation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-28, in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ deviation and the super reach δ deviation, the advance notice effect can be executed by the patterns YE-1 to YE-3 in the period before the reach. In the period after the reach, the cut-in effect can be executed by the patterns CI-1 to pattern CI-3. However, when the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in the pattern CI-3, the advance notice effect can be executed only in the pattern YE-1 and the pattern YE-2.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-29 (A) and 8-29 (B), in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the revival effect, the advance notice effect is performed in the period before the reach YE-1 to 1. The pattern YE-4 can be executed, and the cut-in effect can be executed by the patterns CI-1 to the pattern CI-4 in the period after the reach. However, when the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in the pattern CI-3 or the pattern CI-4, the advance notice effect can be executed only in the pattern YE-1 and the pattern YE-2.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 at the time of executing the variable display in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-30 to 8-32. First, as shown in FIGS. 8-30 (A) to 8-30 (E), when the execution of the advance notice effect is determined at the start of the variable display, the advance notice effect is pattern YE- in the image display device 5. It is executed in any of 1 to pattern YE-4. Specifically, when the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-1, the image 208SG005s of the character A is displayed together with the blue effect on the image display device 5, and the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-2. When the image 208SG005t of the character B is displayed with the red effect on the image display device 5 and the advance notice effect is executed by the pattern YE-3, the image 208SG005u of the character C is displayed with the golden effect on the image display device 5. When the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-4, the collective image 208SG005v of the characters A to C is displayed on the image display device 5 together with the rainbow-colored effect.

At this time, the player expects a big hit depending on which character's image 208SG005s, 208SG005t, 208SG005u, 208SG005v the image displayed on the image display device 5 is, and the color of the effect displayed together with the image of these characters. It is possible to recognize the degree.

As described above, when the cut-in effect is determined to be executed by the pattern CI-3 or the pattern CI-4 at the start of the variable display, the advance notice effect is executed only by the pattern YE-1 or the pattern YE-2. It is possible.

When the variable display is a variable display of the super reach γ, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination of reach as shown in FIGS. 8-31 (A) to 8-31 (C), and then the super reach is displayed. A reach effect of γ (a battle effect in which a ally character and an enemy character fight in this feature unit 208SG) is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-31 (D), when the cut-in effect execution start timing during the reach effect of the super reach γ is reached, the image display device 5 starts displaying the image of the push button 31B, and the player A promotion notification is performed to urge the user to operate the push button 31B. At this time, the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, or the player operates the push button 31B without operating the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B. When the reception period elapses, the effect is displayed on the image display device 5 together with the cut-in image corresponding to the effect pattern of the cut-in effect.

Specifically, when the effect pattern of the cut-in effect is the pattern CI-1, the cut-in image 208SG005w is displayed together with the blue effect on the image display device 5, and the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-2. In this case, the cut-in image 208SG005x is displayed together with the red effect on the image display device 5, and the cut-in image 208SG005y is displayed together with the golden effect on the image display device 5 when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3. When the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-4, the cut-in image 208SG005z is displayed together with the rainbow-colored effect on the image display device 5.

At this time, the player decides which of the cut-in images 208SG005w, 208SG005x, 208SG005y, and 208SG005z is the cut-in image displayed on the image display device 5, and the color of the effect displayed together with these cut-in images. It is possible to recognize the degree of expectation of a big hit.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 8-32 (A) and 8-32 (B), when the variation pattern of the variable display is PS2-4 (fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ out of line), the super reach γ As a reach effect result (battle effect result), when the ally character loses to the enemy character, it is notified that the variable display result is out of order, and the variable display ends. Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-32 (A) and 8-32 (C), when the variable display variation pattern is PB1-4 (super reach γ jackpot variation pattern that does not execute the revival effect). , As the reach effect result (battle effect result) of the super reach γ, when the ally character wins the enemy character, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit, and the variable display ends.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-32 (A) and 8-32 (D) to 8-32 (F), the variation pattern of the variable display is PB1-5 (super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect). In the case of (variation pattern), it is notified that the variable display result is once out of order due to the defeat of the ally character by the enemy character as the reach effect result (battle effect result) of the super reach γ. Then, when the revival effect is executed, it is notified again that the variable display result is a big hit when the ally character reverses to the enemy character and wins as the reach effect result (battle effect result) of the super reach γ. The variable display ends.

Although not shown in particular, when the variable display is a variable display of super reach δ, after the decorative symbol is displayed in a combination of reach, the ally character and the enemy character are displayed in the same manner as the reach effect of super reach γ. Battle production) is executed. Then, when the cut-in effect is executed during the battle effect, the variable display result is always a big hit by executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3. The battle production as the reach production of Super Reach δ may be the same as the battle production as the reach production of Super Reach γ, but the characters to be played against and the development of the battle are partially different. You may.

As described above, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-21, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the cut-in effect is the pattern CI. While it is confirmed that the variable display result will be a big hit by executing in -3, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, the cut-in effect is produced. There is a case where the variable display result is out of alignment when executed in the pattern CI-3. That is, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is out of order, it is determined that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. , When the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the player can pay attention to whether the variable display result is a big hit or a miss, and the game interest can be improved. There is.

In addition, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-21, after notifying that the variable display result is out of order as a variable pattern in which the cut-in effect can be executed during the reach effect. Super reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern (super reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern that executes resurrection effect, PB1-5) and super reach that does not execute resurrection effect to notify that the variable display result is a jackpot by executing the resurrection effect A fluctuation pattern of γ jackpot (PB1-4) is provided, and when variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect, the fluctuation of super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the revival effect. The ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 is set lower than that in the case of executing the variable display in the pattern. Therefore, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and the variable display is notified that the variable display is out of order during the reach effect of the super reach γ, the set value set by the player in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. Even if it recognizes that is any of 4 to 6, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4 to 6 by notifying that the revival effect is executed and the variable display is a big hit. It is possible to reduce the deterioration of the game interest due to an error in recognizing that it is one of the above.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the disadvantage setting values are set to 1 to 3 and the advantageous setting values are set to 4 to 6 as the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the setting values are set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The determination ratio of the effect pattern of the cut-in effect or the advance notice effect is different depending on whether the set value is the disadvantageous set value or the advantageous set value, but the present invention is not limited to this. As long as the disadvantage setting value includes 1 and the advantage setting value includes 6, they may be set in any range in which the values do not overlap with each other. Specifically, the disadvantage setting value may be 1 to 5 and the advantage setting value may be only 6, or the disadvantage setting value may be only 1 and the advantage setting value may be 2 to 6.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, an embodiment in which the suggestion effect in the present invention is described as a reach effect is illustrated, but the invention is not limited to this, and the suggestion effect in the present invention is being variably displayed. As long as it is an effect that can be executed, for example, an effect other than the reach effect may be used, such as a pseudo continuous effect in which a temporary stop of a decorative pattern and a revariable display are repeatedly executed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-21 (C) to 8-21 (E), the fluctuation of the super reach γ deviation when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. When the variable display is executed in the pattern, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the ratio of the cut-in effect being executed in the pattern CI-3 is the highest, and the pachinko game When the set value set in the machine 1 is 4, the ratio of the cut-in effect being executed in the pattern CI-3 is set to be the lowest. Therefore, the higher the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the higher the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is out of order, and the higher the set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since the player can be expected to be set, the game entertainment can be improved.

In the feature unit 208SG of the embodiment, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ out of line. Illustrates a mode in which the higher the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the higher the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3. It is not limited, and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ out of line, the pachinko game Regardless of the set value set in the machine 1, the ratio at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 may be the same ratio. By doing so, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 in the variable display of the deviation of the super reach γ, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. It can be difficult to identify the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-6, which reach effect is to be executed and whether to execute the revival effect is determined in advance in association with each variation pattern, and is also determined in FIG. 8-13. As shown in (A), when the variable display result is a big hit, the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table of 1 regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, when the variable display result is a big hit, the ratio of executing the revival effect during the variable display is the same regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For this reason, the execution rate of the resurrection effect during the variable display follows the set value that determines the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit, so the player should pay attention to whether or not the resurrection effect is executed during the variable display. And can improve the game entertainment.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the reach effect and whether or not to execute the revival effect is illustrated by exemplifying a form that is determined in advance in association with each variation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute the reach effect and whether or not to execute the revival effect is changed by the effect control CPU 120 after the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern. It may be appropriately determined from the display result and the like.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-6 and 8-22, as the fluctuation pattern in the feature portion 208SG of the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern for executing the reach effect of the super reach δ (PA2-5 and PB1-6). Is provided, and when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach δ, the variable display result is always a big hit, so that the variation of the super reach effect increases and the super Since the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the reach δ and the player can pay attention to whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit, the game interest can be improved.

In addition, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the embodiment in which the variation pattern (PA2-5 and PB1-6) for executing the reach effect of the super reach δ is provided has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Therefore, it is also possible not to provide a variation pattern for executing the reach effect of the super reach δ.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as the effects that can be executed during the variable display, a notice effect that can be executed during the period from the start of the variable display to the reach (or until the end timing of the variable display) and the reach. There is a cut-in effect that can be executed during the effect. Further, the advance notice effect can be executed by any of a plurality of effect patterns (patterns YE-1 to pattern YE-4) having different jackpot expectations. Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-26, when the variable display result is a big hit and the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in the pattern CI-3 or the pattern CI-4, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit. Determines the effect pattern from the effect patterns (pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2) excluding the pattern YE-3 and the pattern YE-4, which are highly expected to hit the jackpot, when the advance notice effect is executed. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the variable display result will be a big hit by being executed by YE-3 or YE-4. Therefore, if it is decided to execute the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-4, whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit by executing the advance notice effect in the pattern YE-1 or the pattern YE-2. It is possible to pay attention until the variable display of the crab is completed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-27 and 8-28, during the variable display of 1, the advance notice effect is set before the cut-in effect (from the start of the variable display). By making it executable during the period until reach), if the variable display result becomes a big hit, the player recognizes that the variable display result becomes a big hit from the timing before the cut-in effect is executed. This can be prevented and the deterioration of the game interest can be prevented.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, an embodiment in which the advance notice effect can be executed at a timing prior to the cut-in effect during the variable display of 1, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the advance notice effect may be executed as a look-ahead effect during the variable display that is executed before the variable display that executes the cut-in effect. Further, the advance notice effect is executed during the period from the start of the cut-in effect to the end of the reach effect, so that the variable display result is obtained in the period from the start of the cut-in effect to the end of the reach effect. It may be possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the game is a big hit and prevent the game from being enjoyed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-21 and 8-22, when the variable display result is a big hit, the big hit type is always big hit C when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-4. On the other hand, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the jackpot type can be any of the jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, so the cut-in effect is changed to the pattern CI-4 during the variable display. It is possible to draw attention to the player whether or not it is executed. Further, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3, there is a possibility that the big hit type is the big hit A or the big hit B. Therefore, the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result. In the case of a miss, it is possible to make the player think that even if it is a big hit, it may have been a big hit A or a big hit B, so the game interest for the variable display result being missed. Can be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-26, any of 4 to 6 is set as a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (that is, the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is obtained. When the cut-in effect is decided to be executed in the pattern CI-3, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, when the advance notice effect is executed, the expectation of a big hit is high. Since the effect pattern is determined from the effect patterns (pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2) excluding the pattern YE-3 and the pattern YE-4, the advance notice effect is executed by the patterns YE-3 and YE-4. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the variable display result will be a big hit. Therefore, even though the variable display result does not become a big hit, the player against the fact that the variable display result becomes a big hit when the pattern CI-3 and the patterns YE-3 and YE-4 are executed during the same variable display. It is possible to prevent the expectation of the above from being excessively raised.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, any one of 4 to 6 is set as a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the cut-in effect is the pattern CI-3, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit. The execution ratio of the pattern YE-3 and the pattern YE-4 is set to 0% as a form of restricting the execution of the advance notice effect in the pattern YE-3 and the pattern YE-4 when the execution of the advance notice effect is determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any of 4 to 6 can be set as a set value for the pachinko gaming machine 1 though the embodiment is exemplified by the pattern YE-3 and the pattern YE-4. When the cut-in effect is set and the execution is decided in the pattern CI-3, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, the advance notice effect is given at a lower rate than the pattern YE-1 and the pattern YE-2. It may be possible to execute with the pattern YE-3 or the pattern YE-4. That is, in the present claim, "when the advantageous setting value is set and it is not determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the suggestion effect is performed in an embodiment including the specific effect. When it is executed, the execution of the second predetermined effect is restricted. ”In order to prevent the advance notice effect from being executed by the pattern YE-3 or the pattern YE-4, the advance notice effect is performed by the pattern YE-1 or the pattern. A form in which the pattern YE-3 or the pattern YE-4 is executed at a lower rate than the case where the YE-2 is executed is also included.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-21, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) out of the super reach γ. In this case, if the set values are the same, the ratio of the cut-in effect being executed in the pattern CI-3 in the high-accuracy high-base state is the cut-in effect in the low-accuracy low-base state and the low-accuracy high-base state. It is set higher than the rate executed in pattern CI-3. For this reason, when the gaming state is the high-accuracy high-base state, the cut-in effect is produced in the variable display of the super reach γ out of line compared to the case where the gaming state is the low-accuracy low-base state or the low-accuracy high-base state. Since the ratio of execution in the pattern CI-3 is high, it becomes easy for the player to recognize that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6 in the high accuracy and high base state. After the player recognizes that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6 by executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 in the high accuracy and high base state. Is able to improve the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 because it is easy for the player to continue the game even after the gaming state shifts to the low probability low base state.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the variable display is displayed by the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) of the super reach γ deviation. When executed, when the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state, if the set values are the same, the cut-in rate is higher than when the gaming state is the low accuracy low base state or the low accuracy high base state. Although the embodiment in which the effect can be performed by the pattern CI-3 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. Moreover, when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) out of the super reach γ, the cut-in effect can be executed in the pattern CI-3 when the gaming state is the high accuracy and high base state. When the gaming state is a low probability low base state or a low probability high base state, the cut-in effect may be disabled by the pattern CI-3.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these, and any changes or additions within the scope of the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. ..

For example, in the feature unit 208SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-21, when the variable display is executed in the variation pattern (PB1-5) for executing the resurrection effect, the variation pattern in which the resurrection effect is not executed is executed. Although the embodiment in which the cut-in effect can be executed by the pattern CI-3 at a lower rate than the case where the variable display is executed by (PA2-4 or PB1-4) is illustrated, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as a modified example 208SG-1, as shown in FIGS. 8-33 (A) to 8-33 (E), when variable display is executed in a variable pattern (PB1-5) for executing a revival effect. May make the cut-in effect infeasible with pattern CI-3. By doing so, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and it is notified that the variable display result is out of order, any of 4 to 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Even though the player recognizes that it is set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the game interest due to the fact that the revival effect is executed and the variable display result is notified that the jackpot is a big hit.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the above-described embodiment, when the variable display is executed by the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the resurrection effect, the variable display is performed by the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the resurrection effect. Although the embodiment in which the ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 is set to be lower than that in the case of executing the above is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and FIG. 8 is shown as a modified example 208SG-2. As shown in −34 (A) to 8-34 (D), when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect, the super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the revival effect The ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 may be set higher than in the case of executing the variable display in the variable pattern. By doing so, for example, the player places more importance on whether or not the variable display result is a big hit than whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. In the case of, after the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and it is notified that the variable display result is out of order, the revival effect is further executed and the variable display result is a big hit. Since the player can be focused on whether or not the notification is made, the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the above-described embodiment, the fluctuation pattern (PB1-5) of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any one of 1 to 6. ), The cut-in effect can be executed by the pattern CI-3. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is shown as a modified example 208SG-3. As shown in 8-35 (A) to 8-35 (C), when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect is executed. While the cut-in effect can be executed by the pattern CI-3 when the variable display is executed by the fluctuation pattern (PB1-5) of the above, the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are 1 to 3. In either case, the cut-in effect may be disabled in the pattern CI-3 when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern (PB1-5) of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect. By doing so, when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern (PB1-5) of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect, the variable display result becomes a jackpot and the pachinko game machine 1 is set. It is confirmed that the set value is one of 4 to 6, and the revival effect is executed after it is once notified that the variable display result will be out of order during the reach effect of the super reach γ during the variable display. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the variable display result is notified to be a big hit, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

That is, in the feature unit 208SG, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach γ, the setting is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 even if the variable display result is out of order. By determining that the value is any of 4 to 6, it is possible to promote the continuation of the game for the player, but in this feature unit 208SG-3, the reach of the super reach γ is being produced. When the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the variable display result becomes a big hit, and the player determines that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. However, it is possible to promote the continuation of the game.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-26, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ is out of alignment. When the variable display is executed in (PA2-4), if the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in the pattern CI-1 or the pattern CI-2, which is an effect pattern with a low expectation of a big hit, the cut-in effect is executed. Illustrates a mode in which the advance notice effect can be executed by the pattern YE-3 at a higher rate than when the execution by the pattern CI-3, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, is determined. The present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 8-36 (A) to 8-36 (C) as the modified example 208SG-4, the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are 4 to 6. When the variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) out of the super reach γ, the cut-in effect is decided to be executed with the pattern CI-3, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit. If this is the case, the cut-in effect will be performed with pattern YE-3 at a higher rate than when execution is decided with pattern CI-1 or pattern CI-2, which is an effect pattern with a low expectation of big hits. It may be feasible. By doing so, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach γ, and when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-1 or the pattern CI-2. By executing the advance notice effect in the pattern YE-3 at a higher rate than that, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the variable display result is out of alignment, so that the variable display result can be obtained. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it will be a big hit, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-21 (C) to 8-21 (E), the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. And when the variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) out of the super reach γ, if the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state, the gaming state is low if the set values are the same. Although the embodiment in which the cut-in effect can be performed by the pattern CI-3 at a higher rate than in the case of the low accuracy base state or the low accuracy high base state is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is a modification. As shown in FIG. 8-37 as 208SG-5, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and is variably displayed by the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) of the super reach γ deviation. When is executed, if the gaming state is a low-accuracy low-base state or a low-accuracy high-base state, if the set values are the same, the gaming state is cut at a higher rate than when the gaming state is in the high-accuracy high-base state. The in-effect may be executed by the pattern CI-3.

By doing so, when the gaming state is the low-accuracy low-base state or the low-accuracy high-base state, the rate during the reach production of the super reach γ is higher than that when the gaming state is the high-accuracy high-base state. Since the cut-in effect is easily executed by the pattern CI-3, for example, the variable display result does not become a big hit over a long period of time (for example, 1000 variable displays) in the low accuracy low base state, so that the player When the motivation to continue playing the game is reduced, the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, that is, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. Is notified to the player, so that the player's willingness to continue playing the game can be improved, so that the game interest in the low-accuracy low-base state and the low-accuracy high-base state can be improved.

In the present modification 208SG-5, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) of the super reach γ deviation. At that time, when the gaming state is the low accuracy low base state or the low accuracy high base state, if the set values are the same, the cut-in effect is produced at a higher rate than when the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state. Although the embodiment that can be performed by the pattern CI-3 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as a modification 208SG-6 as shown in FIG. 8-38. When the set value is any of 4 to 6 and the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) out of the super reach γ, the gaming state is the low probability low base state or the low probability high base state. In the case of, the cut-in effect can be executed by the pattern CI-3, while the cut-in effect may be disabled by the pattern CI-3 when the gaming state is the high accuracy and high base state. By doing so, the cut-in effect can be executed by the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach γ only when the game state is the low accuracy low base state or the low accuracy high base state. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to the low-determined base state and the low-accuracy high-base state, in which the variable display result is less likely to be a big hit than the high-based state, the game interests of these low-determined base state and low-accuracy high-base state are Can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the cut-in effect can be executed during the reach effect of the super reach γ or the super reach δ is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, as shown in FIGS. 8-40 (A) and 8-40 (B) as the modified example 208SG-7, during the reach production of the super reach γ and the super reach δ, the pachinko game is performed instead of the cut-in effect. The set value suggestion effect suggesting the set value set in the machine 1 may be executable. When the set value suggestion effect can be executed during the reach effect of the super reach γ or the super reach δ in this way, a period before the executable period (during the reach effect) of the set value suggestion effect (for example). , The period from the start of the variable display to the reach), the above-mentioned advance notice effect may be executed, and the execution rate of the set value suggestion effect may be different depending on the effect pattern of the advance notice effect.

Specifically, when the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-3 or the pattern YE-4, the set value is higher than that in the case where the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-1 or the pattern YE-2. It suffices to make the suggestion effect feasible. By doing so, the player can be made to pay attention to which effect pattern the advance notice effect is executed in, and when the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-3 or the pattern YE-4, , Since the player can pay attention to whether or not the set value suggestion effect is executed during the reach effect, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the set value suggestion effect.

(Explanation of feature section 027SH)
Next, a game machine related to the feature unit 027SH will be described. The gaming machine according to the feature unit 027SH is a gaming machine capable of playing a game. In this embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of playing a game will be described as an example.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH includes a game control means and an effect executing means. The game control means is realized by, for example, the CPU 103 of the main board 11. The effect execution means is realized by, for example, the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12. The effect executing means can execute various effects (for example, various notice effects, item image effects, etc., which will be described later).

FIG. 9-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH of the present embodiment. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH is provided with a movable body 027SH 32, which is an accessory, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-1. As shown in FIGS. 9-6 (E) to 9-6 (G), the movable body 027SH 32 has a first state (initial state) and a second state (tilted state) under the control of the effect control board 12. Works between. For example, the movable body 027SH32 operates in the order of the first state → the second state → the first state, or operates in the order of the first state → the second state → the first state → the second state → the first state, or the first state. → State between 1st state and 2nd state (temporarily stopped) → 2nd state → 1st state and operation, 1st state → State between 1st state and 2nd state (temporarily stopped) → It may operate with the first state. The other configurations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH in the gaming board 2 are the same as the configurations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature portion 208SG shown in FIG. 8-1. Is omitted.

FIG. 9-2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the hit probability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH. Specifically, FIG. 9-2 (A) shows the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value (set values "1" to "6") when the gaming state is in the low probability state. FIG. 9-2 (B) shows the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value (set values “1” to “6”) when the gaming state is in the highly accurate state. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH is classified into a gaming state (whether it is in a low probability state or a high probability state) and a set value (a set value “1” to “6”). In addition, a plurality of types of display result judgment tables for special figures corresponding to each (for each, the big hit judgment value and the small hit probability so as to be the big hit probability and the small hit probability as shown in FIGS. 9-2 (A) and 9-2 (B)). 12 types of display result determination tables for special figures to which hit determination values are assigned) are stored. For example, the CPU 103 determines the above-mentioned plurality of types of display result for special figures in the winning random number value determination process. It is sufficient to judge whether it is a big hit or a small hit (whether it is a miss) by using one of the corresponding special figure display result determination tables.

FIG. 9-2 (C) shows the types of jackpots. FIG. 9-2 (D) shows the distribution of jackpots for the first special symbol. FIG. 9-2 (E) shows the distribution of jackpots for the second special symbol. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH has a plurality of types of jackpot type determination tables (each of which corresponds to each of the special symbols (whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol)). , The judgment value corresponding to the first big hit, the judgment value corresponding to the second big hit, and the judgment value corresponding to the third big hit are assigned so as to be sorted as shown in FIGS. 9-2 (D) and 9-2 (E). Two types of jackpot type determination tables) are stored, and for example, when the CPU 103 determines in the prize-winning random number value determination process that a jackpot will be achieved based on the special figure display result determination table, the above-mentioned plurality of The type of jackpot (big hit type) may be determined by using one of the jackpot type determination tables corresponding to the type.

FIG. 9-3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH. FIG. 9-3 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the types of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times). Fluctuation pattern # 10 is a non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern # 11 is a non-reach out-of-reach (for shortening) fluctuation pattern. Fluctuation pattern # 12 is a fluctuation pattern that is out of normal reach. Fluctuation pattern # 13 is a fluctuation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach A and finally becomes out of order. Fluctuation pattern # 14 is a fluctuation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach B and finally becomes out of order. Fluctuation pattern # 15 is a fluctuation pattern of small hits. Fluctuation pattern # 16 is a fluctuation pattern of a normal reach jackpot. Fluctuation pattern # 17 is a fluctuation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach A and finally becomes a big hit. Fluctuation pattern # 18 is a fluctuation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach B and finally becomes a big hit.

FIG. 9-3 (B) is an example of the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern. The expectation (reliability) of the jackpot is Super Reach B> Super Reach A> Normal Reach. The jackpot expectation of a certain effect a is, for example, (probability that effect a is executed when it becomes a big hit) × (probability that it becomes a big hit) / {(probability that effect a is executed when it becomes a big hit) × ( Calculated by (probability of becoming a big hit) + (probability that production a is executed when a big hit does not occur) x (probability of not becoming a big hit)} (when the expected degree of big hit becomes "1", it is always "big hit" Become).

For example, the reliability of Super Reach A is (0.3 × 1/320) / {(0.3 × 1/320) + (0.009 × 319/320)} = about when the set value is 1. It is 9.5%. Further, the reliability of Super Reach A is (0.3 × 1/295) / {(0.3 × 1/295) + (0.009 × 294/295)} = about when the set value is 6. It is 10.2%.

Further, the reliability of Super Reach B is (0.6 × 1/320) / {(0.6 × 1/320) + (0.001 × 319/320)} = about when the set value is 1. It is 65.3%. Further, the reliability of Super Reach B is (0.6 × 1/295) / {(0.6 × 1/295) + (0.001 × 294/295)} = about when the set value is 6. It is 67.1%.

According to the example of FIG. 9-3 (B), the fluctuation pattern # 11 is not determined during the low base, but for example, the fluctuation pattern # 11 is determined even during the low base according to the number of reserved memories. It may be. Further, according to the example of FIG. 9-3 (B), the fluctuation pattern # 10 is not determined during the high base, but the fluctuation pattern # 10 is determined even during the high base according to, for example, the number of reserved memories. It may be.

FIG. 9-4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the advance notice effect. 9-5 and 9-6 are production examples of the respective notice effects. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH can execute a plurality of types of advance notice effects as shown in FIG. 9-4. In this embodiment, each of the plurality of types of advance notice effects can be specified by the advance notice effect patterns.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" shown in FIG. 9-4 is a cut-in notice effect (display of a weak cut-in image). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH is, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A) as a notice effect (cut-in notice effect / display of a weak cut-in image) of the notice effect pattern “YEP-A1”. , Weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI is displayed.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" shown in FIG. 9-4 is a cut-in notice effect (display of a strong cut-in image). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH is, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (B) as a notice effect (cut-in notice effect / display of a strong cut-in image) of the notice effect pattern “YEP-A2”. , Strong cut-in image 027SHYKE-KCI is displayed.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-B" shown in FIG. 9-4 is a group notice effect (display of a group image). The pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH displays a group image 027SHYKE-GN as, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (C), as a notice effect (group notice effect) of the notice effect pattern “YEP-B”. To do.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" shown in FIG. 9-4 is a button notice effect (display of button image → press → weak cut-in image). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH is shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) and 9-6 (B), for example, as a notice effect (button notice effect / display of a weak cut-in image) of the notice effect pattern “YEP-C1”. Such as the button image 027SHYKE-BU and the weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI are displayed. The weak cut-in image displayed in the button notice effect may be different from the weak cut-in image displayed in the cut-in notice effect.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-C2" shown in FIG. 9-4 is a button notice effect (display of button image → press → strong cut-in image). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH is shown in FIGS. 9-6 (C) and 9-6 (D), for example, as a notice effect (button notice effect / display of a strong cut-in image) of the notice effect pattern “YEP-C2”. Such, the button image 027SHYKE-BU and the strong cut-in image 027SHYKE-KCI are displayed. The strong cut-in image displayed in the button notice effect may be different from the strong cut-in image displayed in the cut-in notice effect.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-D" shown in FIG. 9-4 is a character advance notice effect (operation of the character). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH has, for example, as shown in FIGS. The movable body 027SH32 is operated.

FIG. 9-7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the determination ratio of the advance notice effect and the like. FIG. 9-7 (A) is an example of a determination ratio of whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect (display of a weak cut-in image or display of a strong cut-in image). According to the example shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), when the super reach is out of order (when the fluctuation pattern is either # 13 or # 14), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 40%, and the super reach jackpot is determined. In the case of (when either fluctuation pattern # 17 or # 18 is obtained), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 50%. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH executes a cut-in notice effect execution presence / absence determination table for super reach loss, which allocates 40% of the total as a judgment value corresponding to execution existence, and 50% of the total. The cut-in notice effect execution presence / absence determination table for the super reach jackpot, which is assigned as the determination value corresponding to Yes, is stored. For example, the effect control CPU 120 is used for the super reach loss when the super reach is lost. Use the cut-in notice effect execution presence / absence determination table to determine whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect, and if it becomes a super reach jackpot, use the cut-in notice effect execution presence / absence determination table for the super reach jackpot. You may decide whether or not to execute the effect. The same applies to the determination of whether or not to execute other notice effects (group notice effect, button notice effect, character advance notice effect). If the super reach does not occur (if any of the fluctuation patterns # 10, # 11, # 12, # 15, and # 16), the execution status is determined at a rate of 0% (determine not to execute). ).

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH decides to execute the cut-in notice effect, it determines the notice effect pattern (“YEP-A1”, “YEP-A2”) related to the cut-in notice effect. FIG. 9-7 (B) is an example of the determination ratio of the notice effect pattern (“YEP-A1”, “YEP-A2”) of the cut-in notice effect when it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect. According to the example shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), when the super reach is lost, the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" is determined at a rate of 80%, and the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" is 20. Determined at a rate of%. Further, in the case of a super reach jackpot, the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" is determined at a rate of 20%, and the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" is determined at a rate of 80%. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH allocates 80% of the whole as a determination value corresponding to the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" and 20% of the whole corresponds to the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2". The cut-in notice effect pattern determination table for the super reach loss assigned as the judgment value, 20% of the whole is assigned as the judgment value corresponding to the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1", and 80% of the whole is the notice effect pattern " The cut-in notice effect pattern determination table for the super reach jackpot assigned as the determination value corresponding to "YEP-A2" is stored. For example, the effect control CPU 120 super reach when the super reach is out of order. Use the cut-in notice effect pattern determination table for out-of-order to determine the advance notice effect pattern for the cut-in advance notice effect, and if it becomes a super reach jackpot, cut in using the cut-in advance notice effect pattern determination table for the super reach jackpot. The notice production pattern of the notice effect may be determined. The same applies to the determination of the advance notice effect pattern of other advance notice effects (button advance notice effects).

FIG. 9-7 (C) is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the group notice effect (display of the group image). According to the example shown in FIG. 9-7 (C), when the super reach is out of order, the execution rate is determined at a rate of 20%, and when the super reach jackpot is achieved, the execution rate is determined at a rate of 50%. To do. Further, since there is only one type of advance notice effect pattern related to the group advance notice effect (notice effect pattern "YEP-B"), the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH decides to execute the group advance notice effect. The advance notice effect pattern "YEP-B" is determined as the advance notice effect pattern related to the effect. If it does not reach super reach, it is decided that there is execution at a rate of 0% (it is decided not to execute).

FIG. 9-7 (D) shows the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the button notice effect (display of button image → press → display of weak cut-in image, or display of button image → press → display of strong cut-in image). This is an example. According to the example shown in FIG. 9-7 (D), when the super reach is out of order, the execution rate is determined at a rate of 10%, and when the super reach jackpot is achieved, the execution rate is determined at a rate of 50%. To do. If it does not reach super reach, it is decided that there is execution at a rate of 0% (it is decided not to execute).

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH decides to execute the button notice effect, it determines the notice effect pattern (“YEP-C1”, “YEP-C2”) related to the button notice effect. FIG. 9-7 (E) is an example of the determination ratio of the advance notice effect patterns (“YEP-C1” and “YEP-C2”) related to the button advance notice effect when it is decided to execute the button advance notice effect. According to the example shown in FIG. 9-7 (E), when the super reach is out of order, the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" is determined at a rate of 90%, and the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-C2" is set to 10. Determined at a rate of%. Further, in the case of a super reach jackpot, the notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" is determined at a rate of 10%, and the notice effect pattern "YEP-C2" is determined at a rate of 90%.

FIG. 9-7 (F) is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the bonus notice effect (movement of the bonus). According to the example shown in FIG. 9-7 (F), when the super reach is out of order, the execution rate is determined at a rate of 5%, and when the super reach jackpot is achieved, the execution rate is determined at a rate of 75%. To do. In addition, since there is only one type of advance notice effect pattern related to the character advance notice effect (notice effect pattern "YEP-D"), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH decides to execute the character advance notice effect, The notice effect pattern "YEP-D" is determined as the advance notice effect pattern related to the character advance notice effect. If it does not reach super reach, it is decided that there is execution at a rate of 0% (it is decided not to execute).

According to FIG. 9-7, in the case of super reach, a maximum of four types of advance notice effects are executed.

In addition, the probability that the cut-in notice effect (display of weak cut-in image or display of strong cut-in image) will be executed at the time of super reach is {(probability of loss × super reach at the time of loss). Probability of becoming x Probability of performing a cut-in notice effect when the super reach is off) + (Probability of becoming a big hit x Probability of becoming a super reach when a big hit x Super reach The cut-in notice effect is executed when a big hit Probability)} / {(Probability of losing x Probability of becoming super reach when losing) + (Probability of becoming a big hit x Probability of becoming super reach when hitting a big hit)} When the set value is 1, { (319/320 x 1% x 40%) + (1/320 x 90% x 50%)} / {(319/320 x 1%) + (1/320 x 90%)} = about 42%. ..

In addition, the probability that the group notice effect (display of the group image) will be executed when the super reach is reached is {(probability of losing x probability of becoming super reach when out of the way x group notice effect when the super reach is out of the way). Probability of being executed) + (Probability of becoming a big hit x Probability of becoming a super reach at the time of a big hit x Probability of executing a group notice effect at the time of a super reach big hit)} / {(Probability of being missed x Probability of being missed) (Probability of becoming a super reach) + (Probability of becoming a big hit x Probability of becoming a super reach at the time of a big hit)} When the set value is 1, {(319/320 x 1% x 20%) + (1) / 320 × 90% × 50%)} / {(319/320 × 1%) + (1/320 × 90%)} = about 26%.

In addition, the probability that the button notice effect (display of button image-> press-> display of weak cut-in image or display of button image-> press-> display of strong cut-in image) will be executed at the time of super reach is { (Probability of losing x Probability of becoming super reach when missing x Probability of executing button notice effect when super reach is out) + (Probability of becoming a big hit x Probability of becoming super reach when hitting a big hit x Super reach Probability that the button notice effect will be executed at the time of a big hit)} / {(Probability of becoming a miss x Probability of becoming a super reach at the time of losing) + (Probability of becoming a big hit x Probability of becoming a super reach at the time of a big hit)} Calculated from, in the case of the set value 1, {(319/320 × 1% × 10%) + (1/320 × 90% × 50%)} / {(319/320 × 1%) + (1/320) × 90%)} = about 19%.

In addition, the probability that the character advance notice effect (action of the character) will be executed when it becomes super reach is {(probability of losing x probability of becoming super reach when it is out x character when it is out of super reach). Probability of executing the notice effect) + (Probability of becoming a big hit x Probability of becoming a super reach at the time of a big hit x Probability of executing the character advance notice effect at the time of a super reach big hit)} / {(Probability of losing) Calculated from (probability of becoming a super reach when out of the game) + (probability of becoming a big hit x probability of becoming a super reach when a big hit)}, when the set value is 1, {(319/320 x 1% x 5%) + (1/320 x 90% x 75%)} / {(319/320 x 1%) + (1/320 x 90%)} = about 20%.

FIG. 9-8 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the item image effect. FIG. 9-9 is a display example of each item image. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH can execute a plurality of types of item image effects as shown in FIG. 9-8 (A).

The item image advance notice effect of the item image effect pattern "IGEP-A" shown in FIG. 9-8 (A) is an item image suggesting that the cut-in advance notice effect (YEP-A1 or YEP-A2) is executed. It is an item image effect A that displays A. In other words, the item image A displayed in the item image effect A can specify the type of advance notice effect to be executed (specifically, the cut-in advance notice effect).

In the item image effect A, the strength (high or low reliability) of suggestion that the cut-in notice effect is executed differs depending on the display mode (first to third display modes) of the item image A.

Specifically, the item image A of the first display mode (level 1) is a weak suggestion that weakly suggests that the cut-in notice effect is executed. That is, the item image A of the first display mode suggests whether the cut-in notice effect is executed with low reliability. The item image 027SHIGALV1 shown in FIG. 9-9 (A) is an example of the first display mode (level 1) of the item image A. In this embodiment, the first display mode (level 1) of the item image A (the same applies to the item image B to the item image D) is blue.

The item image A of the second display mode (level 2) is a medium suggestion that moderately suggests that the cut-in notice effect is executed. That is, the item image A in the second display mode suggests whether the cut-in notice effect is executed with a moderate degree of reliability. The item image 027SHIGALV2 shown in FIG. 9-9 (B) is an example of the second display mode (level 2) of the item image A. In this embodiment, the second display mode (level 2) of the item image A (the same applies to the item image B to the item image D) is green.

The item image A of the third display mode (level 3) is a strong suggestion that strongly suggests that the cut-in notice effect is executed. That is, the item image A in the third display mode suggests with high reliability whether the cut-in notice effect is executed. The item image 027SHIGALV3 shown in FIG. 9-9 (C) is an example of the third display mode (level 3) of the item image A. In this embodiment, the third display mode (level 3) of the item image A (the same applies to the item image B to the item image D) is red.

The item image advance notice effect of the item image effect pattern "IGEP-B" shown in FIG. 9-8 (A) is an item that displays an item image B suggesting that the group advance notice effect (YEP-B) is executed. Image production B. In other words, the item image B displayed in the item image effect B can specify the type of the advance notice effect to be executed (specifically, the group advance notice effect).

In the item image effect B, the strength (high or low reliability) of suggestion that the group notice effect is executed differs depending on the display mode (first to third display modes) of the item image B.

Specifically, the item image B of the first display mode (level 1) is a weak suggestion that weakly suggests that the group notice effect is executed. That is, the item image B of the first display mode suggests whether the group notice effect is executed with low reliability. The item image 027SHIGBLV1 shown in FIG. 9-9 (D) is an example of the first display mode (level 1) of the item image B.

The item image B of the second display mode (level 2) is a medium suggestion that moderately suggests that the group notice effect is executed. That is, the item image B of the second display mode suggests whether the group notice effect is executed with a moderate degree of reliability. The item image 027SHIGBLV2 shown in FIG. 9-9 (E) is an example of the second display mode (level 2) of the item image B.

The item image B of the third display mode (level 3) is a strong suggestion that strongly suggests that the group notice effect is executed. That is, the item image B of the third display mode suggests with high reliability whether the group notice effect is executed. The item image 027SHIGBLV3 shown in FIG. 9-9 (F) is an example of the third display mode (level 3) of the item image B.

The item image advance notice effect of the item image effect pattern "IGEP-C" shown in FIG. 9-8 (A) suggests that the button advance notice effect (YEP-C1 or YEP-C2) is executed. Is an item image effect C for displaying. In other words, the item image C displayed in the item image effect C can specify the type of the advance notice effect to be executed (specifically, the button advance notice effect).

In the item image effect C, the strength (high or low reliability) of suggestion that the button notice effect is executed differs depending on the display mode (first to third display modes) of the item image C.

Specifically, the item image C of the first display mode (level 1) is a weak suggestion that weakly suggests that the button notice effect is executed. That is, the item image C of the first display mode suggests whether the button notice effect is executed with low reliability. The item image 027SHIGCLV1 shown in FIG. 9-9 (G) is an example of the first display mode (level 1) of the item image C.

The item image C of the second display mode (level 2) is a medium suggestion that moderately suggests that the button notice effect is executed. That is, the item image C in the second display mode suggests whether the button notice effect is executed with a moderate degree of reliability. The item image 027SHIGCLV2 shown in FIG. 9-9 (H) is an example of the second display mode (level 2) of the item image C.

The item image C of the third display mode (level 3) is a strong suggestion that strongly suggests that the button notice effect is executed. That is, the item image C in the third display mode suggests with high reliability whether the button notice effect is executed. The item image 027SHIGCLV3 shown in FIG. 9-9 (I) is an example of the third display mode (level 3) of the item image C.

The item image advance notice effect of the item image effect pattern "IGEP-D" shown in FIG. 9-8 (A) displays the item image D suggesting that the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed. Item image production D. In other words, the item image D displayed in the item image effect D can specify the type of the advance notice effect to be executed (specifically, the character advance notice effect).

In the item image effect D, the strength (high or low reliability) of suggestion that the character advance notice effect is executed differs depending on the display mode (first to third display modes) of the item image D.

Specifically, the item image D of the first display mode (level 1) is a weak suggestion that weakly suggests that the character advance notice effect is executed. That is, the item image D in the first display mode suggests with low reliability whether or not the character advance notice effect is executed. The item image 027SHIGDLV1 shown in FIG. 9-9 (J) is an example of the first display mode (level 1) of the item image D.

The item image D of the second display mode (level 2) is a medium suggestion that moderately suggests that the character advance notice effect is executed. That is, the item image D in the second display mode suggests with a moderate degree of reliability whether or not the character advance notice effect is executed. The item image 027SHIGDLV2 shown in FIG. 9-9 (K) is an example of the second display mode (level 2) of the item image D.

The item image D of the third display mode (level 3) is a strong suggestion that strongly suggests that the character advance notice effect is executed. That is, the item image D in the third display mode suggests with high reliability whether or not the character advance notice effect is executed. The item image 027SHIGDLV3 shown in FIG. 9-9 (L) is an example of the third display mode (level 3) of the item image D.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH has an item image effect A (IGEP-A), an item image effect B (IGEP-B), and an item image effect C (IGEP-C) shown in FIG. 9-8 (A). , Item image production D (IGEP-D) 4 types of item image production may not execute even one of the four types, or may execute only one of the four types. Two of the four types may be executed, three of the four types may be executed, or all four types may be executed.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH can change the display mode of the item image to be displayed in the item image production. In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH can execute the item image effect that changes the display mode of the item image. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH may change the display mode of the item image A from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode (level 2) during the execution of the item image effect A. It is possible. In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH can execute the item image effect A that changes the display mode of the item image A from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode (level 2). is there. The same applies to the item image effect B, the item image effect C, and the item image effect D.

FIG. 9-8 (B) shows the contents of the item image effect execution mode pattern. The item image production execution mode pattern is common to each item image production (item image production A, item image production B, item image production C, item image production D), and is any one for each item image production. Item image effect execution mode pattern is determined (details will be described later).

The item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP1” shown in FIG. 9-8 (B) is an item image effect execution mode pattern that does not execute the item image effect. Since the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" does not execute the item image effect, the item image is not displayed.

The item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP2” shown in FIG. 9-8 (B) is an item image effect execution mode pattern for executing the item image effect, and the display mode of the item image is set to the first display mode (level). This is an item image effect execution mode pattern that does not change as it is in 1).

The item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP3” shown in FIG. 9-8 (B) is an item image effect execution mode pattern for executing the item image effect, and the display mode of the item image is set to the first display mode (level). This is an item image effect execution mode pattern for changing from 1) to the second display mode (level 2).

The item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP4” shown in FIG. 9-8 (B) is an item image effect execution mode pattern for executing the item image effect, and the display mode of the item image is set to the first display mode (level). It is an item image effect execution mode pattern that changes from 1) to the second display mode (level 2) and further changes from the second display mode (level 2) to the third display mode (level 3).

The item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP5” shown in FIG. 9-8 (B) is an item image effect execution mode pattern for executing the item image effect, and the display mode of the item image is set to the first display mode (level). This is an item image effect execution mode pattern for changing from 1) to the third display mode (level 3).

Therefore, although the details will be described later, for example, the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP3” is determined for the item image effect A (IGEP-A), and the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEP-B” is determined for the item image effect B (IGEP-B). "IGEGP1" is determined, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is determined for the item image effect C (IGEP-C), and the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" is determined for the item image effect D (IGEP-D). If so, the item image effect A (IGEP-A) that changes the display mode of the item image A from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode (level 2), and the display mode of the item image C. The item image effect C (IGEP-C) that does not change the first display mode (level 1) and the display mode of the item image D are changed from the first display mode (level 1) to the third display mode (level 3). The item image effect D (IGEP-D) to be caused is executed (the item image effect B is not executed).

FIG. 9-10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the determination ratio of the item image effect and the like. 9-10 (A) and 9-10 (B) are examples of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A (IGEP-A). Specifically, FIG. 9-10 (A) shows the item image effect execution of the item image effect A (IGEP-A) when the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2) is executed in the super reach. This is an example of the determination ratio of the aspect pattern. FIG. 9-10 (B) shows the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A (IGEP-A) when the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2) is not executed in the super reach. This is an example.

9-10 (C) and 9-10 (D) are examples of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B (IGEP-B). Specifically, FIG. 9-10 (C) shows the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B (IGEP-B) when the group notice effect (YEP-B) is executed in the super reach. This is an example. FIG. 9-10 (D) is an example of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B (IGEP-B) when the group notice effect (YEP-B) is not executed in the super reach.

9-10 (E) and 9-10 (F) are examples of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C (IGEP-C). Specifically, FIG. 9-10 (E) shows an item image effect execution mode of the item image effect C (IGEP-C) when the button notice effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2) is executed in the super reach. This is an example of the pattern determination ratio. FIG. 9-10 (F) shows the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C (IGEP-C) when the button notice effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2) is not executed in the super reach. This is an example.

9-10 (G) and 9-10 (H) are examples of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D (IGEP-D). Specifically, FIG. 9-10 (G) determines the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D (IGEP-D) when the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed in the super reach. This is an example of the ratio. FIG. 9-10 (H) is an example of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D (IGEP-D) when the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is not executed in the super reach. ..

According to FIG. 9-10, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A that displays the item image A and suggests the execution of the cut-in notice effect (that is, whether the item image effect A is executed or the item). The display mode of the item image A when the image effect A is executed) is determined by whether or not the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2) is executed. Further, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B that displays the item image B and suggests the execution of the group notice effect (that is, whether the item image effect B is executed or the item image effect B is executed) is executed. The display mode of the item image B in the case) is determined by whether or not the group notice effect (YEP-B) is executed. Further, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C that displays the item image C and suggests the execution of the button notice effect (that is, whether the item image effect C is executed or the item image effect C is executed) is executed. The display mode of the item image C in the case) is determined by whether or not the button notice effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2) is executed. Further, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D that displays the item image D and suggests the execution of the character advance notice effect (that is, whether the item image effect D is executed or the item image effect D is executed). The display mode of the item image D in this case) is determined by whether or not the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed.

As specific examples, the reliability of the suggestion of the cut-in notice effect for each display mode of the item image A displayed in the item image effect A, and the button notice effect for each display mode of the item image C displayed in the item image effect C. The reliability of the suggestion will be explained.

(Reliability of suggestion of cut-in notice effect for each display mode of item image A)
According to FIGS. 9-10 (A) and 9-10 (B), the final display mode of the item image A is the third display mode (level 3), which is the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP4”. Is determined. When the cut-in notice effect is executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined at a rate of 50% (Fig. 9-10 (A)), and when the cut-in notice effect is not executed, 10%. The item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined by the ratio (FIG. 9-10 (B)). The reliability of the cut-in notice effect when the final display mode of the item image A in the super reach is the third display mode is, for example, (when the cut-in notice effect is executed in the super reach, the third display mode Item image A is finally displayed) × (Probability that the cut-in notice effect is executed in the super reach) / {Item image of the third display mode when the cut-in notice effect is executed in the super reach Probability that A is finally displayed) × (Probability that cut-in notice effect is executed in super reach) + (Item image A in the third display mode is final when cut-in notice effect is not executed in super reach) Probability displayed in) × (Probability that the cut-in notice effect is not executed in Super Reach)}. When 42% of the set value 1 is used as the probability that the cut-in notice effect is executed in the super reach, the cut-in notice effect when the final display mode of the item image A is the third display mode in the super reach. The reliability is (50% × 42%) / {(50% × 42%) + (10% × 58%)} = about 78%.

The final display mode of the item image A becomes the second display mode (level 2) when the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP3” is determined. When the cut-in notice effect is executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a rate of 30% (Fig. 9-10 (A)), and when the cut-in notice effect is not executed, 20%. The item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined by the ratio (FIG. 9-10 (B)). Therefore, when 42% of the set value 1 is used as the probability that the cut-in notice effect is executed in the super reach, the cut-in notice when the final display mode of the item image A is the second display mode in the super reach. The reliability of the production is (30% × 42%) / {(30% × 42%) + (20% × 58%)} = about 52%.

The final display mode of the item image A becomes the first display mode (level 1) when the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP2” is determined. When the cut-in notice effect is executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is determined at a rate of 20% (Fig. 9-10 (A)), and when the cut-in notice effect is not executed, 60%. The item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is determined by the ratio (FIG. 9-10 (B)). Therefore, when 42% of the set value 1 is used as the probability that the cut-in notice effect is executed in the super reach, the cut-in notice when the final display mode of the item image A is the first display mode in the super reach. The reliability of the production is (20% × 42%) / {(20% × 42%) + (60% × 58%)} = about 19%.

(Reliability of Suggestion of Button Notice Effect by Display Mode of Item Image C) According to FIGS. 9-10 (E) and 9-10 (F), the final display mode of the item image C is the third display. The mode (level 3) is when the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP4” or “IGEGP5” is determined. When the button notice effect is executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" or "IGEGP5" is determined at a rate of 70% in total (FIG. 9-10 (E)), and when the button notice effect is not executed, The item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined at a rate of 5% (FIG. 9-10 (F)). The reliability of the button notice effect when the final display mode of the item image C in the super reach is the third display mode is, for example, (the item of the third display mode when the button notice effect is executed in the super reach). Probability that image C is finally displayed) × (Probability that button notice effect is executed in super reach) / {Item image C in the third display mode is finally displayed when button notice effect is executed in super reach. (Probability of being displayed in) × (Probability that the button notice effect is executed in Super Reach) + (Probability that the item image C in the third display mode is finally displayed when the button notice effect is not executed in Super Reach) It is calculated by × (probability that the button notice effect is not executed in Super Reach)}. When 19% of the set value 1 is used as the probability that the button notice effect is executed in the super reach, the reliability of the button notice effect when the final display mode of the item image C in the super reach is the third display mode. Is (70% × 19%) / {(70% × 19%) + (5% × 81%)} = about 77%.

The final display mode of the item image C becomes the second display mode (level 2) when the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP3” is determined. When the button notice effect is executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a rate of 15% (Fig. 9-10 (E)), and when the button notice effect is not executed, the item image effect is determined at a rate of 10%. The item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP3” is determined (FIG. 9-10 (F)). Therefore, when 19% of the set value 1 is used as the probability that the button notice effect is executed in the super reach, the button notice effect when the final display mode of the item image C in the super reach is the second display mode. The reliability is (15% × 19%) / {(15% × 19%) + (10% × 81%)} = about 26%.

The final display mode of the item image C becomes the first display mode (level 1) when the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is determined. When the button notice effect is executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is determined at a rate of 10% (Fig. 9-10 (E)), and when the button notice effect is not executed, the item image effect is determined at a rate of 65%. The item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP2” is determined (FIG. 9-10 (F)). Therefore, when 19% of the set value 1 is used as the probability that the button notice effect is executed in the super reach, the button notice effect when the final display mode of the item image C in the super reach is the first display mode. The reliability is (10% × 19%) / {(10% × 19%) + (65% × 81%)} = about 3.5%.

FIG. 9-11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating various timings. Specifically, FIG. 9-11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display timing of various item images, the execution timing of various notice effects, and the like in the variable display that becomes super reach.

In FIG. 9-11, T0 is the start timing during the variable display. T1 is the timing to develop into super reach.

T2 is the timing at which the item image A (see FIG. 9-9 (A)) of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed when the item image effect A is executed. When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is any of "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5", the item image A is displayed in the first display mode (level 1) in the T2.

T3 is the timing at which the item image B (see FIG. 9-9 (D)) of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed when the item image effect B is executed. When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is any of "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5", the item image B is displayed in the first display mode (level 1) in the T3.

T4 is the timing at which the item image C (see FIG. 9-9 (G)) of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed when the item image effect C is executed. When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is any of "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5", the item image C is displayed in the first display mode (level 1) in the T4.

T5 is the timing at which the item image D (see FIG. 9-9 (J)) of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed when the item image effect D is executed. When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is any of "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5", the item image D is displayed in the first display mode (level 1) in the T5.

T6 is the timing at which the item image A (see FIG. 9-9 (B)) of the second display mode (level 2) is displayed when the item image effect A is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP3" or "IGEGP4", the display mode of the item image effect A is the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode in the T6. It changes to (level 2). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP2" or "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect A does not change in the T6 (the first display mode (level 1)). Will remain).

T7 is the timing at which the item image B (see FIG. 9-9 (E)) of the second display mode (level 2) is displayed when the item image effect B is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP3" or "IGEGP4", the display mode of the item image effect B in the T7 is the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode. It changes to (level 2). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP2" or "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect B does not change in the T7 (the first display mode (level 1)). Will remain).

T8 is the timing at which the item image C (see FIG. 9-9 (H)) of the second display mode (level 2) is displayed when the item image effect C is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP3" or "IGEGP4", the display mode of the item image effect C in the T8 is the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode. It changes to (level 2). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP2" or "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect C does not change in the T8 (the first display mode (level 1)). Will remain).

T9 is a timing at which the item image D (see FIG. 9-9 (K)) of the second display mode (level 2) is displayed when the item image effect D is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP3" or "IGEGP4", the display mode of the item image effect D in the T9 is from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode. It changes to (level 2). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP2" or "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect D does not change in the T8 (the first display mode (level 1)). Will remain).

T10 is the timing at which the item image A (see FIG. 9-9 (C)) of the third display mode (level 3) is displayed when the item image effect A is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP4", the display mode of the item image effect A in the T10 is from the second display mode (level 2) to the third display mode (level 3). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect A is changed from the first display mode (level 1) to the third display mode (level) in the T10. It changes to 3). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP2", the display mode of the item image effect A does not change in the T10 (the first display mode (level 1) remains). .. Further, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP3", the display mode of the item image effect A does not change in the T10 (the second display mode (level 2) remains). ..

T11 is a timing at which the item image B (see FIG. 9-9 (F)) of the third display mode (level 3) is displayed when the item image effect B is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP4", the display mode of the item image effect B in the T11 is from the second display mode (level 2) to the third display mode (level 3). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect B in the T11 is changed from the first display mode (level 1) to the third display mode (level). It changes to 3). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP2", the display mode of the item image effect B does not change in the T11 (the first display mode (level 1) remains). .. Further, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP3", the display mode of the item image effect B does not change in the T11 (the second display mode (level 2) remains). ..

T12 is the timing at which the item image C (see FIG. 9-9 (I)) of the third display mode (level 3) is displayed when the item image effect C is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP4", the display mode of the item image effect C in the T12 is changed from the second display mode (level 2) to the third display mode (level 3). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect C in the T12 is changed from the first display mode (level 1) to the third display mode (level). It changes to 3). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP2", the display mode of the item image effect C does not change in the T12 (the first display mode (level 1) remains). .. Further, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP3", the display mode of the item image effect C does not change in the T12 (the second display mode (level 2) remains). ..

T13 is a timing at which the item image D (see FIG. 9-9 (L)) of the third display mode (level 3) is displayed when the item image effect D is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP4", the display mode of the item image effect D in the T13 is from the second display mode (level 2) to the third display mode (level 3). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect D in the T13 is changed from the first display mode (level 1) to the third display mode (level). It changes to 3). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP2", the display mode of the item image effect D does not change in the T13 (the first display mode (level 1) remains). .. Further, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP3", the display mode of the item image effect D does not change in the T13 (the second display mode (level 2) remains). ..

T14 is an erasure timing (timing used as an item) of the item image A. That is, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP2", the item image A of the first display mode (level 1) being displayed is deleted, and the item image effect execution of the item image effect A is executed. When the aspect pattern is "IGEGP3", the item image A of the second display mode (level 2) being displayed is deleted, and the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP4" or "IGEGP5". If there is, the item image A of the third display mode (level 3) being displayed is deleted.

Further, T14 is also a timing to start the execution of the fanning effect for inciting whether to execute the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2). T15 is the timing at which the execution of the above-mentioned fanning effect is finished. That is, T14 to T15 are execution periods of the above-mentioned fanning effect.

Further, T15 is also a timing to start execution of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2). T16 is a timing for ending the execution of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2). That is, T15 to T16 are execution periods of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2).

T17 is the deletion timing of the item image B. That is, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP2", the item image B of the first display mode (level 1) being displayed is deleted, and the item image effect execution of the item image effect B is executed. When the aspect pattern is "IGEGP3", the item image B of the second display mode (level 2) being displayed is deleted, and the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP4" or "IGEGP5". If there is, the item image B of the third display mode (level 3) being displayed is deleted.

In addition, T17 is also a timing to start the execution of the fanning effect that fuels whether to execute the group notice effect (YEP-B). T18 is the timing at which the execution of the above-mentioned fanning effect is finished. That is, T17 to T18 are execution periods of the above-mentioned fanning effect.

Further, T18 is also a timing to start execution of the group notice effect (YEP-B). T19 is the timing to end the execution of the group notice effect (YEP-B). That is, T18 to T19 are execution periods of the group notice effect (YEP-B).

T20 is the deletion timing of the item image C. That is, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP2", the item image C of the first display mode (level 1) being displayed is deleted, and the item image effect execution of the item image effect C is executed. When the aspect pattern is "IGEGP3", the item image C of the second display mode (level 2) being displayed is deleted, and the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP4" or "IGEGP5". If there is, the item image C of the third display mode (level 3) being displayed is deleted.

Further, T20 is also a timing to start the execution of the fanning effect for inciting whether to execute the button notice effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2). T21 is the timing at which the execution of the above-mentioned fanning effect is finished. That is, T20 to T21 are execution periods of the above-mentioned fanning effect.

Further, T21 is also a timing for starting the execution of the button notice effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2). T22 is a timing at which the execution of the button notice effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2) is finished. That is, T21 to T22 are execution periods of the button notice effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2).

T23 is the deletion timing of the item image D. That is, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP2", the item image D of the first display mode (level 1) being displayed is deleted, and the item image effect execution of the item image effect D is executed. When the aspect pattern is "IGEGP3", the item image D of the second display mode (level 2) being displayed is deleted, and the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP4" or "IGEGP5". If there is, the item image D of the third display mode (level 3) being displayed is deleted.

In addition, T23 is also a timing to start the execution of the fanning effect that fuels whether to execute the character advance notice effect (YEP-D). T24 is a timing at which the execution of the above-mentioned fanning effect is finished. That is, T23 to T24 are execution periods of the above-mentioned fanning effect.

Further, T24 is also a timing for starting the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D). T25 is the timing at which the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is finished. That is, T24 to T25 are execution periods of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D).

9-12 and 9-13 are specific examples of various timings. In FIG. 9-12 (A), only the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1) is executed as the advance notice effect, and only the item image effect A (IGEP-A) is executed as the item image effect. When executed in "IGEGP4" (that is, when item image effect B (IGEP-B), item image effect C (IGEP-C) and item image effect D (IGEP-D) are executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" It is explanatory drawing explaining the display timing of the item image A, the execution timing of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), etc. in (in a case).

In FIG. 9-12 (A), T2 to T6 are periods during which the item image A of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed. T6 to T10 are periods during which the item image A of the second display mode (level 2) is displayed. T10 to T14 are periods during which the item image A of the third display mode (level 3) is displayed. T14 to T15 are execution periods of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the cut-in notice effect. T15 to T16 are execution periods of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), that is, a period during which the weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI (see FIG. 9-5 (A)) is displayed.

In FIG. 9-12 (B), nothing is executed as the advance notice effect, and the item image effect A (IGEP-A), the item image effect C (IGEP-C), and the item image effect D (IGEP) are used as the item image effect. Item image A, in the case where each of −D) is executed by the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP2” (when the item image effect B (IGEP-B) is the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP1”), It is explanatory drawing explaining the display timing of the item image C, the item image D, and the like.

In FIG. 9-12 (B), T2 to T14 are periods during which the item image A of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed. T14 to T15 are execution periods of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the cut-in notice effect. It should be noted that the cut-in notice effect is not executed after the fanning effect. T4 to T20 are periods during which the item image C of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed. T20 to T21 are execution periods of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the button notice effect. It should be noted that the button notice effect is not executed after the fanning effect. T5 to T23 are periods during which the item image D of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed. T23 to T24 are execution periods of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the character advance notice effect. It should be noted that the character advance notice effect is not executed after the fanning effect.

In FIG. 9-13 (A), a cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), a group notice effect (YEP-B), and a button notice effect (YEP-C1) are executed as the advance notice effects, and the item image effect is an item. Each of the image effect A (IGEP-A) and the item image effect B (IGEP-B) is executed by the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3", and the item image effect C (IGEP-C) is the item image effect execution mode pattern. Display of item image A, item image B, item image C, and item image D when the item image effect D (IGEP-D) is executed by the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2". It is explanatory drawing explaining the execution timing of the timing, the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), the group notice effect (YEP-B), the button notice effect (YEP-C1), and the like.

In FIG. 9-13 (A), T14 to T15 are execution periods of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the cut-in notice effect. The item image A is erased in T14, but the display mode of the item image A immediately before being erased is the second display mode (level 2). T15 to T16 are execution periods of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), that is, a period during which the weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI (see FIG. 9-5 (A)) is displayed. T17 to T18 are execution periods of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the group notice effect. The item image B is erased at T17, but the display mode of the item image B immediately before being erased is the second display mode (level 2). T18 to T19 are execution periods of the group notice effect (YEP-B), that is, a period during which the group image 027SHYKE-GN (see FIG. 9-5 (C)) is displayed. T20 to T21 are execution periods of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the button notice effect. The item image C is erased at T20, but the display mode of the item image C immediately before being erased is the third display mode (level 3). In T21 to T22, the execution period of the button advance notice effect (YEP-C1), that is, the button image 027SHYKE-BU (see FIG. 9-6 (A)) is displayed (push button while the button image 027SHYKE-BU is displayed). When 31B is operated, it is a period in which a weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI (see FIG. 9-6 (B) is displayed) instead of the button image 027SHYKE-BU). T23 to T24 are execution periods of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the character advance notice effect. The item image D is erased in T23, but the display mode of the item image D immediately before being erased is the first display mode (level 1). It should be noted that the character advance notice effect is not executed after the fanning effect.

In FIG. 9-13 (B), the button notice effect (YEP-C2) and the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) are executed as the advance notice effects, and only the item image effect C (IGEP-C) is executed as the item image effect. Is executed in the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" (that is, when item image effect A (IGEP-A), item image effect B (IGEP-B) and item image effect D (IGEP-D) are item images. It is explanatory drawing explaining the display timing of the item image C, the execution timing of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D), etc. in the effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1").

In FIG. 9-13 (B), T4 to T12 are periods during which the item image C of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed. T12 to T20 are periods during which the item image C of the third display mode (level 3) is displayed. T20 to T21 are execution periods of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the button notice effect. In T21 to T22, the execution period of the button notice effect (YEP-C2), that is, the button image 027SHYKE-BU (see FIG. 9-6 (C)) is displayed (push button while the button image 027SHYKE-BU is displayed). When 31B is operated, it is a period in which the strong cut-in image 027SHYKE-KCI (see FIG. 9-6 (D) is displayed) instead of the button image 027SHYKE-BU). T24 to T25 are execution periods of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D), that is, periods during which the movable body 027SH32 is operated (see FIGS. 9-6 (E) to 9-6 (G)). In the example of FIG. 9-13 (B), there is no display of the item image D suggesting whether or not the character advance notice effect is executed, and there is no execution of the fanning effect to incite whether or not the character advance notice effect is executed. An object notice effect (YEP-D) is being executed. Specifically, when the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" is determined when the character advance notice effect is executed (see FIG. 9-10 (G)), it is determined whether the character advance notice effect is executed. Neither the display of the suggesting item image D nor the execution of the fanning effect for inciting whether to execute the character advance notice effect is executed, and the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed.

9-14 and 9-15 show the effect determination process (effect determination process for determining the advance notice effect, item image effect, etc.) executed in the variable display start setting process of S171 in the effect control process process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example. The flowchart of FIG. 9-15 is a continuation of the flowchart of FIG. 9-14.

In the effect determination process shown in FIGS. 9-14, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect based on the fluctuation pattern (step 027SHS100). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), if the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach (either fluctuation pattern # 13 or # 14), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution is performed at a rate of 40%. However, if the fluctuation pattern is a super reach jackpot (either fluctuation pattern # 17 or # 18), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 50%, and the fluctuation pattern is other than the above (variation patterns # 10, # 11, # 12). , # 15, # 16), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 0%.

Following step 027SHS100, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the cut-in notice effect is determined to be executed (step 027SHS101). If it is determined that the cut-in notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS101; YES), the process proceeds to step 027SHS102. If it is not determined that the cut-in notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS101; NO), the process proceeds to step 027SHS105.

Following step 027SHS101 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of cut-in advance notice effect (that is, the advance notice effect pattern) based on the fluctuation pattern (step 027SHS102). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), if the fluctuation pattern is out of the super reach, the effect control CPU 120 determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" at 80%, and the advance notice effect pattern "YEP". -A2 "is determined by 20%. Further, if the fluctuation pattern is a super reach jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" at 20% and determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" at 80%.

Following step 027SHS102, the effect control CPU 120 sets the advance notice effect pattern (notice effect pattern "YEP-A1 or advance notice effect pattern" YEP-A2 ") of the cut-in advance notice effect determined in step 027SHS102 (step 027SHS103). ).

Following step 027SHS103, the effect control CPU 120 determines an execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect A (IGEP-A) as a case of executing the cut-in notice effect (step 027SHS104). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (A), the effect control CPU 120 has 0% of the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1", 20% of the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2", and the item image effect execution. The aspect pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a ratio of 30%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined at a ratio of 50%, and the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" is determined at a ratio of 0%.

Following step 027SHS101 (NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect A (IGEP-A) as a case where the cut-in notice effect is not executed (step). 027SHS105). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (B), the effect control CPU 120 has 10% of the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP1”, 60% of the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP2”, and the item image effect execution. The aspect pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a ratio of 20%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined at a ratio of 10%, and the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" is determined at a ratio of 0%.

Following step 027SHS104 or step 027SHS105, the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A (IGEP-A) determined in step 027SHS104 or step 027SHS105 (step 027SHS106).

Following step 027SHS106, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the group notice effect based on the fluctuation pattern (step 027SHS110). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (C), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute if the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach at a rate of 20%, and executes if the fluctuation pattern is a super reach jackpot. Yes is determined at a rate of 50%, and if the fluctuation pattern is other than the above, execution Yes is determined at a rate of 0%.

Following step 027SHS110, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the group advance notice effect is determined to be executed (step 027SHS111). If it is determined that the group notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS111; YES), the process proceeds to step 027SHS113. If it is not determined that the cut-in notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS111; NO), the process proceeds to step 027SHS115.

Following step 027SHS111, the effect control CPU 120 sets the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-B" for the group advance notice effect (step 027SHS113).

Following step 027SHS113, the effect control CPU 120 determines an execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect B (IGEP-B) as a case of executing the group notice effect (step 027SHS114). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (C), the effect control CPU 120 has 0% of the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1", 20% of the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2", and the item image effect execution. The aspect pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a ratio of 30%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined at a ratio of 45%, and the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" is determined at a ratio of 5%.

Following step 027SHS111 (NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect B (IGEP-B) as a case where the group notice effect is not executed (step 027SHS115). ). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (D), the effect control CPU 120 has 10% of the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1", 60% of the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2", and the item image effect execution. The aspect pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a ratio of 20%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined at a ratio of 10%, and the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" is determined at a ratio of 0%.

Following step 027SHS114 or step 027SHS115, the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B (IGEP-B) determined in step 027SHS114 or step 027SHS115 (step 027SHS116).

Following step 027SHS116, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the button notice effect based on the fluctuation pattern (step 027SHS120). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (D), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute if the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach at a rate of 10%, and executes if the fluctuation pattern is a super reach jackpot. Yes is determined at a rate of 50%, and if the fluctuation pattern is other than the above, execution Yes is determined at a rate of 0%.

Following step 027SHS120, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the button advance notice effect is determined to be executed (step 027SHS121). If it is determined that the button notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS121; YES), the process proceeds to step 027SHS122. If it is not determined that the button notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS121; NO), the process proceeds to step 027SHS125.

Following step 027SHS121 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of button advance notice effect (that is, the advance notice effect pattern) based on the fluctuation pattern (step 027SHS122). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (E), the effect control CPU 120 determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" at 90% if the fluctuation pattern is out of the super reach, and the advance notice effect pattern "YEP". -C2 "is determined by 10%. Further, if the fluctuation pattern is a super reach jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" at 10% and determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-C2" at 90%.

Following step 027SHS122, the effect control CPU 120 sets the advance notice effect pattern (notice effect pattern "YEP-C1 or advance notice effect pattern" YEP-C2 ") of the button advance notice effect determined in step 027SHS122 (step 027SHS123). ..

Following step 027SHS123, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect C (IGEP-C) as a case of executing the button notice effect (step 027SHS124). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (E), the effect control CPU 120 has 5% of the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP1”, 10% of the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP2”, and the item image effect execution. The aspect pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a ratio of 15%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined at a ratio of 60%, and the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" is determined at a ratio of 10%.

Following step 027SHS121 (NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect C (IGEP-C) as a case where the button advance notice effect is not executed (step 027SHS125). ). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (F), the effect control CPU 120 has 20% of the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP1”, 65% of the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP2”, and the item image effect execution. The aspect pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a ratio of 10%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined at a ratio of 5%, and the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" is determined at a ratio of 0%.

Following step 027SHS124 or step 027SHS125, the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C (IGEP-C) determined in step 027SHS124 or step 027SHS125 (step 027SHS126).

Following step 027SHS126, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the character advance notice effect based on the fluctuation pattern (step 027SHS130). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (F), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute if the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach at a rate of 5%, and executes if the fluctuation pattern is a super reach jackpot. Yes is determined at a rate of 75%, and if the fluctuation pattern is other than the above, execution Yes is determined at a rate of 0%.

Following step 027SHS130, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined that the character advance notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS131). If it is determined that the character advance notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS131; YES), the process proceeds to step 027SHS133. If it is not determined that the character advance notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS131; NO), the process proceeds to step 027SHS135.

Following step 027SHS131, the effect control CPU 120 sets the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-D" of the accessory advance notice effect (step 027SHS133).

Following step 027SHS133, the effect control CPU 120 determines an execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect D (IGEP-D) as a case of executing the character advance notice effect (step 027SHS134). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (G), the effect control CPU 120 has 10% of the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP1”, 5% of the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP2”, and the item image effect execution. The aspect pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a ratio of 15%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined at a ratio of 60%, and the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" is determined at a ratio of 10%.

Following step 027SHS131 (NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect D (IGEP-D) as a case where the character advance notice effect is not executed (step). 027SHS135). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (H), the effect control CPU 120 has 20% of the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP1”, 74% of the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP2”, and the item image effect execution. The aspect pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a ratio of 4%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined at a ratio of 2%, and the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" is determined at a ratio of 0%.

Following step 027SHS134 or step 027SHS135, the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B (IGEP-D) determined in step 027SHS134 or step 027SHS135 (step 027SHS136). Then, this flowchart ends.

9-16 to 9-20 are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation related to the feature unit 027SH. Specifically, FIGS. 9-16 to 9-20 show the main scenes in the example shown in FIG. 9-12 (A) as an example, and FIG. 9-16 (A) → FIG. 9-16 (B) → Fig. 9-16 (C) → Fig. 9-17 (A) → Fig. 9-17 (B) → Fig. 9-17 (C) → Fig. 9-18 (A) → Fig. 9- 18 (B) → FIG. 9-18 (C) → FIG. 9-19 (A) → FIG. 9-19 (B) → FIG. 9-19 (C) → FIG. 9-20 (A) → FIG. 9-20 ( B) → Transition in the order of FIG. 9-20 (C).

FIG. 9-16 (A) is a scene of reaching in the variable display. FIG. 9-16 (B) is a scene developed into super reach (scene of T1 in FIG. 9-11). FIG. 9-16 (C) is a scene at the beginning of the super reach effect (a scene immediately after T1 in FIG. 9-11).

9-17 (A) shows a scene in which the item image display suggestion effect using the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI suggesting whether the item image A is displayed is performed (FIGS. 9-11 and 9). The scene immediately before T2 in -12 (A)). That is, the effect control CPU 120 executes the item image display suggestion effect using the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI that suggests whether the item image A is displayed immediately before the display timing (T2) of the item image A. To do. The effect control CPU 120 also executes an item image display suggestion effect that suggests whether each item image is displayed immediately before the display timing of another item image such as the item image B.

9-17 (B) shows a scene (FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12) in which the execution of the item image effect A is started (that is, the display of the item image 027SHIGALV1 in the first display mode (level 1) is started). (A) T2 scene).

Regarding the relationship between the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI and the item image A that suggests whether the item image A is displayed, the item image A is displayed when the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI is displayed. In some cases, the item image A may not be displayed. Further, when the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI is displayed, the item image A may always be displayed. Further, the item image A may be displayed when the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI is not displayed. Further, the item image A may be displayed more easily when the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI is displayed than when the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI is not displayed. In addition, there are a plurality of types of item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI, and the ratio of whether or not item image A is displayed depends on which type of item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI is displayed. It may be different. Item image display suggestion display suggesting whether item image B is displayed The relationship between item image B-SHI and item image B, item image display suggestion display suggesting whether item image C is displayed 027SHIGC-SHI and item image C The same applies to the relationship between the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGD-SHI and the item image D, which suggests whether the item image D is displayed.

FIG. 9-17 (C) shows a scene in which the item image change suggestion effect using the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN suggesting whether the display mode of the item image A changes is performed (FIGS. 9-11 and FIG. 9C). FIG. 9-12 (A), a scene immediately before T6). That is, the effect control CPU 120 uses the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN to suggest whether the display mode of the item image A changes immediately before the change timing (T6) of the item image A. To execute. The effect control CPU 120 also executes an item image change suggestion effect that suggests whether the display mode of each item image changes immediately before the change timing of another item image such as the item image B.

FIG. 9-18 (A) is a scene in which the item image effect A is changed to the second display mode (level 2) (the scene of T6 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12 (A)).

Regarding the relationship between the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN and the item image A, which suggests whether the display mode of the item image A changes, when the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN is displayed, the item image A There may be a case where the display mode changes and a case where the display mode of the item image A does not change. Further, when the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN is displayed, the display mode of the item image A may be changed at any time. Further, the display mode of the item image A may change when the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN is not displayed. Further, the display mode of the item image A may be changed more easily when the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN is displayed than when the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN is not displayed. Further, there are a plurality of types of the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN, and whether or not the display mode of the item image A changes depending on which type of the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN is displayed. The proportions may be different. Item image change suggestion display 027SHIGC-HEN suggesting whether the display mode of the item image B changes, the relationship between the item image B and the item image B, and the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGC-HEN suggesting whether the display mode of the item image C changes. The same applies to the relationship between the item image C and the item image C, and the relationship between the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGD-HEN and the item image D, which suggests whether the display mode of the item image D changes.

FIG. 9-18 (B) shows an item image change suggestion display using 027SHIGA-HEN, which suggests whether the display mode of the item image A changes, as in the scene of FIG. 9-17 (C). Is the scene (the scene immediately before T10 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12 (A)). 9-18 (C) is a scene (the scene of T10 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12 (A)) in which the item image effect A is changed to the third display mode (level 3).

FIG. 9-19 (A) shows that the fanning effect for inciting whether to execute the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2), which is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image A, is executed (started). This is a scene in which the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is displayed (the scene immediately before T14 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12 (A)). That is, the effect control CPU 120 displays the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI immediately before the execution start timing (T14) of the fanning effect that fuels whether to execute the cut-in notice effect. It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 also indicates that each of the fanning effects is executed (started) immediately before the execution start timing of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute another notice effect such as the group notice effect. Display the start display of the fanning effect.

9-19 (B) to 9-20 (B) show a scene (FIG. 9) in which a fanning effect 027SHIGA-AO is performed to encourage whether to execute a cut-in notice effect, which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image A (FIG. 9). 9-11 and T14 to T15 in FIG. 9-12 (A)). In the example of FIGS. 9-19 (B) to 9-20 (B), the countdown fanning display 027SHIGA-AO that counts down to the execution start timing (T14) of the cut-in notice effect is performed. That is, the effect control CPU 120 executes a fanning effect for inciting whether to execute the cut-in notice effect immediately before the execution start timing (T14) of the cut-in notice effect. It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 also executes a fanning effect that encourages whether to execute each advance notice effect immediately before the execution start timing of other advance notice effects such as the group advance notice effect.

FIG. 9-20 (C) shows a scene in which the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image A, is performed, that is, a scene in which the weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI is displayed. (Scene of T15 to T16 of FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12 (A)).

In addition, there are a fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI indicating that a fanning effect is executed to indicate whether to execute a cut-in notice effect, which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image A, and a notice effect corresponding to the item image A. Regarding the relationship with the fanning effect that determines whether to execute the cut-in notice effect, even if the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is displayed, the fanning effect may be executed or the fanning effect may not be executed. Good. Further, when the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is displayed, the fanning effect may always be executed. Further, the fanning effect may be executed when the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is not displayed. In addition, it may be easier to execute the fanning effect when the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is displayed than when the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is not displayed. In addition, there are a plurality of types of the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI, and the ratio of whether or not to execute the fanning effect is different depending on which type of fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is displayed. May be good. The fanning effect start display 027SHIGB-KAI indicating that the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the group notice effect that is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image B, and the group notice effect that is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image B The relationship with the fanning effect that incites whether to execute, the button that is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image C. The relationship with the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the button advancement effect that corresponds to the image C, and the instigation effect that incites whether to execute the character advance notice effect that corresponds to the item image D is executed. The same applies to the relationship between the fanning effect start display 027SHIGD-KAI indicating that the item image D and the fanning effect for inciting whether to execute the character advance notice effect which is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image D.

In addition, regarding the relationship between the cut-in notice effect, which is the notice effect corresponding to the item image A, and the cut-in notice effect, which is the notice effect corresponding to the item image A, the fan effect was executed. In some cases, the cut-in notice effect may be executed and the cut-in notice effect may not be executed (see FIG. 9-12 (B)). Further, the cut-in notice effect may be executed whenever the fanning effect is executed. In addition, the cut-in notice effect may be executed when the fanning effect is not executed. In addition, it may be easier to execute the cut-in notice effect when the fanning effect is executed than when the fanning effect is not executed. In addition, there are a plurality of types of fanning effects, and the ratio of whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect may be different depending on which type of fanning effect is executed. The relationship between the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the group notice effect that corresponds to the item image B and the group notice effect that corresponds to the item image B, and the notice effect that corresponds to the item image C. The relationship between the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the button advance notice effect and the button advance notice effect that is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image C, and whether to execute the character advance notice effect that is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image D. The same applies to the relationship between the fanning effect and the character advance notice effect, which is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image D.

9-21 to 9-30 are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation related to the feature unit 027SH. Specifically, FIGS. 9-21 to 9-30 show the main scenes in the example shown in FIG. 9-13 (A) as an example, and FIG. 9-21 (A) → FIG. 9-21 (B) → Fig. 9-21 (C) → Fig. 9-22 (A) → Fig. 9-22 (B) → Fig. 9-22 (C) → Fig. 9-23 (A) → Fig. 9- 23 (B)-> FIG. 9-23 (C)->, ..., FIG. 9-29 (A)-> FIG. 9-29 (B)-> FIG. 9-29 (C)-> FIG. 9-30 (A)-> FIG. The transition is in the order of -30 (B) → FIG. 9-30 (C).

FIG. 9-21 (A) shows a scene in which the item image display suggestion effect using the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI suggesting whether the item image A is displayed is being performed (FIG. 9-11, T2). The scene just before). FIG. 9-21 (B) shows a scene in which the execution of the item image effect A is started (that is, the display of the item image 027SHIGALV1 in the first display mode (level 1) is started) (the scene of T2 in FIG. 9-11). Is.

FIG. 9-21 (C) shows a scene in which the item image display suggestion effect using the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGB-SHI suggesting whether the item image B is displayed is being performed (FIG. 9-11, T3). The scene just before). FIG. 9-22 (A) shows a scene in which the execution of the item image effect B is started (that is, the display of the item image 027SHIGBLV1 in the first display mode (level 1) is started) (the scene of T3 in FIG. 9-11). Is.

FIG. 9-22 (B) shows a scene in which the item image display suggestion effect using the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGC-SHI suggesting whether the item image C is displayed is being performed (FIG. 9-11, T4). The scene just before). FIG. 9-22 (C) shows a scene in which the execution of the item image effect C is started (that is, the display of the item image 027SHIGCLV1 in the first display mode (level 1) is started) (the scene of T4 in FIG. 9-11). Is.

FIG. 9-23 (A) shows a scene in which the item image display suggestion effect using the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGD-SHI suggesting whether the item image D is displayed is being performed (FIG. 9-11, T5). The scene just before). 9-23 (B) shows a scene in which the execution of the item image effect D is started (that is, the display of the item image 027SHIGDLV1 in the first display mode (level 1) is started) (the scene of T5 in FIG. 9-11). Is.

FIG. 9-23 (C) shows a scene in which the item image change suggestion effect using the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN suggesting whether the display mode of the item image A changes is performed (FIG. 9-11). The scene just before T6). FIG. 9-24 (A) is a scene (the scene of T6 in FIG. 9-11) in which the item image effect A is changed to the second display mode (level 2).

FIG. 9-24 (B) shows a scene in which the item image change suggestion effect using the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGB-HEN suggesting whether the display mode of the item image B changes is performed (FIG. 9-11). The scene just before T7). FIG. 9-24 (C) is a scene (the scene of T7 in FIG. 9-11) in which the item image effect B is changed to the second display mode (level 2).

FIG. 9-25 (A) shows a scene in which the item image change suggestion effect using the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGC-HEN suggesting whether the display mode of the item image C changes is performed (FIG. 9-11). The scene just before T8). FIG. 9-25 (B) is a scene (the scene of T8 in FIG. 9-11) in which the item image effect C is changed to the second display mode (level 2).

FIG. 9-25 (C) shows a scene in which the item image change suggestion effect using the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGD-HEN suggesting whether the display mode of the item image D changes is performed (FIG. 9-11). The scene just before T9). 9-26 (A) is a scene (the scene of T9 in FIG. 9-11) in which the item image effect D did not change.

FIG. 9-26 (B) shows a scene in which the item image change suggestion effect using the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGD-HEN suggesting whether the display mode of the item image D changes is performed (FIG. 9-11). The scene just before T13). 9-26 (C) is a scene in which the item image effect D has not changed (the scene of T13 in FIG. 9-11). The item image effect C is changed to the third display mode (level 3) in the scene before the scene of 9-26 (C) (the scene of T12 in FIG. 9-11).

FIG. 9-27 (A) shows that the fanning effect for inciting whether to execute the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2), which is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image A, is executed (started). This is a scene in which the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is displayed (the scene immediately before T14 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13 (A)).

FIG. 9-27 (B) shows a scene (FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13) in which the fanning effect 027SHIGA-AO is performed to encourage whether to execute the cut-in notice effect which is the notice effect corresponding to the item image A. (A) scenes T14 to T15). FIG. 9-27 (C) shows a scene in which the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image A, is performed, that is, a scene in which the weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI is displayed. (Scene of T15 to T16 of FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13 (A)).

FIG. 9-28 (A) shows a fanning effect start display 027SHIGB indicating that a fanning effect that incites whether to execute the group notice effect (YEP-B) corresponding to the item image B is executed (started). -A scene displaying KAI (a scene immediately before T17 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13 (A)).

9-28 (B) shows a scene (FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13 (FIGS. 9-11) and 9-13 (FIG. 9-11) and FIG. A) scenes T17 to T18). 9-28 (C) shows a scene in which a group notice effect, which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image B, is performed, that is, a scene in which the group image 027SHYKE-GN is displayed (FIGS. 9-11 and 9). -13 (A), scenes T18 to T19).

FIG. 9-29 (A) shows that the fanning effect for inciting whether to execute the button notice effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2), which is the notice effect corresponding to the item image C, is executed (started). This is a scene in which the effect start display 027SHIGC-KAI is displayed (the scene immediately before T20 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13 (A)).

9-29 (B) shows a scene (FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13 (FIGS. 9-11) and 9-13 (FIG. 9-11) and FIG. A) scenes from T20 to T21). 9-29 (C) to 9-30 (A) show a scene in which the button notice effect (YEP-C1), which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image C, is performed, that is, the button image 027SHYKE-BU. It is a scene (the scenes of T21 to T22 of FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13 (A)) which are displayed and the weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI is displayed as an example after the operation of the push button 31B.

FIG. 9-30 (B) shows a fanning effect start display indicating that a fanning effect is executed (started) to indicate whether to execute the character advance notice effect (YEP-D), which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image D. This is a scene displaying 027SHIGD-KAI (a scene immediately before T23 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13 (A)).

FIG. 9-30 (C) shows a scene (FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13) in which a fanning effect 027SHIGD-AO is performed to incite whether or not to execute a character advance notice effect which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image D. (A) scenes T23 to T24). In addition, after the fanning effect, the character advance notice effect, which is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image D, is not performed (see FIG. 9-13 (A)).

In the examples of FIGS. 9-16 to 9-30, each item image display suggestion display (027SHIGA-SHI, 027SHIGB-SHI, 027SHIGC-SHI, 027SHIGD-SHI) that suggests the display of each item image is common. However, it may be different for each item image. In addition, although each of the fanning effects (027SHIGA-AO, 027SHIGB-AO, 027SHIGC-AO, 027SHIGD-AO) that fuels each notice production is common, it is different for each notice effect (that is, for each item image). May be good. The fanning effect start display (027SHIGA-KAI, 027SHIGB-KAI, 027SHIGC-KAI, 027SHIGD-KAI) indicating the start of each fanning effect corresponding to each notice effect is common, but any of the noticed effect is displayed. It may be different depending on whether it starts (that is, for each item image).

(Suggested setting value)
Subsequently, the suggestion of the set value (see FIGS. 9-2 (A) and 9-2) will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-31 and 9-32. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH suggests a set value currently set by using the item image effect (for example, using the item image). For example, as shown in FIGS. 9-31 (A) and 9-31 (B), the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH has a fourth display mode as the display mode of the item image D in the item image effect D (B). The display mode of level 4) may be provided to suggest the currently set value in relation to the display of the item image D of the fourth display mode.

(First example)
For example, as shown in FIG. 9-31 (C), when the item image D in the fourth display mode is displayed → the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed (the movable body 027SH32 is in operation). (Any result of hit or miss), it may be suggested that the currently set value is set high (for example, set value 4 or more).

(Second example)
For example, as shown in FIG. 9-31 (D), it is currently set when the item image D in the fourth display mode is displayed → the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed → off. It may be suggested that the set value is a high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more).

(Third example)
For example, as shown in FIG. 9-31 (E), when the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is not performed (the movable body 027SH32 is not operated). (Any result of hit or miss), it may be suggested that the currently set value is set high (for example, set value 4 or more).

(Fourth example)
For example, as shown in FIG. 9-31 (F), it is currently set when the item image D in the fourth display mode is displayed → the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is not executed → is out of order. It may be suggested that the set value is a high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more).

(Fifth example)
Further, although not shown, it is currently set when the item image D in the fourth display mode is displayed → off (regardless of whether or not the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed). It may be suggested that the set value is a high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more).

(Display timing of the fourth display mode (level 4))
In the first example (the same may apply to each of the second to fourth examples), the display timing of the item image D in the fourth display mode is not particularly limited (that is, it is displayed from the beginning). It may be displayed differently from other display modes), but as an example, the display period may be lengthened so as to be easily recognized by the player. Specifically, as shown as the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP6” in FIG. 9-32 (A), the item image D of the fourth display mode is displayed from the first (T5 in FIG. 9-11). You may. In FIG. 9-32 (A), the fourth display mode is generally gold to make the player recognize that the hit is fixed or rich, but the fourth display mode is out of alignment after the item image D in the fourth display mode is displayed. When the possibility of becoming non-zero (for example, in the case of the second example or the like), the fourth display mode may be a color or pattern different from gold.

(An example of the determination ratio of the first example)
In the case of the first example, as the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D (IGEP-D) in the case of executing the character advance notice effect (YEP-D), FIG. 9-10 ( Instead of the determination ratio shown in G), the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 9-32 (B) is used, and the item image effect D (IGEP-D) when the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is not executed is used. ), As the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern, the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 9-32 (C) may be used instead of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-10 (H). That is, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of step 027SHS134 of FIG. 9-15, the item image effect execution mode pattern is determined at the ratio shown in FIG. 9-32 (B), and the step of FIG. 9-15. In 027SHS135, the item image effect execution mode pattern may be determined at the ratio shown in FIG. 9-32 (C).

That is, there is no case where the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is not performed (see FIG. 9-32 (C)), but the item image in the fourth display mode. Display of D → Execution of character advance notice effect (YEP-D) may occur (movement of movable body 027SH32 is present) (see FIG. 9-32 (B)), and an item image of the fourth display mode. There is a setting difference in the transition from the display of D to the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) (see FIG. 9-32 (B)). In the example shown in FIG. 9-32 (B), the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" is determined at a rate of 1% when the current set value is any of the set values 1 to 3. If the current set value is any of the set values 4 to 6, it is determined at a rate of 15%.

According to the example shown in FIG. 9-32 (B), it is the case of the set value 1-3 that the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed. There are more cases where the set value is 4-6 than. That is, according to the example shown in FIG. 9-32 (B), the fourth setting is higher (for example, the set value is 4 or more) than the low setting (for example, the set value is 3 or less). The frequency of transition from the display of the item image D in the display mode to the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) increases. Therefore, the transition (or frequent transition) of the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is high with respect to the currently set value. It suggests that it is a setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more).

In the example shown in FIG. 9-32 (B), even if the super reach A (variation pattern # 13, # 17) is obtained, the super reach B (variation pattern # 14, # 18) is obtained. Even if there is, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" can be determined when the character effect is executed (if it is any of the set values 1 to 3, it is determined at a rate of 1%. (Although it is determined at a rate of 15% when any of the set values 4 to 6), the item image production execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" is performed only when the character effect is executed in the case of Super Reach B. (The item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" may not be determined when the character effect is executed in the case of Super Reach A). That is, in the case of Super Reach B, there is a setting difference in the transition from the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode to the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) (the operation of the movable body 027SH32 is present). On the other hand, in the case of Super Reach A, the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is possible (the movement of the movable body 027SH32 is present). May be set so that there is no difference in settings.

(An example of the determination ratio of the second example)
In the case of the second example, for example, the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is possible (the movement of the movable body 027SH32 is present) → the jackpot. There is no setting difference in, but there is a setting difference in the transition of the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) (with the operation of the movable body 027SH32) → off. There may be. For example, the determination ratio of the item image production execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" when the character effect is executed in the case of a super reach jackpot is set to be common to the set values 1 to 6 (for example, 20%), while the super reach is lost. In this case, the determination ratio of the item image production execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" when the character effect is executed may be different between the case of the set value 1 to 3 and the case of the set value 4 to 6 (for example). If it is any of the set values 1 to 3, it may be 1%, and if it is any of the set values 4 to 6, it may be 10%).

In the case of Super Reach B, the item image D in the 4th display mode is displayed → the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed (the movable body 027SH32 is operated) → the transition is made. While making the setting difference, in the case of Super Reach A, the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is possible (the movement of the movable body 027SH32 is present) → is off. There may be no setting difference in the transition of ,.

(An example of the determination ratio of the third example)
In the case of the third example, for example, there is no setting difference in the transition from the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode to the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D), but the fourth example. There may be a setting difference in the transition from the display of the item image D in the display mode to the non-execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D). For example, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" when the character effect is executed is set to be common to the set values 1 to 6 (for example, 10%), while the item image effect is not executed when the character effect is not executed. The determination ratio of the execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" may be different between the case of the set values 1 to 3 and the case of the set values 4 to 6 (for example, when any of the set values 1 to 3 is set, 0. If it is 5% or any of the set values 4 to 6, it may be 3%).

(An example of the determination ratio of the fourth example)
In the case of the fourth example, for example, there is no setting difference in the transition of the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → no execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) → big hit. There may be a setting difference in the transition of the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → no execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) → off. For example, the determination ratio of the item image production execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" when the character effect is not executed in the super reach jackpot (variation patterns # 17, # 18) is set to the same setting value 1 to 6 (for example, 5%). , When the item image production execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" is determined when the character effect is not executed in the out-of-super reach (variation patterns # 13 and # 14), the determination ratios are set values 1 to 3 and set values 4 to 6. (For example, 0.5% may be set when any of the set values 1 to 3 is set, and 3% may be set when any of the set values 4 to 6 is used).

(An example of the determination ratio of the fifth example)
In the case of the fifth example, the details are omitted, but for example, there is no setting difference in the transition from the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode to the jackpot, but the item image in the fourth display mode. There may be a setting difference in the transition of D display → off.

In the above description, an example suggesting that the currently set value is a high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more) has been described, but the target of the suggestion is not limited to the high setting. For example, the negation of the minimum setting (setting value 1) (setting value 2 or more) may be suggested, or each setting value of setting value 1 to setting value 6 may be suggested. That is, in the above, an example has been described in which the determination ratios of the item image effect execution mode patterns are divided into two, the set values 1 to 3 and the set values 4 to 6, and the determination ratios are different. The item image effect execution mode pattern may be determined differently by dividing into 6 and the item image effect execution mode pattern may be determined by dividing each of the set values 1 to 6 into 6 items. May be different.

(About the modified example of the game machine related to the feature part 027SH)
Subsequently, a modification of FIGS. 9-1 to 9-32 will be described.

(Modification example 1 of feature portion 027SH)
In the above, an example has been described in which the order of the display start timing of each item image and the order of the execution start timing of each notice effect corresponding to each item image match. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 and the like, the display start timing of the item images A to D is the display start timing of the item image A (T2) → the display start timing of the item image B (T3) → the item image. The display start timing of C (T4) → the display start timing of item image D (T5), and the execution start timing of each notice effect corresponding to item images A to D is the cut-in corresponding to item image A. Execution start timing of the advance notice effect (T15) → Execution start timing of the group advance notice effect corresponding to the item image B (T18) → Execution start timing of the button advance notice effect corresponding to the item image C (T21) → Correspond to the item image D The order is the execution start timing of the character notice effect, and the order of the display start timing of each item image and the order of the execution start timing of each notice effect corresponding to each item image match. ing. However, the order of the display start timing of each item image and the order of the execution start timing of each notice effect corresponding to each item image do not have to match. For example, the item image A → the item image B may be displayed in this order, and the group notice effect corresponding to the item image B → the cut-in notice effect corresponding to the item image A may be executed in this order. Further, when the item image A → the item image B are displayed in this order, the cut-in notice effect → the group notice effect may be executed in the order, or the group notice effect → the cut-in notice effect may be executed in the order. You may do so.

(Modification example 2 of feature portion 027SH)
In the above, an example in which the display start timing of each item image is different is described. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 and the like, the item image A is T1, the item image B is T2, the item image C is T3, and the item image D is T4. However, the display start timing of each item image does not have to be different individually. For example, two types of display start timings of the four types of item images A to D may be displayed at the same time, or three types of the four types of item images may be displayed at the same time. Alternatively, the display start timings of all the four types of item images may be simultaneous.

(Modification example 3 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, an example in which the change timing of each item image to the second display mode (level 2) is different is described. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 and the like, the item image A is T6, the item image B is T7, the item image C is T8, and the item image D is T9. However, the timing of changing each item image to the second display mode (level 2) does not have to be different individually. For example, the timing of changing to the second display mode (level 2) of two types of the four types of item images A to D may be simultaneous, or three types of the four types of item images. The timing of changing to the second display mode (level 2) may be the same, or the timing of changing all four types of item images to the second display mode (level 2) may be simultaneous. The same applies to the timing of change to the third display mode (level 3).

(Modification example 4 of feature portion 027SH)
In the example shown in FIGS. 9-11 and the like, the display mode at the start of displaying the item image A is always the first display mode (level 1), but the display mode at the time of display disclosure is the second display mode (level 1). 2) or the third display mode (level 3) may be used. The same applies to the item image B, the item image C, and the item image D. As described above, when the item image D may be in the fourth display mode (level 4), the display mode at the time of display disclosure may be the fourth display mode (level 4).

(Variation example 5 of feature portion 027SH)
In the above, an example in which the display mode of the item image does not change at the timing after any of the notice effects is executed (that is, at the change timing when the display mode of the item image changes, any of the notice effects is executed An example) that is earlier than the above was explained. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 9-11, none of the item images changes at the timing after the earliest executed cut-in notice effect is executed (after T15). However, the display mode of the item image may be changed at the timing after any of the advance notice effects is executed.

(Variation example 6 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, an example in which the item image is not newly displayed at the timing after one of the notice effects is executed (that is, the display start timing of the item image is earlier than the timing when any of the notice effects is executed. Example) was explained. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 9-11, no item image is newly displayed at the timing after the cut-in notice effect to be executed earliest is executed (after T15). However, the item image may be newly displayed at the timing after any of the advance notice effects is executed.

(Modification example 7 of feature portion 027SH)
In the above, an example in which the execution periods of a certain advance notice effect and another advance notice effect do not overlap has been described, but the execution periods of a certain advance notice effect and another advance notice effect may overlap. That is, when the execution start timing of a certain advance notice effect → the execution start timing of another advance notice effect → the execution end timing of another advance notice effect → the execution end timing of a certain advance notice effect, or the execution start timing of a certain advance notice effect → another The execution start timing of the notice effect → the execution end timing of a certain notice effect → the execution end timing of another notice effect may be set.

(Modification example 8 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, the item image and the notice effect are one-to-one, such as the item image A and the cut-in notice effect, the item image B and the group notice effect, the item image C and the button notice effect, and the item image D and the character notice effect. An example of correspondence was explained. That is, as shown in FIG. 9-11, it is the cut-in notice effect that can be executed based on the item image A being deleted (used as an item), and the item image B is deleted. It is a group notice effect that can be executed based on, and it is a button notice effect that can be executed based on the item image C being deleted, and it can be executed based on the item image D being deleted. Explained that it was a notice production of the character. However, the item image and the advance notice effect do not necessarily have to have a one-to-one correspondence.

For example, a plurality of notice effects (for example, cut-in notice effect, group notice effect) may be associated with a certain item image (for example, item image X). When the item image X is associated with the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect, only the cut-in notice effect is executed based on the deletion of the item image X, and the item image X is executed. In some cases, only the group notice effect is executed based on the fact that is deleted. It should be noted that the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect may be executed based on the erasure of the item image X.

Further, for example, one notice effect (for example, cut-in notice effect) may be associated with a plurality of item images (for example, item image X and item image Y). When the cut-in notice effect is associated with the item image X and the item image Y, the cut-in notice effect is executed based on the deletion of the item image X, and the item image Y is deleted. The cut-in notice effect may be executed based on the fact. In addition to the display mode of the item image when it is erased, the rate at which the advance notice effect is executed may be different depending on the type of the item image to be erased. In the above example, in addition to the display mode of the item image X and the item image Y when deleted, the cut-in notice effect is executed according to whether the item image X is deleted or the item image Y is deleted. You may make different proportions.

Further, for example, a plurality of notice effects (for example, cut-in notice effect, group notice effect) may be associated with a plurality of item images (for example, item image X and item image Y). When the item image X and the item image Y are associated with the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect, only the cut-in notice effect is executed based on the deletion of the item image X. , When only the group notice effect is executed based on the deletion of the item image X, when only the cut-in notice effect is executed based on the deletion of the item image Y, and when the item image Y is executed. In some cases, only the group notice effect is executed based on the fact that it is erased. When the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect are executed based on the erasure of the item image X, or the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect are executed based on the erasure of the item image Y. It may be executed. In addition to the display mode of the item image when it is erased, the ratio of the advance notice effect to be executed and the ratio of the type of the advance notice effect to be executed may be different depending on the type of the item image to be deleted. Good.

(Modification example 9 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above description, the item image can specify the notice effect having a corresponding relationship at the time of the start of display, but the item image may not be able to specify the notice effect having a corresponding relationship at the time of the start of display. For example, the item image A corresponding to the cut-in notice effect is displayed in a display mode (for example, plain) in which the corresponding notice effect cannot be specified at the display start timing, and the corresponding notice effect is displayed at the change timing. May be changed from an unspecified display mode (for example, plain) to a identifiable display mode (first display mode, second display mode, etc.) for the corresponding advance notice effect.

(Modification example 10 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, an example in which a plurality of item images of the same type are not displayed has been described, but a plurality of item images of the same type may be displayed. For example, when two item images A of the first display mode (level 1) are displayed side by side, or the item image A of the first display mode (level 1) and the item image A of the second display mode (level 2) are displayed side by side. And may be displayed side by side. When N items of a certain type are displayed, the advance notice effect corresponding to the item images is executed up to N times.

(Modification example 11 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, the display mode of the item image changes, but the type of the item image does not change. However, the type of the item image may also change. For example, the item image A of the first display mode (level 1) changes to the item image B of the first display mode (level 1), or the item image A of the first display mode (level 1) is the second. There may be a case where the item image B of the display mode (level 2) is changed. The display mode is demoted (level 3 → level 2) when the type is changed such that the item image A of the third display mode (level 3) changes to the item image B of the second display mode (level 2). There may be cases.

(Modification example 12 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, there are four types of notice effects, and there are four types of item images corresponding to the notice effects, but the item images and the notice effects do not have to be four types. For example, in relation to the above-described modification 8, the item image may be 2 types and the notice effect may be 5 types, the item image may be 5 types, and the notice effect may be 2 types. In addition, one type of item image and one type of notice effect may be used.

(Modification example 13 of feature unit 027SH)
In the above, an example has been described in which the timing of erasing the item image is the timing of executing the fanning effect for inciting the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image, but the timing of erasing the item image is not limited to this. For example, the timing for erasing the item image may be the timing at which the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image is executed. That is, the item image may be continuously displayed during the execution period of the fanning effect and deleted at the start of execution of the advance notice effect (at the end of the fanning effect). Specifically, in FIG. 9-11, the item image A is erased to T15 instead of T14, the item image B is erased to T18 instead of T17, and the item image C is erased to T21 instead of T20. The item image D may be deleted in T24 instead of T23.

(Modification example 14 of feature portion 027SH)
In the above, the item image A is erased at the start of the fanning effect (T14 in FIG. 9-11), and during the execution period of the fanning effect (T14 to T15 in FIG. 9-11) and during the cut-in notice effect (T14 in FIG. 9-11). An example that is not displayed in T15 to T16 of FIG. 9-11 (in the case of the above-mentioned modified example 13, it is erased at the start of the cut-in notice effect (T15), and is erased during the period of the cut-in notice effect (FIG. 9-11). An example) that is not displayed in T15 to T16) has been described. That is, an example has been described in which the item image A is erased by the start of the cut-in notice effect at the latest and is not displayed during the cut-in notice effect. However, the item image A may be displayed during the cut-in notice effect without being erased. That is, the item image A may not be erased even if it is used. The same applies to other item images (item image B, item image C, item image D).

(Variation example 15 of the feature portion 027SH)
In relation to the above-described modification 14, when the used item image A is not erased, it may be possible to recognize that the used item image A has been used. For example, if the display mode of the item image A immediately before starting the fanning effect for fanning the cut-in notice effect is the second display mode (level 2) (the first display mode (level 1) or the third display mode (level)). 3)), at the start of the fanning effect that fuels the cut-in notice effect, the second display mode (level 2) → the fanning effect execution mode (for example, the color is grayed down or monochrome, and the wording "fanning effect is in progress". , Etc.), and at the start of the cut-in notice effect, the fanning effect execution mode → the notice effect execution mode (for example, the color is grayed down or monochrome, and the wording “notice effect in progress” etc. is displayed). , At the end of the cut-in advance notice effect, the advance notice effect execution mode → the advance notice effect end mode (for example, the color may be grayed down or monochrome, and the word “finished” or the like may be displayed). That is, regarding the item image A, during the execution period (T14 to T15) of the fanning effect, it is set as the "fanning effect execution mode", and during the execution period of the cut-in notice effect (T15 to T16), it is set as the "notice effect execution mode" and cut. After the end of the in-notice effect (T16 ~), the "notice effect end mode" may be set. The same applies to other item images (item image B, item image C, item image D).

If the cut-in notice effect is not executed after the fanning effect, at the execution start timing of the cut-in notice effect, the fanning effect execution mode → the notice effect non-execution mode (for example, the color is grayed down or monochrome, and the wording "notice" A mode in which "directing non-execution" or the like is displayed) may be used. That is, with respect to the item image A, the "fanning effect execution mode" may be set during the execution period (T14 to T15) of the fanning effect, and the "notice effect non-execution mode" may be set after the end of the fanning effect (T15 to). The same applies to other item images (item image B, item image C, item image D).

The above-mentioned fanning effect execution mode may be common regardless of the type of the item image. For example, it may be plain, and the wording "in the process of fanning" or the like may be displayed. The advance notice effect execution mode, the advance notice effect end mode, and the advance notice effect non-execution mode may be common regardless of the type of the item image.

In addition, instead of the above, the fanning effect execution mode may be one according to the type of the item image. For example, the color may be grayed down or the wording "in the process of fanning" or the like may be displayed within a range in which a pattern (see FIG. 9-9) corresponding to the type of the item image can be recognized. The advance notice effect execution mode, the advance notice effect end mode, and the advance notice effect non-execution mode may be common regardless of the type of the item image.

(Modification example 16 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, an example of executing the notice effect after executing the fan effect (an example of executing the fan effect before executing the notice effect) has been described, but it is not necessary to execute the notice effect after executing the fan effect (notice effect). You don't have to perform the fanning effect before executing). That is, after the item image is used, the advance notice effect may be executed without executing the fanning effect.

(Modification example 17 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, the item image effect (display of the item image) and the notice effect are executed during the super reach effect, but the item image effect and the advance notice effect may be executed during another period. For example, the flow may be variable display start → item image A display start → reach → item image A deletion → cut-in notice effect execution, or variable display start → item image A display start → reach → super reach. → Delete item image A → Execute cut-in notice effect, or start variable display → Reach → Start display item image A → Delete item image A → Execute cut-in notice effect, The flow may be as follows: variable display start → reach → display start of item image A → development into super reach → deletion of item image A → execution of cut-in notice effect.

(Modification example 18 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, the item image effect (display of the item image) and the notice effect are executed during one variation, but the item image effect and the advance notice effect may be executed over a plurality of variations.

For example, it is necessary to display all the necessary item images (item images for which display is determined) in one fluctuation, and delete all the displayed item images in the other fluctuation after the next fluctuation. It is also possible to execute all the notice effects (notice effects for which execution is decided). For example, the item image A, the item image B, and the item image C are displayed on the first change → the item image A, during the change after some changes (for example, during any change from the second change to the fourth change). The flow is that the item image B and the item image C are all erased (each item image can be changed between the start of display and the deletion) and the necessary advance notice effect is executed.

Further, for example, all necessary item images (item images for which display presence is determined) are displayed during a certain fluctuation, and the displayed item images are sequentially deleted over a plurality of fluctuations to produce a necessary notice (a notice effect). The advance notice effect for which execution is determined) may be sequentially executed. For example, it is necessary to start displaying the item image A, the item image B, and the item image C in the first variation and delete the item image A in the first variation (the item image A can be changed between the start of display and the deletion). Execute notice effect (cut-in notice effect) → Delete item image B at the second change (item image B can be changed between display start and erase) and execute necessary notice effect (group notice effect) → 3 changes The flow of erasing the item image C in the eyes (the item image C can be changed between the start of display and erasing) and executing the necessary notice effect (button notice effect), and the item image A and item image B in the first variation. , Start displaying item image C → Erase item image A on the 2nd change (item image A can change between display start and erase) and execute the necessary notice effect (cut-in notice effect) → 3rd change Erase item image B (item image B can be changed between display start and erase) and execute necessary notice effect (group notice effect) → Delete item image C at the 4th change (item image C starts display ~ It is a flow of executing the necessary advance notice effect (button advance notice effect) (which can be changed during erasure).

Further, for example, the required item image (item image for which display presence is determined) is sequentially displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, and the displayed item is displayed during another fluctuation in which all the necessary item images have been displayed. You may delete all the images and execute all the necessary notice effects (notice effects for which execution is determined). For example, the item image A starts to be displayed on the first variation → the item image B starts to be displayed on the second variation → the item image C starts to be displayed on the third variation, and the item image A, the item image B, and the item appear on the third variation. The flow of erasing all image C (each item image can be changed between display start and erasure) and executing the necessary notice effect, or the item image A is displayed on the first change → the item image on the second change. Start displaying B → Start displaying item image C on the 3rd change → Delete all item image A, item image B, and item image C on the 4th change (each item image can change between display start and deletion) The flow is to execute the necessary notice production.

Further, for example, necessary item images (item images for which display presence is determined) are sequentially displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, and the displayed item images are sequentially deleted over a plurality of fluctuations to provide a necessary notice. The production (notice production for which execution is determined) may be sequentially executed. For example, the item image A is displayed on the first variation → the item image B is displayed on the second variation, and the item image A is deleted on the second variation (the item image A can be changed between the display start and the deletion). The necessary notice effect (cut-in notice effect) is executed, and the item image B is erased at the third variation (the item image B can be changed between the start of display and the deletion), and the necessary notice effect (group notice effect) is performed. The flow of execution, for example, the item image A starts to be displayed on the first variation → the item image B starts to be displayed on the second variation → the item image A is deleted on the third variation (the item image A is between the display start and the deletion). Perform the necessary notice effect (cut-in notice effect) (changeable) and delete the item image B at the 4th variation (item image B can be changed between display start and erase) and the necessary notice effect (group) It is a flow to execute the notice production).

(Modified example 19 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, the item image is determined in the variable display start setting process (step S171) (see FIGS. 7 and 9-14), but the item image is determined in the lookahead advance notice setting process (step S161). May be good. In the mode of determining the item image in the variable display start setting process (step S171), the item image is determined based on whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 9-10), but the look-ahead advance notice When the item image is determined in the setting process (step S161), the item image is based on the contents of the received symbol specification command (see FIG. 8-16) and variable category specification command (see FIG. 8-16). You may decide. It should be noted that a plurality of item images may be collectively determined in the look-ahead notice setting process at the time of one start winning, or one item image may be determined in the look-ahead notice setting process at the time of each start winning. .. That is, a plurality of item images may be associated with one variation, or one item image may be associated with each variation.

(Modification example 20 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, as an effect when the item image is used after the item image is displayed, an example of executing a notice effect corresponding to the type of the item image to be used has been described. However, the notice effect corresponding to the type of the item image to be used has been described. There may be a case where a different kind of advance notice effect is executed. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 9-11, it is the cut-in notice effect that can be executed based on the erasure of the item image A, but the group notice effect is based on the erasure of the item image A. May be executed. Further, as an example related to the modification 8, when a plurality of notice effects (for example, cut-in notice effect, group notice effect) are associated with a certain item image (for example, item image X). , A notice effect (for example, a character advance notice effect) different from the above-mentioned plurality of advance notice effects (for example, cut-in notice effect, group notice effect) may be executed based on the deletion of the item image X. You may. As a result, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest. In addition, in a mode in which a different type of advance notice effect from the advance notice effect corresponding to the type of item image to be used may be executed, a different type of advance notice effect from the advance notice effect corresponding to the type of item image to be used is executed. The jackpot expectation may be higher in the case than in the case of executing the advance notice effect corresponding to the type of the item image to be used.

(Modification example 21 of the feature portion 027SH)
Although the suggestion of the set value has been described with reference to FIGS. 9-31 and 9-32, the suggestion of the set value is not limited to this.

For example, in relation to the above-mentioned modification 1, the determination ratio of whether or not to match the order of the display start timing of each item image and the order of the execution start timing of each notice effect corresponding to each item image is set. A setting difference may be provided to suggest a set value in relation to whether the order of the display start timing of the item image and the order of the execution start timing of the advance notice effect match. As an example, the ratio of matching the order of the display start timing of the item image and the order of the execution start timing of the advance notice effect is set to 95% when the setting is low (for example, 3 or less), and is set to high (for example, 4). If it is (or more), it is set to 85%, and the high setting (for example, the setting value) is that the order of the display start timing of the item image and the order of the execution start timing of the advance notice effect do not match (or often do not match). It may be suggested that it is 4 or more). In other words, the frequency of breaking the above order rules (in principle, the order is the same) is higher in the high setting (5% in the low setting, 15% in the high setting), so the high setting is made due to the breaking of the law (frequency of breaking the law). It may be suggested.

Further, in relation to the above-mentioned modification 2, a setting difference is provided in the determination ratio of whether or not the display start timings of the plurality of item images are simultaneous, and it is related to whether the display start timings of the plurality of item images are simultaneous. However, the set value may be suggested. As an example, the ratio of displaying start timings of a plurality of item images at the same time is set to 5% when the setting is low (for example, 3 or less) and 15% when the setting is high (for example, 4 or more). , It may be suggested that the fact that the change timings of the plurality of item images match (or the frequency of matching is high) is a high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more). In other words, the frequency of breaking the above display start timing rule (the principle is not simultaneous) is higher in the high setting (5% in the low setting, 15% in the high setting), so it is higher due to the breaking of the law (frequency of breaking the rule). It may suggest a setting. Similarly, in relation to the above-mentioned modification 3, a setting difference is provided in the determination ratio of whether or not the change timings of the plurality of item images are simultaneous, and whether the change timings of the plurality of item images are simultaneous. It may be related and suggest a setting value.

Further, in relation to the above-described modification 4, a setting difference is provided in the determination ratio of the display mode at the time of display disclosure of the item image, and the set value is suggested in relation to the display mode at the time of display disclosure of the item image. May be good. As an example, the display mode at the start of displaying the item image is the first display mode (level 1) or the second display mode (level 2), and the ratio of the second display mode (level 2) is set low (for example,). If it is 3 or less), it is set to 3%, if it is set to a high setting (for example, 4 or more), it is set to 9%, and the display mode at the start of displaying the item image is the second display mode (level 2). It may be suggested that (or the frequency of the second display mode (level 2) is high) is a high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more). In other words, the frequency of breaking the law regarding the display mode when displaying and disclosing the item image (in principle, the first display mode (level 1)) is higher in the high setting (3% in the low setting, 9% in the high setting). High setting may be suggested by breaking the law (frequency of breaking the law).

Further, the set value may be suggested in the advance notice effect. For example, for a strong cut-in image (Fig. 9-5 (B), etc.), a normal strong cut-in image (appearance of characters A, B, etc.) and a special strong cut-in image (appearance of characters A, C, etc.) By preparing two types of strong cut-in images and providing a setting difference in the determination ratio of the types of the strong cut-in images, the set value may be suggested in the strong cut-in image. Specifically, for example, after deciding to execute the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2) for displaying the strong cut-in image, if the setting is low (for example, 3 or less), "normal strong cut-in image" Is determined at a rate of 95% and "special strong cut-in image" is determined at a rate of 5%, and when the setting is high (for example, 4 or more), "normal strong cut-in image" is determined at 80% and "special". The "strong cut-in image" may be determined at a rate of 20%. That is, in the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2) for displaying the strong cut-in image, the frequency at which the "special strong cut-in image" is displayed (or the frequency at which the "special strong cut-in image" is displayed is displayed. It may be suggested that a high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more) is high.

Further, for example, for a group image (FIG. 9-5 (C), etc.), two types of group images, a normal group image (group of character A) and a special group image (group of character B), are prepared. By providing a setting difference in the determination ratio of the type of, the set value may be suggested in the group image. Specifically, for example, after deciding to execute the group notice effect (YEP-B), when the setting is low (for example, 3 or less), 95% of the "normal group image" and the "special group image" are used. Is determined at a rate of 5%, and when the setting is high (for example, 4 or more), even if the "normal group image" is determined at a rate of 80% and the "special group image" is determined at a rate of 20%. Good. That is, in the group notice effect (YEP-B) for displaying the group image, it is set high that the "special group image" is displayed (or the "special group image" is frequently displayed). (For example, it may be suggested that the set value is 4 or more).

In addition, the set value may be suggested in the super reach. For example, for Super Reach B (variable patterns # 16 and # 18), there are two types of super reach effects: a normal super reach effect (battle effect in background 1) and a special super reach effect (battle effect in background 2). By preparing a setting difference in the determination ratio of the type of super reach effect of super reach B, the set value may be suggested in the super reach effect of super reach B. It may also suggest a set value in relation to the jackpot. For example, for the start effect (fanfare effect) of the big hit game state of the third big hit (see Fig. 9-2), two types of fanfare effects, a normal fanfare effect and a special fanfare effect, are prepared, and the fanfare effect in the third big hit is prepared. By providing a setting difference in the determination ratio of the type of, the set value may be suggested in the fanfare effect in the third big hit.

Further, it may be suggested by the item image that the setting value is suggested later. For example, the item image may suggest that the set value is suggested in the advance notice effect. As an example, when it is decided to display a "special strong cut-in image" in which a setting value is suggested, and a cut-in notice effect is performed, the setting value is suggested in the cut-in notice effect. The item image A in a mode suggesting that the above is performed (for example, a mode in which the wording “notice with setting suggestion?” Is displayed) may be displayed. That is, in the item image A of the above aspect, it is uncertain whether or not the cut-in notice effect is performed, but if the cut-in notice effect is performed, the "special strong cut-in image" is used in the cut-in notice effect. Is suggested to be displayed. As another example, when it is decided to display a "special strong cut-in image" in which the setting value is suggested, the mode suggesting that the setting value is suggested in the cut-in notice effect ( For example, the item image A may be displayed (a mode in which the wording "notice with setting suggestion!" Is displayed). That is, the item image A of the above aspect suggests that the cut-in notice effect is performed and that the "special strong cut-in image" is displayed in the cut-in notice effect.

It should be noted that the advance notice effect shown in FIG. 9-4 has a set value in a different effect (may be an effect related to the jackpot reliability, or may be an effect not related to the jackpot reliability). The item image may suggest that the suggestion is made.

Further, it may be suggested by a method other than the item image that the setting value is suggested later. In other words, the item image may not suggest that the setting value is suggested later. For example, it may be suggested that the setting value is suggested in the advance notice effect by the fanning effect of the advance notice effect. As an example, when it is decided to display a "special strong cut-in image" in which a setting value is suggested, and a cut-in notice effect is performed, the setting value is suggested in the cut-in notice effect. (For example, a mode in which a word such as "notice with setting suggestion?" Is displayed in the vicinity of the number to be counted down) may be executed. That is, it is uncertain whether or not the cut-in notice effect will be performed in the fanning effect of the above aspect, but if the cut-in notice effect is performed, the "special strong cut-in image" in the cut-in notice effect. It is suggested to display. As another example, when it is decided to display a "special strong cut-in image" in which the setting value is suggested, the mode suggesting that the setting value is suggested in the cut-in notice effect ( For example, a fanning effect of (a mode in which a word such as "notice with setting suggestion!" Is displayed near the number to be counted down) may be executed. That is, the fanning effect of the above aspect suggests that the cut-in notice effect is performed and that the "special strong cut-in image" is displayed in the cut-in notice effect.

It should be noted that the suggestion of the set value may not be suggested at all later. That is, the set value may be suggested without any suggestion in advance (without suggesting even the item image or suggesting other than the item image.

In addition, "suggestion of setting value" is only to recognize that there is a high possibility that it is a certain setting value (or a setting value within a certain range), and that it is a certain setting value (or a setting value within a certain range). It may not be deterministically notified, or it may be deterministically notified that it is a certain set value (or a set value within a certain range). For example, by making sure that a certain effect or a certain display is not determined when the setting is low (for example, a setting value of 3 or less), the effect or the display or the like is set to a high setting (for example, a setting value of 4 or less). It will definitely notify you of the fact.

(Application to other devices)
Although the example of applying to a pachinko gaming machine has been described above, it can also be applied to a slot machine. For example, in a certain state (for example, a state that is not an advantageous state), whether to shift to another state (for example, an advantageous state) periodically (for each fixed number of games, for each number of games within a predetermined range) is determined from the normal time. In a slot machine that draws with a high probability, it is possible to execute multiple types of advance notice effects with different expectations for transition to another state during the period of high probability that it visits periodically, and from the period of high probability. In the previous period, after making it possible to display an item image that can specify the type of advance notice effect to be executed, the type specified by the item image after the item image is displayed depending on the display mode of the item image. The rate at which the advance notice effect is executed may be different.

Alternatively, in the slot machine that draws with high probability whether to shift to the second advantageous state (for example, AT state, ART state, etc.) in the first advantageous state (for example, CZ, bonus game, etc.), the first In the second period of the advantageous state (for example, the period from the latter half to the final stage of the period of the first advantageous state), it is possible to execute a plurality of types of advance notice effects having different expectations for transition to the second advantageous state. In the first period prior to the second period of the first advantageous state, it is possible to display an item image that can specify the type of the advance notice effect to be executed, and then the item image is displayed according to the display mode. After the item image is displayed, the rate at which the advance notice effect of the type specified by the item image is executed may be different.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 027SH)
(Means 1 relating to feature unit 027SH)
A gaming machine capable of performing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, etc.), comprising an effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing an effect, the effect executing means , Multiple types of notice within a predetermined period (for example, T15 to T16, T18 to T19, T21 to T22, T24 to T25 shown in FIG. 9-11, a period before the period in which the lottery is performed with high probability, etc.) A specific display (for example, FIGS. 9-9 (A) to 9-9 (A)) to be able to execute the effect (for example, a plurality of types of advance notice effects shown in FIG. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, the item image effect shown in FIG. 9-8 (A)) for displaying the plurality of types of item images shown in (L) before the predetermined period. The rate at which the content advantageous to the player is notified differs depending on the type of the advance notice effect executed within the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-7 (A) to (F), the jackpot expectation degree is different. (Different), there are cases where the advance notice effect of the type specified by the specific display is executed after the specific display is displayed, and cases where it is not executed (for example, FIGS. 9-10 (A) (C)). (E) When the item image effect execution mode patterns "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5" for displaying the item image are determined when the advance notice effect of (G) is executed, the item image is specified by the item image after the item image is displayed. Item image effect execution mode patterns "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5" that display an item image when the advance notice effect of the above types is executed and the advance notice effect of FIGS. 9-10 (B) (D) (F) (H) is not executed. When the item image is displayed, the type of advance notice effect specified by the item image is not executed), and there are a plurality of display modes of the specific display (for example, FIGS. 9-9 (A) to (A) to ( (L)), the ratio at which the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display is executed after the specific display is displayed differs depending on the display mode of the specific display (for example, FIGS. 9-8 (B), 9). As shown in -10 (A) to -10 (H), the rate at which the notice effect corresponding to the item image is executed after the item image is displayed differs depending on the display mode of the item image. Specifically, the notice. The rate at which the effect is executed is such that the display mode of the item image corresponding to the notice effect is the third display mode (level 3)> the display mode of the item image corresponding to the notice effect is the second display mode (level 2)>. The forecast The display mode of the item image corresponding to the notification effect is the first display mode (level 1)).

According to the game machine, the ratio of the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display is executed after the specific display is displayed differs depending on the display mode of the specific display. Therefore, the player pays attention to the display mode of the specific display. The interest of the game is improved.

(Means 2 pertaining to feature unit 027SH)
In the game machine of the above means 1, the specific display changes to a special mode corresponding to the execution period of the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display (for example, the type of advance notice effect specified by the specific display). It is possible (for example, the item image A can be changed to the "notice effect execution mode" at the time of executing the cut-in notice effect (T15)), and the special aspect of the specific display is not limited to the type of the specific display. (For example, it may be common regardless of the type of item image).

According to the above-mentioned game machine, it is possible to clearly notify that the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display is being executed (the item image is used). In addition, it is possible to clearly notify which specific display corresponds to the advance notice effect being executed and which specific display corresponds to the advance notice effect being executed.

(Means 3 for Feature 027SH)
In the gaming machines of means 1 and means 2, the specific display can be changed to a special mode after the execution of the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display (for example, the notice effect of the type specified by the specific display). (For example, the item image A may be changed to the "notice effect end mode" at the end of execution (T16) of the cut-in notice effect, etc.).

According to the above-mentioned game machine, it is possible to clearly notify that the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display has been executed (the item image has been used). In addition, it is possible to clearly notify which specific display corresponds to the executed notice effect and which specific display corresponds to the executed advance notice effect.

(Means 4 for Feature 027SH)
In the gaming machine of the above means 1 to 3, a plurality of types of the specific display can be displayed as the specific effect within a specific period prior to the predetermined period (for example, T2 to T2 shown in FIGS. 9-11). A maximum of four types of item images can be displayed in T14, etc.), and the specific display of each type may be displayed in any of the display modes (for example, in the scene of FIGS. 9-26 (C), the item image. A is displayed in the second display mode (level 2), item image B is displayed in the second display mode (level 2), item image C is displayed in the third display mode (level 3), and item image D is displayed. It is displayed according to the first display mode (level 1)).

According to the above-mentioned game machine, since attention is paid to the display mode of each type of specific display, the interest is improved.

(Means 5 for Feature 027SH)
The gaming machine of the above means 2 can execute the advance notice effect at a plurality of timings within the predetermined period (for example, T15, T18, T21, T24 as shown in FIGS. 9-11). In addition, the advance notice effect can be executed at a plurality of execution start timings), and the execution timing of the advance notice effect differs depending on the type of the advance notice effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-11, the cut-in advance notice effect). The execution start timing of the group notice effect is T15, the execution start timing of the group notice effect is T18, the execution start timing of the button notice effect is T21, the execution start timing of the character advance notice effect is T24, etc., depending on the type of the notice effect). The timing at which the specific display becomes the special mode differs depending on the type of the notice effect corresponding to the specific display (for example, the notice effect specified by the specific display) (for example, the item image A is a cut-in notice effect). The item image B can be changed to the "notice effect execution mode" at the time of execution (T15), the item image B can be changed to the "notice effect execution mode" at the time of execution (T18), and the item image C is a button notice. Since the item image D can be changed to the "notice effect execution mode" at the time of executing the effect (T21) and can be changed to the "notice effect execution mode" at the time of executing the character advance notice effect (T24), the item The timing at which the image becomes the "notice effect execution mode" may differ depending on the type of the advance notice effect specified by the item image).

According to the above-mentioned game machine, since the execution timing of the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display is different, the complexity of the effect can be reduced.

(Means 6 for Feature 027SH)
In the game machines of the above means 1 to 5, the notice is displayed when the specific display capable of specifying the type of the notice effect is displayed before the execution of the notice effect, and before the execution of the notice effect. There are cases where the specific display that can specify the type of effect is not displayed (for example, in the example of FIG. 9-13 (B), the item image B corresponding to the button advance effect is displayed before the button advance effect is executed. However, the item image D corresponding to the character advance notice effect is not displayed before the execution of the character advance notice effect), and the specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed before the execution of the advance notice effect. The rate at which the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is not displayed before the execution of the advance notice effect is different from that in the case where the content advantageous to the player is notified, for example, FIG. 9-8 (Fig. 9-8). B), as shown in FIGS. 9-10 (A) to 9-10 (H), when the item image corresponding to the notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed, and before the advance notice effect is executed, the notice effect is displayed. Since the execution rate of the advance notice effect is different from when the corresponding item image is not displayed, the advance notice effect is displayed when the item image corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed and before the advance notice effect is executed. When the item image corresponding to is not displayed, the jackpot expectation may be different as shown in FIGS. 9-7 (A) to 9-7 (F)).

According to the above-mentioned game machine, the interest is improved because attention is paid to what kind of production flow will be.

(Means 7 pertaining to feature unit 027SH)
The gaming machines of the above means 1 to 6 can change the display mode of the specific display after the display of the specific display (see, for example, FIG. 9-8), and an effect suggesting a change in the display mode of the specific display. (For example, the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN, which suggests whether the display mode of the item image A changes, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (C)) can be executed. You may.

According to the above-mentioned game machine, since attention is paid to whether the specific display changes, the interest is improved.

(Means 8 for Feature 027SH)
The gaming machines of the above means 1 to 7 can execute variable display of the identification information, and pre-reading determination means (for example, pre-reading by the effect control CPU 120) determines whether or not the content advantageous to the player is notified. The advance notice setting process (step S161) and the like) are provided, the predetermined period is a period corresponding to a plurality of variable displays, and the specific display may be displayed based on the look-ahead determination. For example, a plurality of item images may be associated with one variable display, or one item image may be associated with each variable display.

According to the above-mentioned game machine, the degree of attention to the fluctuation executed later is increased, and the interest is improved.

(Means 9 for Feature 027SH)
The gaming machines of the above means 1 to 8 can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and include a disadvantage setting value and an advantageous setting value that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantage setting value. Any of the set values can be set (see, for example, FIGS. 9-2 (A) and 9-2 (B)), and the set value is suggested in at least a part of the above-mentioned advance notice effects of the plurality of types. You may. For example, for a strong cut-in image (Fig. 9-5 (B), etc.), a normal strong cut-in image (appearance of characters A, B, etc.) and a special strong cut-in image (appearance of characters A, C, etc.) By preparing two types of strong cut-in images and providing a setting difference in the determination ratio of the types of the strong cut-in images, the set value may be suggested in the strong cut-in image.

According to the above-mentioned game machine, in addition to paying attention to whether the advance notice effect is executed after the display of the specific display, whether or not there is a suggestion of a set value in the advance notice effect displayed after the display of the specific display, the interest is improved. ..

(Means 10 pertaining to feature unit 027SH)
The gaming machines of the above means 1 to 9 can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and include a disadvantage setting value and an advantageous setting value that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantage setting value. Any of the set values can be set (see, for example, FIGS. 9-2 (A) and 9-2 (B)), the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value can be executed, and the specific display is , May be displayed in response to the setting suggestion effect to be executed.

According to the above-mentioned game machine, in addition to whether or not the advance notice effect is executed, attention is paid to the specific display regarding the suggestion of the set value, so that the interest is further improved. If there is no relationship between the item image effect that displays the item image corresponding to the notice effect before the execution of the notice effect and the setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value, there is a risk that the interest will be insufficient. In the above-mentioned game machine, the item image effect may suggest the execution of the setting suggestion effect, and since there is a relationship between the item image effect and the setting suggestion effect, the interest is improved.

(Means 11 for Feature 027SH)
The gaming machines of the above means 1 to 9 can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and include a disadvantage setting value and an advantageous setting value that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantage setting value. Any of the set values can be set (see, for example, FIGS. 9-2 (A) and 9-2 (B)), the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value can be executed, and the specific display is , It may be displayed corresponding to the advance notice effect to be executed, but may not be displayed corresponding to the setting suggestion effect to be executed.

According to the above-mentioned game machine, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated and suppress the deterioration of the interest. If the item image effect that displays the item image corresponding to the notice effect before the execution of the advance notice effect and the setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value are related, the effect may become complicated and the interest may be reduced. However, in the above-mentioned game machine, the item image effect does not suggest the execution of the setting suggestion effect, and the item image effect and the setting suggestion effect are independent of each other, so that the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

(Means 12 pertaining to feature unit 027SH)
The gaming machines of the above means 1 to 9 can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and include a disadvantage setting value and an advantageous setting value that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantage setting value. Any of the set values can be set (see, for example, FIGS. 9-2 (A) and 9-2 (B)), and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value can be executed, and as the specific display. The setting suggestion effect may be executed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 9-31 and 9-32, the item image D (level 4) may be used to suggest the set value.

According to the above-mentioned game machine, in addition to whether or not the advance notice effect is executed, attention is paid to the specific display regarding the suggestion of the set value, so that the interest is further improved. If there is no relationship between the item image effect that displays the item image corresponding to the notice effect before the execution of the notice effect and the setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value, there is a risk that the interest will be insufficient. In the above-mentioned game machine, the item image production is also a setting suggestion production, so that the interest is improved.

(Means 13 for Feature 027SH)
The gaming machines of the above means 1 to 9 can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and include a disadvantage setting value and an advantageous setting value that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantage setting value. Any of the set values can be set (for example, see FIGS. 9-2 (A) and 9-2 (B)), and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value can be executed. May be different from the advance notice effect and the specific display. For example, the set value may be suggested by the effect mode (for example, the background) of the super reach effect, or the set value may be suggested by the start effect (fanfare effect) of the jackpot game state.

According to the above-mentioned game machine, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated and suppress the deterioration of the interest. If the advance notice effect, the item image effect, and the setting suggestion effect are related, the effect may become complicated and the interest may be lowered. However, in the above-mentioned game machine, the advance notice effect, the item image effect, and the setting suggestion effect are produced. Because it is independent of, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine that acquires a plurality of items in response to a button press, displays a plurality of items corresponding to the notice side by side, and executes a notice corresponding to the item (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116654). reference). However, the interest of the game was insufficient. The configurations according to (1) to (13) shown below are made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game. In the above-mentioned description of the feature unit 027SH, the configurations according to (1) to (13) shown below are specifically described.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, etc.), and the effect can be executed. Means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) are provided, and the effect execution means is within a predetermined period (for example, T15 to T16, T18 to T19, T21 to T22, T24 to T25, high probability shown in FIGS. 9-11. It is possible to execute a plurality of types of advance notice effects (for example, a plurality of types of advance notice effects shown in FIG. 9-4) during a period prior to the period in which the lottery is performed, and the advance notice effects to be executed. A specific effect (for example, FIG. 9-8) in which a specific display (for example, a plurality of types of item images shown in FIGS. 9-9 (A) to (L)) capable of specifying the type is displayed before the predetermined period. (Item image effect, etc. shown in (A)) can be executed, and the rate at which advantageous content for the player is notified differs depending on the type of the advance notice effect executed within the predetermined period (for example, FIG. 9-). (As shown in 7 (A) to (F), the jackpot expectation is different), when the notice effect of the type specified by the specific display is executed after the specific display is displayed, and when the notice effect of the type specified by the specific display is executed, it is not executed. There are times and times (for example, when executing the advance notice effect of FIGS. 9-10 (A), (C), (E), and (G), the item image effect execution mode patterns "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5" for displaying the item image are displayed. If the item image is displayed, the type of advance notice effect specified by the item image is executed, and the advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 9-10 (B), (D), (F), and (H) is not executed. When the item image effect execution mode patterns "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5" for displaying the item image are determined in, the advance notice effect of the type specified by the item image is not executed after the item image is displayed), the specific display. There are a plurality of display modes (see, for example, FIGS. 9-9 (A) to (L)), and after the specific display is displayed according to the display mode of the specific display, the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display is executed. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 9-8 (B) and 9-10 (A) to (H), the item image is displayed after the item image is displayed depending on the display mode of the item image. The rate at which the corresponding notice effect is executed is different. Specifically, the rate at which the notice effect is executed is such that the display mode of the item image corresponding to the notice effect is the third display mode (level 3)> the notice effect. Corresponds to The display mode of the item image is the second display mode (level 2)> the display mode of the item image corresponding to the notice effect is the first display mode (level 1)).

According to such a configuration, the ratio at which the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display is executed differs depending on the display mode of the specific display, so that the player pays attention to the display mode of the specific display. , The interest of the game is improved.

(2) In the game machine of the above (1), the specific display is special corresponding to the execution period of the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display (for example, the type of advance notice effect specified by the specific display). The mode can be changed (for example, the item image A can be changed to the "notice effect execution mode" at the time of executing the cut-in notice effect (T15)), and the special aspect of the specific display is the type of the specific display. It may be common regardless of (for example, common regardless of the type of item image).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify that the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display is being executed (the item image is used).

(3) In the gaming machines of the above (1) and (2), the specific display is a special aspect after the execution of the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display (for example, the notice effect of the type specified by the specific display). (For example, the item image A can be changed to the "notice effect end mode" at the end of execution (T16) of the cut-in notice effect, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify that the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display has been executed (the item image has been used).

(4) In the gaming machines (1) to (3), as the specific effect, a plurality of types of the specific display can be displayed within a specific period prior to the predetermined period (for example, in FIG. 9-11). Up to four types of item images can be displayed in T2 to T14 shown), and the specific display of each type may be displayed in any display mode (for example, the scene shown in FIGS. 9-26 (C)). Then, the item image A is displayed in the second display mode (level 2), the item image B is displayed in the second display mode (level 2), and the item image C is displayed in the third display mode (level 3). Item image D is displayed according to the first display mode (level 1)).

According to such a configuration, since attention is paid to the display mode of each type of specific display, the interest is improved.

(5) The gaming machine according to (2) can execute the advance notice effect at a plurality of timings within the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11, T15, T18, T21, The advance notice effect can be executed at a plurality of execution start timings such as T24), and the execution timing of the advance notice effect differs depending on the type of the advance notice effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-11, the cut The execution start timing of the in-notice effect is T15, the execution start timing of the group advance notice effect is T18, the execution start timing of the button advance notice effect is T21, the execution start timing of the character advance notice effect is T24, and so on, depending on the type of advance notice effect. ), The timing at which the specific display becomes the special mode differs depending on the type of the notice effect corresponding to the specific display (for example, the notice effect specified by the specific display) (for example, the item image A is cut-in). The item image B can be changed to the "notice effect execution mode" when the advance notice effect is executed (T15), and the item image B can be changed to the "notice effect execution mode" when the group advance notice effect is executed (T18). Can be changed to the "notice effect execution mode" when the button notice effect is executed (T21), and the item image D can be changed to the "notice effect execution mode" when the character advance notice effect is executed (T24). Therefore, the timing at which the item image becomes the "notice effect execution mode" may differ depending on the type of the advance notice effect specified by the item image).

According to such a configuration, since the execution timing of the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display is different, the complexity of the effect can be reduced.

(6) In the game machines (1) to (5) above, when the specific display capable of specifying the type of the advance notice effect is displayed before the execution of the advance notice effect, and when the specific display capable of specifying the type of the advance notice effect is displayed, and when the advance notice effect is displayed. There are cases where the specific display that can specify the type of the advance notice effect is not displayed before the execution (for example, in the example of FIG. 9-13 (B), the button advance notice effect corresponds to the button advance notice effect before the execution. Although the item image B is displayed, the item image D corresponding to the character advance notice effect is not displayed before the execution of the character advance notice effect), and the item image D corresponding to the advance notice effect is corresponding to the one before the execution of the advance notice effect. When the specific display is displayed and when the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is not displayed before the execution of the advance notice effect, the rate at which the content advantageous to the player is notified is different, for example. As shown in FIGS. 9-8 (B) and 9-10 (A) to (H), when the item image corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed, and before the advance notice effect is executed. Since the execution rate of the notice effect is different from when the item image corresponding to the notice effect is not displayed, when the item image corresponding to the notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed and when the notice effect is executed. When the item image corresponding to the notice effect is not displayed before, the jackpot expectation may be different as shown in FIGS. 9-7 (A) to 9-7 (F)).

According to such a configuration, the interest is improved because attention is paid to what kind of production flow will be.

(7) The gaming machines according to (1) to (6) can change the display mode of the specific display after the display of the specific display (see, for example, FIG. 9-8), and the display mode of the specific display can be changed. Effect suggesting change (for example, item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN using item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN, which suggests whether the display mode of item image A changes, etc. shown in FIG. 9-17 (C)) May be feasible.

With such a configuration, attention is paid to whether the specific display changes, so that the interest is improved.

(8) The gaming machines according to (1) to (7) above can execute variable display of identification information, and pre-reading determination means (for example, effect control) for pre-reading and determining whether or not content advantageous to the player is notified. The pre-reading notice setting process (step S161), etc. by the CPU 120 is provided, the predetermined period is a period corresponding to a plurality of variable displays, and the specific display is displayed based on the pre-reading determination. May be good. For example, a plurality of item images may be associated with one variable display, or one item image may be associated with each variable display.

With such a configuration, the degree of attention to the fluctuations to be executed later is increased, and the interest is improved.

(9) The game machines (1) to (8) above can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and the disadvantage setting value and the advantageous setting value that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantage setting value. Any setting value can be set from a plurality of setting values including and (see, for example, FIGS. 9-2 (A) and 9-2 (B)), and in at least a part of the above-mentioned advance notice effects of the plurality of types. The set value may be suggested. For example, for a strong cut-in image (Fig. 9-5 (B), etc.), a normal strong cut-in image (appearance of characters A, B, etc.) and a special strong cut-in image (appearance of characters A, C, etc.) By preparing two types of strong cut-in images and providing a setting difference in the determination ratio of the types of the strong cut-in images, the set value may be suggested in the strong cut-in image.

According to such a configuration, in addition to whether the advance notice effect is executed after the specific display is displayed, it is also noticed whether the advance notice effect displayed after the specific display is displayed suggests a set value, which improves the interest. To do.

(10) The gaming machines (1) to (9) above can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and the disadvantage setting value and the advantageous setting value that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantage setting value. Any setting value can be set from a plurality of setting values including and (see, for example, FIGS. 9-2 (A) and 9-2 (B)), and a setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting value can be executed. , The specific display may be displayed in response to the setting suggestion effect to be executed.

With such a configuration, the interest is further improved.

(11) The gaming machines (1) to (9) above can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and the disadvantage setting value and the advantageous setting value that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantage setting value. Any setting value can be set from a plurality of setting values including and (see, for example, FIGS. 9-2 (A) and 9-2 (B)), and a setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting value can be executed. , The specific display may be displayed in response to the advance notice effect to be executed, but may not be displayed in response to the setting suggestion effect to be executed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

(12) The gaming machines (1) to (9) above can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and the disadvantage setting value and the advantageous setting value that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantage setting value. Any setting value can be set from a plurality of setting values including and (see, for example, FIGS. 9-2 (A) and 9-2 (B)), and a setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting value can be executed. , The setting suggestion effect may be executed as the specific display. For example, as shown in FIGS. 9-31 and 9-32, the item image D (level 4) may be used to suggest the set value.

With such a configuration, the interest is further improved.

(13) The gaming machines (1) to (9) above can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and the disadvantage setting value and the advantageous setting value that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantage setting value. Any setting value can be set from a plurality of setting values including and (see, for example, FIGS. 9-2 (A) and 9-2 (B)), and a setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting value can be executed. , The setting suggestion effect may be different from the advance notice effect and the specific display. For example, the set value may be suggested by the effect mode (for example, the background) of the super reach effect, or the set value may be suggested by the start effect (fanfare effect) of the jackpot game state.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

[Explanation of feature 16TM]
Next, the feature unit 16TM will be described. 10-1 (A1) and 10-1 (B1) are explanatory views showing specific examples of hold display and active display in the present embodiment. The hold display is the display information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol that has not been executed, and the active display is the display information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol that has been executed. In the present embodiment, a first hold display area 16TM011 for displaying the first hold storage number (1st hold display 16TM001 of 0 to 4) is provided at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5, and the image display device An active display area 16TM013 is provided at the lower center of the screen of No. 5 where the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the currently executing fluctuation display is displayed.

Further, when the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy low base state (normal state), the mini effect area 16TM035, which will be described later, is located in the special effect area 16TM035 provided below the active display 16TM003 at the lower center of the screen of the image display device 5. Slot 16TM030 is displayed. In this example, since the mini slot 16TM030 is displayed directly below the active display 16TM003, the player sees the mini slot 16TM030 as if it were the pedestal of the active display 16TM003. That is, since the mini-slot 16TM030 is displayed at a position corresponding to the active display 16TM003, the player can easily grasp that the mini-slot 16TM030 executes the effect corresponding to the variable display being executed. Can be done.

In the present embodiment, the mini slot 16TM030 can be displayed regardless of whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is executed (whether or not the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed) and regardless of the number of reserved storages. Information.

When the first hold storage number is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first hold display 16TM001 in the first hold display area 16TM011 in a number corresponding to the first hold storage number. That is, in the first hold display 16TM001, the start condition (for example, winning the first start winning opening) is satisfied, but the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. Information corresponding to the variable display (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) of the first special symbol in which the second reserved memory number is 0 and the first reserved memory number is not 0) is not established. Is. When a plurality of first hold displays 16TM001 are displayed in the first hold display area 16TM011, the first hold display 16TM001 corresponds to the order close to the active display area 16TM013 (from the right when viewed from the player). The start condition of the variable display is satisfied.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 16TM003 in the active display area 16TM013 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed. That is, the active display 16TM003 is a big hit game in which the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed) after the start condition (for example, winning the first start winning opening or the second start winning opening) is satisfied. This is information corresponding to the variable display (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) of the special symbol for which the state is not controlled and the number of reserved memories is not 0).

In the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in response to the variable display of the special symbol. As shown in FIGS. 10-1 (A1) and 10-1 (A1) and (B1), the area at the upper center of the image display device 5 on which the decorative symbol is variable and stopped is displayed from the left, the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, The symbol display area 5R is used.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-1 (A1) and (B1), the symbol is smaller than the decorative symbol displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5, and the special symbol is variablely displayed. A symbol indicating whether or not the symbol is displayed and the display result of the special symbol is called a small symbol. The variable display of the small symbol can be executed in parallel with the variable display of the special symbol, and the stop display of the small symbol can also be executed in parallel with the stop display of the special symbol. Then, the area at the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5, in which the small symbols corresponding to the first special symbol are variablely displayed and stopped, is displayed from the left in the small symbol display area 5l, the small symbol display area 5c, and the small symbol display area. Let it be 5r. The small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r have smaller display areas than the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Therefore, the visibility of the small symbol is lower than the visibility of the decorative symbol.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 (A1) and 10-1 (A1) and (B1), in the present embodiment, when controlled to the low accuracy low base state (normal state), the mini slot is set in the special effect area 16TM035 of the image display device 5. 16TM030 is displayed. In the mini-slot 16TM030, variable display of a plurality of types of mini-slot symbols is executed. In the first mini-slot variable display described later, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (A2), the mini-slots of "replay", "bell", "watermelon", "cherry", "7", and "blank" The symbols are variably displayed, and in the second mini-slot variable display, which will be described later, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (B2), the symbols without the warning characters (“not displayed”) and the jackpot expectation are displayed. The mini-slot symbols of "CHANGE", "super heat", and "FEVER", which are symbols consisting of suggestive notice characters, are variably displayed.

(Variable display of the first mini slot)
As shown in FIG. 10-1 (A1), in the present embodiment, when the low accuracy and low base state (normal state) is controlled, the variation display of the special symbol (variation display of the decorative symbol, variation of the small symbol) Each time the display) is executed, the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 (areas corresponding to each of the three reels in the slot machine) are divided into three areas, "left", "middle", and "right". ), The first mini-slot variable display in which the mini-slot symbol is variably displayed (for example, vertical scroll display or update display) can be executed. In the first mini-slot variable display, the mini-slot symbols are displayed in one stage (one line) in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. In the following description, the term "variable display" refers to a variable display of a special symbol, a variable display of a decorative symbol corresponding to a variable display of a special symbol, or a variable display of a small symbol.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (A2), in each of the mini slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 (3 reels), "replay", "bell", "watermelon", A plurality of types of symbols that can be distinguished from each other, such as "cherry", "7", and "blank (horizontal linear object (-) in this example)", are variably displayed in a predetermined order.

Then, when the mini-slot symbols are stopped in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, if the combinations of symbols called the winning combinations are aligned, the winning combination is assumed to be established. The winning combination may be a combination of the same symbols or a combination including different symbols. The winning combination in the present embodiment is a combination of the same symbol and a combination including different symbols. In addition, in the case of a combination of different symbols, the winning combination is "off".

In the present embodiment, the winning combination is established when the combinations of the same symbols are aligned. For example, if the same symbol combinations of [bell], [bell], and [bell] are aligned in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, the role of "bell" is established. Similarly, if the same combination of [watermelon], [watermelon], and [watermelon] is available, the role of "watermelon" is established, and if the same combination of [cherry], [cherry], and [cherry] is available, "cherry". The role of "cherry" is established, and when the combinations of the same symbols of [7], [7], and [7] are aligned, the role of "7 matching" is established. However, when the same combinations of [blank], [blank], and [blank] are aligned in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, the same treatment is performed as when the winning combination is "missing".

(Variable display of the second mini slot)
As shown in FIG. 10-1 (B1), in the present embodiment, after the first mini-slot variable display is executed (after any of the above-mentioned successful combinations is established), the two are not divided into a plurality. In a single mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 (area corresponding to one reel), it is possible to execute a second mini-slot variable display in which the mini-slot symbol is variably displayed (for example, vertical scroll display or update display). is there. In the second mini-slot variable display, the mini-slot symbols are displayed in one stage (one line) in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (B2), in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 (1 reel), "no display", "CHANGE", "super heat", and "FEVER" can be distinguished from each other. A plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed in a predetermined order. In the present embodiment, the display result by the second mini-slot variable display, that is, the display result of the variable display of the special symbol being executed according to the displayed characters (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed). Is suggested to be a "big hit".

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-1 (A1) and (B1), the number of fluctuation displays executed after the game state is controlled to the low probability low base state (normal state) is counted. The fluctuation number display 16TM040 indicating the value of the fluctuation number counter is displayed at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. The value indicated by the variation display 16TM040 allows the player to grasp the number of variation displays executed in the normal state. In the examples shown in FIGS. 10-1 (A1) and 10-1 (B1), "125" is displayed as the fluctuation number display 16TM040, and the fluctuation display has already been executed 124 times since the gaming state shifts to the normal state. It shows the state in which the 125th fluctuation display is being executed at the present time.

Here, the variation number display 16TM040 is different from the normal mode (for example, the white mode) by executing the second setting suggestion effect described later based on the set value of the game machine. For example, it changes to purple mode).

It should be noted that the display mode of the variation number display 16TM040 is expected to be different from the normal mode (for example, white mode), the normal mode, and the above-mentioned setting suggestion mode (for example, purple mode) based on the display result of the variation display to be executed. A notice effect (for example, referred to as a second expectation level notice effect) that changes to a degree notice mode (for example, a red mode) may be executed. However, in the same variation display, both the second setting suggestion effect and the second expectation notice effect are not executed, and if it is decided to execute the second setting suggestion effect, the second setting suggestion effect is displayed. Expectation notice production shall not be executed. That is, the second setting suggestion effect is executed with priority over the second expectation notice effect.

FIG. 10-2 is a flowchart showing a change effect determination process executed at the time of starting winning. The effect control CPU 120 executes the start winning change effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-2 in the lookahead advance notice setting process (step S161) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7.

In the start winning change effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first receives a set of start winning commands (for example, a symbol designation command, a variable category command) based on the occurrence of a start winning to the first starting winning opening. , And whether or not the first hold storage number addition designation command) has been newly received (step S16TM1000).

The symbol designation command is an effect control command that indicates whether or not a big hit is obtained among the winning judgment results and the judgment result of the type of big hit. The CPU 103 determines whether or not a jackpot will occur and the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning, and a symbol for designating the determination result. Output the specified command. Further, the variation category command is an effect control command that indicates the determination result of the variation pattern among the determination results at the time of winning. The CPU 103 determines whether or not it will be normal reach, whether or not it will be super reach, etc. based on the random number for determining the variation pattern type extracted at the time of starting winning, and outputs a variation category command that specifies the determination result. To do. Further, the first hold storage number addition designation command is an effect control command for designating that the first hold storage number has been increased by 1.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 newly stores one set of start winning commands (symbol designation command, variable category command, and first hold storage number addition designation command) in the start winning command storage area. Judge whether or not it is. If a new command for starting a set of winning prizes has not been received (NO in step S16TM1000), the process ends as it is.

If one set of commands at the time of starting winning is newly received, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display and the final display mode determination table of the active display described later (FIG. 10-3 (A)). It is determined based on (see step S16TM1010). The final display mode of the active display determined in step S16TM1010 is the final display color of the active display determined at the time of starting winning. In the present embodiment, after the active display has changed to the final display color, the warning characters may be superimposed and displayed on the active display according to the execution of the expectation warning effect described later. That is, there is a possibility that the mode of the active display may change from the final display mode of the active display determined at the time of winning the start, based on the effect determination process at the start of the fluctuation.

FIG. 10-3 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the final display mode determination table of the active display. As shown in FIG. 10-3 (A), in this embodiment, as the final display mode of the active display 16TM003, any one of "normal mode (white mode)", "blue mode", and "red mode" is used. It is possible to determine, and a determination value is assigned to each of these modes.

As shown in FIG. 10-3 (A), when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the starting winning is said. The final display mode of the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display based on (new first hold storage) is the normal mode (white circle display) at a rate of 70% and the blue mode (blue) at a rate of 25%. (Round display), and the red mode (red round display) at a rate of 5%.

On the other hand, when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), it is based on the start winning (new first hold memory). The final display mode of the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display is a normal mode at a rate of 10%, a blue mode at a rate of 30%, and a red mode at a rate of 60%.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern of the active display, the execution presence / absence of the first change effect, and the number of executions based on the change pattern determination table of the active display (see FIG. 10-3 (B)). (Step S16TM1020).

FIG. 10-3 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining a change pattern of the active display. In this embodiment, any of change patterns 001 to change pattern 025 can be determined as the change pattern of the active display, and a determination value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 10-3 (B), the active display at the time of active shift is the normal mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified judgment result is "missing"), the change pattern of the active display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) has a probability of 70% change pattern 001. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 002 is selected with a 25% probability and the change pattern 003 is selected with a 5% probability. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). As for the change pattern of the active display corresponding to the variation display based on the memory), the change pattern 001 is selected with a probability of 10%, the change pattern 002 is selected with a probability of 30%, and the change pattern 003 is selected with a probability of 60%. Judgment values are assigned so that

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display when a start winning prize occurs, but the display mode of the active display at the time of active shift is different from the final display mode. Will execute an active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display.

Here, when the display mode of the active display is changed (when the active change effect is executed) and when the display mode of the active display is not changed (when the active change effect is not executed), the display mode of the active display is changed. It is possible to perform a first change effect that suggests that it may change. This first change effect has a success mode and a failure mode. In the example shown below, when the first change effect of the success mode is executed, the display mode of the active display is changed and the failure mode is changed. When the first change effect of the above is executed, the display mode of the active display shall not be changed. Further, the first change effect is an effect in which the character acts on the active display. When the first change effect of the success mode is executed, the character acts on the active display to change the display mode of the active display, and when the first change effect of the failure mode is executed, the character Acts on the active display, but does not change the display mode of the active display.

The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 001 is 0. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 002 is one, and the first change effect of the failure mode is executed. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 003 is two, and the first change effect of the failure mode is executed in each case.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (B), the active display at the time of active shift is in the blue mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, symbol designation). If the judgment result specified by the command is "missing"), the change pattern of the active display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 30% of the change pattern 011. Selected with probability, change pattern 012 is selected with 27% probability, change pattern 013 is selected with 23% probability, change pattern 014 is selected with 10% probability, change pattern 015 is selected with 5% probability. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 016 is selected with a probability of 5%. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). As for the change pattern of the active display corresponding to the variation display based on the memory), the change pattern 011 is selected with a probability of 5%, the change pattern 012 is selected with a probability of 10%, and the change pattern 013 is selected with a probability of 15%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 014 is selected with a probability of 20%, the change pattern 015 is selected with a probability of 25%, and the change pattern 016 is selected with a probability of 25%.

At this time, the number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 011 is 0. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 012 is one, and the first change effect of the failure mode is executed. The first change effect in the change pattern 013 is executed twice, and the first change effect in the failure mode is executed in each case. The number of times of execution of the first change effect in the change pattern 014 is one, and the first change effect of the success mode is executed. The first change effect in the change pattern 015 is executed twice, and the first change effect in the success mode is executed after the first change effect in the failure mode is executed. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 016 is two, and after the first change effect of the success mode is executed, the first change effect of the failure mode is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (B), the active display at the time of active shift is in the red mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, symbol designation). If the judgment result specified by the command is "missing"), the change pattern of the active display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 35% of the change pattern 021. The change pattern 022 is selected with a probability of 25%, the change pattern 023 is selected with a probability of 20%, the change pattern 024 is selected with a probability of 10%, and the change pattern 025 is selected with a probability of 10%. Judgment values are assigned to be selected. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). As for the change pattern of the active display corresponding to the variation display based on the memory), the change pattern 022 is selected with a probability of 5%, the change pattern 022 is selected with a probability of 15%, and the change pattern 023 is selected with a probability of 30%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 024 is selected with a probability of 25% and the change pattern 025 is selected with a probability of 25%.

At this time, the number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 021 is 0. The number of times of execution of the first change effect in the change pattern 022 is one, and the first change effect of the success mode is executed. The number of times of execution of the first change effect in the change pattern 023 is two, and in each case, the first change effect of the successful mode is executed. The first change effect in the change pattern 024 is executed twice, and the first change effect in the success mode is executed after the first change effect in the failure mode is executed. The first change effect in the change pattern 025 is executed twice, and the first change effect in the success mode is executed after the first change effect in the failure mode is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern of the hold display based on the change pattern determination table of the hold display (see FIGS. 10-4 (C) to (F)) (step S16TM1030), and performs the process as it is. finish.

FIG. 10-4 (C) is for determining the change pattern of the hold display for one hold when the first hold storage number stored in the first hold storage area is “1”. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a table. In this embodiment, any of the change patterns 101 to 103 can be determined as the change pattern of the hold display, and a determination value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 10-4 (C), the active display at the time of active shift is the normal mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified determination result is "missing"), the change pattern 101 is 100% as the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory). Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected with probability. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of starting prize is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting prize (new first hold) A determination value is assigned to the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory) so that the change pattern 101 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 10-4 (C), the active display at the time of active shift is in the blue mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified determination result is "missing"), the change pattern 102 of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 100%. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected with probability. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of starting prize is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting prize (new first hold) A determination value is assigned to the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on (memory) so that the change pattern 102 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 10-4 (C), the active display at the time of active shift is in the red mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified determination result is "missing"), the change pattern 103 of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 100%. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected with probability. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of starting prize is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting prize (new first hold) A determination value is assigned to the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory) so that the change pattern 103 is selected with a probability of 100%.

In the description of FIG. 10-4, the active shift means that the first hold display 16TM001 shifts from the first hold display area 16TM011 to the active display area 16TM013 (as a result, the determination target at the time of starting winning is obtained. The active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display is displayed).

In this embodiment, when the first hold display 16TM001 shifts from the first hold display area 16TM011 to the active display area 16TM013, the display mode is not changed. That is, the display mode of the first hold display 16TM001 immediately before the active shift and the display mode of the active display 16TM003 immediately after the active shift match.

In the present embodiment, the display mode of the first hold display 16TM001 is not changed during the active shift, but the display mode of the first hold display 16TM001 is changed during the active shift. You may let me.

FIG. 10-4 (D) is for determining a change pattern of the hold display for two holds when the first hold storage number stored in the first hold storage area is “2”. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a table. In this embodiment, any of the change patterns 201 to 206 can be determined as the change pattern of the hold display, and a determination value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 10-4 (D), the active display at the time of active shift is the normal mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified determination result is "missing"), the change pattern 201 of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 100%. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected with probability. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of starting prize is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting prize (new first hold) A determination value is assigned to the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory) so that the change pattern 201 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 10-4 (D), the active display at the time of active shift is in the blue mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified determination result is "missing"), the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 40% of the change pattern 202. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 203 is selected with a probability and the change pattern 203 is selected with a probability of 60%. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). As for the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the variation display based on the memory), the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 202 is selected with a probability of 60% and the change pattern 203 is selected with a probability of 40%. There is.

As shown in FIG. 10-4 (D), the active display at the time of active shift is in the red mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified determination result is "missing"), the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 10% of the change pattern 204. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 205 is selected with a probability, the change pattern 205 is selected with a probability of 30%, and the change pattern 206 is selected with a probability of 60%. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). As for the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory), the change pattern 204 is selected with a probability of 60%, the change pattern 205 is selected with a probability of 30%, and the change pattern 206 has a probability of 10%. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected in.

FIG. 10-4 (E) is for determining a change pattern of the hold display for three holds when the first hold storage number stored in the first hold storage area is “3”. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a table. In this embodiment, any one of the change pattern 301 to the change pattern 310 can be determined as the change pattern of the hold display, and a determination value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 10-4 (E), the active display at the time of active shift is the normal mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified determination result is "missing"), the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 100% of the change pattern 301. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected with probability. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of starting prize is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting prize (new first hold) A determination value is assigned to the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory) so that the change pattern 301 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 10-4 (E), the active display at the time of active shift is in the blue mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified determination result is "missing"), the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 20% of the change pattern 302. Judgment values are assigned so that the change pattern 303 is selected with a probability of 20%, and the change pattern 304 is selected with a probability of 60%. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). As for the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory), the change pattern 302 is selected with a probability of 40%, the change pattern 303 is selected with a probability of 40%, and the change pattern 304 has a probability of 20%. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected in.

As shown in FIG. 10-4 (E), the active display at the time of active shift is in the red mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified judgment result is "missing"), the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 13% of the change pattern 305. The change pattern 306 is selected with a probability of 13%, the change pattern 307 is selected with a probability of 4%, the change pattern 308 is selected with a probability of 20%, and the change pattern 309 is selected with a probability of 20%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 310 is selected and the change pattern 310 is selected with a probability of 30%. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). As for the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory), the change pattern 305 is selected with a 20% probability, the change pattern 306 is selected with a 20% probability, and the change pattern 307 has a 30% probability. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 308 is selected with a probability of 13%, the change pattern 309 is selected with a probability of 13%, and the change pattern 310 is selected with a probability of 4%.

FIG. 10-4 (F) is for determining a change pattern of the hold display for four holds when the first hold storage number stored in the first hold storage area is “4”. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a table. In this embodiment, any of the change patterns 401 to 415 can be determined as the change pattern of the hold display, and a determination value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 10-4 (F), the active display at the time of active shift is the normal mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified determination result is "missing"), the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 100% of the change pattern 401. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected with probability. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of starting prize is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting prize (new first hold) A determination value is assigned to the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory) so that the change pattern 401 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 10-4 (F), the active display at the time of active shift is in the blue mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified determination result is "missing"), the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 20% of the change pattern 402. Judgment values are assigned so that the change pattern 403 is selected with a probability of 20%, the change pattern 404 is selected with a probability of 20%, and the change pattern 405 is selected with a probability of 40%. .. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). As for the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory), the change pattern 402 is selected with a 30% probability, the change pattern 403 is selected with a 30% probability, and the change pattern 404 has a 30% probability. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 405 is selected with a probability of 10%.

As shown in FIG. 10-4 (F), the active display at the time of active shift is in the red mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified judgment result is "missing"), the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 3% of the change pattern 406. The change pattern 407 is selected with a probability of 3%, the change pattern 408 is selected with a probability of 3%, the change pattern 409 is selected with a probability of 10%, and the change pattern 410 is selected with a probability of 10%. Selected, change pattern 411 is selected with a 10% probability, change pattern 412 is selected with a 15% probability, change pattern 413 is selected with a 15% probability, and change pattern 414 is selected with a 15% probability. , The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 415 is selected with a probability of 16%. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). As for the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory), the change pattern 406 is selected with a probability of 10%, the change pattern 407 is selected with a probability of 10%, and the change pattern 408 is selected with a probability of 10%. The change pattern 409 is selected with a 15% probability, the change pattern 410 is selected with a 15% probability, the change pattern 411 is selected with a 15% probability, and the change pattern 412 is selected with a 7% probability. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 413 is selected with a probability of 7%, the change pattern 414 is selected with a probability of 7%, and the change pattern 415 is selected with a probability of 4%.

(Production determination process at the start of variable display)
When starting the variation display of the special symbol, the CPU 103 includes a display result specification command for specifying the display result, a variation pattern specification command for specifying the variation pattern, and a hold storage number subtraction specification command (first hold storage number subtraction designation). Command or second hold storage subtraction specification command)
To the effect control CPU 120.

The effect control CPU 120 is a hold storage number subtraction designation command (first hold) that specifies that the hold storage number has been subtracted when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is started. Storage number subtraction specification command or second hold storage number subtraction specification command), display result specification command to specify the display result (big hit or miss, big hit type when it becomes a big hit), fluctuation time of special symbol and production content ( Based on receiving a set of commands called a variation pattern specification command that specifies (reach, pseudo-ream, etc.) from the game control microcomputer 100, the variation display of the special symbol is executed, and the special symbol is executed. It is possible to specify the fluctuation time and the content of the production (reach, pseudo-ream, etc.).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 receives a special symbol (first special symbol) from the game control microcomputer 100 when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the display result is confirmed. It is possible to identify that the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol) is completed and the display result is derived.

FIG. 10-5 is a flowchart showing an effect determination process executed at the start of fluctuation. The effect control CPU 120 executes the effect change start effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-5 in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-mentioned one set of commands accompanying the start of the variation display of the special symbol, the display result designation is the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol. An effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) for execution based on a command and a variation pattern specification command is set, and a decorative pattern based on the specified variation pattern is set. The effect to be executed during the variation display is determined by the variation start effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-5.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed, which will be described later, based on the execution / non-execution determination table of the first setting suggestion effect (see FIG. 10-6 (G)) (step S16TM2000). ..

Here, in the present embodiment, the first setting suggestion effect can be executed as an effect suggesting the currently set setting value in the low probability low base state. In this first setting suggestion effect, in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the mini-slot 16TM030, the combination of [bell], [bell], and [bell] mini-slot symbols is stopped and displayed as the same symbol combination. By doing so, it is a production that establishes the role of "Bell". That is, the player sets the set value based on the fact that the combination of the [bell], [bell], and [bell] mini-slot symbols is stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the mini-slot 16TM030. It is recognized that the first setting suggestion effect for suggesting the above has been executed.

As shown in the table of FIG. 10-6 (G), determination values for determining whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect are assigned according to the currently set setting values. When the set value is "1", the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 97%, and decides to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 3%. When the set value is "2", it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 96%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 4%. When the set value is "3", it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 95%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 5%. When the set value is "4", it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 94%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 6%. When the set value is "5", it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 93%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 7%. When the set value is "6", it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 92%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 8%.

As shown in FIG. 10-6 (G), the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect differs depending on the set value, and the higher the set value, the higher the rate of execution of the first setting suggestion effect. Become. In the present embodiment, since the effect determination process at the start of the variation is executed each time the variation display is executed, it is determined whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed for each variation display (step S16TM2000). That is, it is determined whether the winning combination of the first mini-slot variable display described above is [bell] or “off”. As a result, the player becomes interested in whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed each time the variable display is executed, and the first relative to the number of times the variable display is executed. You will also be interested in the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed (execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player guess the set value for each variable display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the first setting suggestion effect (YES in step S16TM2010), the presence or absence of the expectation notice effect is selected when the first setting suggestion effect is executed. It is determined based on the execution / non-execution determination table 1 (see FIGS. 10-6 (H1) and (H2)) of the expected degree advance notice effect (step S16TM2020). On the other hand, when it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect (NO in step S16TM2010), the process proceeds to step S16TM2120 described later.

FIG. 10-6 (H1) shows the execution ratio of the expectation level advance notice effect when it is determined to execute the first setting suggestion effect and the display result is “off”. In the table 1 for determining whether or not the expectation degree advance notice effect is executed, determination values for determining whether or not the expectation degree advance notice effect is executed are assigned to each of the deviation patterns. When the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach out" (variation time is 10 seconds), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the expectation level advance notice effect is not executed at a rate of 100%. Further, when the fluctuation pattern is "out of normal reach" (variation time is 30 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 100%. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is "out of super reach" (variation time is 120 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 60%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 40%. To do.

FIG. 10-6 (H2) shows the execution ratio of the expectation level advance notice effect when it is determined to execute the first setting suggestion effect and the display result is a “big hit”. In the table 1 for determining whether or not the expectation degree advance notice effect is executed, determination values for determining whether or not the expectation degree advance notice effect is executed are assigned to each of the jackpot fluctuation patterns. When the fluctuation pattern is "normal reach jackpot" (variation time is 30 seconds), the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 100%. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is "super reach jackpot" (variation time is 120 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 20%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 80%. To do.

As shown in FIGS. 10-6 (H1) and (H2), whether or not the expectation level advance notice effect is executed is determined based on the fluctuation pattern (variation time). In the present embodiment, when it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is non-reach off (10 seconds), normal reach off (30 seconds), or normal reach jackpot (30 seconds). If it is (seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 100%, and if the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is out of super reach (120 seconds), the expectation notice effect is given. It is decided to execute at a rate of 40%, and in the case of a super reach jackpot (120 seconds), it is decided to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 80%.

When a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time (non-reach off (10 seconds), normal reach off (30 seconds), normal reach jackpot (30 seconds)) is selected, both the first setting suggestion effect and the expectation notice effect There is not enough time to perform the production of. Therefore, when the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is executed, the first setting suggestion effect can be executed, but the expectation notice effect is not executed after the first setting suggestion effect is executed. There is.

On the other hand, when a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time (super reach off (120 seconds), super reach jackpot (120 seconds)) is selected, both the first setting suggestion effect and the expectation notice effect are produced. There is enough time to do it. Therefore, it is possible to execute the expectation degree advance notice effect after executing the first setting suggestion effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed is determined based on a common table regardless of the fluctuation time. When the fluctuation time is short, the fluctuation time is long. In any case, the first setting suggestion effect is executed at a common ratio. On the other hand, the expectation notice effect is executed at a higher rate when the fluctuation time is long than when the fluctuation time is short. That is, when the fluctuation time of the variable display to be executed is shorter than [the rate at which the expectation notice effect is executed after the first setting suggestion effect is executed], the fluctuation time of the variable display to be executed is longer. [The rate at which the expectation notice effect is executed after the first setting suggestion effect is executed] is higher.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the expectation advance notice effect (YES in step S16TM2030), the display result of stopping and displaying in the second mini-slot variable display described above, and the second change. Whether or not to execute the effect is determined based on the character icon determination table (see FIG. 10-6 (J)) (step S16TM2040). The second change effect changes the display mode of the active display 16TM003 by superimposing a character icon based on the "character symbol as a display result stopped in the second mini-slot variable display" on the active display 16TM003. It is a production to make you. In the present embodiment, the second change effect is executed except when the display result stopped by the second mini-slot variable display becomes the display result of "no display" in which the character symbol is not displayed. Become. On the other hand, when it is decided not to execute the expectation degree advance notice effect (NO in step S16TM2030), the process proceeds to step S16TM2060 described later.

FIG. 10-6 (J) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the character icon determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-6 (J), in this embodiment, when it is decided to execute the expectation notice effect, the character symbol is a mini slot as a display result of the second mini slot variable display. It is possible to determine one of the display result "no display" which is not displayed in the symbol display area 5LCR1 and the character symbol "CHANGE", "extreme heat", and "FEVER", and each of these displays. Judgment values are assigned to each result.

As shown in FIG. 10-6 (J), when the display result of the variation display is "off" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "off"), the variation As the display result of the second mini-slot variable display to be executed in the display, "no display" is selected at a rate of 70%, "CHANGE" is selected at a rate of 25%, and "super heat" is selected at a rate of 5%. Is selected.

On the other hand, when the display result of the fluctuation display is "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "big hit"), the second mini-slot variable to be executed in the fluctuation display is variable. As the display result of the display, "No display" is selected at a rate of 22%, "CHANGE" is selected at a rate of 35%, "Fever" is selected at a rate of 40%, and "Intense heat" is selected at a rate of 3%. "FEVER" is selected. Therefore, when the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is "FEVER", the occurrence of a big hit is confirmed.

As shown in FIG. 10-6 (J), regarding the display result of the second mini-slot variable display (variable display on one reel), "no display" <"CHANGE" <"super heat" <"FEVER" The expectation that it will be a big hit is high in this order. Therefore, when any of the character symbols of "CHANGE", "super heat", and "FEVER" is stopped (when the second change effect is executed after that), none of the character symbols is displayed without stopping. The rate of big hits is higher than when the result is "no display" (when the second change effect is not executed after that). In addition, since the jackpot expectation level differs depending on the character symbol to be stopped, the player pays attention to the display result of the second mini-slot variable display.

In the present embodiment, when the character symbol (any of "CHANGE", "super heat", and "FEVER") is stopped as the display result of the second mini-slot variable display, the display mode of the active display is changed. The second change effect is executed. Specifically, when any of the character symbols of "CHANGE", "super heat", and "FEVER" is stopped and displayed in the mini slot symbol display area 5LCR1 (1 reel) of the mini slot 16TM030, (i) The stopped-displayed character symbol moves upward from the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 and acts on the active display 16TM003 displayed in the active display area 16TM013 (see FIG. 10-10 (11)), (ii). The active display 16TM003 and the character icon based on the moved character pattern are superimposed and displayed (see FIG. 10-10 (12)). This character icon is an icon indicating the same character as the character symbol that is the display result of the second mini-slot variable display. That is, an effect in which a character icon indicating the same character as the character symbol as the display result is added to the active display 16TM003 is executed as the second change effect. On the other hand, when the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is "no display", the second change effect is not executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 uses the expected degree advance notice effect establishment combination when executing the first setting suggestion effect in the expectation degree advance notice effect establishment combination determination table 1 (see FIG. 10-7 (K)). (Step S16TM2050), and the process proceeds to step S16TM2060.

FIG. 10-7 (K) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the establishment combination determination table 1 of the expectation degree notice effect. As shown in FIG. 10-7 (K), in this embodiment, when it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the expected degree advance notice effect is established, more specifically, the expectation degree. "Out of place", "watermelon", "watermelon (via replay)", "cherry", "cherry (via replay)", as the winning combination of the first mini slot variable display executed in the advance notice production (same below), It is possible to determine any of "cherry (freeze)", "7-match", and "7-match (freeze)", and a determination value is assigned to each of these established combinations.

In the present embodiment, when "out of place" is selected as the winning combination of the expectation notice effect, the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 are stopped and displayed with a combination of mini-slot symbols including different symbols. For example, when [Replay] is displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5L1, [Replay] is displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5C1, and [Bell] is stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5R1, the expected degree advance notice effect is established. It becomes "off".

In the present embodiment, when "watermelon", "cherry", and "7-match" are selected as the winning combination of the expectation notice effect, the mini-slot symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 is a mini with the same symbol combination. Stop and display the slot symbol. For example, when the combination of the mini-slot symbols of [watermelon], [watermelon], and [watermelon] is stopped and displayed as the combination of the same symbols in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, the expected degree notice effect is established. Becomes "watermelon".

In the present embodiment, when "watermelon (via replay)" and "cherry (via replay)" are selected as the winning combination of the expectation notice effect, the same symbols are displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. After stopping and displaying the combination of [Replay], [Replay], and [Replay] mini-slot symbols as a combination, the mini-slot symbols are re-variated in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 to display the mini-slot symbols. Areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 can be combined with [watermelon], [watermelon], [watermelon] mini-slot symbols, or [cherry], [cherry], [cherry] mini-slot symbols as a combination of the same symbols. Stop display.

In the present embodiment, when "cherry (freeze)" or "7 alignment (freeze)" is selected as the winning combination of the expectation notice effect, the normal mode (freeze) is set in the mini slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. After executing the variable display of the mini-slot symbol in a freeze mode different from the scroll display from top to bottom and the update display), [cherry], [cherry], and [cherry] are displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. ], Or the combination of the mini-slot symbols of [7], [7], and [7] is stopped and displayed. The variable display of the freeze mode in the present embodiment is a mini-slot symbol that executes scroll display or update display from the bottom to the top with the visibility of the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 lowered. It is a variable display.

As shown in FIG. 10-7 (K), when the display result to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "no display" (a symbol in which characters are not displayed) (that is, the second change effect is not executed). In the case of), the winning combination in the expectation notice production is "missing" at a rate of 100%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (K), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "CHANGE" (that is, the character icon to be superimposed and displayed on the active display in the second change effect is ". In the case of "CHARCE"), the winning combination in the expectation notice production is "missing" at a rate of 5%, "watermelon" at a rate of 45%, and "watermelon (via replay)" at a rate of 20%. 20% will be "cherry", 2% will be "cherry (via replay)", and 8% will be "cherry (freeze)".

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (K), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "extreme heat" (that is, the character icon to be superimposed and displayed on the active display in the second change effect is displayed. In the case of "super heat"), the winning role in the expectation notice production is "watermelon" at a rate of 15%, "watermelon (via replay)" at a rate of 10%, and "watermelon" at a rate of 40%. It becomes "cherry", 10% becomes "cherry (via replay)", and 25% becomes "cherry (freeze)".

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (K), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "FEVER" (that is, the character icon to be superimposed and displayed on the active display in the second change effect is ". In the case of "FEVER"), the winning combination in the expectation notice production is "7 sets" at a rate of 70% and "7 sets (freeze)" at a rate of 30%.

As shown in FIG. 10-7 (K), when the winning combination is "missing", the stop symbol is "no display" or "CHANGE", and when the winning combination is "watermelon" or "cherry", the stop symbol ( When the character icon) becomes "CHANGE" or "super heat" and the winning combination is "7 sets", the stop symbol (character icon) becomes "FEVER". In addition, when the winning combination is "off", "no display" is easier to select than "CHANGE" as the stopping symbol, and when the winning combination is "watermelon", the stop symbol (character icon) is "super heat". "CHANGE" is easier to select than "CHANGE", and when the winning combination is "cherry", "super heat" is more likely to be selected as the stop symbol (character icon) than "CHANGE".

That is, with respect to the stop symbol of the second mini-slot variable display, the degree of expectation controlled to the jackpot game state increases in the order of "no display" <"CHANGE" <"super heat" <"FEVER", and the first Regarding the winning combination of the mini-slot variable display, the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot game state is higher in the order of "missing" <"watermelon" <"cherry" <"7 matching". In addition, when "7-match" is selected as the winning combination of the first mini-slot variable display, the stop symbol of the second mini-slot variable display is always "FEVER", so "7-match" is confirmed as a big hit. It is a production of. According to such a configuration, the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot game state can be changed according to the winning combination composed of a plurality of types of mini-slot symbols, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (K), the winning combination with the variable display of the freeze mode is limited to "cherry (freeze)" and "7 sets (freeze)". Then, when "cherry (freeze)" is selected as the winning combination, the display result (character icon) becomes "CHANGE" or "super heat", and "7 matching (freeze)" is selected as the winning combination. The notice character (character icon) is "FEVER". That is, when the mini-slot symbol performs variable display in the freeze mode, the winning combination of "cherry" or higher ("cherry" or "7 sets") is determined, so that the mini-slot symbol is variablely displayed in the normal mode. The expectation that the jackpot game state will be controlled is higher than when it is performed. According to such a configuration, the player can pay attention to the variable display mode of the mini-slot symbol, and the interest of the game can be improved.

On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the first setting suggestion effect (NO in step S16TM2010), the presence or absence of the expectation notice effect is selected when the first setting suggestion effect is not executed. It is determined based on the execution presence / absence determination table 2 (see FIGS. 10-6 (I1) and (I2)) of the expected degree advance notice effect (step S16TM2120).

FIG. 10-6 (I1) shows the execution ratio of the expectation level advance notice effect when it is determined not to execute the first setting suggestion effect and the display result is “off”. In the table 2 for determining whether or not the expectation degree advance notice effect is executed, determination values for determining whether or not the expectation degree advance notice effect is executed are assigned to each of the deviation patterns. When the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach out" (variation time is 10 seconds), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the expectation level advance notice effect is not executed at a rate of 100%. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is "out of normal reach" (fluctuation time is 30 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 80%, and to execute it at a rate of 20%. .. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is "out of super reach" (variation time is 120 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 40%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 60%. To do.

FIG. 10-6 (I2) shows the execution ratio of the expectation level advance notice effect when it is determined not to execute the first setting suggestion effect and the display result is a “big hit”. In the table 2 for determining whether or not the expectation degree advance notice effect is executed, determination values for determining whether or not the expectation degree advance notice effect is executed are assigned to each of the jackpot fluctuation patterns. When the fluctuation pattern is "normal reach jackpot" (variation time is 30 seconds), the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 30%, and executes it at a rate of 70%. Decide on that. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is "super reach jackpot" (variation time is 120 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 10%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 90%. To do.

Here, in the examples of FIGS. 10 (H1) and 10 (H2) in which it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect, when the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach" is selected, the expectation notice effect is not executed. In the examples of FIGS. 10 (I1) and (I2), which were determined (“no execution” is 100%) but determined not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the “normal reach” fluctuation pattern was selected. In some cases, it may be decided to execute the expectation notice effect ("execution" is 20% for "normal reach off" and 70% for "normal reach jackpot").

Further, in the examples of FIGS. 10 (H1) and 10 (H2) determined to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the ratio of executing the expectation notice effect when the fluctuation pattern of "super reach" is selected ("" In the example of FIGS. 10 (I1) and (I2), it was decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, rather than 40% for "super reach out" and 80% for "super reach jackpot". When the fluctuation pattern is selected, the ratio of executing the expectation notice effect is higher (60% for "super reach out" and 90% for "super reach jackpot"). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first setting suggestion effect is not executed, the expectation notice effect is executed at a higher rate than when the first setting suggestion effect is executed. ..

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the expectation advance notice effect (YES in step S16TM2130), the display result of stopping and displaying in the second mini-slot variable display described above, and the second change. Whether or not to execute the effect is determined based on the character icon determination table (see FIG. 10-6 (J)) (step S16TM2140). On the other hand, when it is decided not to execute the expectation degree advance notice effect (NO in step S16TM2130), the process proceeds to step S16TM2060 described later.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 uses the expected degree notice effect establishment combination when the first setting suggestion effect is not executed in the expected degree notice effect establishment combination determination table 2 (see FIG. 10-7 (L)). (Step S16TM2150), and the process proceeds to step S16TM2060.

FIG. 10-7 (L) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the establishment combination determination table 2 of the expectation degree notice effect. As shown in FIG. 10-7 (L), in this embodiment, when it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the expected degree notice effect is established, more specifically, the expectation degree "Out of place", "watermelon", "watermelon (via replay)", "cherry", "cherry (via replay)", as the winning combination of the first mini slot variable display executed in the notice production It is possible to determine any of "cherry (freeze)", "7-match", and "7-match (freeze)", and a determination value is assigned to each of these established combinations.

As shown in FIG. 10-7 (L), when the display result to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "no display" (a symbol in which characters are not displayed) (that is, the second change effect is not executed). In the case of), the winning combination in the expectation notice production is "missing" at a rate of 100%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (L), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "CHANGE" (that is, the character icon to be superimposed and displayed on the active display in the second change effect is ". In the case of "CHARCE"), the winning combination in the expectation notice production is "missing" at a rate of 5%, "watermelon" at a rate of 15%, and "watermelon (via replay)" at a rate of 50%. Then, 2% becomes "cherry", 18% becomes "cherry (via replay)", and 10% becomes "cherry (freeze)".

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (L), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "extreme heat" (that is, the character icon to be superimposed and displayed on the active display in the second change effect). In the case of "super heat"), the winning role in the expectation notice production is "watermelon" at a rate of 10%, "watermelon (via replay)" at a rate of 15%, and "watermelon" at a rate of 10%. It becomes "cherry", 38% becomes "cherry (via replay)", and 27% becomes "cherry (freeze)".

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (L), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "FEVER" (that is, the character icon to be superimposed and displayed on the active display in the second change effect is ". In the case of "FEVER"), the winning combination in the expectation notice production is "7 sets" at a rate of 30% and "7 sets (freeze)" at a rate of 70%.

In the present embodiment, there are cases where it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect and cases where it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, and the first mini-slot in the expectation notice effect. An example is shown in which the winning combination of the variable display (that is, the winning combination other than the "bell") is determined based on different tables, but it is not limited to such a form, and it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect. The winning combination of the first mini-slot variable display (that is, the winning combination other than the "bell") in the expectation notice effect is common between the case where the first setting suggestion effect is performed and the case where it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect. It may be decided based on the table of. That is, while step S16TM2020 and step S16TM2120 determine whether or not to execute the expectation degree advance notice effect at different ratios (based on the execution presence / absence determination table of the different expectation degree advance notice effect), the common establishment combination in step S16TM2050 and step S16TM2150. The winning combination of the first mini-slot variable display in the expectation notice effect may be determined based on the determination table.

As shown above, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the low probability low base state (normal state), the first mini-slot symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 is used every time the variation display is executed. The mini-slot variable display (first time) is executed, and the winning combination is "bell" or "missing". Then, after the end of the first mini-slot variable display (first time), when (i) the first mini-slot variable display (second time) is executed during the variable display (expectation notice effect is executed). (Case) and (ii) the first mini-slot variable display (second time) is not executed (the expectation notice effect is not executed).

Here, (i) when the first mini-slot variable display (second time) is executed (when the expectation degree notice effect is executed), the established combination determined based on the established combination determination table is established. Later, the second mini-slot variable display (first time) is further executed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1. Then, as the display result of the second mini-slot variable display (first time), (a) a symbol that does not include a character (“not displayed”) or (b) a character symbol (“CHANCE”, “super heat””. , "FEVER") stops. (B) When the character symbol ("CHANGE", "super heat", "FEVER") is stopped, the second change effect in which the character icon based on the character symbol is added to the active display is executed. Become.

As described above, in the above embodiment, when the second mini-slot variable display (first time) is executed and (a) the symbol (“no display”) that does not include the character is stopped, that is, the second Even if the change effect is not executed, (i) the first mini-slot variable display (second time) is always executed before that, and the effect is always "missing". .. Not limited to this, when the second mini-slot variable display (first time) is executed and (a) the symbol (“no display”) that does not include the character is stopped (when the second change effect is not executed). In addition, in (i) the first mini-slot variable display (second time) executed before that, there is a possibility that a winning combination other than "off" is established.

In addition, when the second mini-slot variable display (first time) is executed and (a) a symbol (“no display”) that does not include a character is stopped (when the second change effect is not executed), (I) The first mini-slot variable display (second time) itself may not be executed. That is, after the first mini-slot variable display (first time) in the mini-slot symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 (in the 3-reel system), the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 (in the 1-reel system). The second mini-slot variable display (first time) may be executed.

Further, as the display result of the second mini-slot variable display (first time), (b) the character symbol (“CHANGE”, “super heat”, “FEVER”) may be stopped without fail. That is, when the second mini-slot variable display (in the one-reel system) in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is executed, the second change effect may be executed after that. When such an effect configuration is adopted, the winning combination of (i) the first mini-slot variable display (second time) executed before the second mini-slot variable display (first time) is "missing". It may not be.

Next, when the value of the fluctuation count counter is 25 × n (n is an integer) [a multiple of 25] (YES in step S16TM2060), the effect control CPU 120 executes the second setting suggestion effect described later. Whether or not to execute the second setting suggestion effect is determined based on the execution presence / absence determination table (see FIG. 10-7 (M)) (step S16TM2070), and the process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the fluctuation count counter is not 25 × n (n is an integer) (NO in step S16TM2060), the process ends as it is.

Here, in the present embodiment, the second setting suggestion effect can be executed as an effect suggesting the currently set setting value in the low probability and low base state. In this second setting suggestion effect, the fluctuation number display 16TM040 displayed in the normal mode (white mode in this example) at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed in purple at the timing when the variation display of the special symbol is started. It is an effect that changes the mode. Then, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the second setting suggestion effect, the second setting suggestion effect is ended, and the variation number display 16TM040 displayed in purple on the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed in the normal mode. Return to.

In FIG. 10-7 (M), determination values for determining whether or not to execute the second setting suggestion effect are assigned according to the currently set set values. When the set value is "1", the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 90%, and decides to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 10%. When the set value is "2", it is decided not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 88%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 12%. When the set value is "3", it is decided not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 86%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 14%. When the set value is "4", it is decided not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 84%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 16%. When the set value is "5", it is decided not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 82%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 18%. When the set value is "6", it is decided not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 80%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 20%.

In the present embodiment, when the game state is the low probability low base state, the mini slot 16TM030 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the first setting suggestion effect, the second change effect, and the expectation level advance notice effect are executed. However, the image display device 5 is not limited to such a mode, and when the gaming state is any of the low accuracy high base state, the high accuracy high base state, and the high accuracy low base state, the image display device 5 is miniatured. Slot 16TM030 may be displayed and any of the first setting suggestion effect, the second change effect, or the expectation degree advance notice effect may be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the variation number display 16TM040 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the second setting suggestion effect is executed when the game state is the low probability low base state. Regardless of the form, when the gaming state is any of the low accuracy high base state, the high accuracy high base state, and the high accuracy low base state, the image display device 5 displays the variation number display 16TM040, and the second The setting suggestion effect may be executed.

As shown in FIG. 10-5, after determining whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2000, whether or not to execute the expectation notice effect is determined in step S16TM2020 or step S16TM2120, and further, in step S16TM2050 or step S16TM2150. The role of establishing the expectation notice production has been decided. When determining the first setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2000, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (G), whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined based on the currently set setting value. In this embodiment, the first setting suggestion effect can be executed regardless of the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time).

Further, when the first setting suggestion effect is executed (YES in step S16TM2010) and the expectation level advance notice effect is executed, as shown in FIGS. 10-6 (H1) and (H2), the fluctuation pattern (variation time) Based on the above, it is decided whether or not to execute the expectation notice production. If the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is non-reach out of reach (10 seconds), normal reach out of reach (30 seconds), or normal reach jackpot (30 seconds), it is decided that "expectation notice effect is not executed" at a rate of 100%. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is out of the super reach (120 seconds), it is decided to "execute the expectation notice effect" at a rate of 40%, and in the case of the super reach jackpot (120 seconds). Determines to "execute the expectation notice production" at a rate of 80%.

In this way, the first setting suggestion effect can be executed regardless of the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time), and the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the image display device 5 can be executed regardless of the fluctuation pattern (variation time). , [Bell], [Bell], and [Bell] mini-slot symbols can be stopped and displayed. Further, when the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is super reach (120 seconds), the first setting suggestion effect and the expectation level advance notice effect can be executed, and the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1 and 5C1 of the image display device 5 can be executed. After displaying the combination stop display of the [bell], [bell], and [bell] mini-slot symbols on 5R1, the same except for [bell] is displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the image display device 5. It is possible to stop and display a combination of symbols (for example, [watermelon], [watermelon], [watermelon] or [7], [7], [7], etc.). According to such a configuration, in the mini slot 16TM030, the first setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value can be executed, and the expectation notice effect suggesting the expectation that the display result becomes a "big hit" can be executed. It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

As shown in FIG. 10-6 (G), each time the first setting suggestion effect whose execution rate differs depending on the set value is executed, the player himself counts the number of times the first setting suggestion effect is executed. , The player himself calculates the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect [execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect = (number of times the first setting suggestion effect is executed / number of fluctuations) × 100], and the calculated first setting suggestion The player can infer the set value by determining which of the set values of the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect for each well-known set value the effect execution ratio is close to.

Temporarily, a configuration was adopted in which the determination of whether or not to execute the expectation degree advancement effect is performed before the determination of whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed, and the expectation degree advance notice effect is executed with priority over the first setting suggestion effect. In that case, due to the relationship between the decision to execute the expectation notice effect and the fluctuation time, the execution lottery of the first setting suggestion effect itself is not performed, or the execution lottery of the first setting suggestion effect is won. Even so, there may be a case where the first setting suggestion effect is not executed because the expectation notice effect is prioritized. As a result, the degree of deviation between the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect calculated by the player and the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect based on the actual set value becomes large. Then, the importance of the first setting suggestion effect as an element for estimating the set value is reduced, and the player may not pay attention to it. In order to solve such a problem, as shown in step S16TM2000 and step S16TM2020 of FIG. 10-5, whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined before whether or not the expectation level advance notice effect is executed. A configuration is adopted in which the first setting suggestion effect is executed with priority over the expectation notice effect.

(Specific example of executing change effect and setting suggestion effect)
Next, with respect to specific examples when it is decided to execute the first change effect, the second change effect, the first setting suggestion effect, the second setting suggestion effect, and the expectation degree notice effect, FIGS. 10-8 to 10 This will be described using -10. 10-8 are time charts when the first change effect, the second change effect, the first setting suggestion effect, the second setting suggestion effect, and the expectation level advance notice effect are executed, and FIGS. 10-9 and 10 -10 shows an example of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the first change effect, the second change effect, the first setting suggestion effect, the second setting suggestion effect, and the expectation degree advance notice effect are executed. It is explanatory drawing.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 10-8 to 10-10, when the CPU 103 wins a start, the display result of the variation display corresponding to the start prize is a "big hit" in the first start prize determination process (S101A). This is an example when it is determined that this is the case (when specified by the symbol specification command). Then, based on this, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode (final display color) of the active display to the red mode in step S16TM1010 in the start winning change effect determination process, and changes the active display in step S16TM1020. This is an example of a case where the pattern is decided to be the change pattern 022 and the first change effect of the success mode is decided to be executed.

Further, the CPU 103 determines that the display result of the fluctuation display becomes a "big hit" at the start of the fluctuation (specified by the display result specification command), and sets the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the fluctuation display to the "super reach jackpot". This is an example of the case where "(120 seconds)" is determined (when specified by the fluctuation pattern command). Then, based on this, the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the first setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2000 in the change start effect determination process at the start of fluctuation, and executes the expectation notice effect in step S16TM2020. In step S16TM2040, it was decided to set the display result of the second mini-slot variable display to "extreme heat" and to execute the second change effect, and in step S16TM2050, the expectation notice effect was produced. This is an example in which it is decided that the winning combination of is "cherry (freeze)", and it is decided to execute the second setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2070.

First, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (1), when the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy low base state, the display of the variation display of the first special symbol that was executed last time (most recently executed). Based on the result being "off", the effect control CPU 120 when the variation display is fixedly stopped in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of decorative patterns (“247” in this example) is continuously displayed. Further, based on the fact that the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol (most recently executed) executed last time was "missing", the small symbol display area 5l and the small symbol display area of the image display device 5 In 5c and the small symbol display area 5r, the combination of small symbols (“247” in this example) when the fluctuation display is fixedly stopped is continuously displayed. The effect control CPU 120 displays four first hold displays 16TM001 in the first hold display area 16TM011 of the image display device 5 in response to the number of first hold storages being 4.

In the low-accuracy low-base state, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (1), the number of times the variable display is executed in the low-accuracy low-base state (normal state) in the image display device 5 is calculated. The fluctuation number display 16TM040 is displayed. In this example, it is assumed that the fluctuation display has been executed 124 times so far after shifting to the low-accuracy low-base state, and as shown in FIG. 10-9 (1), the fluctuation count display 16TM040 is set to "124" or the like. The screen when the character of is displayed in the normal mode (white mode) is shown.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the fact that the winning combination (display result) of the variable display of the mini slot symbol that was executed last time (immediately executed) was "missing", and the mini of the image display device 5. In the slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, the combination of mini-slot symbols ([replay], [replay], and [bell] in this example) when the variable display is fixedly stopped is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (2), when the CUP 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 10-8), the effect control CPU 120 is the image display device 5. The variation display of the decorative symbol is started in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the variation display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed in the active display area 16TM013 of the image display device 5, and corresponds to the case where the first reserved storage number is 3. Then, three first hold display 16TM001 are displayed in the first hold display area 16TM011 of the image display device 5.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (2), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and steps. Based on the determination that the second setting suggestion effect is executed in S16TM2070, the second setting suggestion effect is executed. In this example, it is assumed that the fluctuation display has been executed 125 times so far after shifting to the low-accuracy low-base state, and as shown in FIG. 10-9 (2), the fluctuation number display 16TM040 is "125" or the like. The case where the characters of are displayed in purple mode is shown. The player grasps that the setting suggestion is made by changing the display mode of the variation number display 16TM040 from the conventional normal mode (white mode) to the purple mode. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols is continued in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (3), the effect control CPU 120 is in a state of continuing the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. 10). (Timing of T2 shown in −8), based on the decision to execute the first setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2000, the minislot in the minislot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the image display device 5. The variable display of the symbol (variable display of the first mini slot) is started. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols is continued in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (4), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. 10). (Timing of T3 shown in −8), the second setting suggestion effect is terminated, and the variation number display 16TM040 (characters such as “125”) displayed in the purple mode is returned to the normal mode (white mode). At this time, the variation display of the small symbols is continued in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, and the mini slot symbols are variable in the mini slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the image display device 5. The display is continuing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (5), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. 10). (Timing of T4 shown in −8), success based on the decision in step S16TM1020 to set the change pattern of the active display to the change pattern 022 and to execute the first change effect of the success mode. The first change effect of the aspect is executed. In this example, the character 16TM050 appears, and an effect of throwing a ball toward the active display 16TM003 is executed. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character 16TM050 corresponds to the active display 16TM003, the player can be expected to change the mode of the active display 16TM003.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, and in the mini slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the image display device 5. , The variable display of the mini slot symbol is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (6), the effect control CPU 120 is in a state of continuing the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. 10). (Timing of T5 shown in −8), the display mode of the active display 16TM003 is changed from the normal mode to the red mode (in this example, the white round display to the red round shape) in response to the execution of the first change effect of the successful mode. Display). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. Further, the effect control CPU 120 is a combination of mini slot symbols when the first setting suggestion effect is executed in the mini slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the image display device 5 (in this example, [bell] [ Bell] [Bell]) is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (7), the effect control CPU 120 is in a state of continuing the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. 10). (Timing of T6 shown in -8), based on the fact that it was decided in step S16TM2050 that the winning combination of the expectation notice effect was "cherry (freeze)", the expectation notice effect was executed and the image display device. In the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of 5, variable display of the mini-slot symbol in the freeze mode is started. In this example, when the variable display of the freeze mode is executed, the dark image 16TM100 is displayed as a covering image covering the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, thereby reducing the visibility of the mini-slot symbol and visually recognizing it. In a difficult state, the variable display (scroll display or update display) of the mini slot symbol is executed from the bottom to the top. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

In the present embodiment, in order to reduce the visibility of the mini slot symbol, the dark image 16TM100 covering the mini slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 is displayed, so that the mini has a lower display priority than the dark image 16TM100. Although the slot pattern is difficult to see, it is slightly visible (that is, the layer transparency of the darkened image 16TM100 is not 0%), but it is not limited to such a form and is more than the darkened image 16TM100. A mini-slot symbol with a low display priority (an image whose display layer is lower and can be seen behind the darkened image 16TM100 when viewed from the player) becomes completely invisible (that is, the layer transparency of the darkened image 16TM100 is 0). It may be%).

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (8), the effect control CPU 120 is in a state of continuing the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. 10). (Timing of T7 shown in −8), based on the fact that it was decided in step S16TM2050 that the winning combination of the expectation notice effect was “cherry (freeze)”, the mini slot symbol display area 5L1 of the image display device 5 In 5, C1 and 5R1, the combination of mini-slot symbols ([cherry], [cherry], and [cherry] in this example) when the winning combination is "cherry" is stopped and displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (9), the effect control CPU 120 sets "7" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing when the reach state in the fluctuation pattern should be established. The decorative symbol of No. 1 is stopped and displayed to bring it into a reach state, and the characters "reach !!" are displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5 (timing of T8 in FIG. 10-8). At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the variable display of the small symbol is continued. That is, the small symbol is also stopped in the small symbol display area 5l corresponding to the symbol display area 5L in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the small symbol display area 5r corresponding to the symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. It is continuously displayed in a variable manner without being displayed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 changes the mode of the mini-slot 16TM030 from the mode corresponding to the first mini-slot variable display to the mode corresponding to the second mini-slot variable display when the reach state is established. .. That is, the area where the mini-slot 16TM030 is displayed is changed from the 3-reel mini-slot symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 to the 1-reel mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1. One reel mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 can display any one of a plurality of types of mini-slot symbols ("no display", "CHANGE", "super heat", "FEVER") as a display result. If the result is a symbol containing a notice character ("CHANGE", "super heat", "FEVER"), the icon of the notice character that is the display result is added to the active display based on the display result. The second change effect is executed. Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts variable display of the mini-slot symbol in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (10), the effect control CPU 120 determines in step S16TM2040 that the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is "extreme heat", that is, Based on the fact that the notice character of the expectation notice effect is decided to be "super heat", the design including the notice character of "super heat" is stopped and displayed in the mini slot symbol display area 5LCR1 of the image display device 5. (Timing of T9 in FIG. 10-8). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (11), the effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute the second change effect (stop and display the symbol including the warning character) in step S16TM2040. Based on this, the second change effect is executed (timing of T10 in FIG. 10-8). In this example, when the display mode of the active display 16TM003 is changed, the mini-slot symbol (in this example, the “super heat” symbol) that is stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is displayed from the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1. The effect of moving to the active display area 16TM013 and acting on the active display 16TM003 is executed. More specifically, by displaying an effect image indicating that the mini-slot symbol (in this example, the “super heat” symbol) protruding from the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 hits the active display 16TM003, the effect image is displayed. It suggests to the player that the mode of the active display 16TM003 changes. At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the variable display of the small symbol is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (12), the battle effect is executed according to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach. Here, along with the execution of the battle effect, the ally character 16TM060 and the enemy character 16TM070 are displayed on the image display device 5 (timing of T11 shown in FIG. 10-8). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 superimposes and displays the character icon based on the mini-slot symbol (in this example, the character icon of "super heat") that is stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 on the active display 16TM003. The display mode of the active display 16TM003 is changed. That is, a character icon indicating the same character as the notice character (“super heat” in this example) that is the display result is added to the active display 16TM003.

As shown in FIGS. 10-9 and 10-10, when the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the currently executing fluctuation display is displayed in the active display area 16TM013, the mini slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 The combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "cherry" ([cherry], [cherry], [cherry] in this example) is stopped and displayed (Fig. 10-9 (8)), and then the mini-slot symbol is displayed. The mini-slot symbol (“super heat” in this example) as a warning character for the expectation notice effect is stopped and displayed in the area 5LCR1 (Fig. 10-10 (10)), and then stopped in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1. The second change effect of adding a character icon indicating the same character as the displayed mini-slot pattern character (“super heat” in this example) to the active display 16TM003 is being executed (FIGS. 10-10 (11) and (12). )).

According to such a configuration, the display mode of the active display 16TM003 is changed according to the combination of the mini-slot symbols stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 where the first setting suggestion effect is executed. Since the two-change effect can be executed, the interest of the setting suggestion effect can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-8 to 10-10, the first setting suggestion effect is terminated before the battle effect executed according to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is started. I am doing it. That is, before the battle effect is executed, in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the image display device 5, a combination of mini-slot symbols corresponding to the first setting suggestion effect (in this example, [bell] [ Bell] [Bell]) is hidden. In this way, the first setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value is executed in the first half of the variation display (before the reach state is established), that is, before the display result of the variation display is suggested. It is possible to raise interest in suggestive production. In addition, the latter half of the fluctuation display (after the reach state is established), that is, the stage after the display result of the fluctuation display is suggested (after the battle effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is started). Then, since the first setting suggestion effect has already been completed, it is possible to pay attention to the display result (result of the battle effect) of the variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (1), the mini-slot symbol display of the image display device 5 is based on the determination that the first setting suggestion effect is not executed and the expectation notice effect is not executed. In areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, the combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "out of place" (in this example, [replay], [replay], and [bell]) stops. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (6), based on the decision to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the mini-slot symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the image display device 5 is established. The combination of mini-slot symbols whose role is "bell" ([bell], [bell], [bell] in this example) stops. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (8), the mini-slot symbol display of the image display device 5 is based on the fact that it is decided to execute the expectation notice effect and the winning combination is determined to be "cherry". In areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, the combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "cherry" (in this example, [cherry], [cherry], and [cherry]) stops. In this way, since it is possible to stop and display any one of a plurality of types of winning combinations in the mini slot 16TM030, the variable display of the minislot symbol is executed in the minislot 16TM030 for the game. You can improve your interest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-9 (2) and (3), the number of fluctuations is displayed in the lower left area of the image display device 5 which is different from the special effect area 16TM035 (lower center of the screen of the image display device 5). A second setting suggestion effect is performed in which the 16TM040 is changed from the normal mode (white mode) to the purple mode. Here, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (G), the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect ranges from 3% (set value 1) to 8% (set value 6), whereas the figure shows. As shown in 10-7 (M), the execution rate of the second setting suggestion effect ranges from 10% (setting value 1) to 20% (setting value 6), so that both effects are executed the same number of times. If it is assumed that the setting value has been set, the second setting suggestion effect is easier to guess than the first setting suggestion effect. Specifically, the execution ratio calculated based on the number of executions of the first setting suggestion effect is compared with the predetermined effect execution ratio (3% to 8%) corresponding to each set value (1 to 6). Therefore, the set value corresponding to the effect execution ratio closest to the former is estimated as the set value of the game machine. Further, the execution ratio calculated based on the number of executions of the second setting suggestion effect is compared with the predetermined effect execution ratio (10% to 20%) corresponding to each set value (1 to 6), and the former is selected. The set value corresponding to the closest effect execution ratio is estimated as the set value of the game machine. When such an estimation is made, the set value estimated based on the number of executions of the second setting suggestion effect is larger than the set value estimated based on the number of executions of the first setting suggestion effect. It is highly possible that it is the setting value of the machine (the reliability of the setting suggestion is high). However, in the present embodiment, the execution lottery is performed for each variation display for the first setting suggestion effect, and the execution lottery is performed for each 25 variation display for the second setting suggestion effect. The execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect is higher than the execution frequency of the second setting suggestion effect. Therefore, the first setting suggestion effect is executed more times within the same fluctuation display number of times (within the same time) than the second setting suggestion effect, which is useful for estimating the set value. .. As described above, by providing a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects in which the ratio of the set values suggested by the effects to the set values of the game machine is different, the interest of the setting suggestion effects can be improved.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-9 and 10-10, variation display of small symbols is executed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r provided in the upper right part of the screen of the image display device 5. ing. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the first setting suggestion effect is executed in the special effect area 16TM035 (lower center of the screen of the image display device 5), and the first setting suggestion effect is executed in the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. 2 Setting suggestion effect is executed. In this way, in the upper part of the screen, the variation display of the small symbol is executed as the effect corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol, whereas in the lower part of the screen, the setting suggestion effect (first setting suggestion effect, second setting suggestion effect, second). By executing the setting suggestion effect), the visibility of one of the effects does not deteriorate.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (A), as the display mode of the active display based on the determination result at the time of starting winning, a plurality of types of display modes (normal mode, blue mode, and red mode) ( Display color). Then, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (5), the display mode (display) of the active display 16TM003 is accompanied by the appearance of the character 16TM050 and the execution of the action effect of the mode of throwing the ball toward the active display 16TM003. The first change effect of changing the normal mode (color) from the normal mode (white circle display) to the red mode (red circle display) is executed. Further, the second mini-slot variable display is executed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 based on the determination result at the start of fluctuation, and the character icon indicated by the character symbol is displayed based on the character symbol resulting from the display. The second change effect added to the active display 16TM003 is executed. In this way, the first change effect that changes the display color of the active display according to the action effect executed in the area different from the area where the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the area where the first setting suggestion effect is executed ( A second change effect that changes the display shape of the active display according to the action effect based on the notice characters displayed in the special effect area 16TM035). Can be further improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-10 (11) and 10-10 (12), the mini-slot symbol stopped in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 when the second change effect is executed (in this example, "super heat"). However, the effect of jumping out of the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 and hitting the active display 16TM003 displayed in the active display area 16TM013 is executed. Specifically, after the effect image indicating that the mini-slot symbol (“super heat” in this example) protruding from the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 hits the active display 16TM003 is displayed, the mini-slot symbol display area A character icon indicating the same character as the character of the mini-slot symbol stopped at 5LCR1 is added to the active display 16TM003. According to such a configuration, the effect executed in the mini slot 16TM030 and the display mode of the active display 16TM003 can be related to each other, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-7 (K) and 10-7 (L), the winning combination of the expectation notice effect (first mini-slot variable display (second time)) in the mini-slot 16TM030 is "missing" and "watermelon". , "Cherry", and "7 sets". Then, depending on the determined winning combination, the selection ratio of whether the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is "no display", "CHANGE", "super heat", or "FEVER" is selected. It's different. Further, in the present embodiment, when the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is any of the character symbols of "CHANGE", "super heat", and "FEVER", the mode of the character symbol and the mode of the character symbol are determined. It matches the mode of the character icon added to the active display 16TM003. That is, which mode of the character icon is added to the active display 16TM003 according to the winning combination of the expectation level advance notice effect (first mini-slot variable display (second time)) executed in the mini-slot 16TM030. The proportions are different. According to such a configuration, the effect executed in the mini slot 16TM030 and the display mode of the active display 16TM003 can be related to each other, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Display of the total result of the winning combination)
In this embodiment, during the demo display, the "volume adjustment" icon for adjusting the volume during the game, the "light amount adjustment" icon for adjusting the light amount during the game, and the low accuracy low base state (normal state). ), And a menu screen including an icon of "mini reel information" for confirming the number of times the variation is displayed (the number of times the variation of the special symbol is displayed) and the number of times each winning combination is won in the mini slot 16TM030 is displayed. By operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B on this menu screen, each icon of "volume adjustment", "light intensity adjustment", and "mini reel information" can be selected.

FIG. 10-11 is displayed on the full screen of the image display device 5 when the "mini reel information" icon is selected by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B while the menu screen is displayed. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the mini reel information.

As shown in FIGS. 10-11, the characters "mini reel information" are displayed in the upper left portion of the screen of the image display device 5. Further, in the central part of the screen of the image display device 5, the cumulative number of fluctuation displays (variation display of special symbols) executed in the low accuracy low base state (normal state) and the number of winnings of each winning combination in the mini slot 16TM030 are displayed. The mini reel information 16TM200 including the above, the selecting tab 16TM210 displaying the characters "today", and the next selection tab 16TM220 displaying the characters "previous day" are displayed. Further, on the right side of the screen of the image display device 5, an operation promotion display 16TM270 prompting to operate the stick controller 31A is displayed corresponding to the selected tab 16TM210. Further, at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5, an operation promotion display 16TM280 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B is displayed together with the characters “return”.

In the mini reel information 16TM200, the character "rotation speed" is displayed at the top as an item indicating the number of fluctuation display times, and correspondingly, the cumulative total of fluctuation display executed in the low accuracy low base state (normal state). The number of times "XXXX times" is displayed. In the second row, the character "bell" is displayed as an item indicating the winning combination bell, and correspondingly, the cumulative number of times the winning combination is "bell" in the first mini slot variable display "AAAA". "Times" and "Bell" winning probability "(1 / aaaa.a)" [= Cumulative number of times "Bell" was established / Cumulative number of fluctuation displays executed in the low probability low base state (normal state)] It is displayed. In the third row, the character "watermelon" is displayed as an item indicating the winning combination of watermelons, and in response to this, the cumulative number of times the winning combination is "watermelon" in the first mini slot variable display "BBBB". "Times" and the winning probability of "Watermelon" "(1 / bbbb.b)" [= Cumulative number of times "Watermelon" was established / Cumulative number of fluctuation displays executed in the low probability low base state (normal state)] It is displayed. In the 4th row, the character "cherry" is displayed as an item indicating the winning combination cherry, and correspondingly, the cumulative number of times the winning combination is "cherry" in the first mini slot variable display "CCCC". "Times" and "Cherry" winning probability "(1 / ccc.c)" [= Cumulative number of times "Cherry" was established / Cumulative number of fluctuation displays executed in the low probability low base state (normal state)] It is displayed. In the 5th row, the character "777" is displayed as an item indicating 7 sets of winning combinations, and correspondingly, the cumulative number of times that the winning combination is "7 sets" in the first mini slot variable display. "DDDD times" and the winning probability of "7 sets" "(1 / ddddd.d)" [= Cumulative number of times when "7 sets" was established / Low probability Low base state (normal state) Cumulative number] is displayed.

The cumulative number of times "7 sets" has been won (DDDD times) is a combination of mini slot symbols that are "7 sets" in the mini slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the mini slot 16TM030 (in this example). , [7] [7] [7]) indicate the number of times the game has stopped, and is counted separately from the number of times the jackpot has occurred and displayed as an item different from the number of times the jackpot has occurred.

In addition, each cumulative number of times (XXXX times, AAAA times, BBBB times, CCCC times, DDDD times) is displayed in a maximum of 4 digits, and the count is stopped at "9999 times". In addition, the denominator of the winning probability is displayed with a maximum of 5 digits including the first decimal place, and the count is stopped at "1 / 999.9". For each winning combination, if the number of winnings is 1 or more, the winning probability is displayed, and if the number of winnings is 0, the winning probability display is hidden.

In the present embodiment, the RAM 122 of the effect control board 12 stores the history information (each cumulative number of times described above, etc.) related to the mini reel information, and the effect control CPU 120 images the mini reel information based on the stored history information. It can be displayed on the display device 5. Specifically, the history information for three days of "today", "the day before", and "the day before the previous day" is stored in the backup storage area of the RAM 122, and the history information is retained even when the power is turned off.

As the mini reel information, the mini reel information of "today" is set as the default, and the characters "today" are displayed on the selected tab 16TM210 and the characters "previous day" are displayed on the next selection tab 16TM220. Further, an operation promotion display 16TM270 prompting the operator to operate the stick controller 31A is displayed on the right side of the screen of the image display device 5. Every time the controller sensor unit detects that the stick controller 31A has been operated while the operation promotion display 16TM270 is displayed, the mini reel information is switched from "previous day" to "two days before", and the selected tab 16TM210 is displayed. The characters are switched from "previous day" to "two days before", and the characters on the next selection tab 16TM220 are switched from "two days before" to "today". Then, when the controller sensor unit detects that the stick controller 31A has been operated while the mini reel information of "the day before the previous day" is selected, the information is switched to the mini reel information of "today" again, and the characters on the selected tab 16TM210 are displayed. Is switched to "today", and the characters on the next selection tab 16TM220 are switched to "previous day".

When the power of the game machine is turned on, the power-on history stored in the backup RAM is referred to, and if the date of the previous power-on and the date of the current power-on are different, the history information of the "previous day" is changed to ". After storing in the storage area corresponding to "the day before the previous day" (overwriting the history information), the history information of "today" is stored in the storage area corresponding to "the day before" (overwriting of the history information), and the data is updated. .. As a result, when the power is turned on at the start of business of "today", the "previous day" and "previous day" are based on the updated "previous day" and "previous day" historical information stored in the backup storage area. It is possible to display the mini reel information of "every day".

Further, in the present embodiment, an operation promotion display 16TM280 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 together with the characters “return”. When the push sensor detects that the push button 31B has been operated while the operation promotion display 16TM280 is displayed, the display of the mini reel information ends and the screen returns to the menu screen.

As shown in FIG. 10-11, when the "mini reel information" icon is selected by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B while the menu screen is displayed, "today" and "today" are backed up. The mini reel information based on the history information of "the day before" and "the day before the previous day" is displayed on the image display device 5. Then, in the mini reel information 16TM200, the execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect, and the winning probability of "bell", "(1 / aaaa.a)" [= cumulative number of times "bell" is established / low probability low base Cumulative number of variable displays executed in the state (normal state)] is displayed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the player himself counts the number of times the first setting suggestion effect is executed, the player himself calculates the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect, and the calculated first setting suggestion effect is performed. The set value can be estimated by determining which of the set values of the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect for each well-known set value the execution ratio is close to. However, when the player himself counts the number of times the first setting suggestion effect is executed, the number of times the first setting suggestion effect is executed may be erroneously counted. In the present embodiment, the player operates the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B during the demonstration display to confirm the execution probability (the winning probability of the "bell") of the first setting suggestion effect in the mini reel information. Therefore, even if the number of executions of the first setting suggestion effect is erroneously counted, the accurate execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect can be easily grasped.

(Other variants)
(1) In the above embodiment, the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are effects suggesting the currently set value, but the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are , It can be said that it is a production that suggests that the setting has been changed. For example, the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect is close to the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect (well-known execution rate) corresponding to the setting value 4, and the execution rate of the second setting suggestion effect is the set value. It is difficult for the player to estimate the actual set value when the execution ratio (well-known execution ratio) of the second setting suggestion effect corresponding to 2 is approximated. However, in such a situation, the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect indicated by the mini reel information of "the day before" and "the day before the previous day" is the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the set value 1 (well known). When it is close to the execution rate of), the player can infer that it is highly likely that the set value has been changed at least. That is, it can be inferred that the set values of "the day before" and "the day before the previous day" are the set values 1, and since there is a high possibility that the set values have been changed for "today", the current set values. Can be inferred to be at least a set value of 2 or more.

The setting suggestion effect (first setting suggestion effect, second setting suggestion effect) may be an effect executed at a different ratio depending on whether or not the set value is changed on the day. For example, when the set value is changed on the day, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the set value is not changed on the day.

Further, the setting suggestion effect (first setting suggestion effect, second setting suggestion effect) may be an effect executed at different ratios depending on the set value. For example, the effect may be executed at a higher rate when the set value is 3 or more than when the set value is 2 or less. Further, the setting suggestion effect (first setting suggestion effect, second setting suggestion effect) may be an effect in which the effect mode is determined at different ratios according to the set value. For example, when the set value is 2 or less, the display color of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be blue at a rate of 70% and red at a rate of 30%, while the set value is 3 or more. The display color of the setting suggestion effect may be determined to be blue at a rate of 30% and red at a rate of 70%.

(2) In the above embodiment, the degree of expectation that is controlled to the jackpot game state differs depending on the winning combination, and the degree of expectation increases in the order of "missing" <"watermelon" <"cherry" <"7 sets". An example is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the degree of expectation of a jackpot of a specific jackpot type may be different depending on the winning combination. For example, the degree of expectation that the jackpot type will be a probabilistic jackpot differs depending on the winning combination, and the degree of expectation may be higher in the order of "missing" <"watermelon" <"cherry" <"7 sets".

(3) In the above embodiment, an example of executing the first mini-slot variable display (first time) in which the winning combination is "out of place" based on the decision not to execute the first setting suggestion effect. Although shown, not limited to this, based on the decision not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, (i) execute the first mini-slot variable display (first time) in which the winning combination is "out of place". In some cases, (ii) the first mini-slot variable display itself may not be executed.

In the case where such an effect configuration is adopted, (ii) the first mini-slot variable display itself is not executed based on the decision not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, (a). When it is decided to execute the expectation notice effect, the first mini-slot variable display related to the expectation notice effect is executed, and a winning combination other than "bell" (including "off") is used as the winning combination. After the establishment, the second mini-slot variable display related to the expected degree notice effect is executed. On the other hand, based on the decision not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, it was decided not to execute (b) the expectation notice effect when (ii) the first mini-slot variable display itself is not executed. Occasionally, neither the first mini-slot variable display nor the second mini-slot variable display is executed during the variable display.

(4) In the above embodiment, when the menu screen is displayed during the demo display, the mini reel information is displayed by selecting the "mini reel information" icon by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. An example is shown in which the image display device 5 displays the execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this form, and the mini reel information may be displayed during a period other than the demo display. For example, the mini reel information can be obtained by selecting the "mini reel information" icon by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B during the jackpot game state including the fanfare period and the ending period, or during the variable display period. It may be displayed on the image display device 5 to notify the execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect. It should be noted that the execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect may be notified without requiring an operation, for example, an advantage for the player such as an ending period of the big hit game state and a variable display at which the high base state ends. The execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect may be displayed at the end of the above period.

(5) In the above embodiment, an example in which the mini reel information is displayed on the image display device 5 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and the mini reel information is displayed in an area different from the image display device 5. Is also good. For example, in a gaming machine provided with a sub-image display device that displays various effect images different from the image display device 5, mini reel information is displayed on the sub-image display device during a demo display, a jackpot game state, or a variable display. You may.

(6) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the second change effect is an effect of changing the display mode of the active display, but the second change effect is not limited to such a form, and the second change effect is a hold display. It may be an effect that changes the display mode. For example, the display result (character symbol) of the second mini-slot variable display is used to execute a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the display result of the variable display (variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice) that has not been executed, and the second A second change effect may be executed in which a character icon based on the display result of the mini-slot variable display is added to the hold display corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice. As described above, the display result suggested by the second mini-slot variable display is not limited to the display result of the variable display that has been executed, and may be the display result of the variable display that has not been executed. In addition, the target of the response information changed by the second change effect is not limited to the response information corresponding to the executed variation display (active display), but also the response information corresponding to the non-executed variation display (hold display). It may be.

(7) In the above embodiment, the first mini-slot variable display executed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 (3 reels) is performed twice (the first winning combination is "bell" or "missing". ", The second successful combination is other than" bell ") has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first mini-slot variable display may be executed three times or more. For example, based on the decision to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the first mini-slot variable display is executed twice, and the expectation degree advance notice effect is executed. The first mini-slot variable display related to the advance notice effect may be performed twice, and the second mini-slot variable display related to the expectation advance notice effect may be executed. For example, when the first mini-slot variable display is executed a total of four times, the first winning combination is set to "missing" and then the second winning combination is set to "bell" (first setting suggestion effect), the third time. It is possible to set the 4th winning combination to "cherry" after setting the winning combination to "watermelon".

(8) In the above embodiment, an example in which the second mini-slot variable display is executed only once based on the decision to execute the expectation degree advance notice effect is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. The variable display of 2 mini slots may be executed twice or more. For example, after the display result of the first mini-slot variable display is set to "CHANGE", the display result of the second mini-slot variable display may be set to "extreme heat". In this way, when the second mini-slot variable display is executed a plurality of times, each display result is determined so that the display result with a high expectation is not followed by the display result with a low expectation. The fall of the notice character shall be restricted.

Further, the second change effect may be executed a plurality of times in response to the execution of the second mini-slot variable display a plurality of times. For example, based on the fact that the display result of the first mini-slot variable display is "CHANGE", the character icon of "CHANGE" is superimposed on the active display, and then the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is displayed. Is changed to "super heat", and instead of the character icon of "CHANGE", the character icon of "super heat" may be superimposed on the active display. In this way, when the second change effect is executed a plurality of times, each display mode is determined so that the display mode with high expectation does not change to the display mode with low expectation, and the active display is displayed. It shall limit the decline of the display mode.

(9) In the above embodiment, only the freeze mode is exemplified as the special mode of the variable display of the mini-slot symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of special modes may be provided. For example, as a special mode, in addition to the freeze mode described above, a mode in which the speed at which the mini-slot symbol is variably displayed (scrolling speed) is extremely faster or extremely slower than the normal mode may be provided, and the variable display may be provided. The mini-slot symbol to be played may be expanded (for example, 200% of the normal mode). Further, the ratio of the winning combination may be different depending on the type of the special aspect. For example, in the second special mode (freeze mode) than in the first special mode (mode in which the mini slot symbol is enlarged), the winning combination of the variable display of the mini slot symbol is "cherry" or "7 sets". The ratio may be high.

(10) In the above embodiment, a plurality of variable display patterns (variable display times) of mini-slot symbols may be provided. For example, as the variable display pattern of the mini-slot symbol, a variable display pattern having a variable display time of 3.5 seconds and a variable display pattern having a variable display time of 30 seconds may be provided. Then, the winning combination may be determined at different ratios according to the variable display pattern of the mini-slot symbol. For example, in the case of a variable display pattern having a variable display time of 30 seconds, the ratio of the winning combinations being "cherry" or "7 sets" is higher than in the case of a variable display pattern having a variable display time of 3.5 seconds. May be high.

(11) In the above embodiment, at the timing when the combination of the mini-slot symbols is stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 (the winning combination is established), the mini-slot symbol corresponds to the winning combination. The effect image may be displayed in the display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. For example, when "replay" is established as a winning combination, a blue effect image is displayed, when "bell" is established as a winning combination, a yellow effect image is displayed, and "watermelon" is established as a winning combination. , If a green effect image is displayed and "cherry" is established as a winning combination, a red effect image is displayed, and if "7 alignment" is established as a winning combination, a rainbow-colored effect image is displayed. Good.

(12) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which "7 sets" is stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 as a winning combination for notifying that the jackpot has been confirmed, but the present invention is not limited to this. , "BAR alignment" may be stopped and displayed as a winning combination to notify that the jackpot has been confirmed. To display the stop display of "BAR alignment" as a winning combination is to stop and display the combination of [BAR], [BAR], and [BAR] in the mini slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. Further, the probability variation jackpot may be determined when "7 alignment" is established, and the normal jackpot may be determined when "BAR alignment" is established.

(13) In the above embodiment, the mini-slot 16TM030 including the mini-slot symbol does not depend on whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is executed (whether or not the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed). Although an example of information that can be displayed regardless of the number of reserved storages has been shown, the mini slot 16TM030 may be hidden during a predetermined period, not limited to such a form. For example, the mini slot 16TM030 may be hidden during the period when the super reach effect is being executed.

(14) In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the same winning combination (for example, [bell]) is not established multiple times except for "off" during one special symbol variation display. Not limited to such a form, the same winning combination (for example, [bell]) that is not “out of place” may be established multiple times during one variation display of the special symbol. In the case of adopting such a configuration, if the total number of times that the winning combination (for example, [Bell]) is established is included in the cumulative number of times, [How many fluctuation displays out of the executed n fluctuation displays] It becomes extremely difficult to grasp the most important information for guessing the set value, such as whether the winning combination [bell] is established in response to the above, and the importance of the information displayed in the mini reel information 16TM200 becomes important. It may drop and the player may not pay attention. In order to solve such a problem, even if the same winning combination (for example, [Bell]) is established multiple times during one special symbol variation display, the same winning combination is displayed during this variation display. The cumulative number of times is counted, assuming that the number of times it is established is one. For example, even if the winning combination of "bell" is established three times during one special symbol variation display, the number of times the winning combination of "bell" is established during this variation display is regarded as one, and the mini reel Information 16 Add 1 to the cumulative number of times the TM200 "bell" has been won.

(15) In the above embodiment, an example in which the display mode of the variation number display 16TM040 is changed from the normal mode (white mode) to the setting suggestion mode (for example, purple mode) at a rate corresponding to the set value is shown, but it is specified. Regarding the set value of (for example, a set value such as 5 or 6 which is particularly advantageous for the player), the setting suggestion mode may be different from the case of other set values. For example, when the set value is in the range of 1 to 4, the display mode of the fluctuation number display 16TM040 is changed from the normal mode (white mode) to the first setting suggestion mode (for example, purple mode) at a ratio corresponding to the set value. When the set value is 5 or 6, the display mode of the variation number display 16TM040 is changed from the normal mode (white mode) to the second setting suggestion mode (for example, gold mode) at a ratio corresponding to the set value. As for whether or not to use the first setting suggestion mode, the lottery is performed once every 25 times as described above, whereas as to whether or not to use the second setting suggestion mode, 50 A separate lottery may be held at a rate of once per time. Then, when it is decided to use the second setting suggestion mode, the fluctuation number display 16TM040 is displayed as the second setting suggestion mode (for example, the gold mode) regardless of whether or not it is decided to use the first setting suggestion mode. ).

(16) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect is set in common regardless of the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) in the low probability low base state (normal state). Not limited to this, the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect may be different depending on the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). For example, the fluctuation pattern of the long fluctuation time is larger than the fluctuation pattern of the short fluctuation time. , The first setting suggestion effect may be executed at a high rate.

(17) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the variable display of the mini-slot symbol is executed at the lower center of the screen and the set value is suggested by the display result, but the mini-slot is not limited to such a mode. The set value may be suggested by another effect executed in response to the variable display of the symbol. For example, an effect in which any one of a plurality of types of characters appears in response to the variable display of the mini-slot symbol may be executed, and the set value may be suggested by the type of the appearing character.

It should be noted that the variable display of the mini-slot symbol and other effects corresponding to the variable display of the mini-slot symbol may be executed in an area different from the lower center of the screen. For example, it may be executed in an area that does not overlap (do not overlap) with the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at the right edge or the left edge of the screen, and is a display device (so-called sub-display device) different from the image display device 5. It may be executed.

(18) In the above embodiment, the effect acting on the hold display and the effect acting on the active display are the lower center (see FIG. 10-10 (11)) or the lower right (FIG. 10-9 (5)) of the screen. Although examples are shown in (see), these effects may be performed in different areas. For example, it may be executed in an area that does not overlap (do not overlap) with the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at the right edge or the left edge of the screen, and is a display device (so-called sub-display device) different from the image display device 5. It may be executed.

(19) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the setting suggestion effect and the expectation level advance notice effect by the variable display of the mini slot symbol are executed in the low probability low base state (normal state), but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be executed in a high-accuracy high-base state or a high-accuracy low-base state (KT control that tends to make a small hit than in a normal state).

In such an effect configuration, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect (the rate at which the winning combination is "bell") is [(a variable display of the decorative symbol (special symbol) executed in the gaming state in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed). The ratio of (the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed in the game state (the number of times the winning combination is "bell" in the variable display of the mini-slot symbol) to the number of times)]. Therefore, the high accuracy and high base state. If the variable display of the mini-slot symbol is executed in, [(the number of times the winning combination is "bell" in the variable display of the mini-slot symbol executed in the high-accuracy high-base state) ÷ (high-accuracy high-base) The execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is calculated by the variable display number of the decorative symbol (special symbol) executed in the state), and the set value is suggested by the calculated value. In addition, the high accuracy and low base state (KT state). ) When the variable display of the mini-slot symbol is executed, [(the number of times that the winning combination is "bell" in the variable display of the mini-slot symbol executed in the high accuracy low base state (KT state)) ÷ (Number of variations of the decorative symbol (special symbol) executed in the high-accuracy low-base state (KT state))] calculates the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect, and the calculated value suggests the set value.

As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (FIG. 12), it is possible to set one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, and it corresponds to the setting value before and after the setting change. A game machine that displays a character image has been proposed. With respect to a gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values as described in JP-A-2010-201002 (FIG. 12), there is room for improving the interest of the production. The following configurations relating to means A1 to means A10 and configurations relating to means B1 to means B10 are made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and are games that can be set to any of a plurality of set values. The purpose is to improve the interest of the production related to the machine. The following configurations relating to means A1 to means A10 and configurations relating to means B1 to means B10 are specifically described in [Explanation of Feature 16TM].

The gaming machine of means A1 (pachinko gaming machine 1) is
A setting means (game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) having different advantages for the player.
Variable display means (microcomputer 100 for game control, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing variable display (variable display), and
An advantageous state control means (microcomputer 100 for game control) that can control an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous for the player, and
A display means (CPU 120 for effect control, image display device 5) is provided.
The display means includes a special display (combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "bell") corresponding to a setting suggestion relating to the setting means, and a specific display corresponding to the suggestion of controlling the advantageous state (establishing combination is "bell"). It is possible to display "watermelon", "cherry", or a combination of mini-slot symbols that are "7 sets", "no display", "CHANGE", "super heat", or "FEVER" symbol).
When the variable display period is a predetermined period, the special display can be displayed (when the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is non-reach off (10 seconds), normal reach off (30 seconds), or normal reach jackpot (30 seconds). It is possible to stop and display the combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "bell"), and when the variable display period is longer than the predetermined period, the special display can be displayed and then the specific display can be displayed. (If the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is out of super reach (120 seconds) or super reach jackpot (120 seconds), the winning combination is "bell" after the combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "bell" is stopped and displayed. Stop and display the combination of mini-slot symbols that are "watermelon", "cherry", or "7 sets", and stop and display the "no display", "CHANGE", "super heat", or "FEVER" symbol. It is possible).
According to such a configuration, since the special display can be displayed with priority over the specific display, it is possible to improve the interest in setting suggestion.

The game machine of means A2
It is a game machine of means A1 and
Equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) for controlling the effect
When the variable display (variable display) by the variable display means (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120) is executed, the effect control means displays the special display at a different ratio according to a set value. It is determined whether or not to perform (whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed is determined for each variation display (step S16TM2000), and as shown in FIG. 10-6 (G), the first setting is made according to the set value. The execution rate of the suggestion effect is different)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player can infer the set value when the variable display is executed.

The game machine of means A3
A gaming machine of means A1 or means A2,
Equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) for controlling the effect
When the variable display (variable display) by the variable display means (microcomputer 100 for game control, CPU 120 for effect control) is executed, the effect control means displays the special display at a different ratio according to a set value. It is determined whether or not to perform the determination, and after the determination is made, it is determined whether or not to display the specific display (as shown in FIG. 10-5, whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined in step S16TM2000. Later, in step S16TM2020, it is determined whether or not to execute the expectation notice effect).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, after deciding whether or not to display the special display, it is decided whether or not to display the specific display, so that appropriate effect control in which the special display is prioritized becomes possible.

The game machine of means A4
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A3.
The display means (effect control CPU 120, image display device 5) displays the special display (combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "bell") when a specific effect (battle effect in super reach) is executed. It is characterized by being hidden.
According to such a configuration, the player can pay attention to the specific effect.

The game machine of means A5
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A4.
The variable display means (CPU 120 for effect control) can execute variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative symbols).
The display means (effect control CPU 120, image display device 5) is a variable display (mini slot symbol) of information different from the decorative identification information in a specific area (mini slot symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1, or 5LCR1). The special display (combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "bell") or the specific display (establishing combination is "watermelon", "cherry", or " A combination of mini-slot symbols that will be "7 sets", or a combination of "CHANGE", "super heat", or "FEVER" character symbols), or a predetermined display (a combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "off"), or , "No display" pattern) can be displayed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the production performed in a specific area of the display means.

The game machine of means A6
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A5.
The variable display means (CPU 120 for effect control) can execute variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative symbols).
The display means (effect control CPU 120) can execute variable display (variable display of the mini-slot symbol) of information different from the decorative identification information in a specific area (mini-slot symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1). ,
When the variable display mode executed in the specific area becomes a special mode (freeze mode), the ratio controlled to the advantageous state (big hit gaming state) is higher than that when the special mode (freeze mode) does not occur. High (As shown in FIG. 10-7 (K), when the mini-slot symbol performs a variable display of the freeze mode, the winning combination is "cherry (freeze)" or "7 sets (freeze)", and "cherry". Since the above-mentioned winning combination (“cherry” or “7-match”) is determined, the expectation that the mini-slot symbol will be controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the variable display of the normal mode is performed).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the variable display mode becomes a special mode, so that the player can pay attention to the display means.

The game machine of means A7
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A6.
There are multiple types of the specific display (there are "watermelon", "cherry", and "7 sets" as the winning combination, and the display results include "no display", "CHANGE", "super heat", and "FEVER". ),
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the type of the specific display (as shown in FIG. 10-7 (K), the expectation degree controlled to the jackpot gaming state is "watermelon"<"cherry"< It is higher in the order of "7 sets")
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to be interested in the type of specific display.

The game machine of means A8
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A7.
A storage means (RAM 122 of the effect control board 12) for storing the display history of the special display (the cumulative number of times the combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "bell" is stopped and displayed)
When the predetermined condition is satisfied (when the menu screen is displayed, the icon of "mini reel information" is selected by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B), the information regarding the display history (the establishment combination is It is characterized by including a history display means (an image display device 5 for displaying the mini reel information 16TM200) capable of displaying a "winning probability of becoming a bell").
According to such a configuration, the player can easily grasp the information regarding the display history of the special display in order to estimate the set value.

The game machine of means A9
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A8.
The display means (effect control CPU 120) can display a special display (variation number display 16TM040) suggesting a set value in a special area (lower left of the screen of the image display device 5).
The ratio at which the special display is displayed is different from the ratio at which the special display is displayed (the first setting suggestion effect is an execution lottery for each variable display, and the second setting suggestion effect is 25 times. A lottery is held for each variable display),
The ratio of the set value suggested by the special display corresponding to the set value of the game machine is different from the ratio of the set value suggested by the special display corresponding to the set value of the game machine (FIG. 10-6). As shown in FIG. 10-7 (M), while the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect is 3% (set value 1) to 8% (set value 6) as shown in (G). In addition, since the execution rate of the second setting suggestion effect is 10% (setting value 1) to 20% (setting value 6), the actual effect execution rate between the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect. The ratio of the set value estimated based on is different from the set value of the game machine is different)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the ratio of the suggested set value corresponding to the set value of the game machine differs depending on whether the display is the special display or the special display. You can pay attention to what is suggested.

The game machine of means A10
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A9.
The variable display means (CPU 120 for effect control) can execute the variable display (variable display of the decorative symbol) of the first decorative identification information in the first area (decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R in the center of the screen). , Variable display of the second decoration identification information (variable display of small symbols), which is less visible than the first decoration identification information, can be executed in the second area (small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r at the upper right of the screen). Yes,
The display means (CPU 120 for effect control) can display at least one of the special display or the specific display in the first area (mini slot symbols in the mini reel symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 at the lower center of the screen). The combination is displayed), and the display of the special display and the specific display in the second area is restricted (mini slot symbols are not displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the variable display of the second decorative identification information in the second region from being lowered.

The gaming machine of means B1 (pachinko gaming machine 1) is
A setting means (game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) having different advantages for the player.
Variable display means (microcomputer 100 for game control, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing variable display (variable display), and
An advantageous state control means (microcomputer 100 for game control) that can control an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous for the player, and
A display means (CPU 120 for effect control, image display device 5) is provided.
The display means includes a special display corresponding to a setting suggestion related to the setting means (combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "bell") and a specific display corresponding to the suggestion of controlling an advantageous state (establishing combination is "bell"). It is possible to display "watermelon", "cherry", or a combination of mini-slot symbols that are "7 sets", "no display", "CHANGE", "super heat", or "FEVER" symbol) in a specific area. ,
Corresponding display means (CPU 120 for effect control, image display device 5) capable of displaying the corresponding display (active display 16TM003) corresponding to the variable display, and
The specific display is displayed in the specific area (as shown in FIG. 10-9 (8), a combination of mini slot symbols whose winning combination is "cherry" is provided in the mini slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. After the stop display is displayed, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (10), the mode of the corresponding display is changed in response to the stop display of the character symbol of "super heat" in the mini slot symbol display area 5LCR1). Change effect (as shown in FIGS. 10-10 (11) and (12), a second change effect is added to the active display 16TM030 to add a character icon indicating the same character as the character of the mini-slot pattern (“super heat”)). A gaming machine characterized by comprising an effect executing means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing the above.
According to such a configuration, a gaming machine capable of displaying a special display corresponding to a setting suggestion can perform a change effect in response to the specific display being displayed in a specific area. Can be improved.

The game machine of means B2
It is a game machine of means B1
There are a plurality of types of special modes (normal mode, blue mode, red mode) as the mode of the corresponding display (active display).
The effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) is a gaming machine capable of executing a special effect (first change effect) that changes the special aspect of the corresponding display.
According to such a configuration, the player can be expected to change the corresponding display of the special aspect.

The game machine of means B3
A gaming machine of means B1 or means B2.
The effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) can execute an effect acting on the corresponding display (active display) that is the target of the change effect as the change effect (second change effect) (FIG. 10-10). As shown in (11) and (12), an effect indicating that the mini-slot symbol (“super heat”) stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 jumps out of the mini-slot 16TM30 and hits the active display 16TM003. After the image is displayed, a character icon indicating the same character as the character (“super heat”) of the mini slot symbol stopped and displayed in the mini slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is added to the active display 16TM030).
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of change production.

The game machine of means B4
A game machine according to any one of means B1 to means B3.
There are a plurality of types of the specific display (the first mini-slot variable display has "missing", "watermelon", "cherry", and "7 sets" as the winning combination, and the second mini-slot variable display display result is "". There are "No display", "CHANGE", "Fever", "FEVER"),
Depending on the type of the specific display, the mode of the corresponding display to be the target of the change effect is determined at a different ratio (as shown in FIGS. 10-7 (K) and (L), the first in the expectation notice effect. The winning combination of the 1 mini slot variable display is determined to be "out of place", "watermelon", "cherry", or "7 sets", and the second mini slot is determined according to which winning combination is determined. The selection ratio of whether the display result of the variable display is "no display", "CHANGE", "extreme heat", or "FEVER" is different, and the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is different. Since it matches the mode of the character icon added to the active display 16TM003, it is added to the active display 16TM003 depending on which combination of the first mini-slot variable display in the expectation notice effect is determined. The ratio of the mode of the character icon is different)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to have a relationship between the type of the specific display and the mode of the corresponding display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the production.

The game machine of means B5
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B4.
Equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) for controlling the effect
When the variable display (variable display) by the variable display means (microcomputer 100 for game control, CPU 120 for effect control) is executed, the effect control means displays the special display at a different ratio according to a set value. It is determined whether or not to perform the determination, and after the determination is made, it is determined whether or not to display the specific display (as shown in FIG. 10-5, whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined in step S16TM2000. Later, in step S16TM2020, it is determined whether or not to execute the expectation notice effect).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, after deciding whether or not to display the special display, it is decided whether or not to display the specific display, so that appropriate effect control in which the special display is prioritized becomes possible.

The game machine of means B6
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B5.
The variable display means (CPU 120 for effect control) can execute variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative symbols).
The display means (effect control CPU 120, image display device 5) is a variable display (mini slot symbol) of information different from the decorative identification information in a specific area (mini slot symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1, or 5LCR1). The special display (combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "bell") or the specific display (establishing combination is "watermelon", "cherry", or " A combination of mini-slot symbols that will be "7 sets", or a combination of "CHANGE", "super heat", or "FEVER" character symbols), or a predetermined display (a combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "off"), or , "No display" pattern) can be displayed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the production performed in a specific area of the display means.

The game machine of means B7
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B6.
The variable display means (CPU 120 for effect control) can execute variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative symbols).
The display means (effect control CPU 120) can execute variable display (variable display of the mini-slot symbol) of information different from the decorative identification information in a specific area (mini-slot symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1). ,
When the variable display mode executed in the specific area becomes a special mode (freeze mode), the ratio controlled to the advantageous state (big hit gaming state) is higher than that when the special mode (freeze mode) does not occur. High (As shown in FIG. 10-7 (K), when the mini-slot symbol performs a variable display of the freeze mode, the winning combination is "cherry (freeze)" or "7 sets (freeze)", and "cherry". Since the above-mentioned winning combination (“cherry” or “7-match”) is determined, the expectation that the mini-slot symbol will be controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the variable display of the normal mode is performed).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the variable display mode becomes a special mode, so that the player can pay attention to the display means.

The game machine of means B8
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B7.
There are multiple types of the specific display (there are "watermelon", "cherry", and "7 sets" as the winning combination, and the display results include "no display", "CHANGE", "super heat", and "FEVER". ),
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the type of the specific display (as shown in FIG. 10-7 (K), the expectation degree controlled to the jackpot gaming state is "watermelon"<"cherry"< It is higher in the order of "7 sets")
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to be interested in the type of specific display.

The game machine of means B9
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B8.
A storage means (RAM 122 of the effect control board 12) for storing the display history of the special display (the cumulative number of times the combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "bell" is stopped and displayed)
When the predetermined condition is satisfied (when the menu screen is displayed, the icon of "mini reel information" is selected by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B), the information regarding the display history (the establishment combination is It is characterized by including a history display means (an image display device 5 for displaying the mini reel information 16TM200) capable of displaying a "winning probability of becoming a bell").
According to such a configuration, the player can easily grasp the information regarding the display history of the special display in order to estimate the set value.

The gaming machine of means B10
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B9.
The display means (effect control CPU 120) can display a special display (variation number display 16TM040) suggesting a set value in a special area (lower left of the screen of the image display device 5).
The ratio at which the special display is displayed is different from the ratio at which the special display is displayed (the first setting suggestion effect is an execution lottery for each variable display, and the second setting suggestion effect is 25 times. A lottery is held for each variable display),
The ratio of the set value suggested by the special display corresponding to the set value of the game machine is different from the ratio of the set value suggested by the special display corresponding to the set value of the game machine (FIG. 10-6). As shown in FIG. 10-7 (M), while the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect is 3% (set value 1) to 8% (set value 6) as shown in (G). In addition, since the execution rate of the second setting suggestion effect is 10% (setting value 1) to 20% (setting value 6), the actual effect execution rate between the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect. The ratio of the set value estimated based on is different from the set value of the game machine is different)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the ratio of the suggested set value corresponding to the set value of the game machine differs depending on whether the display is the special display or the special display. You can pay attention to what is suggested.

[Explanation of feature 04TM]
Next, the feature unit 04TM will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-1 to 11-6. In the gaming machine shown in the above-mentioned [Explanation of the feature unit 16TM], as shown in FIGS. 10-1 (A1) and (B1), the gaming state is controlled to the low probability low base state (normal state) and then executed. The fluctuation number display 16TM040 indicating the value of the fluctuation number counter that counts the number of times of the variation display is displayed at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. The value indicated by the variation display 16TM040 allows the player to grasp the number of variation displays executed in the normal state. Further, the variation number display 16TM040 changes from the normal mode (for example, the white mode) to the setting suggestion mode (for example, the purple mode) different from the normal mode by executing the second setting suggestion effect based on the set value of the game machine. It changes to.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment shown in [Explanation of the feature unit 04TM], the fluctuation number display 16TM040 is not displayed at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5, and the second variation number display 16TM040 is used. It is assumed that the setting suggestion effect is not executed. On the other hand, in the game machine according to the present embodiment, the first setting suggestion effect is executed in the same manner as the game machine shown in [Explanation of the feature unit 16TM], and the third setting suggestion effect different from the second setting suggestion effect is performed. It shall be executed.

In this embodiment as well, the fluctuation number display 16TM040 may be displayed and the second setting suggestion effect may be executed, as in the game machine shown in [Explanation of the feature unit 16TM]. That is, in addition to the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect, the third setting suggestion effect described later may be executed.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-1 (A1) and (B1), the first reserved storage number (1st reserved display 16TM001 of 0 to 4) is displayed at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. The first hold display area 16TM011 is provided, and the active display area 16TM013 for displaying the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed is provided at the lower center of the screen of the image display device 5.

Further, when the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy low base state (normal state), the mini slot 16TM030 is located in the special effect area 16TM035 provided below the active display 16TM003 at the lower center of the screen of the image display device 5. Is displayed. In this example, since the mini slot 16TM030 is displayed directly below the active display 16TM003, the player sees the mini slot 16TM030 as if it were the pedestal of the active display 16TM003. That is, since the mini-slot 16TM030 is displayed at a position corresponding to the active display 16TM003, the player can easily grasp that the mini-slot 16TM030 executes the effect corresponding to the variable display being executed. Can be done.

In the present embodiment, the mini slot 16TM030 can be displayed regardless of whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is executed (whether or not the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed) and regardless of the number of reserved storages. Information.

When the first hold storage number is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first hold display 16TM001 in the first hold display area 16TM011 in a number corresponding to the first hold storage number. That is, in the first hold display 16TM001, the start condition (for example, winning the first start winning opening) is satisfied, but the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. Information corresponding to the variable display (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) of the first special symbol in which the second reserved memory number is 0 and the first reserved memory number is not 0) is not established. Is. When a plurality of first hold displays 16TM001 are displayed in the first hold display area 16TM011, the first hold display 16TM001 corresponds to the order close to the active display area 16TM013 (from the right when viewed from the player). The start condition of the variable display is satisfied.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 16TM003 in the active display area 16TM013 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed. That is, the active display 16TM003 is a big hit game in which the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed) after the start condition (for example, winning the first start winning opening or the second start winning opening) is satisfied. This is information corresponding to the variable display (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) of the special symbol for which the state is not controlled and the number of reserved memories is not 0).

In the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in response to the variable display of the special symbol. As shown in FIGS. 10-1 (A1) and 10-1 (A1) and (B1), the area at the upper center of the image display device 5 on which the decorative symbol is variable and stopped is displayed from the left, the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, The symbol display area 5R is used.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-1 (A1) and (B1), the symbol is smaller than the decorative symbol displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5, and the special symbol varies. A symbol indicating whether or not it is displayed and the display result of the special symbol is called a small symbol. The variable display of the small symbol can be executed in parallel with the variable display of the special symbol, and the stop display of the small symbol can also be executed in parallel with the stop display of the special symbol. Then, the area at the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5, in which the small symbols corresponding to the first special symbol are variablely displayed and stopped, is displayed from the left in the small symbol display area 5l, the small symbol display area 5c, and the small symbol display area. Let it be 5r. The small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r have smaller display areas than the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Therefore, the visibility of the small symbol is lower than the visibility of the decorative symbol.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 (A1) and 10-1 (A1) and (B1), in the present embodiment, when controlled to the low accuracy low base state (normal state), the mini slot is set in the special effect area 16TM035 of the image display device 5. 16TM030 is displayed. In the mini-slot 16TM030, variable display of a plurality of types of mini-slot symbols is executed. In the first mini-slot variable display, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (A2), the mini-slot symbols of "replay", "bell", "watermelon", "cherry", "7", and "blank" Is variably displayed, and in the second mini-slot variable display, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (B2), a symbol in which no notice character is displayed (“not displayed”) and a jackpot expectation degree are suggested. The mini-slot symbols of "CHANGE", "super heat", and "FEVER", which are the symbols consisting of the notice characters, are variably displayed. For details of the first mini-slot variable display and the second mini-slot variable display, refer to (first mini-slot variable display) and (second mini-slot variable display) in the above-mentioned [Explanation of the feature unit 16TM]. ), So that the description will be omitted in this embodiment.

(Production decision processing at the start of fluctuation)
FIG. 11-1 is a flowchart showing an effect determination process executed at the start of fluctuation. The effect control CPU 120 executes the effect change start effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-1 in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-mentioned one set of commands accompanying the start of the variation display of the special symbol, the display result designation is the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol. An effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) to be executed based on a command and a variation pattern specification command is set, and a decorative pattern based on the specified variation pattern is set. The effect to be executed during the variation display is determined by the effect determination process at the start of the variation shown in FIG. 11-1.

In addition, in step S16TM2000 to step S16TM2050 and step S16TM2120 to step S16TM2150 shown in FIG. Since it is the same as the above, the description is omitted here, and the processing after step S04TM2060 will be described.

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern accompanied by super reach (“super reach loss” or “super reach jackpot”) (step S04TM2060). If the variation pattern is not a variation pattern with super reach (NO in step S04TM2060), the process ends as it is.

When the variation pattern is a variation pattern accompanied by super reach (YES in step S04TM2060), that is, when the super reach effect (battle effect) is executed, the effect control CPU 120 has a notice effect corresponding to the super reach effect. Whether or not the expectation degree suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode are determined based on the table (FIG. 11-2 (A)) for determining whether or not the expectation degree suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode (step S04TM2065).

FIG. 11-2 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining whether or not to execute the expectation suggestion effect and the effect mode. In the table for determining whether or not the expectation degree suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode, determination values for determining whether or not the expectation degree suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode are assigned according to the display result.

If the display result is "off" (that is, if the display result specified by the display result specification command is "off"), the expectation suggestion effect is not executed at a rate of 70% (stars during super reach development). It was decided not to display), and at a rate of 20%, it was decided to perform the expectation suggestion effect of the first aspect in which one star is displayed during the development of super reach, and at a rate of 8%, it was decided to perform super reach. Decided to execute the expectation suggestion effect of the second aspect in which two stars are displayed at the time of development, and at a rate of 2%, the expectation suggestion effect of the third aspect in which three stars are displayed at the time of super reach development. Decide to do.

If the display result is a "big hit" (that is, if the display result specified by the display result specification command is a "big hit"), the expectation suggestion effect is not executed at a rate of 50% (stars when super reach develops). Is not displayed), and at a rate of 10%, it is decided to perform the expectation suggestion effect of the first aspect in which one star is displayed during the development of super reach, and at a rate of 15%, super reach is performed. Decided to execute the expectation suggestion effect of the second aspect in which two stars are displayed at the time of development, and at a rate of 25%, the expectation suggestion effect of the third aspect in which three stars are displayed at the time of super reach development. Decide to do.

In this way, the ratio of the expectation suggestion effect being executed when the display result is "big hit" is 50%, whereas the expectation suggestion effect is executed when the display result is "missing". The ratio is 30%. When the expectation suggestion effect is executed, the percentage of big hits is higher than when the expectation suggestion effect is not executed. Therefore, does the player execute the expectation suggestion effect when the super reach develops? You will be interested in whether or not.

In addition, the rate at which a big hit occurs differs depending on the production mode when the expectation suggestion effect is executed. In the present embodiment, the rate at which a big hit occurs when the expectation suggestion effect is executed is the highest when the expectation suggestion effect is executed in the third aspect (three stars), and the expectation suggestion effect is the first. It is the second highest when executed in two modes (two stars), and the lowest when the expectation suggestion effect is executed in the first mode (one star). Therefore, the player will also pay attention to how the expectation suggestion effect is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the timer effect is executed, which will be described later, based on a table (see FIG. 11-2 (B)) for determining whether or not the timer effect is executed (step S04TM2070). The timer effect in the present embodiment is an effect that suggests (notifies) that it will develop into a super reach effect (battle effect), and is also an effect that suggests that the expectation degree suggestion effect described later is executed. In the timer production, the timer is displayed in a countdown system from the remaining 10 seconds, and when the timer reaches 0 seconds remaining, it develops into a super reach production (battle production). In addition, the expectation degree suggestion effect may be executed at the timing when the timer has 0 seconds remaining.

FIG. 11-2 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining whether or not to execute the timer effect. In the table for determining whether or not the timer effect is executed, a determination value for determining whether or not the timer effect is executed is assigned according to the display result.

As shown in FIG. 11-2 (B), when the display result is "missing" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "missing"), the timer is 80%. It is decided not to execute the effect, and it is decided to execute the timer effect at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, when the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "big hit"), it is decided not to execute the timer effect at a rate of 40%. It is decided to execute the timer effect at a rate of 60%.

In this way, the rate at which the timer effect is executed when the display result is "big hit" is 60%, whereas the rate at which the timer effect is executed when the display result is "missing" is 20%. %. When the timer effect is executed, the percentage of big hits is higher than when the timer effect is not executed, so that the player is interested in whether or not the timer effect is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display result is a "big hit" (step S04TM2080). When the display result is "big hit" (YES in step S04TM2080), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step 04TM2090, and when the display result is "missing" (NO in step S04TM2080), the effect control CPU 120 , Step 04 The process proceeds to TM2100.

When the display result is "big hit" (YES in step S04TM2080), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the cut-in notice effect is executed and the effect mode, which will be described later, and whether or not the cut-in notice effect is executed and the effect mode. Is determined based on the table (see FIG. 11-2 (C)) (step S04TM2090), and the process ends.

FIG. 11-2 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect and the effect mode. In the table for determining whether or not the cut-in notice effect is executed and the effect mode, determination values for determining whether or not the cut-in notice effect is executed and the effect mode are assigned.

As shown in FIG. 11-2 (C), when the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "big hit"), the cut rate is 40%. Decided not to execute the in-notice effect, decided to execute the cut-in notice effect in the blue mode (the word "chance" on the blue background image) at a rate of 10%, and decided to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 15%. Decided to perform a cut-in notice effect (characters of "great chance" on the red background image), and cut-in notice of the golden mode (characters of "super heat" on the golden background image) at a rate of 35%. Decide to perform the production.

When the display result is "off" (NO in step S04TM2080), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the cut-in suggestion effect (an example of the third setting suggestion effect), which will be described later, is executed and the effect mode of the cut-in suggestion effect. It is determined based on a table (see FIG. 11-2 (D)) for determining whether or not to execute and the mode of effect (step S04TM2100), and the process is terminated.

FIG. 11-2 (D) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining whether or not to execute the cut-in suggestion effect and the effect mode. In the table for determining whether or not the cut-in suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode, determination values for determining whether or not the cut-in suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode are assigned according to the set set values.

In the effect control CPU 120, when the set value is any of "1", "2", and "3" (that is, the set value specified by the set value specification command is "1", "2", "3". In any case), it was decided not to execute the cut-in suggestion effect at a rate of 60%, and the cut-in suggestion of the blue aspect (the characters "chance" on the blue background image) was at a rate of 30%. It is decided to execute the effect, and it is decided to execute the cut-in suggestion effect of the red aspect (the characters of "great chance" on the red background image) at a rate of 10%.

In the effect control CPU 120, when the set value is any of "4", "5", and "6" (that is, the set value specified by the set value designation command is "4", "5", "6". In any case), it was decided not to execute the cut-in suggestion effect at a rate of 55%, and the cut-in suggestion of the blue aspect (the characters "chance" on the blue background image) was at a rate of 30%. Decided to perform the production, decided to perform the cut-in suggestion production of the red aspect (characters of "great chance" on the red background image) at a rate of 10%, and decided to perform the cut-in suggestion effect at the rate of 5% Decided to perform a cut-in suggestion effect (the characters "super heat") on the golden background image.

When the set value is any of "1", "2", and "3" (that is, when the set value specified by the set value specification command is any of "1", "2", and "3". ), The ratio of executing the cut-in suggestion effect of the golden aspect (the cut-in image 04TM100C of the golden aspect described later is displayed) is 0%. On the other hand, when the set value is any of "4", "5", and "6" (that is, the set value specified by the set value specification command is any of "4", "5", and "6". In the case of), the ratio of executing the cut-in suggestion effect of the golden aspect (the cut-in image 04TM100C of the golden aspect is displayed) is 5%.

Therefore, the cut-in suggestion effect of the golden mode in which the cut-in image 04TM100C of the golden mode is displayed has a set value of any one of "4", "5", and "6" (that is, a setting specified by the set value designation command). It is an effect that suggests (notifies) that the value is any of "4", "5", and "6"). In particular, in this example, it is confirmed that the set value is at least one of "4", "5", and "6" (high set value) due to the execution of the cut-in suggestion effect in the golden mode. To do. As described above, the cut-in suggestion effect is a high setting suggestion effect that suggests (notifies) that the set value is a high set value.

In this example, there is no setting difference between the execution ratio of the cut-in suggestion effect in the blue mode and the execution ratio of the cut-in suggestion effect in the red mode, but the cut is not limited to such an effect configuration. A setting difference may be provided between the execution rate of the in-suggestion effect and the execution rate of the cut-in suggestion effect in the red aspect. For example, the cut-in suggestion effect in the blue mode is an effect that suggests that the set value is an odd number (the set value is any of "1", "3", and "5"), and the cut in the red mode is cut. The in-suggestion effect may be an effect that suggests that the set value is an even number (the set value is any of "2", "4", and "6"). As described above, the cut-in suggestion effect may be an even-odd number suggestion effect that suggests whether the set value is an even number or an odd number.

As shown in FIG. 11-2 (C), the cut-in notice effect is an effect that is executed only when the display result is a "big hit", and therefore is displayed when the cut-in notice effect is executed. The result is always a "big hit". On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-2 (D), the cut-in suggestion effect is an effect that is executed only when the display result is "off", and therefore, when the cut-in suggestion effect is executed. The display result is always "off".

However, in the present embodiment, the cut-in notice effect in the blue aspect and the cut-in suggestion effect in the blue aspect are both effects in which the characters "chance" are displayed on the blue background image, which is a common effect. It has become. Further, the cut-in notice effect in the red mode and the cut-in suggestion effect in the red mode are both effects in which the characters "great chance" are displayed on the red background image, which are common effect modes. Further, the cut-in notice effect in the golden mode and the cut-in suggestion effect in the golden mode are both effects in which the characters "extreme heat" are displayed on the golden background image, which are common effect modes. Since the cut-in notice effect and the cut-in suggestion effect have the same effect modes (blue, red, and gold) that may be selected, the cut-in notice effect or the cut-in suggestion effect is executed. During the period (the period before the timing when the display result is notified by stopping and displaying the decorative symbol), the player recognizes whether the cut-in notice effect or the cut-in suggestion effect is executed. That is difficult. In addition, during the period when the cut-in notice effect or the cut-in suggestion effect is executed (the period before the timing when the display result is notified by stopping and displaying the decorative symbol), whether the display result is "off" or "off". It is difficult to know if it will be a big hit. Therefore, even if the cut-in notice production is a production corresponding to the "big hit" and the cut-in suggestion production is a production corresponding to the "missing", this does not reduce the interest of the game.

As shown in FIG. 11-1, when the variation pattern of the variation display of the decorative symbol to be executed is super reach, the effect control CPU 120 determines in step S04TM2065 whether or not to execute the expectation suggestion effect and the effect mode. Regardless of the determination result, in step S04TM2100, whether or not to execute the cut-in suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined. In this way, whether or not the expectation suggestion effect that suggests the display result (whether or not a big hit occurs) and the effect mode, and whether or not the cut-in suggestion effect that suggests the set value (third setting suggestion effect) is executed and By independently determining the production mode, the information suggested by the production is clarified, and the player's interest in the production is improved.

Here, a judgment random number (random number for expectation suggestion effect) used in the determination process of step S04TM2065 for determining whether or not the expectation suggestion effect is executed and an effect mode, and a cut used in the determination process of step S04TM2100. Since the judgment random numbers (random numbers for cut-in suggestion effect) for determining whether or not the in-suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode are random numbers that are independent of each other, the decision result of one effect is the decision result of the other effect. Does not affect.

That is, the decision regarding the expectation suggestion effect does not affect the decision of the cut-in suggestion effect (third setting suggestion effect), and the decision regarding the cut-in suggestion effect (third setting suggestion effect) is the expectation suggestion effect. It does not affect the decision of. The relationship between the expectation degree suggestion effect and the first setting suggestion effect (step S16TM2000) is the same as the relationship between the expectation degree suggestion effect and the cut-in suggestion effect (third setting suggestion effect). This makes it possible to prevent the information suggested by the production from becoming unclear. In addition, when a specification change such as a change in the jackpot probability is made, it is possible to prevent overly complicated debugging in terms of production due to the specification change.

(Battle production)
In the present embodiment, in the fluctuation pattern accompanied by super reach (“super reach off”, “super reach jackpot”), after the reach state is established, as a super reach effect, a ally character and an enemy character battle. A battle effect is executed to notify whether or not the jackpot has been won. Therefore, it is possible to execute the battle effect as a notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the display result of the variable display during execution (variable display in which the start condition is satisfied) becomes a big hit. That is, the battle effect is an example of a notice effect that suggests that the player is controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.

Then, when the final display result is "missing", an effect (battle effect [defeat]) in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed. When the final display result is "big hit", the effect of the ally character winning over the enemy character (battle effect [victory]) is executed.

(Expectation suggestion production)
Expectation suggestion production is a preliminary production that corresponds to fluctuation patterns accompanied by super reach ("super reach out", "super reach jackpot"), and the timing when it evolved into super reach after the reach state was established (battle production) It is a production that suggests the jackpot expectation by the number of stars displayed at the execution timing). Here, as shown in FIGS. 11-1 and 11-2, the expectation suggestion effect is executed at the timing when the reach state is established and then the super reach is developed (the timing when the battle effect is executed). There are cases (when 1 to 3 stars are displayed) and cases where the expectation suggestion effect is not executed (stars are not displayed).

(Timer production)
The timer effect is an effect corresponding to the battle effect (super reach), which is a kind of advance notice effect that suggests the display result, and displays (notifies) the remaining time (seconds) until the battle effect is executed. Is. Further, as described above, since the expectation suggestion effect may be executed at the timing when the battle effect is executed (the timing when the battle effect is developed), the timer effect is until the expectation suggestion effect is executed. It is also an effect that displays (suggests) the remaining time (number of seconds) of. As described above, in the present embodiment, the timer effect is an effect corresponding to the battle effect which is a kind of advance notice effect, and is also an effect corresponding to the expectation suggestion effect which is a kind of advance notice effect.

As shown in FIGS. 11-5 (3) to 11-5 (6), which will be described later, the timer effect is started 10 seconds before the battle effect is executed (developed into super reach). In the timer effect, the timer image 04TM300 is displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. At the timing when the timer image 04TM300 is displayed, the timer image 04TM300 shows an initial value (in this example, a numerical value of "00:10" indicating 10 seconds). Then, the numerical value indicated by the timer image 04TM300 (the numerical value displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5) is subtracted and updated by 1 every second, and the timing (00: 00) is reached. The battle effect will be executed when there are 0 seconds left). In addition, the expectation degree suggestion effect may be executed at the timing when the numerical value indicated by the timer image 04TM300 becomes "00:00" (the timing when the remaining 0 seconds are reached). As described above, the timer effect is an effect of performing a subtraction operation (countdown operation until the start of the battle effect) of the remaining time (remaining 10 seconds to remaining 0 seconds) indicated by the timer image.

In the present embodiment, the timer effect is shown as an example in which the timer effect is started 10 seconds before the battle effect is executed (developed into super reach), but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and a plurality of timings are used. It may be possible to execute the timer effect with. For example, when the timer effect is executed at the timing 10 seconds before the battle effect is executed (the timer image 04TM300 in this case has "00:10" indicating the remaining 10 seconds as the initial value), the battle It may be started at the timing 20 seconds before the effect is executed (the timer image 04TM300 in this case has "00:20" indicating the remaining 20 seconds as the initial value). Then, in such an effect configuration, the timer effect that starts 20 seconds before the battle effect is executed is a big hit than the timer effect that starts 10 seconds before the battle effect is executed. Expectations may be high. That is, when the execution period of the timer effect is long (when the initial value indicated by the appearing timer image 04TM300 is large and the update period (timer operation period) is long), when the execution period of the timer effect is short (appearing timer image 04TM300). When the initial value indicated by is small and the update period (timer operation period) is short), the jackpot expectation may be higher than when).

In the present embodiment, the timer effect is an effect corresponding to the battle effect and the expectation degree suggestion effect, and when the timer effect is executed and the remaining time indicated by the timer image 04TM300 becomes "00:00", the battle There are cases where only the production is executed, and there are cases where the battle production and the expectation suggestion production are executed. In this way, there are a pattern in which one type of notice effect is executed corresponding to one timer effect and a pattern in which two types of notice effects are executed, and the pattern in which two types of notice effects are executed is Expectations for big hits are higher than the pattern in which one type of advance notice is executed. Therefore, the player pays attention to how many kinds of advance notice effects are executed at the timing when the remaining time indicated by the timer image 04TM300 becomes "00:00".

In the present embodiment, an example of executing a timer effect as a battle effect or an effect corresponding to an expectation suggestion effect is shown, but the timer effect is not limited to such a form and is not limited to such a form. May be executed. For example, a pseudo-continuous effect based on a variation pattern (for example, an effect in which the decorative symbol re-variates after the combination of pseudo-continuous symbols is temporarily stopped) or a movable body motion effect (for example, a movable accessory operates during the execution of the battle effect). A timer effect may be executed in response to the effect), and a group notice effect (for example, a large number of characters) in which the presence / absence of execution and the effect mode (for example, the number of characters appearing) are determined by the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation A timer effect may be executed in response to the effect across the screen).

In this way, when a plurality of types of advance notice effects are executed, timer effects corresponding to each type of advance notice effects may be executed. Here, timer effects corresponding to each type of advance notice effect may be simultaneously executed in parallel, and accordingly, a plurality of timer images 04TM300 may be displayed in parallel at the same time. In such an effect configuration, when the number of displayed timer images 04TM300 is large (when timer effects are executed for many types of advance notice effects), the number of displayed timer images 04TM300 is small (small). The jackpot expectation may be higher than (when the timer effect is executed for the type of advance notice effect). By adopting such an effect configuration, when the timer image 04TM300 is displayed (when a timer effect corresponding to a certain type of advance notice effect is being executed), another timer image 04TM300 is displayed. Players will also be interested in whether or not.

Further, in the timer effect, it may be possible to display the timer image in a plurality of modes. For example, the numerical value indicated by the timer image may be displayed in a normal mode (for example, white) and a special mode (for example, red). Then, when the display result is "off", the timer image is displayed in the normal mode at a rate of 90%, and the timer image is displayed in a special mode at a rate of 10%, and the display result is "big hit". In the case of ", the timer image may be displayed in the normal mode at a rate of 10%, and the timer image may be displayed in a special mode at a rate of 90%. With such an effect configuration, the player pays attention to the display mode when the timer image is displayed.

Further, the display mode of the timer image may be changed during the execution of the timer effect. For example, during the period from "00:10" to "00:05" the remaining time indicated by the timer image, the timer image is displayed in the normal mode, and the remaining time indicated by the timer image is from "00:05" to "00:05". The timer image may be displayed in a special mode until "00: 00". With such an effect configuration, the player becomes interested in whether or not the display mode of the timer image changes during the execution of the timer effect (during the countdown operation).

Further, the timer effect may be an effect that suggests a set value, not an effect that suggests a jackpot expectation. For example, when the set value is 1, the timer image is displayed in the normal mode at a rate of 95%, the timer image is displayed in a special mode at a rate of 5%, and when the set value is 2 or more. , The timer image may be displayed in a normal mode at a rate of 90% and the timer image may be displayed in a special mode at a rate of 10%. In the case of such an effect configuration, the timer image of the special aspect suggests that the set value is a high set value. In this way, while the timer effect is a production corresponding to the super reach effect (battle effect) and the expectation degree suggestion effect, which are advance notice effects, the set value may be suggested by the timer effect itself. With such a configuration, the player's interest in the timer effect can be further increased.

In the present embodiment, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the first setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2000 and decides to execute the timer effect in step S04TM2070, the first setting is made before the start of the timer effect. It is possible to set the effect execution timing so as to start the variable display of the mini-slot symbol related to the suggestion effect, and to continue the variable display of the mini-slot symbol related to the first set suggestion effect even after the start of the timer effect. .. However, in the variable display of the mini-slot symbol related to the first setting suggestion effect, the timing at which the combination of mini-slot symbols ([bell], [bell], [bell] in this example) is stopped and displayed (the timing at which the setting is suggested). ) Shall be set at least at a timing different from the timing at which the timer effect is the final mode (the timing at which the remaining time indicated by the timer image 04TM300 becomes "00:00").

For example, the timing for stopping and displaying the combination of mini slot symbols (in this example, [bell], [bell], and [bell]) is the first half of the timer effect (the remaining time indicated by the timer image 04TM300). May be the timing from "00:10" to "00:05"), and the timing after the timer production ends (for example, after the remaining time indicated by the timer image 04TM300 becomes "00:00"). , Timing after the timer image 04TM300 is erased).

(Cut-in notice production, cut-in suggestion production)
In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the cut-in notice effect is executed in the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation, the cut-in notice effect is executed at a predetermined timing during the battle effect. Further, when it is determined that the cut-in suggestion effect is executed in the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation, the cut-in suggestion effect is executed at a predetermined timing during the battle effect.

In the present embodiment, the cut-in notice effect includes a blue-type cut-in notice effect, a red-type cut-in notice effect, and a gold-type cut-in notice effect. Further, as the cut-in suggestion effect, there are a blue mode cut-in suggestion effect, a red mode cut-in suggestion effect, and a gold mode cut-in suggestion effect.

Specific examples of the cut-in notice effect and the cut-in suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. 11-3. 11-3 (A) to 11-3 (C) show an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the cut-in notice effect is executed and when the cut-in suggestion effect is executed. 11-3 (D) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 after the end of the cut-in notice effect, and FIG. 11-3 (E) is a cut-in. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 after the end of a suggestion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), the cut-in image 04TM100A including the blue background and the characters "chance" is displayed in the cut-in notice effect in the blue mode, and similarly in the cut-in suggestion effect in the blue mode. , A cut-in image 04TM100A containing a blue background and the words "chance" is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (B), in the cut-in notice effect of the red aspect, the cut-in image 04TM100B including the red background and the characters "great chance" is displayed, and the cut-in suggestion effect of the red aspect is displayed. However, similarly, the cut-in image 04TM100B including the red background and the characters "Great Chance" is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (C), in the cut-in notice effect in the golden mode, the cut-in image 04TM100C including the golden background and the characters "extreme heat" is displayed, and the cut-in suggestion effect in the golden mode is displayed. But similarly, a cut-in image 04TM100C containing a golden background and the words "super heat" is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 11-3 (A) to 11-3, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 16TM013 of the image display device 5 to display the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed. .. Further, based on the fact that the winning combination (display result) of the variable display of the mini-slot symbol that was executed last time (most recently executed) was "missing", the mini-slot symbol display area 5L1 of the image display device 5 In 5C1 and 5R1, the combination of mini-slot symbols ([replay], [replay], and [bell] in this example) when the variable display is fixedly stopped is continuously displayed. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols is continued in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 11-3 (A) to 11-3, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the ally character 04TM200 and the enemy character 04TM250 as the battle effect is executed. .. The cut-in image related to the cut-in notice effect or the cut-in suggestion effect has a higher priority than the active display and battle effect effect images (the display layer is higher than the active display and battle effect effect images, and is seen by the player. It is superimposed and displayed so that it can be seen in the foreground), and is superimposed and displayed on the active display and the effect image of the battle effect.

When the display result is determined to be "big hit" and the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "super reach jackpot", the effect control CPU 120 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11-3 (D). , The production image of the battle effect [winning] in which the ally character 04TM200 wins the enemy character 04TM250 is displayed, and the character "win" is displayed in the center of the screen. Further, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the combination of small symbols corresponding to the display result of "big hit" ("777" in this example) is fixedly stopped. At this time, the cut-in images shown in FIGS. 11-3 (A) to 11-3 (C) are the effect images based on the cut-in notice effect.

When the display result is determined to be "out of alignment" and the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "out of super reach", the effect control CPU 120 is mounted on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11-3 (E). , The production image of the battle effect [defeat] in which the ally character 04TM200 is defeated by the enemy character 04TM250 is displayed, and the characters "defeat" are displayed in the center of the screen. Further, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the combination of small symbols corresponding to the display result of "off" ("767" in this example) is fixedly stopped. At this time, the cut-in images shown in FIGS. 11-3 (A) to 11-3 (C) are the effect images based on the cut-in suggestion effect.

In this way, in any case where it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect or when it is decided to execute the cut-in suggestion effect, the battle effect (super reach effect) The execution timing of the cut-in effect (cut-in notice effect or cut-in suggestion effect) is set so that any one of the cut-in images 04TM100A to 04TM100C is displayed at the timing immediately before the winning / losing result is notified. Therefore, the execution period of the cut-in suggestion effect (display period of the cut-in image) and the execution period of the timer effect (display period of the timer image) do not overlap, and at least the timer image 04TM300 is the final mode "00: It is avoided that the cut-in suggestion effect is executed at the timing updated to "00".

If the victory effect is executed after the cut-in effect is executed, it is found that the cut-in effect is the cut-in notice effect, and if the defeat effect is executed after the cut-in effect is executed, the cut-in is performed. It turns out that the production was a cut-in suggestion production. Therefore, the player decides which type of cut-in effect is executed until the end of the battle effect and immediately before the winning / losing result (display result) is notified, and which type of cut-in effect is executed. I can't figure out what it was.

(Example of cut-in suggestion production)
Next, regarding an example of the effect when the timer effect and the cut-in suggestion effect are executed when the display result is determined to be "out of line" and the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "out of super reach", FIG. 11-4. This description will be given with reference to FIGS. 11-6.

FIG. 11-4 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the timer effect and the cut-in suggestion effect, and FIGS. 11-5 and 11-6 are effects related to the timer effect and the cut-in suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of an image.

In this example, in the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation, it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2000, and to execute the expectation suggestion effect of the first aspect (one star) in step S04TM2065. Then, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the timer effect in step S04TM2070, and it is decided to execute the cut-in suggestion effect (third setting suggestion effect) in the golden mode in step S04TM2100.

First, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (1), when the CUP 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 11-4), the effect control CPU 120 is the image display device 5. The variation display of the decorative symbol is started in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the variation display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed in the active display area 16TM013 of the image display device 5, and corresponds to the case where the first reserved storage number is 3. Then, three first hold display 16TM001 are displayed in the first hold display area 16TM011 of the image display device 5.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the fact that the winning combination (display result) of the variable display of the mini slot symbol that was executed last time (immediately executed) was "missing", and the mini of the image display device 5. In the slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, the combination of mini-slot symbols ([replay], [replay], and [bell] in this example) when the variable display is fixedly stopped is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (2), the effect control CPU 120 is in a state of continuing the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. 11). (Timing of T2 shown in -4), based on the decision to execute the first setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2000, the minislot in the minislot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the image display device 5. The variable display of the symbol (variable display of the first mini slot) is started. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols is continued in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (3), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and the step S04TM2070. Based on the decision to execute the timer effect in, at the timing when the remaining time (number of seconds) until the battle effect is executed is 10 seconds (timing of T3 shown in Fig. 11-4), The timer effect is executed, and the timer image 04TM300 (in this example, the numerical image of "00:10" which is the initial value) is displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the variation display of the small symbols is continued in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, and the mini slot symbols are variable in the mini slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the image display device 5. The display is continuing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (4), the effect control CPU 120 reaches the timing when the remaining time (seconds) until the battle effect is executed is 5 seconds (in T4 shown in FIG. 11-4). Timing), the timer effect is continued, and the timer image 04TM300 (in this example, the numerical image of "00:05") updated based on the elapsed time is displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. Further, the effect control CPU 120 is a combination of mini slot symbols based on the execution of the first setting suggestion effect in the mini slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the image display device 5 (in this example, [bell]. [Bell] [Bell]) is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (5), the effect control CPU 120 displays the symbol of the image display device 5 at the timing when the reach state in the fluctuation pattern should be established (the timing of T5 shown in FIG. 11-4). The decorative symbol of "3" is stopped and displayed in the area 5L and the symbol display area 5R to bring it into a reach state, and the characters "reach !!" are displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5. At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the variable display of the small symbol is continued. That is, the small symbol is also stopped in the small symbol display area 5l corresponding to the symbol display area 5L in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the small symbol display area 5r corresponding to the symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. It is continuously displayed in a variable manner without being displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the timer effect, and the timer image 04TM300 (in this example, "00:03") updated based on the elapsed time is displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. Image) is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (6), the effect control CPU 120 reaches the timing when the remaining time (seconds) until the battle effect is executed becomes 0 seconds (T6 shown in FIG. 11-4). (Timing), the timer effect is continued, and the timer image 04TM300 (in this example, the numerical image of "00:00") updated based on the elapsed time is displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. When the remaining time indicated by the timer image 04TM300 becomes "00:00" in the final mode, it is notified that the timing for developing the super reach effect (battle effect) has been reached, and the expectation degree suggestion effect is executed. It is also suggested that.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (7), the effect control CPU 120 ends the timer effect in accordance with the execution timing of the battle effect (at the timing of T7 shown in FIG. 11-4), and the image display device. The timer image 04TM300 (“00: 00” in this example) in the lower right area of the screen of No. 5 is erased. The effect control CPU 120 executes a battle effect [defeat] according to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach in which the display result is "off", and causes the image display device 5 to display the background image for the battle effect (normally). (Switching from the background to the background for battle production), the ally character 04TM200 and the enemy character 04TM250 are displayed, and the characters "battle" are displayed in the upper left area of the screen. Further, based on the decision in step S04TM2065 to execute the expectation notice effect of the first aspect (one star), a star image 04TM400 showing the jackpot expectation is placed next to the word "battle". Display one. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (8), the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the battle effect [defeat], and continuously displays the ally character 04TM200 and the enemy character 04TM250 on the image display device 5. (Timing of T8 shown in FIG. 11-4). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (9), at the execution timing of the cut-in suggestion effect (at the timing of T9 shown in FIG. 11-4), the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in suggestion effect in the golden mode. Then, the cut-in image 04TM100C including the golden background and the characters "extreme heat", which is a display mode having a higher priority than the production image of the battle effect, is displayed in the central area in the vertical direction of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (10), the effect control CPU 120 erases the cut-in image 04TM100C including the golden background and the characters "extreme heat", and ends the cut-in suggestion effect. With the ally character 04TM200 and the enemy character 04TM250 displayed on the image display device 5 (the image corresponding to the battle effect is continuously displayed), the characters "defeat" are displayed in the center of the image display device 5. It is displayed (timing of T10 shown in FIG. 11-4). Then, the effect control CPU 120 stops the combination of small symbols (“323” in this example) whose display result is “off” in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this point, the small symbol has not stopped fixedly and is in a state of swinging stop. At this point, the player understands that the display result is "off" and that the type of cut-in effect executed is the cut-in suggestion effect. Then, it is grasped that the set value of the game machine is at least 4 or more by executing the cut-in suggestion effect of the golden aspect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (11), the effect control CPU 120 corresponded to the fact that the battle effect was completed and the defeat was notified (the display result was notified to be "missing"). The eye-catching image 04TM500 is displayed on the entire screen for a predetermined period (for example, about 3 seconds) (timing of T11 shown in FIG. 11-4). The eye-catching image 04TM500 contains information that is not related to the display result, such as the model name of the game machine (“CR XXX” in this example), and is misleading as a notice effect. Is not included.

Further, during the display period of the eye-catching image 04TM500, the active display 16TM003, the first hold display 16TM001, the mini-slot 16TM030 related to the first setting suggestion effect, the ally character 04TM200 and the enemy character 04TM250 related to the battle effect, etc. are the eye-catching images. It is obscured by 04TM500 and hidden, and only the combination of small symbols (“323” in this example) that is stopped swinging is visible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (12), when the display period of the eye-catching image 04TM500 ends, the effect control CPU 120 hides the eye-catching image 04TM500 and makes the background image compatible with super reach. The background image is returned to the normal background image (timing of T12 shown in FIG. 11-4). Then, the combination of decorative symbols (“323” in this example) indicating that the display result is “off” is stopped. In addition, the active display 16TM003, the first hold display 16TM001, and the mini slot 16TM030 related to the first setting suggestion effect are redisplayed. In the normal background, the ally character 04TM200 and the enemy character 04TM250 related to the battle effect are not displayed. At this point, the decorative symbol has not stopped oscillating and has stopped oscillating, and the small symbol has also stopped oscillating.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation designation command from the CPU 103 at the timing when the variation display of the special symbol ends (timing of T13 shown in FIG. 11-4), the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5 The combination of decorative symbols ("323" in this example) is fixedly stopped at 5, C and 5R, and the combination of small symbols ("323" in this example) is fixed and stopped at the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c and 5r. Let me.

As shown in FIG. 11-5 (6), when the timer effect is executed, the battle effect suggesting the jackpot expectation when the timer image 04TM300 reaches the final mode (“00: 00” in this example). And the expectation suggestion effect are executed. On the other hand, the first setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value starts at the timing before the timer effect starts, and ends at the timing before the timer effect reaches the final display mode (in this example, the timer effect). In the first half of the period ("00:10" to "00:05"), the combination of [bell], [bell], and [bell] is stopped and the setting is suggested). Further, the cut-in suggestion effect suggesting the set value is executed after the timer effect ends and the timer image 04TM300 is hidden.

In this way, when the timer image 04TM300 is in the final mode (“00: 00” in this example), the advance notice effect suggesting the jackpot expectation can be executed, but the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value is By not executing it, it is clarified that the information suggested in response to the timer effect accompanied by the countdown operation is the jackpot expectation. When the timer effect is executed, the player preliminarily suggests that the jackpot expectation is suggested at the timing when the countdown operation ends (the timing when the timer image 04TM300 becomes "00:00" which is the final mode). Because it can be grasped, it is possible to raise interest in the variable display currently being executed. Further, when the cut-in suggestion effect is executed, it becomes clear that the cut-in suggestion effect has been executed after the display result is notified by the defeat effect, so that the player is notified of the display result. Until this is done, attention will be paid to the effect (battle effect) related to the display result of the variable display being executed. In addition, since the player can estimate the set value based on the mode in which the cut-in suggestion effect is executed after being notified that the display result is "off", the player can estimate the set value. It is also possible to suppress a decline in interest after the display result of "" is notified. In this way, it is possible to appropriately generate interest in both the advance notice production and the suggestion production.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 11-5 (3) to 11-6 (9), the timer image 04TM300 is displayed, the timer image 04TM300 is the final mode (“00:00”), and the timer image is displayed. An example is shown in which the cut-in suggestion effect is executed after the 04TM300 is hidden, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the cut-in suggestion effect is executed at a timing before the timer image 04TM300 is displayed. After the timer image 04TM300 is displayed, before the timer image 04TM300 becomes the final mode (“0:00”) (for example, the first half period of the timer effect (“00:10” to “00:05”). )) The cut-in suggestion effect may be executed.

At least, at the timing when the cut-in suggestion effect is executed (the timing when the cut-in image related to the cut-in suggestion effect is displayed), the timer image 04TM300 is prevented from being in the final mode (“00: 00”) ( When the timer image 04TM300 is in the final mode (“00: 00”), the cut-in suggestion effect is not executed), and the timer image 04TM300 eliminates the situation where the setting suggestion effect is emphasized. With the execution of the suggestion effect, it is possible to prevent the effect of the timer image 04TM300 (notice effect corresponding to the timer effect) from being lowered.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-5 (3) to (8) and 11-6 (9), in the timer effect, the subtraction operation of the remaining time until the start of the battle effect (countdown operation until the execution of the battle effect) is performed. After the timer image 04TM300 is in a mode (“00: 00”) that suggests the execution timing of the battle effect, the cut-in suggestion effect is executed after being erased. That is, the execution timing of the cut-in suggestion effect is not suggested by the subtraction operation of the timer image 04TM300. According to such a configuration, the scene where the execution timing of the cut-in suggestion effect is emphasized by the subtraction operation of the timer image 04TM300 disappears, and the effect using the timer image 04TM300 (for the timer effect) is eliminated as the setting suggestion effect is executed. It is possible to prevent the interest of the corresponding notice production) from being lowered.

As shown in FIGS. 11-1 and 9-6 (G), whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed is determined according to the set value regardless of the display result. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-1 and 11-2 (D), whether or not the cut-in suggestion effect (third setting suggestion effect) is executed is determined when the display result is "off" (in step S04TM2080). NO), it is determined according to the set value. Therefore, the setting suggestion effect in the present embodiment is not executed when the display result is "big hit", and can be executed when the display result is "missing", and the cut-in suggestion effect that can be executed and the display result is "big hit". There is a first setting suggestion effect that can be executed at any time of "" or "off". According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects, and the cut-in suggestion effect is not executed when the display result becomes a "big hit", which reduces the chance of setting estimation. Can be mitigated.

As shown in FIG. 9-6 (G), each time the first setting suggestion effect whose execution ratio differs depending on the set value is executed, the player himself counts the number of times the first setting suggestion effect is executed. The player himself calculates the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect [execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect = (number of executions of the first setting suggestion effect / number of fluctuations) × 100], and the calculated first setting The player can infer the set value by determining which of the set values of the first set suggested effect execution ratio for each well-known set value the execution ratio of the suggestion effect is close to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-2 (D), the cut-in suggestion effect of the golden mode in which the cut-in image 04TM100C of the golden mode is displayed has set values of "4", "5", and "6". It is an effect that suggests (notifies) that the set value specified by the set value designation command is any of "4", "5", and "6"). In particular, in this example, it is confirmed that the set value is at least one of "4", "5", and "6" (high set value) due to the execution of the cut-in suggestion effect in the golden mode. To do. As described above, the cut-in suggestion effect is a high setting suggestion effect that suggests (notifies) that the set value is a high set value.

In this way, the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect for each variation display is 3% (when the set value is "1") to 8% (when the set value is "6"), and the set value. Since the difference in execution ratio between them is small, it takes a large number of executions to accurately estimate the set value, and the accuracy of setting suggestion is low. On the other hand, the execution rate of the cut-in suggestion effect of the golden mode for each variable display is 0% (when the set value is any of "1", "2", and "3") or 5% (the set value is). When it is any of "4", "5", and "6"), and when it is set to a low set value (when the set value is any of "1", "2", and "3"). If) will not be executed. When the cut-in suggestion effect of the golden aspect is executed, it is determined that the set value is at least one of "4", "5", and "6" (high set value), so that the setting suggestion is made. The accuracy of is high. In this way, by making it possible to execute a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects having different accuracy of setting suggestion, it is possible to improve the interest of setting suggestion.

In the above setting suggestion effect, the range of setting values to be suggested differs between the first setting suggestion effect and the cut-in suggestion effect ("1", "2", "3" in the first setting suggestion effect. , "4", "5", "6", and in the second setting suggestion effect, it is any of "1" to "3", "4" to "6") However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the range of the setting value to be suggested may be common between the first setting suggestion effect and the cut-in suggestion effect. For example, the first setting suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 3% when the set value is "1", and is executed at a rate of 5% when the set value is "2" or more. On the other hand, the cut-in suggestion effect of the golden aspect is not executed when the set value is "1", and is executed at a rate of 20% when the set value is "2" or more. May be good.

In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the timer effect (countdown operation of the timer image 04TM300) is executed as an effect suggesting the display result of the executed variation display (for example, the variation display corresponding to the active display 16TM003). However, not limited to such a form, the timer effect is executed as a look-ahead notice effect that suggests the display result of the variable display whose execution is suspended (for example, the variable display corresponding to the first hold display 16TM001). May be good. Specifically, whether or not the timer effect is executed is determined based on the determination result of the start winning determination (see FIG. 8-16) based on the occurrence of the winning to the starting winning opening (for example). , When the judgment result at the time of starting prize is "big hit", it is decided to execute the timer effect at a higher rate than when the judgment result at the time of starting prize is "missing").

Then, when it is decided that the timer effect is executed, the timer image 04TM300 is displayed at a timing before the variation display (so-called target variation) that is the target of the determination is executed. The timer image 04TM300 may be counted down. Further, at the timing when the timer image 04TM300 becomes the final mode "00:00" due to the countdown operation, the hold change effect that changes the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the target change that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect is executed. You may do so. In this case, the countdown operation of the timer image 04TM300 suggests the execution timing of the look-ahead advance notice effect (the timing at which the target change that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect is notified).

Further, when the timer effect is the look-ahead notice effect, the timing at which the timer image 04TM300 becomes "00:00", which is the final mode, may be the timing at which the target change that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect is started. It may be the timing when a specific effect (for example, the above-mentioned battle effect or expectation suggestion effect) is executed in the target fluctuation.

Further, when the timer effect is a look-ahead advance notice effect, the timer image 04TM300 is displayed over a plurality of fluctuation displays prior to the target fluctuation, and a countdown operation is performed over the plurality of fluctuation displays to display the target fluctuation. Prior to the execution, the pre-reading advance notice effect such as the above-mentioned hold change effect may be executed at the timing when the timer image 04TM300 reaches the final mode of "00:00". As a result, it is possible to improve the interest over a plurality of fluctuation displays prior to the target fluctuation.

Further, when the timer effect is a look-ahead advance notice effect, the timer image 04TM300 is displayed over a plurality of variation displays including a variation display prior to the target variation and a target variation, and counts down over the plurality of variation displays. An effect or a specific effect (for example, the battle effect described above) in which the display mode of the active display 16TM003 changes at the timing when the operation is performed and the timer image 04TM300 reaches the final mode "00:00" during the execution of the target change. And expectation suggestion effect) may be executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest over a plurality of fluctuation displays including the fluctuation display before the target fluctuation and the target fluctuation.

Further, when the timer effect is a pre-reading advance notice effect, the countdown operation may be started after a predetermined period (for example, a plurality of variable display periods) has elapsed after the timer image 04TM300 is displayed. For example, when the execution of the timer effect is determined based on the determination result of the start winning determination (see FIG. 8-16) based on the occurrence of the winning to the starting winning opening, the timer image 04TM300 is displayed. The countdown operation should not be started immediately (at this time, a character such as "timer is being prepared" is displayed to notify the player that the countdown operation has not been executed yet). Then, the countdown operation is not started at the timing before the fluctuation display (target fluctuation) that is the target of the determination is executed, the countdown operation is started during the execution of the target fluctuation, and the timer image is generated by the countdown operation. The battle effect and the expectation degree suggestion effect may be executed at the timing when the 04TM300 reaches the final mode of "00:00".

As shown in FIG. 11-6 (9), when the battle effect and the cut-in suggestion effect are executed in parallel, the cut-in image 04TM100C including the golden background and the characters "super heat" is displayed. It is displayed in a display mode with a higher priority than the production image of the battle effect. In this way, when the battle effect and the cut-in suggestion effect are executed in parallel at the same time, the cut-in suggestion effect is displayed in a display mode having a higher priority than the battle effect, so that the setting is high. The visibility of the cut-in suggestion effect as a suggestion effect is enhanced, and it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the cut-in image.

As shown in FIG. 11-4, the first setting suggestion effect is executed at the timing of T2, and the cut-in suggestion effect is executed at the timing of T9 within the period of one fluctuation display. In this way, by executing the setting suggestion effect at a plurality of timings during the variable display period, the player has more chances to guess the setting, and the interest during the variable display period can be improved. It should be noted that the same type of setting suggestion effect (for example, the third setting suggestion effect) may be executed at a plurality of timings within the period of one variation display, and the same type may be executed within the period of one variation display. (For example, the third setting suggestion effect) may be executed a plurality of times.

As shown in FIG. 11-2 (D), whether or not the cut-in suggestion effect is executed depends on the set value set based on the table for determining whether or not the cut-in suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode. It has been determined (step S04TM2100). Further, as shown in FIG. 11-2 (B), whether or not the timer effect is executed (whether or not the timer image is displayed) is determined according to the display result based on the table for determining whether or not the timer effect is executed. (Step S04TM2070). In this way, whether or not the timer image is displayed is determined based on the display result at a common ratio regardless of whether or not the cut-in suggestion effect is executed. Further, regardless of whether or not the timer effect is executed (whether or not the timer image is displayed), whether or not the cut-in suggestion effect is executed is determined at a common ratio based on the set set value. According to such a configuration, whether or not the timer effect for displaying the timer image is executed before the execution of the battle effect and whether or not the cut-in suggestion effect during the execution of the battle effect is executed are independently determined. It is possible to suppress the complexity of the determination process. As a result, when a specification change such as a change in the jackpot probability occurs, it is possible to facilitate debugging in terms of production and suppress an increase in development cost.

If the timer effect is executed in response to the cut-in suggestion effect, which is the setting suggestion effect, whether or not the timer effect is executed is determined according to the set setting value, and the timer effect is set. , The configuration will be executed at different rates depending on the set value. That is, the timer effect itself has a role as a setting suggestion effect that suggests the currently set value, and the player is interested in the variable display result (or the effect that suggests the variable display result) during the variable display. Will be reduced. In order to prevent the occurrence of such a problem, the decision regarding the timer effect and the decision regarding the cut-in suggestion effect are not related to each other.

(Other variants)
(1) In the above embodiment, an example of executing the cut-in suggestion effect as the third setting suggestion effect is shown, but the setting is not limited to such a form and the setting is different from the cut-in suggestion effect as the third setting suggestion effect. A suggestion effect may be performed.

For example, as the third setting suggestion effect, the eye-catching effect of displaying the above-mentioned eye-catching image 04TM500 may be executed. The eye-catching effect is that when the variation pattern is a variation pattern accompanied by super reach (“super reach off” or “super reach jackpot”), the super reach effect (for example, battle effect) ends and the display result is notified. It is an effect that is executed after being performed (after the victory or defeat is notified), and an eye-catching image (for example, an image in which the characters of the title of the game machine are displayed on a black background image) is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 3). It is an effect to display (for seconds).

The eye-catching image is an image for making the player clearly recognize that the battle effect has been completed and suppressing a sudden feeling when switching from the effect image of the battle effect to the normal effect image. At this time, the eye-catching effect can be executed as the third setting suggestion effect by determining the mode of the characters of the title shown in the eye-catching image at different ratios according to the set setting value. For example, when the set value is "1", the title characters are displayed in white at a rate of 80%, the title characters are displayed in red at a rate of 20%, and the set value is "2" or more. In some cases, the title characters may be displayed in white at a rate of 20%, and the title characters may be displayed in red at a rate of 80%.

In this way, the eye-catching effect in which the mode is determined at different ratios according to the set value does not correspond to the timer effect, and the timer effect does not suggest the execution timing (setting suggestion timing) of the effect. This is an example of production. The eye-catching effect may be executed only when it is notified that the display result is "off", and when it is notified that the display result is "off" and when the display result is "big hit". It can be executed in any case when it is notified that there is (however, when it is notified that the display result is "missing", it is better than when it is notified that the display result is "big hit". The execution rate of the eye-catching effect is high).

(2) In the above embodiment, an example in which the third setting suggestion effect (cut-in suggestion effect) is executed after the display of the timer image is completed is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. The third setting suggestion effect (cut-in suggestion effect) may be executed during the display. However, even when the timer image is displayed, the third setting suggestion effect (cut-in suggestion effect) is not executed at the timing when the timer image becomes "0:00".

(3) In the above embodiment, as an effect corresponding to the advance notice effect, an example in which a timer effect accompanied by a numerical value subtraction operation (countdown operation) shown in the timer image is executed is shown. However, as an effect corresponding to the advance notice effect, an effect of performing other operations may be executed. For example, as an effect corresponding to the advance notice effect, a present effect accompanied by an operation of opening a box (present box) decorated for a present may be executed. In the present production, after the image of the present box is displayed, the present box is opened and the image of the present (hereinafter, "present image") which is the contents of the present box is displayed. For example, as a gift image, an image of a character according to the expectation of a big hit, an image of the character "change" corresponding to an active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display, and a "battle effect" corresponding to the super reach effect There is an image of the characters "Development".

(4) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the advance notice effect (battle effect) is always executed at the timing when the timer image becomes "00:00", but the timer image is not limited to such a form. The advance notice effect may not be executed at the timing of "00:00". When such an effect configuration is adopted, if the advance notice effect (battle effect) is executed at the timing when the timer image becomes "0:00", the timing when the timer image becomes "0:00" It is assumed that the rate of big hits is higher than when the advance notice production (battle production) is not executed (when it does not develop into super reach).

(5) In the above embodiment, the numerical value shown in the timer image is decremented and updated by 1 every 1 second from the initial value "00:10" to the final value "00:00". After that, an example of erasing the timer image and ending the timer effect was shown, but not limited to such a form, before the numerical value shown in the timer image reaches the final value "00:00". , The timer image may be hidden and the timer effect may be terminated. That is, there may be a pattern in which the numerical value shown in the timer image does not become "00:00" when the timer effect is executed.

(6) In the above embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern is "super reach jackpot", an example is shown in which a battle effect [victory] in which a ally character wins over an enemy character is executed. Not limited to this, when the fluctuation pattern is "super reach jackpot", a revival effect in which a ally character once defeated by an enemy character may reversely win against the enemy character may be executed. At this time, the battle effect [defeat] in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character may be executed once, the eye-catching effect described above may be executed, and then the revival effect may be executed. That is, an effect pattern for notifying the display result after the execution of the setting suggestion effect may be provided.

(7) In the above embodiment, the third setting suggestion effect can be executed when the display result is "off", and the third setting suggestion effect is not executed when the display result is "big hit". However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the third setting suggestion effect may be executed even when the display result is a “big hit”. However, when the display result is "big hit", the third setting suggestion effect is executed at a lower rate than when the display result is "missing".

(8) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the second setting suggestion effect is not executed because the variation number display 16TM040 is not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment, and the variation number display 16TM040 can be displayed. It may be possible to execute the second setting suggestion effect by adopting.

(Structure included in feature part 04TM)
As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116654, a game machine that displays a card corresponding to the advance notice effect has been proposed before the advance notice effect is executed. Further, as shown in JP-A-2010-201002, it is possible to set a set value of any of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player, and a character image corresponding to the set value before and after the setting change can be set. A game machine to be displayed has been proposed. When the effect related to the setting suggestion as shown in JP-A-2010-201002 is executed in the gaming machine in which the information (card) corresponding to the advance notice effect as shown in JP-A-2016-116654 is executed, the effect related to the setting suggestion is produced. , If the effect is performed when the player is not controlled in an advantageous state, the player may guess that the player is not controlled in an advantageous state, which may reduce the interest of the game. .. The following inventions according to means A1 to means A9 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and are intended to suppress a decline in the interest of a game in a game machine capable of performing an effect related to setting suggestion.

The game machine of means A1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) having different advantages for the player. ,
A state control means (CPU103) that can control an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and
An effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing an effect (notice effect, setting suggestion effect),
With
The effect executing means is
Suggestion production (cut-in suggestion production) regarding setting suggestion,
Multiple types of advance notice effects (battle effect, expectation level suggestion effect, cut-in advance notice effect) that suggest that the control is controlled to the advantageous state, and
It is possible to execute a specific effect (timer effect) that displays a specific display (timer image 04TM300) in response to the advance notice effect.
When the notice effect is executed after the specific display is displayed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the notice effect is executed without displaying the specific display ( As shown in FIG. 11-2 (B), the rate at which the timer effect is executed when the display result is "big hit" (the rate at which the timer image 04TM300 is displayed) is 60%, whereas it is displayed. The rate at which the timer effect is executed when the result is "off" (the rate at which the timer image 04TM300 is displayed) is 20%),
The effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect when it is not controlled to the advantageous state (as shown in FIG. 11-1), when the display result is "off" (NO in step S04TM2080), the effect control The CPU 120 for PC determines whether or not to execute the cut-in suggestion effect and the mode of the effect (step S04TM2100).
In the specific production,
When the corresponding advance notice effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display changes to a special mode (as shown in FIG. 11-5 (6), the effect control CPU 120 sets the numerical value of the timer image 04TM300 to “00”. Can be updated to ": 00"),
When the suggestion effect is executed after the specific display is displayed, the display mode of the specific display does not change to the special mode (FIGS. 11-5 (6) to (8) and FIGS. 11-6 (9). ), When the cut-in suggestion effect is executed after the timer image 04TM300 is displayed, at least the timer image 04TM300 does not show the value of "0:00").
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the suggestion effect is not emphasized by the specific display, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest when the suggestion effect is executed.

The game machine of means A2
It is a game machine of means A1 and
The effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) is
As the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect that is not executed when controlled to the advantageous state and can be executed when not controlled to the advantageous state (not executed when the display result becomes a "big hit", and the display result is A cut-in suggestion effect that can be executed when it becomes "off" and a second suggestion effect that can be executed when it is controlled to the advantageous state and can be executed even when it is not controlled to the advantageous state (display result is A game machine characterized in that it can execute the first setting suggestion effect) that can be executed at any time of "big hit" or "missing".
According to such a configuration, since it is possible to execute a plurality of types of suggestion effects, it is possible to reduce the influence of reducing the chance of setting estimation when controlled in an advantageous state.

The game machine of means A3
A gaming machine of means A1 or means A2,
The effect executing means is
As the suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of suggestion effects having different accuracy of the setting suggestion (the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect is as small as 1% between the set values, but the accuracy of the setting suggestion is low. When the cut-in suggestion effect of the golden aspect is executed, it is confirmed that the set value is at least one of "4", "5", and "6" (high set value). High accuracy)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in setting suggestion.

The game machine of means A4
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A3.
A determination means (CPU 103 that executes the special symbol normal processing in step S110) for determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled, and
A determination means (CPU 103 that executes the start winning determination process in step S101) for determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled before the determination by the determination means is provided.
The effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) can display the specific display based on the determination result of the determination means (the timer effect can be executed as the look-ahead notice effect, and the timer image 04TM300 is displayed as the look-ahead notice effect. Can be displayed before executing the variable display that is the target of
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the specific display.

The game machine of means A5
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A4.
The effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) can display a plurality of specific displays in the specific effect (a plurality of timer images can be displayed in parallel at the same time).
When multiple specific displays are displayed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when a single specific display is displayed (when multiple timer images are displayed in parallel, the singular number is displayed. Expectations for big hits are higher than when the timer image is displayed)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, when the specific display is displayed, it is possible to make an interest in whether or not another specific display is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest in the specific display.

The game machine of means A6
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A5.
It is possible to suggest the setting by the display mode of the specific display (the display of the timer image in the red mode suggests that the set value is a high set value).
A game machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, attention can be paid to the display mode of the specific display.

The game machine of means A7
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A6.
The effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) is
When the suggestion effect and the advance notice effect are executed in parallel, the information related to the suggestion effect is preferentially displayed (as shown in FIG. 11-6 (9), the battle effect and the cut-in suggestion effect are displayed. When being executed at the same time, the cut-in image 04TM100C containing the golden background and the characters "super heat" is displayed with higher priority than the production image of the battle effect)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the suggestion effect by increasing the visibility of the suggestion effect.

The game machine of means A8
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A7.
The advance notice effect determination means for executing the first determination for determining whether or not to execute the advance notice effect (whether or not the expectation degree suggestion effect is executed in step S04TM2065 and the effect mode are based on the dedicated table (FIG. 11-2 (A)). CPU 120) for production control, which is determined by
Suggestion effect determination means for executing the second determination for determining whether or not to execute the suggestion effect (whether or not the cut-in suggestion effect is executed in step S04TM2100 and the effect mode are determined based on the dedicated table (FIG. 11-2 (D)). A gaming machine characterized by comprising a CPU 120) for effect control to be determined.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the effect control.

The game machine of means A9
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A8.
Equipped with a variable display means (CPU103) capable of executing variable display (variable display of special symbols),
The effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect at a plurality of timings during the period during which the variable display is executed (as shown in FIG. 11-4, the timing of T2 during the period during which the variable display is executed). The first setting suggestion effect is executed in, and the cut-in suggestion effect is executed at the timing of T9)
A game machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of suggestive production.

As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116654, a game machine that displays a card corresponding to the advance notice effect has been proposed before the advance notice effect is executed. Further, as shown in JP-A-2010-201002, it is possible to set a set value of any of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player, and a character image corresponding to the set value before and after the setting change can be set. A game machine to be displayed has been proposed. When the effect related to the setting suggestion as shown in JP-A-2010-201002 is executed in the gaming machine in which the information (card) corresponding to the advance notice effect as shown in JP-A-2016-116654 is executed, the effect related to the setting suggestion is produced. , If the effect is performed when the player is not controlled in an advantageous state, the player may guess that the player is not controlled in an advantageous state, which may reduce the interest of the game. .. The following inventions according to means B1 to B9 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and are intended to suppress a decline in the interest of a game in a game machine capable of performing an effect related to setting suggestion.

The game machine of means B1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) having different advantages for the player. ,
A state control means (CPU103) that can control an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and
An effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing an effect (notice effect, setting suggestion effect),
With
The effect executing means is
Suggestion production (cut-in suggestion production) regarding setting suggestion,
Multiple types of advance notice effects (battle effect, expectation level suggestion effect, cut-in advance notice effect) that suggest that the control is controlled to the advantageous state, and
It is possible to execute a specific effect (timer effect) that displays a specific display (timer image 04TM300) in response to the advance notice effect.
When the notice effect is executed after the specific display is displayed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the notice effect is executed without displaying the specific display ( As shown in FIG. 11-2 (B), the rate at which the timer effect is executed when the display result is "big hit" (the rate at which the timer image 04TM300 is displayed) is 60%, whereas it is displayed. The rate at which the timer effect is executed when the result is "off" (the rate at which the timer image 04TM300 is displayed) is 20%),
The effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect when it is not controlled to the advantageous state (as shown in FIG. 11-1), when the display result is "off" (NO in step S04TM2080), the effect control The CPU 120 for PC determines whether or not to execute the cut-in suggestion effect and the mode of the effect (step S04TM2100).
In the specific effect, it is possible to suggest the execution timing of the advance notice effect by operating the specific display (as shown in FIGS. 11-5 (3) to (6), in the timer effect, the timer image The subtraction operation of 04TM300 suggests the execution timing of the battle effect and the expectation suggestion effect),
The timing at which the suggestion effect is executed is different from the timing suggested by the operation of the specific display (the timing at which the cut-in suggestion effect is executed is updated to "00:00", which is the final mode of the timer image 04TM300. After the timer image 04TM300, which was updated to the final mode, was hidden after the timing was set)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the suggestion effect is not emphasized by the specific display, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest when the suggestion effect is executed.

The game machine of means B2
It is a game machine of means B1
The effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) is
As the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect that is not executed when controlled to the advantageous state and can be executed when not controlled to the advantageous state (not executed when the display result becomes a "big hit", and the display result is A cut-in suggestion effect that can be executed when it becomes "off" and a second suggestion effect that can be executed when it is controlled to the advantageous state and can be executed even when it is not controlled to the advantageous state (display result is A game machine characterized in that it can execute the first setting suggestion effect) that can be executed at any time of "big hit" or "missing".
According to such a configuration, since it is possible to execute a plurality of types of suggestion effects, it is possible to reduce the influence of reducing the chance of setting estimation when controlled in an advantageous state.

The game machine of means B3
A gaming machine of means B1 or means B2.
The effect executing means is
As the suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of suggestion effects having different accuracy of the setting suggestion (the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect is as small as 1% between the set values, but the accuracy of the setting suggestion is low. When the cut-in suggestion effect of the golden aspect is executed, it is confirmed that the set value is at least one of "4", "5", and "6" (high set value). High accuracy)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in setting suggestion.

The game machine of means B4
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B3.
A determination means (CPU 103 that executes the special symbol normal processing in step S110) for determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled, and
A determination means (CPU 103 that executes the start winning determination process in step S101) for determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled before the determination by the determination means is provided.
The effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) can display the specific display based on the determination result of the determination means (the timer effect can be executed as the look-ahead notice effect, and the timer image 04TM300 is displayed as the look-ahead notice effect. Can be displayed before executing the variable display that is the target of
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the specific display.

The game machine of means B5
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B4.
The effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) can display a plurality of specific displays in the specific effect (a plurality of timer images can be displayed in parallel at the same time).
When multiple specific displays are displayed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when a single specific display is displayed (when multiple timer images are displayed in parallel, the singular number is displayed. Expectations for big hits are higher than when the timer image is displayed)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, when the specific display is displayed, it is possible to make an interest in whether or not another specific display is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest in the specific display.

The game machine of means B6
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B5.
It is possible to suggest the setting by the display mode of the specific display (the display of the timer image in the red mode suggests that the set value is a high set value).
A game machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, attention can be paid to the display mode of the specific display.

The game machine of means B7
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B6.
The effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) is
When the suggestion effect and the advance notice effect are executed in parallel, the information related to the suggestion effect is preferentially displayed (as shown in FIG. 11-6 (9), the battle effect and the cut-in suggestion effect are displayed. When being executed at the same time, the cut-in image 04TM100C containing the golden background and the characters "super heat" is displayed with higher priority than the production image of the battle effect)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the suggestion effect by increasing the visibility of the suggestion effect.

The game machine of means B8
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B7.
The advance notice effect determination means for executing the first determination for determining whether or not to execute the advance notice effect (whether or not the expectation degree suggestion effect is executed in step S04TM2065 and the effect mode are based on the dedicated table (FIG. 11-2 (A)). CPU 120) for production control, which is determined by
Suggestion effect determination means for executing the second determination for determining whether or not to execute the suggestion effect (whether or not the cut-in suggestion effect is executed in step S04TM2100 and the effect mode are determined based on the dedicated table (FIG. 11-2 (D)). A gaming machine characterized by comprising a CPU 120) for effect control to be determined.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the effect control.

The game machine of means B9
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B8.
Equipped with a variable display means (CPU103) capable of executing variable display (variable display of special symbols),
The effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect at a plurality of timings during the period during which the variable display is executed (as shown in FIG. 11-4, the timing of T2 during the period during which the variable display is executed). The first setting suggestion effect is executed in, and the cut-in suggestion effect is executed at the timing of T9)
A game machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of suggestive production.

As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116654, a game machine that displays a card corresponding to the advance notice effect has been proposed before the advance notice effect is executed. Further, as shown in JP-A-2010-201002, it is possible to set a set value of any of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player, and a character image corresponding to the set value before and after the setting change can be set. A game machine to be displayed has been proposed. In a gaming machine in which information (card) corresponding to the advance notice effect as shown in JP-A-2016-116654 is displayed, the effect control is performed when the effect related to the setting suggestion as shown in JP-A-2010-2010902 is executed. Can be complicated. The following inventions according to means C1 to C10 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and are intended to suppress complication of effect control in a game machine capable of performing an effect related to setting suggestion.

The game machine of means C1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) having different advantages for the player. ,
A state control means (CPU103) that can control an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and
An effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing an effect (notice effect, setting suggestion effect),
With
The effect executing means is
Suggestion production (cut-in suggestion production) regarding setting suggestion,
Multiple types of advance notice effects (battle effect, expectation level suggestion effect, cut-in advance notice effect) that suggest that the control is controlled to the advantageous state, and
It is possible to execute a specific effect (timer effect) that displays a specific display (timer image 04TM300) in response to the advance notice effect.
When the notice effect is executed after the specific display is displayed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the notice effect is executed without displaying the specific display ( As shown in FIG. 11-2 (B), the rate at which the timer effect is executed when the display result is "big hit" (the rate at which the timer image 04TM300 is displayed) is 60%, whereas it is displayed. The rate at which the timer effect is executed when the result is "off" (the rate at which the timer image 04TM300 is displayed) is 20%),
Whether or not to execute the suggestion effect is determined by a different ratio according to the set value (as shown in FIG. 11-2 (D), whether or not the cut-in suggestion effect is executed is different depending on the set value. (Determined by),
Whether or not the specific effect is executed is determined by a common ratio regardless of whether or not the suggestion effect is executed (as shown in FIG. 11-2 (B), whether or not the timer effect is executed (display of the timer image). (Presence / absence) is determined at a different rate depending on the display result regardless of whether or not the cut-in suggestion effect is executed.)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the effect control.

The game machine of means C2
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) having different advantages for the player. ,
A state control means (CPU103) that can control an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and
An effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing an effect (notice effect, setting suggestion effect),
With
The effect executing means is
Suggestion production (cut-in suggestion production) regarding setting suggestion,
Multiple types of advance notice effects (battle effect, expectation level suggestion effect, cut-in advance notice effect) that suggest that the control is controlled to the advantageous state, and
It is possible to execute a specific effect (timer effect) that displays a specific display (timer image 04TM300) in response to the advance notice effect.
When the notice effect is executed after the specific display is displayed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the notice effect is executed without displaying the specific display ( As shown in FIG. 11-2 (B), the rate at which the timer effect is executed when the display result is "big hit" (the rate at which the timer image 04TM300 is displayed) is 60%, whereas it is displayed. The rate at which the timer effect is executed when the result is "off" (the rate at which the timer image 04TM300 is displayed) is 20%),
Regardless of whether or not the specific effect is executed, it is determined whether or not the suggestion effect is executed at a different ratio depending on the set value (as shown in FIGS. 11-2 (B) and 11-2 (D), the timer Regardless of whether or not the effect is executed (whether or not the timer image is displayed), whether or not the cut-in suggestion effect is executed is determined at a different rate according to the set value.)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the effect control.

The game machine of means C3
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2.
The effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) is
As the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect that is not executed when controlled to the advantageous state and can be executed when not controlled to the advantageous state (not executed when the display result becomes a "big hit", and the display result is A cut-in suggestion effect that can be executed when it becomes "off" and a second suggestion effect that can be executed when it is controlled to the advantageous state and can be executed even when it is not controlled to the advantageous state (display result is A game machine characterized in that it can execute the first setting suggestion effect) that can be executed at any time of "big hit" or "missing".
According to such a configuration, since it is possible to execute a plurality of types of suggestion effects, it is possible to reduce the influence of reducing the chance of setting estimation when controlled in an advantageous state.

The game machine of means C4
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C3.
The effect executing means is
As the suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of suggestion effects having different accuracy of the setting suggestion (the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect is as small as 1% between the set values, but the accuracy of the setting suggestion is low. When the cut-in suggestion effect of the golden aspect is executed, it is confirmed that the set value is at least one of "4", "5", and "6" (high set value). High accuracy)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in setting suggestion.

The game machine of means C5
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C4.
A determination means (CPU 103 that executes the special symbol normal processing in step S110) for determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled, and
A determination means (CPU 103 that executes the start winning determination process in step S101) for determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled before the determination by the determination means is provided.
The effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) can display the specific display based on the determination result of the determination means (the timer effect can be executed as the look-ahead notice effect, and the timer image 04TM300 is displayed as the look-ahead notice effect. Can be displayed before executing the variable display that is the target of
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the specific display.

The game machine of means C6
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C5.
The effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) can display a plurality of specific displays in the specific effect (a plurality of timer images can be displayed in parallel at the same time).
When multiple specific displays are displayed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when a single specific display is displayed (when multiple timer images are displayed in parallel, the singular number is displayed. Expectations for big hits are higher than when the timer image is displayed)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, when the specific display is displayed, it is possible to make an interest in whether or not another specific display is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest in the specific display.

The game machine of means C7
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C6.
It is possible to suggest the setting by the display mode of the specific display (the display of the timer image in the red mode suggests that the set value is a high set value).
A game machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, attention can be paid to the display mode of the specific display.

The game machine of means C8
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C7.
The effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) is
When the suggestion effect and the advance notice effect are executed in parallel, the information related to the suggestion effect is preferentially displayed (as shown in FIG. 11-6 (9), the battle effect and the cut-in suggestion effect are displayed. When being executed at the same time, the cut-in image 04TM100C containing the golden background and the characters "super heat" is displayed with higher priority than the production image of the battle effect)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the suggestion effect by increasing the visibility of the suggestion effect.

The game machine of means C9
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C8.
The advance notice effect determination means for executing the first determination for determining whether or not to execute the advance notice effect (whether or not the expectation degree suggestion effect is executed in step S04TM2065 and the effect mode are based on the dedicated table (FIG. 11-2 (A)). CPU 120) for production control, which is determined by
Suggestion effect determination means for executing the second determination for determining whether or not to execute the suggestion effect (whether or not the cut-in suggestion effect is executed in step S04TM2100 and the effect mode are determined based on the dedicated table (FIG. 11-2 (D)). A gaming machine characterized by comprising a CPU 120) for effect control to be determined.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the effect control.

The game machine of means C10 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C9.
Equipped with a variable display means (CPU103) capable of executing variable display (variable display of special symbols),
The effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect at a plurality of timings during the period during which the variable display is executed (as shown in FIG. 11-4, the timing of T2 during the period during which the variable display is executed). The first setting suggestion effect is executed in, and the cut-in suggestion effect is executed at the timing of T9)
A game machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of suggestive production.

[Explanation of feature 07TM]
Next, the feature unit 07TM will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-1 to 12-27. In the present embodiment, as shown in the above-mentioned (Explanation of the feature unit 208SG), the game is executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a start winning prize is generated) in a game machine whose set value can be changed. When the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display is normal reach or super reach), the jackpot expectation of the fluctuation display whose execution is suspended (the fluctuation display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied) is announced. It is characterized in that the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is restricted.

Each effect (pre-reading advance notice effect, changing advance notice effect) shown in the feature unit 07TM is an effect that can be executed in the game machine together with each effect (setting suggestion effect, changing advance notice effect) shown in 04TM described above. Both the effects (setting suggestion effect, change notice effect) shown in 04TM and each effect (look-ahead notice effect, change notice effect) shown in the feature section 07TM can be executed on the gaming machine. The game may be performed, and only each effect (pre-reading advance notice effect, changing advance notice effect) shown in the feature unit 07TM is played without executing each effect (setting suggestion effect, change notice effect) shown in 04TM described above. It may be feasible on the machine.

(Display result judgment)
FIG. 12-1 is a diagram showing an example of a display result determination table referred to in the low probability state. As shown in FIGS. 12-1 (A) to 12-1 (F), a display result determination table corresponding to each set value (1 to 6) is provided, and the CPU 103 uses the set set value (1 to 6). The jackpot judgment is executed by referring to the display result judgment table corresponding to any of).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has a configuration in which the winning ratio (ball output rate) of the jackpot changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning ratio (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result determination table (winning ratio) according to the set value. The set value is composed of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest ball output rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the ball output rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is.

The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 which is a random number value for determining the special figure display result is set. In each display result judgment table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, a determination value for a big hit is set for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 12-1 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 at the low ratio is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is If it is targeted for variable display, the jackpot will be won at a lower rate (1/300) than when the set values are "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". It is designed to do. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won at the same rate (1/300) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 at the time of non-probability change is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is set. The jackpot is won at a higher rate (1/290) than when it is "1". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won at the same rate (1/290) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 at the low ratio is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is set. The jackpot is won at a higher rate (1/280) than when the numbers are "1" and "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won at the same rate (1/280) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (D), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 4 at the low ratio is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is set. The jackpot is won at a higher rate (1/270) than in the case of "1", "2", and "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won at the same rate (1/270) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (E), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 at the low ratio is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is set. The jackpot is won at a higher rate (1/260) than in the case of "1", "2", "3", and "4". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won at the same rate (1/260) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (F), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 6 at the low ratio is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is set. The jackpot is won at a higher rate (1/250) than in the case of "1", "2", "3", "4", and "5". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won at the same rate (1/250) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at the time when the variable display is to be started in the low accuracy state, and the value of MR1 is shown in FIGS. 12-1 (A) to 12-1 (A). If any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot shown in F) is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. That is, the jackpot winning is determined at a rate according to the set value. The "ratio" shown in FIGS. 12-1 (A) to 12-1 (F) indicates the rate (ratio) of a big hit. Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design.

FIG. 12-2 is a diagram showing an example of a display result determination table referred to in the high accuracy state. As shown in FIGS. 12-2 (A) to 12-2 (F), a display result determination table corresponding to each set value (1 to 6) is provided, and the CPU 103 uses the set set value (1 to 6). The jackpot judgment is executed by referring to the display result judgment table corresponding to any of).

As shown in FIG. 12-2 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 at the high ratio is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is If the target is variable display, the jackpot will be won at a lower rate (1/60) than when the set values are "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". It is designed to do. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won at the same rate (1/60) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-2 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 at the time of high ratio is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is set. The jackpot is won at a higher rate (1/58) than when it is "1". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won at the same rate (1/58) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-2 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 at the time of high ratio is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is set. The jackpot is won at a higher rate (1/56) than when the numbers are "1" and "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won at the same rate (1/56) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-2 (D), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 4 at the time of high ratio is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is set. The jackpot is won at a higher rate (1/54) than in the case of "1", "2", and "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won at the same rate (1/54) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-2 (E), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 at the high ratio is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is set. The jackpot is won at a higher rate (1/52) than in the case of "1", "2", "3", and "4". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won at the same rate (1/52) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-2 (F), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 6 at the time of high ratio is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is set. The jackpot is won at a higher rate (1/50) than in the case of "1", "2", "3", "4", and "5". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won at the same rate (1/50) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at the time when the variable display is to be started in the high accuracy state, and the value of MR1 is shown in FIGS. 12-2 (A) to 12-2 (A). If any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot shown in F) is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. That is, the jackpot winning is determined at a rate according to the set value. In addition, "ratio" shown in FIGS.

Further, in the present embodiment, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 12-1 and 12-2 to determine whether or not to make a big hit, but the big hit determination table is separately used. The jackpot may be determined by using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. ..

In this embodiment, a total of 6 setting values, 1 to 6, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The set value that can be set in may be 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

(Big hit type judgment)
FIG. 12-3 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table [for the first special symbol] stored in the ROM 101, and FIG. 12-3 (B) is a jackpot type stored in the ROM 101. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination table [for the 2nd special symbol]. Of these, FIG. 12-3 (A) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when you do. Further, FIG. 12-3 (B) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is variablely displayed). It is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is set to "4R normal jackpot [100 times]" based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referred to for determining one of "2R normal jackpot [100 times]", "4R probability variation jackpot [next time]", and "10R probability variation jackpot [next time]".

Here, the jackpot type in this embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, the jackpot types are "normal jackpot" (also referred to as non-probability variable jackpot) in which only the time saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends and the state shifts to the low probability / high base state, and after the jackpot game ends. In, "probability change jackpot" is set in which high-accuracy control and time-saving control are executed to shift to a high-accuracy / high-base state.

The big hit game state by "2R big hit" is a normally open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state which is advantageous for the player twice (so-called 2 rounds) and is repeatedly executed. The big hit game state by "big hit" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed four times (so-called four rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into a first state advantageous for the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "10R big hit" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player.

The time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by "normal big hit [100 times]" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times. It ends when the game is in a big hit game state before the game is executed.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of "probability variation jackpot [next time]" are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the jackpot that occurs again is one of the types of "4R probability variation jackpot [next time]" and "10R probability variation jackpot [next time]", high accuracy control and time saving control are performed again after the end of the jackpot game state. Is executed, so that the jackpot game state is continuously generated without going through the normal state, which is a so-called consecutive villa state.

For example, in the jackpot game state by "4R normal jackpot [100 times]", the round that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed four times (so-called four rounds). It is an open jackpot, and after the end of the jackpot game state, it shifts to the low accuracy / high base state, and the time saving control executed after that is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example). Alternatively, it is a jackpot type that ends when the jackpot game state is reached before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. In addition, the jackpot game state by "10R probability variation jackpot [next time]" is a normal opening in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). It is a big hit, and after the end of the big hit game state, it shifts to the high accuracy / high base state, and the high accuracy control and the time saving control executed after that continue until the big hit occurs again after the end of the big hit game state. This is the type of jackpot to be executed.

In the present embodiment, four types of jackpot types are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three or less or five or more jackpot types are provided. May be good.

As shown in FIG. 12-3 (A), in the jackpot type determination table [for the first special symbol], when the set value is "1", 0 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2. ~ 104 are assigned to "4R normal jackpot [100 times]", 105 to 284 are assigned to "4R probability variation jackpot [next time]", and 285 to 299 are assigned to "10R probability variation jackpot [next time]". Is assigned to. When the set value is "2" to "6", the same determination value as when the set value is "1" is assigned in the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (B), in the jackpot type determination table [for the second special symbol], when the set value is "1", the MR2 determination value ranges from 0 to 299. , 0 to 104 are assigned to "2R normal jackpot [100 times]", and 105 to 299 are assigned to "10R probability variation jackpot [next time]". When the set value is "2" to "6", the same determination value as when the set value is "1" is assigned in the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol, a common judgment value is assigned in the big hit type judgment table regardless of which set value is set. ing. Similarly, when a jackpot occurs in the special symbol game of the second special symbol, a common determination value is assigned in the jackpot type determination table regardless of which set value is set.

(Variation pattern judgment)
Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for deviation used when it is determined in advance that the fluctuation display result is "missing", and the fluctuation display result is set to "big hit". A fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpots, which is used when is predetermined, is prepared in advance.

In the present embodiment, it is determined in advance that the [for loss] fluctuation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “out of” and the variation display result is “big hit”. It is assumed that the [for big hit] fluctuation pattern judgment table used at that time is prepared in advance.

[For out-of-reach] In the fluctuation pattern judgment table, for each fluctuation pattern of "non-reach out of reach", "normal reach out of reach", and "super reach out of reach", the fluctuation pattern judgment is random. A predetermined random value within the range that the numerical value MR3 can take is assigned as a determination value.

The "non-reach out-of-reach" variation pattern is a variation pattern in which the combination of decorative symbols indicating that the reach is not established and the variation display result is "out of reach" after the variation display is started is stopped and displayed. Since the effect that the reach is established is not executed, the variation display period when the variation pattern is determined to be "non-reach out of reach" is the other effect that executes the effect that the reach is established when the variation display result is "out of reach". It is shorter than the fluctuation display period of the fluctuation pattern (“normal reach out of reach”, “super reach out of order”).

[For big hit] In the fluctuation pattern judgment table, for each fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach jackpot" and the fluctuation pattern of "super reach jackpot", a predetermined range of the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can be taken. Random value is assigned as a judgment value.

In the present embodiment, in the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the normal reach (“normal reach loss” and “normal reach jackpot”), the final display result is displayed without executing the super reach effect (battle effect) described later after the reach state is established. It will be fixedly stopped.

In the present embodiment, in the fluctuation pattern accompanied by super reach (“super reach off” and “super reach jackpot”), after the reach state is established, the ally character and the enemy character battle as a super reach effect. A battle effect is executed to notify whether or not a big hit has been won.

As shown in FIG. 12-4 (A), in the [for off] fluctuation pattern determination table, when the set value is "1", 1 to 898 out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997. Is assigned to the "non-reach out of reach" variation pattern, 899 to 967 is assigned to the "normal reach out of reach" variation pattern, and 968 to 997 is assigned to the "super reach out of order" variation pattern. There is. Further, when the set value is any of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", the determination value of MR3 is the same as when the set value is "1". Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 898 are assigned to the "non-reach out of reach" variation pattern, 899 to 967 are assigned to the "normal reach out of reach" variation pattern, and 968 to 997 are assigned to the "normal reach out of reach" variation pattern. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach Off [Battle Draw]". In this way, when the display result is "off", the selection ratio of each of the plurality of fluctuation patterns is common regardless of the set value.

As shown in FIG. 12-4 (B), in the [for jackpot] fluctuation pattern determination table, when the set value is "1", 1 to 69 out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach jackpot", and 70 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "super reach jackpot". Further, when the set value is any of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", the determination value of MR3 is the same as when the set value is "1". Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 69 are assigned to the "normal reach jackpot" fluctuation pattern, and 70 to 997 are assigned to the "super reach jackpot" fluctuation pattern. In this way, when the display result is "big hit", the selection ratio of each of the plurality of fluctuation patterns is common regardless of the set value.

(Outline of pre-reading notice production)
In the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a look-ahead notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the display result of the variable display (variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied) whose execution is suspended is a big hit. ing. That is, the look-ahead notice effect is an example of a notice effect that suggests that the player is controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. In this example, as the look-ahead notice effect, as will be described later, there are a change effect, an operation unit vibration effect, a timer standby effect, and a special background effect.

(Change production)
In this embodiment, the change effect can be executed based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The change effect is a special mode (in this example, a white circle display in this example) in which the hold display 07TM001 or the active display 07TM003 corresponding to the variation display that is the judgment target at the time of starting winning is displayed. , White triangle display), blue mode (blue circle display in this example), or red mode (red circle display in this example).

Specifically, among the change effects, the hold change effect that displays the display mode of 07TM001 of the hold display in a display mode different from the normal mode (a display mode of any of a special mode, a blue mode, and a red mode) It is a look-ahead notice effect that suggests the display result of the variable display that has not been executed (the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied). Further, among the change effects, an active change effect for displaying the display mode of the active display 07TM003 in a display mode different from the normal mode (a display mode of any of a special mode, a blue mode, and a red mode) is executed. It is a notice effect during fluctuation that suggests the display result of the fluctuation display (variation display in which the start condition is satisfied). The timing at which the change effect is executed and the change pattern of the hold display will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 12-9 to 12-12 described later.

(Operation unit vibration production)
In this embodiment, the stick controller 31A has a built-in vibrator motor for vibrating the stick controller 31A. For example, it is possible to bias the center of gravity of the shaft of the vibrator motor by the effect control CPU 120, generate vibration by controlling the rotation of the vibrator motor, and control the stick controller 31A to perform a vibration operation. It has become. In the following, the mode when the stick controller 31A is vibrating is referred to as a special mode (vibration mode), and the mode when the stick controller 31A is not vibrating is referred to as a non-special mode (non-vibration mode). It is called.

In this embodiment, it is possible to execute the operation unit vibration effect based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The operation unit vibration effect is the timing when it is decided to execute the operation unit vibration effect at the time of the start winning, and the timing when the variation display which is executed before the variation display corresponding to the start winning is started after the start winning ( At the timing when the hold memory is exhausted and the hold display is shifted), or when the fluctuation display corresponding to the start prize (variation display which is the target of the operation unit vibration effect) is started after the start prize, the stick controller 31A This is an example of a warning effect in which the stick controller 31A is a special mode in which the vibration operation is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds).

Specifically, when the stick controller 31A vibrates at the timing of the start prize based on the judgment result at the time of the start prize, or after the start prize is based on the judgment result at the time of the start prize, the start prize is supported. If the stick controller 31A vibrates at the timing when the fluctuation display, which is executed before the fluctuation display, is started (the timing when the hold storage is digested and the hold display is shifted), the operation unit vibration effect is It is a look-ahead notice effect that suggests the display result of the variable display that has not been executed (the variable display that the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied). Further, when the stick controller 31A vibrates at the timing when the fluctuation display corresponding to the start prize (variation display which is the target of the operation unit vibration effect) is started after the start prize, the operation unit vibration effect is executed. It is a notice effect during fluctuation that suggests the display result of the fluctuation display (variation display in which the start condition is satisfied). The timing at which the operation unit vibration effect is executed will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 12-14.

It should be noted that the effect mode of the operation unit vibration effect in the present embodiment is only the effect mode in which the vibration operation is performed for 2 seconds, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and a plurality of effect modes are used as the effect mode of the operation unit vibration effect. It may be provided. For example, there may be a mode in which the vibration operation of the stick controller 31A is performed for 2 seconds and a mode in which the vibration operation of the stick controller 31A is performed for 10 seconds. Then, when the period of the vibration operation is long (for example, when it is 10 seconds), the jackpot expectation may be higher than when the period of the vibration operation is short (for example, when it is 2 seconds).

Further, the stick controller 31A may be provided with an LED so that the LED emits light when the vibration operation is performed. Then, when the LED emits light due to the vibration operation, the jackpot expectation may be higher than when the LED does not emit light due to the vibration operation. Further, there may be a mode in which the LED provided in the stick controller 31A emits white light and a mode in which the LED provided in the stick controller 31A emits red light when the stick controller 31A vibrates. .. Then, when the LED emits red light due to the vibration operation, the jackpot expectation may be higher than when the LED emits white light due to the vibration operation.

(Timer production)
In this embodiment, the timer effect can be executed based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. As described in the explanation of [Feature Unit 04TM], the timer effect is an effect corresponding to the battle effect (super reach effect), which is a kind of advance notice effect that suggests the display result, until the battle effect is executed. It is an effect of displaying (notifying) the remaining time (number of seconds) of. In addition, since the expectation suggestion effect may be executed at the timing when the battle effect is executed (the timing when it develops into super reach), the timer effect is the remaining time (seconds) until the expectation suggestion effect is executed. It is also a production that displays (suggests) the number). As described above, in the present embodiment, the timer effect is a variable notice corresponding to the battle effect, which is a kind of variable notice effect suggesting the display result of the variable display (variable display in which the start condition is satisfied) being executed. It is an example of the effect, and it is also an example of the variable display that corresponds to the expectation suggestion effect, which is a kind of the variable display that suggests the display result of the variable display that is being executed (the variable display that satisfies the start condition). .. The timing at which the timer effect is executed and the mode of the timer effect will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 12-16.

In this embodiment, the timer effect is started at the timing n seconds before the battle effect is executed (developed into super reach). In the timer effect, the timer image 07TM300 is displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. At the timing when the timer image 07TM300 is displayed, the timer image 07TM300 shows an initial value n (in this example, the numerical value of "00:59" indicating 59 seconds). Then, the numerical value indicated by the timer image 07TM300 (the numerical value displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5) is subtracted and updated by 1 every second, and the timing (00:00) is reached (00: 00). The battle effect will be executed when there are 0 seconds left). In addition, the expectation degree suggestion effect may be executed at the timing when the numerical value indicated by the timer image 07TM300 becomes "00:00" (the timing when the remaining 0 seconds are reached). As described above, the timer effect is an effect of performing a subtraction operation (countdown operation until the start of the battle effect) of the remaining time (remaining n seconds to remaining 0 seconds) indicated by the timer image.

(Timer standby production)
Further, in the present embodiment, when the execution of the timer effect is determined based on the determination result of the start winning decision based on the occurrence of the winning to the starting winning opening, the area where the timer image 07TM300 is displayed is displayed. The timer standby effect that displays (suggests) the standby image 07TM300a that notifies (suggests) that the timer effect is executed in advance can be executed as the look-ahead advance notice effect. The standby image 07TM300a includes the characters "preparing", and then the timer image 07TM300 is displayed in the area to notify (suggest) that the timer effect is executed. The standby image 07TM300a is continuously displayed at the lower right of the screen until the variation display (variation display in which the timer effect is executed) that is the target of the start winning prize determination is executed. Then, when the variation display (target variation) that is the target of the start winning prize determination is executed, the timer effect is executed, and the timer image 07TM300 is replaced with the standby image 07TM300a in the area where the standby image 07TM300a is displayed. Is displayed, and the countdown operation from the initial value n (for example, the numerical value of “00:59” indicating 59 seconds) is started.

In addition, not limited to such a form, when it is decided to execute the timer effect at the time of starting prize, until the fluctuation display (target fluctuation) which is the target of the judgment at the time of starting winning is executed. The timer image 07TM300 with the initial value n (for example, the numerical value of "00:59" indicating 59 seconds) is continuously displayed, the countdown operation is not started, and the variation display (target variation) that is the target of the determination at the start winning prize. ) Is being executed, the countdown operation of the timer image 07TM300, which has been continuously displayed and has an initial value n, may be started. That is, instead of the standby image 07TM300a described above, the timer image 07TM300 having an initial value n may be continuously displayed over a plurality of fluctuations. In this case, the effect of continuously displaying the timer image 07TM300 having the initial value n over a plurality of fluctuations corresponds to the pre-reading advance notice effect.

(Special background production)
In this embodiment, the special background effect can be executed based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The special background effect is the timing when it is decided to execute the special background effect at the time of the start winning, and the timing when the variation display which is executed before the variation display corresponding to the start prize is started after the start prize (hold memory). Is digested and the hold display is shifted), or when the variable display corresponding to the start prize (variation display that is the target of the special background effect) is started after the start prize, as a background image of the decorative pattern. This is an example of a preview effect that displays a special background image 07TM400 that shows the scenery of a volcano including the night sky, mountains, and eruption. The start of the special background effect (displaying the special background image 07TM400) corresponds to the change of the background image from the normal background image to the special background image 07TM400.

Specifically, when the special background image 07TM400 is displayed based on the judgment result at the time of the start winning, or after the start winning, the variation display corresponding to the starting prize is preceded. If the special background image 07TM400 is displayed at the timing when the variable display is started (the timing when the hold memory is digested and the hold display is shifted), the special background effect is not executed. It is a look-ahead notice effect that suggests the display result of the display (variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied). Further, if the special background image 07TM400 is displayed at the timing when the variation display corresponding to the start prize (variation display which is the target of the special background effect) is started after the start prize, the special background effect is executed. It is a notice effect during fluctuation that suggests the display result of the fluctuation display (variation display in which the start condition is satisfied). The timing at which the special background effect is executed will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 12-18.

When the special background effect is executed, a plurality of types of special background images may be displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern. For example, as special background images when the special background effect is executed, the first special background image in which "Lv.1" is displayed in blue characters in the upper left of the special background image 07TM400 and the upper left of the special background image 07TM400. Either the second special background image with green characters "Lv.2" displayed on the side or the third special background image with red characters "Lv.3" displayed on the upper left of the special background image 07TM400. May be displayed. In this case, it is assumed that the jackpot expectation is higher in the order of the first special background image <the second special background image <the third special background image.

With respect to such a plurality of modes of special background effect, the first special background image may be changed to a second special background image or a third special background image having a higher expectation of a big hit than the first special background image. It may be possible to change from the second special background image to the third special background image having a higher expectation of big hit than the second special background image. The timing for changing the special background image may be when the variable display is started (the timing when the hold memory is digested and the hold display is shifted), or may be during the execution of the variable display.

Further, a background change suggestion effect (for example, an effect in which a character appears and an action is performed to hit the current background image to change it) may be executed, which suggests that the background image changes. When the change suggestion effect is executed, the ratio of the special background effect (the background image changes from the normal background to the special background image) is higher than when the background change suggestion effect is not executed. You may. Here, the special background effect may not be executed even when the background change suggestion effect is executed, and the special background effect is executed even when the background change suggestion effect is not executed. You may make it happen.

Further, when the background change suggestion effect is executed, the special background image changes as compared with the case where the background change suggestion effect is not executed (from the first special background image to the second special background image or the third special background image). Or change from the second special background image to the third special background image) may be increased. Here, the special background image may not change even when the background change suggestion effect is executed, and the special background image changes even when the background change suggestion effect is not executed. There may be.

Next, a specific example of the look-ahead notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-5. FIG. 12-5 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the look-ahead advance notice effect is executed when the variation display in which the variation pattern is “non-reach out of reach” is performed. Is.

First, as shown in FIG. 12-5 (1), when the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , The variable display of the decorative symbol is executed, and the variable display of the small symbol is executed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 07TM013 displays the active display 07TM003 corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed, and the hold display area 07TM011 displays two hold displays 07TM001.

In this embodiment, the aspect of the stick controller 31A is shown in the lower right of the effect diagram in correspondence with the effect diagram. When the effect image shown in FIG. 12-5 (1) is displayed on the image display device 5, the mode of the stick controller 31A is a non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-5 (2), in the state where the first reserved storage number is 2, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Occasionally, it is assumed that a new start prize is generated and the first reserved memory number becomes 3.

In this example, in the start winning effect determination process (see FIGS. 12-6 and 12-7) accompanying the start winning generated at this time, it is determined to execute the change effect (step S07TM1020), and the change pattern. It is determined to be 310 (step S07TM1050), and it is assumed that the first look-ahead counter is set (step S07TM1060). At this time, 3 is set as the value of the first look-ahead counter based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 3. That is, the value of the first look-ahead counter indicates the remaining number of fluctuation display times until the fluctuation display that is the target of the change effect (hold change effect or active change effect) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 12-5 (2), the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the change effect of the change pattern 310 (see FIG. 12-10 (A3)), and the first reserved storage number increases. Based on the receipt of the command indicating that the operation has been performed, the hold display 07TM001A in the red mode is newly displayed in the hold display area 07TM011.

Further, in this example, it is determined to execute the operation unit vibration effect in the start winning effect determination process (see FIGS. 12-6 and 12-7) accompanying the start winning generated at this time (step S07TM2010). ), It is assumed that the second look-ahead counter is set (step S07TM2050). At this time, 3 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 3. That is, the value of the second look-ahead counter indicates the remaining number of fluctuation display times until the fluctuation display that is the target of the operation unit vibration effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 12-5 (2), the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A as a special mode (vibration mode) based on the decision to execute the operation unit vibration effect.

Further, in this example, it is determined to execute the timer effect in the start winning effect determination process (see FIGS. 12-6 and 12-7) accompanying the start winning that occurs at this time (step S07TM3020). It is assumed that the third look-ahead counter is set (step S07TM3060). At this time, 3 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 3. That is, the value of the third look-ahead counter indicates the remaining number of fluctuation display times until the fluctuation display that is the target of the timer effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 12-5 (2), the effect control CPU 120 executes the timer standby effect, which is the look-ahead advance notice effect, based on the decision to execute the timer effect, and the screen of the image display device 5. The standby image 07TM300a is displayed in the lower right area. As described above, the standby image 07TM300a contains the characters "preparing", and then the timer image 07TM300 is displayed in the area to notify (suggest) that the timer effect is executed. It has become.

Further, in this example, it is determined to execute the special background effect in the start winning effect determination process (see FIGS. 12-6 and 12-7) accompanying the start winning that occurs at this time (step S07TM4010). , It is assumed that the fourth look-ahead counter is set (step S07TM4050). At this time, 3 is set as the value of the fourth look-ahead counter based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 3. That is, the value of the fourth look-ahead counter indicates the remaining number of fluctuation display times until the fluctuation display that is the target of the special background effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 12-5 (2), the effect control CPU 120 displays the special background image 07TM400 as the background image of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on the determination to execute the special background effect. I'm letting you.

(Production decision processing at the time of starting prize)
12-6 and 12-7 are flowcharts showing the effect determination process executed at the time of starting winning. The effect control CPU 120 executes the start winning effect determination process shown in FIGS. 12-6 and 12-7 in the lookahead advance notice setting process (step S161) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7.

In the effect determination process at the time of start winning, the effect control CPU 120 first receives a set of commands at the time of start winning based on the occurrence of a start winning to the first start winning opening (for example, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, etc.). And it is confirmed whether or not the first hold storage number addition designation command) is newly received (step S07TM1000).

The symbol designation command is an effect control command that indicates whether or not a jackpot will be achieved among the winning determination results, and the determination result of the type of jackpot. The CPU 103 determines whether or not a jackpot will occur and the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning, and a symbol for designating the determination result. Output the specified command. Further, the variation category command is an effect control command that indicates the determination result of the variation pattern among the determination results at the time of winning. The CPU 103 determines whether or not the normal reach is achieved, whether or not the super reach is achieved, and the like based on the random number for determining the variation pattern extracted at the time of winning the start, and outputs a variation category command that specifies the determination result. Further, the first hold storage number addition designation command is an effect control command for designating that the first hold storage number has been increased by 1.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 newly stores one set of start winning commands (symbol designation command, variable category command, and second hold storage number addition designation command) in the start winning command storage area. Judge whether or not it is. If a new command for starting a set of winning prizes has not been received (NO in step S07TM1000), the process ends as it is.

If a new command for starting a set of winning prizes is received (YES in step S07TM1000), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the change prohibition flag (see step S1070 and step S07TM1170) described later is set. Confirm (step S07TM1010). If the change prohibition flag is set (YES in step S07TM1010), the process proceeds to step S07TM2000.

Here, the fact that the change prohibition flag is set means that any variation display different from the variation display corresponding to the start prize (any hold display different from the hold display corresponding to the start prize or active). Regarding the display), since the change effect has already been executed or it has been decided to execute the change effect, in such a case, the execution of the further change effect is prohibited.

When the change prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S07TM1010), the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display and whether or not the change effect is executed in the final display mode determination table of the active display (FIG. 12-). 8) to determine. That is, in the present embodiment, the change effect is not executed for any of the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize and the variable display different from the variable display (holding display or active display different from the holding display corresponding to the starting winning prize). When it is not decided to execute the change effect, the change effect can be executed.

FIG. 12-8 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the final display mode determination table of the active display. As shown in FIG. 12-8, in this embodiment, the final display mode of the active display 07TM003 is any of "normal mode (white mode)", "special mode", "blue mode", and "red mode". It is possible to determine whether or not, and a determination value is assigned to each of these modes.

As shown in FIG. 12-8, when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "missing" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the starting winning (new) The final display mode of the active display 07TM003 corresponding to the variable display based on the first hold memory) is the normal mode (white circle display) at a rate of 60% and the special mode (white triangle display) at a rate of 10%. Then, the proportion of 15% is blue (displayed in a blue circle), and the proportion of 5% is red (displayed in a red circle).

On the other hand, when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), it is based on the start winning (new first hold memory). The final display mode of the active display 07TM003 corresponding to the variable display is a normal mode (white circle display) at a rate of 30%, a special mode (white triangle display) at a rate of 10%, and a rate of 20%. It becomes a blue mode (blue circle display) and becomes a red mode (red circle display) at a rate of 40%.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the active display 07TM003 is displayed in a special mode (white triangle display), a blue mode (blue circle display), or a red mode (blue circle display) different from the normal mode (white circle display). The effect displayed in red circle display) is called change effect (active change effect). Therefore, the final display mode of the active display is a special mode (white triangle display), a blue mode (blue circle display), or a red mode (red circle display) different from the normal mode (white circle display). The determination is to execute a change effect (active change effect) in which the display mode of the active display is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode (a display mode of any of a special mode, a blue mode, and a red mode). Corresponds to the decision.

On the other hand, determining the final display mode of the active display as the normal mode (white circle display) corresponds to determining that the change effect (active change effect and hold change effect) is not executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the change effect (step S07TM1030). If it is decided not to execute the change effect (NO in step S07TM1030), the process proceeds to step S07TM2000.

When it is determined to execute the change effect (YES in step 07TM1030), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect restriction flag (see FIG. 12-19) described later is set (step S07TM1040). ). If the effect restriction flag is not set (NO in step S07TM1040), the process proceeds to step S07TM1050 or later, and if the effect limit flag is set (YES in step S07TM1040), the process proceeds to step S07TM1150 or later. Proceed.

When the effect restriction flag is not set (NO in step S07TM1040), the effect control CPU 120 sets the change pattern of the hold display to the change pattern determination table A of [when the effect limit flag is not set] (FIG. 12-9). And FIG. 12-10) (step S07TM1050). The fact that the production restriction flag is not set means that the variation pattern of the variation display executed at the time of the start winning is not a variation pattern with reach. In this case, the hold corresponding to the start winning is held. It is possible to select a change pattern in which the display is displayed in a blue mode or a red mode at the time of the start winning.

(Change pattern determination table A)
12-9 and 12-10 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the change pattern determination table A for determining the change pattern of the hold display when the effect restriction flag is not set. When the first hold storage number becomes n (n: 1 to 4) due to the start winning, (i) the timing at which the nth hold display 07TM001 corresponding to the start winning is displayed in the hold display area 07TM011 ( (Timing at the time of start winning), (ii) Timing at which the hold display 07TM001 corresponding to the start prize shifts to a higher position (active display area 07TM013 side) in the hold display area 07TM011 (when n ≧ 2). , And (iii), at the timing when the hold display 07TM001 corresponding to the start winning is shifted to the active display area 07TM013 (the timing when the active display 07TM003 corresponding to the starting winning is displayed), the variable display based on the starting winning is displayed. Display information (hold display or active display) corresponding to the above may be displayed in a mode different from the normal mode. The same applies to the description of the change pattern determination table B shown in FIGS. 12-11 and 12-12, which will be described later.

In FIGS. 12-9 and 12-10, what kind of display mode is the display information (hold display 07TM001 or active display 07TM003) corresponding to the variable display at each timing of (i) to (iii) for each change pattern. Indicates whether it will be. In the change patterns shown in FIGS. 12-9 and 12-10, "normal" indicates a normal mode in which a white round display is displayed, and "special" indicates a special mode in which a white triangular display is displayed. "Blue" indicates a blue aspect which is a blue round display, and "red" indicates a red aspect which is a red round display. The same applies to the description of the change pattern determination table B shown in FIGS. 12-11 and 12-12, which will be described later.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "1", the effect control CPU 120 has a [for one reserved] change pattern shown in FIG. 12-9 (A1). Select decision table A.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode (when it is determined not to execute the change effect (NO in step S07TM1030)), the determination result at the time of starting winning (display specified by the symbol designation command). Judgment values are assigned so that the change pattern 101 is determined at a rate of 100% regardless of the result (missing or big hit). The change pattern 101 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, and then the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift.

In the description of FIGS. 12-9 and 12-10, the active shift means that the hold display 07TM001 shifts from the hold display area 07TM011 to the active display area 07TM013 (as a result, it becomes a determination target at the time of starting winning. The active display 07TM003 corresponding to the variable display is displayed). The same applies to the description of the change pattern determination table B shown in FIGS. 12-11 and 12-12, which will be described later.

Here, when the normal mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 07TM003 does not change in the normal mode.

When the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 101, change pattern 102, and so on, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change patterns 103. The change pattern 102 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 103 is the change pattern 103 at the time of the start prize. This is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is displayed in a special mode and then the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the change pattern 101 is 60%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the change pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 20%.

Further, regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the change pattern 101 is Judgment values are assigned so that the change pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 40%, the change pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 30%.

Here, when a special mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201 described later, change pattern 301 described later, change pattern 401 described later). In the case), after the active shift, the active display 07TM003 will finally change from the normal mode to the special mode. Further, when a special mode is determined as the final display mode and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 102 and change pattern 103, change pattern 202 and change pattern 203 described later, change pattern 302 and change). In the case of pattern 303, change pattern 402, and change pattern 403), the active display 07TM003 does not change in the special mode after the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, and so on, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, and the change pattern 105, respectively. The change pattern 104 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode and then the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the change pattern 101 is 30%. The change pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 104 is determined at a rate of 15%, and the change pattern 105 is determined at a rate of 15%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the change pattern 101 is 10%. The change pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 15%, the change pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 15%, the change pattern 104 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 105 is determined at a rate of 30%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by.

Here, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, and change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 07TM003 will eventually change from the normal mode to the blue mode. Further, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the mode is a special mode at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 102 and change pattern 103, change pattern 202 and change pattern 203 described later, change pattern 302 and change). In the case of the pattern 303, the change pattern 402, and the change pattern 403), the active display 07TM003 finally changes from the special mode to the blue mode after the active shift. Further, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 104 and change pattern 105, change pattern 204 and change pattern 205 described later, change pattern 304 and change). In the case of pattern 305, change pattern 404, and change pattern 405), the active display 07TM003 does not change in the blue mode after the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, and so on, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, the change pattern 105, the change pattern 106, and the change pattern 107, respectively. The change pattern 106 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is displayed in a special mode at the time of the start winning, and then the hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is displayed in the red mode and then the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the change pattern 101 is 30%. The change pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 104 is determined at a rate of 10%, and the change pattern 105 is determined at a rate of 10%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 106 is determined at a rate of 5% and the change pattern 107 is determined at a rate of 5%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "ha big hit" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the change pattern 101 is 4 The change pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 8%, the change pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 8%, the change pattern 104 is determined at a rate of 15%, and the change pattern 105 is determined at a rate of 15%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 106 is determined at a rate of 25% and the change pattern 107 is determined at a rate of 25%.

Here, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 07TM003 will eventually change from the normal mode to the red mode. Further, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the mode is a special mode at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 102 and change pattern 103, change pattern 202 and change pattern 203 described later, change pattern 302 and change). In the case of pattern 303, change pattern 402, and change pattern 403), the active display 07TM003 finally changes from the special mode to the red mode after the active shift. Further, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 104 and change pattern 105, change pattern 204 and change pattern 205, change pattern 304 and change described later). In the case of the pattern 304, the change pattern 404, and the change pattern 405), the active display 07TM003 finally changes from the blue mode to the red mode after the active shift. Further, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the red mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 106 and change pattern 107, change pattern 206 to change pattern 208, change pattern 306 to change, which will be described later). In the case of pattern 310, change pattern 406 to change pattern 410), the active display 07TM003 does not change in the red mode after the active shift.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "2", the effect control CPU 120 has a [for two reserved] change patterns shown in FIG. 12-9 (A2). Select decision table A.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode (when it is determined not to execute the change effect (NO in step S07TM1030)), the determination result at the time of starting winning (display specified by the symbol designation command). Judgment values are assigned so that the change pattern 201 is determined at a rate of 100% regardless of the result (missing or big hit). The change pattern 201 does not change the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the start winning, and the notice target at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the hold display of.

When the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order or a big hit), And the determination value is assigned to the change pattern 203, respectively. In the change pattern 202, after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the hold display of the notice target is changed to a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the hold display of the notice target is held at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the display in a special mode, and the change pattern 203 displays the hold display of the notice target in the special mode at the time of starting winning, and then displays the hold display of the notice target in the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift. It is a change pattern that does not change as it is and does not change the hold display of the notice target in a special mode at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the change pattern 201 is 60%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 20% and the change pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 20%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the change pattern 201 is 40%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 30%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 201, change pattern 202, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, and the change pattern 205, respectively. The change pattern 204 does not change the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the start winning, and the notice target at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern that changes the hold display of the above to a blue mode. In the change pattern 205, the hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of starting winning, and then the hold display of the notice target is displayed in blue at the timing of the first hold shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the mode as it is and does not change the hold display of the advance notice target in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the change pattern 201 is 40%. The change pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 204 is determined at a rate of 10%, and the change pattern 205 is determined at a rate of 10%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the change pattern 201 is 10%. The change pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 15%, the change pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 15%, the change pattern 204 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 205 is determined at a rate of 30%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, and the change pattern 208, respectively. The change pattern 206 does not change the hold display of the notice target in the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the special mode at the start winning, and the notice target at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that changes the hold display of the above to a red mode, and the change pattern 207 displays the hold display of the notice target in a special mode at the time of starting winning, and then displays the hold display of the notice target in red at the timing of the first hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes to the mode and does not change the hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 208 is the first time after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the time of starting winning. This is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the hold shift, and the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the change pattern 201 is 35%. The change pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 15%, the change pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 15%, the change pattern 204 is determined at a rate of 10%, and the change pattern 205 is determined at a rate of 10%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 206 is determined at a rate of 5%, the change pattern 207 is determined at a rate of 5%, and the change pattern 208 is determined at a rate of 5%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the change pattern 201 is 2%. The change pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 4%, the change pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 4%, the change pattern 204 is determined at a rate of 15%, and the change pattern 205 is determined at a rate of 15%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 206 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 207 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the change pattern 208 is determined at a rate of 20%.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "3", the effect control CPU 120 has a [for three reserved] change patterns shown in FIG. 12-10 (A3). Select decision table A.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode (when it is determined not to execute the change effect (NO in step S07TM1030)), the determination result at the time of starting winning (display specified by the symbol designation command). Judgment values are assigned so that the change pattern 301 is determined at a rate of 100% regardless of the result (missing or big hit). The change pattern 301 does not change the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the timing of the second hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode and the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift.

When the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, and the change pattern 301 And the determination value is assigned to the change pattern 303, respectively. The change pattern 302 does not change the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the timing of the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes the hold display of the notice target to a special mode at the timing of the active shift without changing the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode, and the change pattern 303 displays the hold display of the notice target at the time of starting winning. After displaying in the special mode, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the second hold shift. , It is a change pattern that does not change the hold display of the notice target in the special mode at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the change pattern 301 is 60%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 20% and the change pattern 303 is determined at a rate of 20%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the change pattern 301 is 40%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 30% and the change pattern 303 is determined at a rate of 30%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, and the change pattern 301 Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, and the change pattern 305, respectively. The change pattern 304 does not change the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the timing of the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes the hold display of the notice target to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift without changing the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode, and the change pattern 305 displays the hold display of the notice target at the start winning. After displaying in the blue mode, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the second hold shift. , It is a change pattern that does not change the hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the change pattern 301 is 30%. The change pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 303 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 304 is determined at a rate of 15%, and the change pattern 305 is determined at a rate of 15%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the change pattern 301 is 10%. The change pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 15%, the change pattern 303 is determined at a rate of 15%, the change pattern 304 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 305 is determined at a rate of 30%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by.

When the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, and so on, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, the change pattern 305, the change pattern 306, the change pattern 307, the change pattern 308, the change pattern 309, and the change pattern 310, respectively. The change pattern 306 does not change the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the timing of the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes the hold display of the notice target to a special mode and changes the hold display of the notice target to a red mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 307 is a special mode of the hold display of the notice target at the time of starting winning. After displaying with, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and is active. It is a change pattern that changes the hold display of the notice target to the red mode at the timing of the shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the change pattern 301 is 30%. The change pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 303 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 304 is determined at a rate of 10%, and the change pattern 305 is determined at a rate of 10%. The change pattern 306 is determined at a rate of 2%, the change pattern 307 is determined at a rate of 2%, the change pattern 308 is determined at a rate of 2%, and the change pattern 309 is determined at a rate of 2%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 310 is determined at a rate of 2%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the change pattern 301 is 10%. The change pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 10%, the change pattern 303 is determined at a rate of 10%, the change pattern 304 is determined at a rate of 15%, and the change pattern 305 is determined at a rate of 15%. The change pattern 306 is determined at a rate of 8%, the change pattern 307 is determined at a rate of 8%, the change pattern 308 is determined at a rate of 8%, and the change pattern 309 is determined at a rate of 8%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 310 is determined at a rate of 8%.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "4", the effect control CPU 120 has a [for four reserved] change patterns shown in FIG. 12-10 (A4). Select decision table A.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode (when it is determined not to execute the change effect (NO in step S07TM1030)), the determination result at the time of starting winning (display specified by the symbol designation command). Judgment values are assigned so that the change pattern 401 is determined at a rate of 100% regardless of the result (missing or big hit). The change pattern 401 does not change the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the timing of the second hold shift. The hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the third hold shift, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the hold display of the notice target is changed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change as it is.

When the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, and the change pattern 401 And the determination value is assigned to the change pattern 403, respectively. The change pattern 402 does not change the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the timing of the second hold shift. The hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the third hold shift, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the hold display of the notice target is changed in the special mode at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 403 does not change the hold display of the notice target in the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the special mode at the time of starting winning. The hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the hold display of the notice target in a special mode.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the change pattern 401 is 60%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 20% and the change pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 20%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the change pattern 401 is 40%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 30%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, and the change pattern 401 Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 403, the change pattern 404, and the change pattern 405, respectively. The change pattern 404 does not change the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the start winning, and the timing of the second hold shift. The hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the third hold shift, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 405 does not change the hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of starting winning. The hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern that does not change the hold display to be announced in the blue mode.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the change pattern 401 is 30%. The change pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 404 is determined at a rate of 15%, and the change pattern 405 is determined at a rate of 15%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the change pattern 401 is 10%. The change pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 15%, the change pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 15%, the change pattern 404 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 405 is determined at a rate of 30%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, and the change pattern 401 Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 403, the change pattern 404, the change pattern 405, the change pattern 406, the change pattern 407, the change pattern 408, the change pattern 409, and the change pattern 410, respectively. The change pattern 406 does not change the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the timing of the second hold shift. The hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode, the hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 407 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is displayed in a special mode at the time of starting winning, and then the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift. The hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the third hold shift, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the notice target is made at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that changes the hold display of the above to a red mode, and the change pattern 408 displays the hold display of the notice target in a special mode at the time of starting winning, and then specially displays the hold display of the notice target at the timing of the first hold shift. The hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift without changing the mode, and the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and is active. It is a change pattern that does not change the hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the shift timing, and the change pattern 409 is the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in a special mode at the time of starting winning. The hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode, the hold display of the notice target is not changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift. It is a change pattern that does not change as it is and does not change the hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 410 is 1 after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the time of starting winning. The hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the timing of the third hold shift This is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode and the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the change pattern 401 is 30%. The change pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 404 is determined at a rate of 10%, and the change pattern 405 is determined at a rate of 10%. The change pattern 406 is determined at a rate of 2%, the change pattern 407 is determined at a rate of 2%, the change pattern 408 is determined at a rate of 2%, and the change pattern 409 is determined at a rate of 2%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 410 is determined at a rate of 2%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the change pattern 401 is 10%. The change pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 10%, the change pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 10%, the change pattern 404 is determined at a rate of 15%, and the change pattern 405 is determined at a rate of 15%. The change pattern 406 is determined at a rate of 8%, the change pattern 407 is determined at a rate of 8%, the change pattern 408 is determined at a rate of 8%, and the change pattern 409 is determined at a rate of 8%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 410 is determined at a rate of 8%.

As shown above, when the effect restriction flag is not set (the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display executed at the time of the start winning is not the fluctuation pattern with reach), the hold display corresponding to the start winning is displayed. It is possible to select a change pattern (change pattern 105, 107, change pattern 205, 208, change pattern 305, 310, change pattern 405, 410) that is displayed in a blue mode or a red mode at the time of the start winning. ..

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the change effect, the first look-ahead counter is set (step S07TM1060), and the change prohibition flag is set (step S07TM1070).

The value corresponding to the first hold storage number updated based on the start winning (value specified by the first hold storage number designation command) is set in the first look-ahead counter, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is displayed. Each time it is executed (every time the first hold storage number subtraction designation command is received), the value of the first look-ahead counter is subtracted by one. That is, the value of the first look-ahead counter is subtracted each time the hold display 07TM001 corresponding to the hold memory that is the determination target at the time of starting winning is shifted. Then, when the value of the first look-ahead counter becomes 0, the targeted variation display is executed. The second look-ahead counter, the third look-ahead counter, and the fourth and fourth look-ahead counters, which will be described later, are also subtracted in the same manner as the first look-ahead counter.

During the period when the change prohibition flag is set, even if a new start prize is generated, it corresponds to the new start prize (new first hold memory) by determining YES in step S07TM1010 described above. No change effect is performed. The change prohibition flag is cleared when the change display (so-called target change) that is the target of the change effect ends.

When the effect restriction flag is set (YES in step S07TM1040), the effect control CPU 120 sets the change pattern of the hold display to the change pattern determination table B (when the effect limit flag is set] (FIG. 12-). 11 and 12-12) (see step S07TM1150). The fact that the effect restriction flag is set means that the variation pattern of the variation display executed at the time of the start winning is a variation pattern with reach. In this case, the hold corresponding to the start winning is held. The change pattern for displaying the display in the blue mode or the red mode at the time of the start winning is not selected.

(Change pattern B determination table)
12-11 and 12-12 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the change pattern determination table B for determining the change pattern of the hold display when the effect restriction flag is set. The description of each change pattern (change pattern 101 to change pattern 410) is the same as that shown in the above-described explanations of FIGS. 12-9 and 12-10, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "1", the effect control CPU 120 has a [for one reserved] change pattern shown in FIG. 12-11 (B1). Select decision table B.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode (when it is determined not to execute the change effect (NO in step S07TM1030)), the determination result at the time of starting winning (display specified by the symbol designation command). Judgment values are assigned so that the change pattern 101 is determined at a rate of 100% regardless of the result (missing or big hit).

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the change pattern 101 is 60%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the change pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 20%.

Further, regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the change pattern 101 is Judgment values are assigned so that the change pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 40%, the change pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 30%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the change pattern 101 is 40%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the change pattern 104 is determined at a rate of 20%. There is.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the change pattern 101 is 20%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 15%, the change pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 15%, and the change pattern 104 is determined at a rate of 50%. There is.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the change pattern 101 is 30%. The change pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 25%, the change pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 25%, the change pattern 104 is determined at a rate of 15%, and the change pattern 106 is determined at a rate of 5%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "ha big hit" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the change pattern 101 is 20. The change pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 15%, the change pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 5%, the change pattern 104 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 106 is determined at a rate of 30%. Judgment values are assigned so that they are determined by the ratio.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "2", the effect control CPU 120 has a [for two reserved] change pattern shown in FIG. 12-11 (B2). Select decision table B.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode (when it is determined not to execute the change effect (NO in step S07TM1030)), the determination result at the time of starting winning (display specified by the symbol designation command). Judgment values are assigned so that the change pattern 201 is determined at a rate of 100% regardless of the result (missing or big hit).

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the change pattern 201 is 60%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 20% and the change pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 20%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the change pattern 201 is 40%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 30%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the change pattern 201 is 40%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the change pattern 204 is determined at a rate of 20%. There is.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the change pattern 201 is 20%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 15%, the change pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 15%, and the change pattern 204 is determined at a rate of 50%. There is.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the change pattern 201 is 30%. The change pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 25%, the change pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 25%, the change pattern 204 is determined at a rate of 15%, and the change pattern 206 is determined at a rate of 5%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the change pattern 201 is 25%. The change pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 5%, the change pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 5%, the change pattern 204 is determined at a rate of 35%, and the change pattern 206 is determined at a rate of 30%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "3", the effect control CPU 120 has a [for three reserved] change patterns shown in FIG. 12-12 (B3). Select decision table B.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode (when it is determined not to execute the change effect (NO in step S07TM1030)), the determination result at the time of starting winning (display specified by the symbol designation command). Judgment values are assigned so that the change pattern 301 is determined at a rate of 100% regardless of the result (missing or big hit).

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the change pattern 301 is 60%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 20% and the change pattern 303 is determined at a rate of 20%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the change pattern 301 is 40%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 30% and the change pattern 303 is determined at a rate of 30%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the change pattern 301 is 40%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 25%, the change pattern 303 is determined at a rate of 25%, and the change pattern 304 is determined at a rate of 10%. There is.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the change pattern 301 is 30%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 303 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the change pattern 304 is determined at a rate of 30%. There is.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the change pattern 301 is 30%. The change pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 303 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 304 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the change pattern 306 is determined at a rate of 5%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 307 is determined at a rate of 5%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the change pattern 301 is 10%. The change pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 10%, the change pattern 303 is determined at a rate of 10%, the change pattern 304 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 306 is determined at a rate of 20%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 307 is determined at a rate of 20%.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "4", the effect control CPU 120 has a [for four reserved] change patterns shown in FIG. 12-12 (B4). Select decision table B.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode (when it is determined not to execute the change effect (NO in step S07TM1030)), the determination result at the time of starting winning (display specified by the symbol designation command). Judgment values are assigned so that the change pattern 401 is determined at a rate of 100% regardless of the result (missing or big hit).

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the change pattern 401 is 60%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 20% and the change pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 20%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the change pattern 401 is 40%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 30%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the change pattern 401 is 40%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 25%, the change pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 25%, and the change pattern 404 is determined at a rate of 10%. There is.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the change pattern 401 is 30%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the change pattern 404 is determined at a rate of 30%. There is.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the change pattern 401 is 30%. The change pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 404 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the change pattern 406 is determined at a rate of 5%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 407 is determined at a rate of 5%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the change pattern 401 is 10%. The change pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 10%, the change pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 10%, the change pattern 404 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 406 is determined at a rate of 20%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 407 is determined at a rate of 20%.

As shown above, when the effect restriction flag is set (the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display executed at the time of the start winning is the fluctuation pattern with reach), the hold display corresponding to the start winning is displayed. Is not selected for the change pattern (change pattern 105, 107, change pattern 205, 208, change pattern 305, 310, change pattern 405, 410) that is displayed in the blue mode or the red mode at the time of the start winning.

However, even if the effect restriction flag is set (the variation pattern of the variation display executed at the time of the start winning is a variation pattern with reach), the hold display corresponding to the start winning is displayed at the start. The change patterns (change patterns 103, 106, change patterns 203, 206, change patterns 303, 307, change patterns 403, 407) displayed in a special mode at the time of winning can be selected.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 12-9 to 12-12, the hold display corresponding to the variable display that is the judgment target at the time of starting winning can be changed from the normal mode to the special mode or the blue mode. It is possible to change from a special aspect to a red aspect. In addition, the hold display corresponding to the variable display that is the determination target at the time of starting winning does not change from the blue mode to any mode, and does not change from the red mode to any mode. Therefore, the special mode as the mode of the hold display is a mode suggesting that the mode changes to the red mode, and the hold display is displayed in the special mode as compared with the case where the hold display is displayed in the normal mode. Is higher in the rate of change to the red mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-8, the jackpot expectation is higher when the active display in the red mode is displayed than when the active display in the normal mode is displayed. Therefore, the specific display (hold display, active display) in the red mode is a mode that suggests that the display result is a "big hit".

That is, the hold display can be displayed in a normal mode and a special mode (red mode) in which the percentage of big hits is higher than in the normal mode, and the hold display is more special than when the hold display is displayed in the normal mode. When the display mode is displayed, the rate at which the display mode of the hold display changes to the special mode (red mode) is higher.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the first look-ahead counter (step S07TM1160) and sets the change prohibition flag (step S07TM1170) when it is determined to execute the change effect.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the operation unit vibration flag (see step S07TM2060 and step S07TM2160), which will be described later, is set (step S07TM2000). If the operation unit vibration flag is set (YES in step S07TM2000), the process proceeds to step S3000.

Here, the fact that the operation unit vibration flag is set means that the operation unit vibration effect has already been executed or the operation unit vibration effect is performed for any variation display different from the variation display corresponding to the start winning prize. Since it is decided to execute it, in such a case, the execution of the further operation unit vibration effect is prohibited.

When the operation unit vibration flag is not set (NO in step S07TM2000), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the operation unit vibration effect is executed in the operation unit vibration effect execution / non-execution determination table (FIG. 12-13 (A). )) (Step S07TM2010). That is, in the present embodiment, when the operation unit vibration effect is not executed and it is not decided to execute the operation unit vibration effect for any of the variation display corresponding to the start winning and the variation display different from the variation display. , The operation unit vibration effect can be executed.

FIG. 12-13 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the execution / non-execution determination table of the operation unit vibration effect. As shown in FIG. 12-13 (A), in this embodiment, determination values are assigned so that the execution ratio of the operation unit vibration effect differs depending on the display result.

If the display result is "off" (that is, if the display result specified by the display result specification command is "off"), it is decided not to execute the operation unit vibration effect at a rate of 95%. It is decided to execute the operation unit vibration effect at a rate of%. On the other hand, when the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "big hit"), it is decided not to execute the operation unit vibration effect at a rate of 70%. , It is decided to execute the operation unit vibration effect at a rate of 30%.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the operation unit vibration effect (step S07TM2020). If it is decided not to execute the operation unit vibration effect (NO in step S07TM2020), the process proceeds to step S07TM3000.

When it is determined to execute the operation unit vibration effect (YES in step 07TM2020), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect restriction flag (see FIG. 12-19) described later is set (see FIG. 12-19). Step S07TM2030). If the effect restriction flag is not set (NO in step S07TM2030), the process proceeds to step S07TM2040 or later, and if the effect limit flag is set (YES in step S07TM2030), the process proceeds to step S07TM2140 or later. Proceed.

When the effect restriction flag is not set (NO in step S07TM2030), the effect control CPU 120 sets the vibration pattern of the operation unit vibration effect to the vibration pattern determination table of the operation unit vibration effect (FIG. 12-13 (B)). The vibration pattern A (see FIG. 12-14) is determined based on (see) (step S07TM2040). Here, the vibration pattern A is the stick controller 31A both when the variation display before the variation display corresponding to the start winning is executed and when the variation display corresponding to the start winning is executed. It is an effect pattern that vibrates, and is a vibration pattern corresponding to both the look-ahead advance notice effect and the variable advance notice effect.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the operation unit vibration effect, it sets the second look-ahead counter (step S07TM2050) and sets the operation unit vibration flag (step S07TM2060).

During the period when the operation unit vibration flag is set, even if a new start prize is generated, it corresponds to the new start prize (new first hold memory) by determining YES in step S07TM2000 described above. The operation unit vibration effect is not executed. The operation unit vibration flag is cleared when the fluctuation display (so-called target fluctuation) that is the target of the operation unit vibration effect is completed.

On the other hand, when the effect restriction flag is set (YES in step S07TM2030), the effect control CPU 120 sets the vibration pattern of the operation unit vibration effect to the vibration pattern determination table of the operation unit vibration effect (FIG. 12-13 (FIG. 12-13). B)) is used to determine the vibration pattern B (see FIG. 12-14) (step S07TM2140). Here, in the vibration pattern B, when the variation display before the variation display corresponding to the start prize is executed, the variation display corresponding to the start prize is executed without vibrating the stick controller 31A. It is an effect pattern that vibrates the stick controller 31A only when the stick controller 31A is vibrated, and is a vibration pattern that does not correspond to the pre-reading advance notice effect but corresponds to the changing advance notice effect.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the second look-ahead counter (step S07TM2150) and sets the operation unit vibration flag (step S07TM2160) when it is determined to execute the operation unit vibration effect.

(Vibration pattern of operation unit vibration effect)
FIG. 12-14 shows the aspect of the stick controller 31A at the lower right of the effect diagram in correspondence with the effect diagram. 12-14 (A1) to (A4) show an example of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the mode of the stick controller 31A when the vibration pattern A is selected as the vibration pattern of the operation unit vibration effect. 12-14 (B1) to (B4) are explanatory views showing the effect image and the stick controller displayed on the image display device 5 when the vibration pattern B is selected as the vibration pattern of the operation unit vibration effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the aspect of 31A.

In the present embodiment, when it is decided to execute the operation unit vibration effect in the start winning effect determination process accompanying the start winning, the first reserved storage number is n (n = 1, 2, 3, 4) at this time. Based on the above, "n" is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter. When the vibration pattern of the operation unit vibration effect is determined to be the vibration pattern A, the timing of the start winning and the fluctuation display in which the value of the second look-ahead counter becomes "n-1" to "1" are started. At the timing (timing when the hold display is shifted), the operation unit vibration effect is executed as the look-ahead notice effect, the stick controller 31A becomes a special mode (vibration mode), and the value of the second look-ahead counter becomes "0". At the timing when the display is started (the timing when the fluctuation display which is the target of the notice is started), the operation unit vibration effect is executed as the notice effect during the change, and the stick controller 31A becomes a special mode (vibration mode).

On the other hand, when the vibration pattern of the operation unit vibration effect is determined to be the vibration pattern B, the timing at which the fluctuation display in which the value of the second look-ahead counter becomes "0" is started (the fluctuation subject to the notice). At the timing when the display is started), the operation unit vibration effect is executed as a notice effect during fluctuation, and the stick controller 31A becomes a special mode (vibration mode). That is, when the vibration pattern of the operation unit vibration effect is determined to be the vibration pattern B, the start winning timing and the value of the second look-ahead counter are "n-", unlike the case where the vibration pattern A is determined. At the timing when the variation display of "1" to "1" is started, the operation unit vibration effect is not executed, and the mode of the stick controller 31A becomes a non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

(Vibration pattern A)
In the example shown in FIGS. 12-14 (A1) to (A4), it is decided to execute the change effect in the start winning effect determination process (see FIGS. 12-6 and 12-7) (step S07TM1020). , The change pattern 303 is determined (step S07TM1050), the operation unit vibration effect is determined to be executed (step S07TM2010), and the vibration pattern of the operation unit vibration effect is determined to be the vibration pattern A (step S07TM2040).

First, as shown in FIG. 12-14 (A1), when the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , The variable display of the decorative symbol is executed, and the variable display of the small symbol is executed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Further, the active display area 07TM013 displays the active display 07TM003 in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the hold display area 07TM011 displays two hold displays 07TM001 in the normal mode. .. At this time, when the first reserved storage number is 2 and the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, a new start prize is generated. 1 It is assumed that the number of reserved memories is 3.

As shown in FIG. 12-14 (A1), the effect control CPU 120 performs a change effect (hold change effect) as a look-ahead advance notice effect based on receiving a command indicating that the first hold storage number has increased. This is executed, and the hold display 07TM001B of a special mode is newly displayed in the hold display area 07TM011.

Further, in this example, in the start winning effect determination process (see FIGS. 12-6 and 12-7) accompanying the start winning generated at this time, the second look-ahead counter is set and the first reserved storage number is 3. Based on the above, 3 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 12-14 (A1), the effect control CPU 120 determines the vibration pattern of the operation unit vibration effect to be the vibration pattern A, and based on this, the operation unit vibration effect is performed as a look-ahead advance notice effect. Is executed, and the mode of the stick controller 31A is set as a special mode (vibration mode) at the timing of starting winning.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-14 (A2), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is set in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , The variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 07TM013 to display the active display 07TM003 in the normal mode and is displayed in the hold display area 07TM011 as the first reserved storage number becomes 2. The hold display 07TM001B and the hold display 07TM001 in the normal mode are shifted one by one to the active display area 07TM013 side. Further, 2 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 2.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 12-14 (A2), the effect control CPU 120 determines the vibration pattern of the operation unit vibration effect to the vibration pattern A, and 2 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter. Based on the above, the operation unit vibration effect is executed as the look-ahead notice effect, and the mode of the stick controller 31A is set as a special mode (vibration mode) at the timing when the hold display is shifted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-14 (A3), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is set in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , The variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 07TM013 to display the active display 07TM003 in the normal mode and is displayed in the hold display area 07TM011 as the first reserved storage number becomes 1. The hold display 07TM001B of is shifted by one to the active display area 07TM013 side. Further, 1 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 1.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 12-14 (A3), the effect control CPU 120 determines the vibration pattern of the operation unit vibration effect to the vibration pattern A, and 1 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter. Based on the above, the operation unit vibration effect is executed as the look-ahead notice effect, and the mode of the stick controller 31A is set as a special mode (vibration mode) at the timing when the hold display is shifted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-14 (A4), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol that is the object of advance notice, the effect control CPU 120 sets the symbol display area of the image display device 5. In 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, and in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the variation display of the small symbol is started.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 executes a change effect (active change effect) as a notice effect during fluctuation as the first reserved storage number becomes 0, and the active display area 07TM013 has a special mode of active display 07TM003B. Is displayed, and the hold display 07TM001B of the special mode displayed in the hold display area 07TM011 is deleted. Further, 0 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 0.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 12-14 (A4), the effect control CPU 120 determines the vibration pattern of the operation unit vibration effect to the vibration pattern A, and 0 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter. Based on this, the operation unit vibration effect is executed as a notice effect during fluctuation, and the timing when the target variation display is executed (the hold display in a special mode corresponding to the target variation display is shifted to the active display area 07TM013. The mode of the stick controller 31A is set as a special mode (vibration mode) at the timing when the active display is displayed.

(Vibration pattern B)
In FIGS. 12-14 (B1) to (B4), it is decided to execute the change effect in the start winning effect determination process (see FIGS. 12-6 and 12-7) accompanying the start winning (step S07TM1020). ), The change pattern 303 is determined (step S07TM1050), the operation unit vibration effect is determined to be executed (step S07TM2010), and the vibration pattern of the operation unit vibration effect is determined to be the vibration pattern B (step S07TM2140). ..

First, as shown in FIG. 12-14 (B1), when the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , The variable display of the decorative symbol is executed, and the variable display of the small symbol is executed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Further, the active display area 07TM013 displays the active display 07TM003 in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the hold display area 07TM011 displays two hold displays 07TM001 in the normal mode. .. At this time, when the first reserved storage number is 2 and the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, a new start prize is generated. 1 It is assumed that the number of reserved memories is 3.

As shown in FIG. 12-14 (B1), the effect control CPU 120 performs a change effect (hold change effect) as a look-ahead advance notice effect based on receiving a command indicating that the first hold storage number has increased. This is executed, and the hold display 07TM001B of a special mode is newly displayed in the hold display area 07TM011.

Further, in this example, in the start winning effect determination process (see FIGS. 12-6 and 12-7) accompanying the start winning generated at this time, the second look-ahead counter is set and the first reserved storage number is 3. Based on the above, 3 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 12-14 (B1), the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the operation unit vibration effect based on the fact that the vibration pattern of the operation unit vibration effect is determined to be the vibration pattern B. , The mode of the stick controller 31A remains the non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-14 (B2), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is set in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , The variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 07TM013 to display the active display 07TM003 in the normal mode and is displayed in the hold display area 07TM011 as the first reserved storage number becomes 2. The hold display 07TM001B and the hold display 07TM001 in the normal mode are shifted one by one to the active display area 07TM013 side. Further, 2 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 2.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 12-14 (B2), the effect control CPU 120 determines the vibration pattern of the operation unit vibration effect to be the vibration pattern B, and 2 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter. Based on the above, the operation unit vibration effect is not executed, and the mode of the stick controller 31A remains as a non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-14 (B3), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is set in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , The variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 07TM013 to display the active display 07TM003 in the normal mode and is displayed in the hold display area 07TM011 as the first reserved storage number becomes 1. The hold display 07TM001B of is shifted by one to the active display area 07TM013 side. Further, 1 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 1.

As shown in FIG. 12-14 (B3), the effect control CPU 120 determines the vibration pattern of the operation unit vibration effect to be the vibration pattern B, and 1 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter. Based on this, the operation unit vibration effect is not executed, and the mode of the stick controller 31A remains as a special mode (vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-14 (B4), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol that is the object of advance notice, the effect control CPU 120 sets the symbol display area of the image display device 5. In 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, and in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the variation display of the small symbol is started.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 executes a change effect (active change effect) as a notice effect during fluctuation as the first reserved storage number becomes 0, and the active display area 07TM013 has a special mode of active display 07TM003B. Is displayed, and the hold display 07TM001B of the special mode displayed in the hold display area 07TM011 is deleted. Further, 0 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 0.

As shown in FIG. 12-14 (B4), the effect control CPU 120 determines the vibration pattern of the operation unit vibration effect to be the vibration pattern B, and 0 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter. Based on this, the operation unit vibration effect is executed as a notice effect during fluctuation, and the timing when the target variation display is executed (the hold display in a special mode corresponding to the target variation display is shifted to the active display area 07TM013 and becomes the active display. The mode of the stick controller 31A is set as a special mode (vibration mode).

In this way, when the vibration pattern of the operation unit vibration effect is the vibration pattern A, the stick controller 31A vibrates at the timing of the start winning based on the determination result at the time of the start winning, and the start is performed after the start winning. The stick controller 31A vibrates at the timing when the fluctuation display, which is executed before the fluctuation display corresponding to the prize, is started (the timing when the hold memory is digested and the hold display is shifted), and after the start prize is won. The stick controller 31A vibrates at the timing when the variation display (variation display that is the target of the operation unit vibration effect) corresponding to the start winning is started. That is, the operation unit vibration effect is executed as a look-ahead notice effect and also as a variable advance notice effect.

On the other hand, when the vibration pattern of the operation unit vibration effect is the vibration pattern B, the timing of the start winning and the variation display that is executed before the variation display corresponding to the start winning after the start winning is started. At the same timing, the stick controller 31A does not vibrate, and after the start prize is started, the fluctuation display corresponding to the start prize (variation display which is the target of the operation unit vibration effect) is started based on the judgment result at the time of the start prize. The stick controller 31A is vibrating only in. That is, the operation unit vibration effect is not executed as the look-ahead notice effect, but is executed only as the variable advance notice effect.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the timer flag (see step S07TM3070 and step S07TM3170) described later is set (step S07TM3000). If the timer flag is set (YES in step S07TM3000), the process proceeds to step S07TM4000.

Here, the fact that the timer flag is set means that the timer standby effect or the timer effect has already been executed or the timer effect is executed for any of the variable displays different from the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize. In such a case, further execution of the timer effect (and the timer standby effect) is prohibited because it is determined to be the case.

When the timer flag is not set (NO in step S07TM3000), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the fluctuation pattern determined at the time of winning the start, that is, the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation category command is the fluctuation accompanied by super reach. It is determined whether or not it is a pattern (“super reach loss” or “super reach jackpot”) (step S07TM3010). If the fluctuation pattern is not accompanied by super reach (if the fluctuation pattern is not "super reach out" or "super reach jackpot") (NO in step S07TM3010), the process proceeds to step S07TM4000.

If the fluctuation pattern is accompanied by super reach (when the fluctuation pattern is "out of super reach" or "super reach jackpot") (YES in step S07TM3010), whether or not to execute the timer effect is determined. Determined based on the table (see FIG. 12-15 (A)) (step S07TM3020). That is, in the present embodiment, the timer standby effect and the timer effect are not executed for any of the variable display corresponding to the start winning and the variable display different from the variable display, and it is not decided to execute the timer effect. In addition, timer production can be executed.

FIG. 12-15 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the execution / non-execution determination table of the timer effect. As shown in FIG. 12-15 (A), in this embodiment, determination values are assigned so that the execution ratio of the timer effect differs depending on the display result.

If the display result is "off" (that is, if the display result specified by the display result specification command is "off"), it is decided that the timer effect is not executed at a rate of 90%, and 10%. Decide to execute the timer effect at a rate. On the other hand, when the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "big hit"), it is decided not to execute the timer effect at a rate of 80%, and 20 Decide to execute the timer effect at a rate of%.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the timer effect (step S07TM3030). If it is decided not to execute the timer effect (NO in step S07TM3030), the process proceeds to step S07TM4000.

When it is determined to execute the timer effect (YES in step 07TM3030), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect restriction flag (see FIG. 12-19) described later is set (step S07TM3040). ). If the effect restriction flag is not set (NO in step S07TM3040), the process proceeds to step S07TM3050 or later, and if the effect limit flag is set (YES in step S07TM3040), the process proceeds to step S07TM3150 or later. Proceed.

When the effect restriction flag is not set (NO in step S07TM3040), the effect control CPU 120 sets the timer display pattern of the timer effect to the timer display pattern determination table of the timer effect (see FIG. 12-15 (B)). The timer display pattern A (see FIG. 12-16) is determined based on (step S07TM3050). Here, in the timer display pattern A, the timer standby effect is executed when the variation display before the variation display corresponding to the start winning is executed, and the variation display corresponding to the start winning is executed. It is an effect pattern that executes a timer effect when the user is present, and is an effect pattern corresponding to both the look-ahead advance notice effect and the variable advance notice effect.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the timer effect, it sets the third look-ahead counter (step S07TM3060) and sets the timer flag (step S07TM3070).

During the period when the timer flag is set, even if a new start prize is generated, the timer corresponding to the new start prize (new first hold storage) is determined as YES in step S07TM3000 described above. No production is performed. The timer flag is cleared when the fluctuation display (so-called target fluctuation) that is the target of the timer effect ends.

On the other hand, when the effect restriction flag is set (YES in step S07TM3040), the effect control CPU 120 sets the timer display pattern of the timer effect to the timer display pattern determination table of the timer effect (FIG. 12-15 (B)). The vibration pattern B (see FIG. 12-16) is determined based on (see) (step S07TM3150). Here, in the timer display pattern B, the variation display corresponding to the start prize is executed without executing the timer standby effect when the variation display before the variation display corresponding to the start prize is executed. It is an effect pattern that executes a timer effect when the user is running, and is an effect pattern that does not correspond to the pre-reading advance notice effect but corresponds to the changing advance notice effect.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the third look-ahead counter (step S07TM3160) and sets the timer flag (step S07TM3170) when it is determined to execute the timer effect.

(Timer display pattern for timer production)
12-16 (A1) to (A4) are explanatory views showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the timer display pattern A is selected as the timer display pattern for the timer effect. 12-16 (B1) to (B4) are explanatory views showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the timer display pattern B is selected as the timer display pattern for the timer effect.

In the present embodiment, when it is decided to execute the timer effect in the start winning effect determination process accompanying the start winning, the first reserved storage number is n (n = 1, 2, 3, 4) at this time. Based on this, "n" is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter. When the timer display pattern of the timer effect is determined to be the timer display pattern A, the timing at which the fluctuation display in which the value of the third look-ahead counter becomes "1" ends from the timing of the start winning prize (the symbol after the fluctuation display) The timer standby effect is continuously executed until the fixed stop period is included), the standby image 07TM300a is continuously displayed in the lower right area of the screen, and the variable display in which the value of the third look-ahead counter becomes "0" is started. The timer effect is executed at the timing (the timing when the variable display that is the target of the notice is started), and the timer image 07TM300 is displayed in the lower right area of the screen.

On the other hand, when the timer display pattern of the timer effect is determined to be the timer display pattern B, the timing at which the fluctuation display in which the value of the third look-ahead counter becomes "0" is started (the fluctuation targeted for advance notice). At the timing when the display is started), the timer effect is executed, and the timer image 07TM300 is displayed in the lower right area of the screen. That is, when the pattern of the timer effect is determined to be the timer display pattern B, the timer standby effect is not executed unlike the case where the timer display pattern A is determined.

(Timer display pattern A)
In the examples shown in FIGS. 12-16 (A1) to (A4), it is decided to execute the change effect in the start winning effect determination process (see FIGS. 12-6 and 12-7) accompanying the start winning. (Step S07TM1020), the change pattern 303 is determined (step S07TM1050), the timer effect is determined to be executed (step S07TM3020), and the timer display pattern of the timer effect is determined to be the timer display pattern A (step S07TM3050). ).

First, as shown in FIG. 12-16 (A1), when the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , The variable display of the decorative symbol is executed, and the variable display of the small symbol is executed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Further, the active display area 07TM013 displays the active display 07TM003 in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the hold display area 07TM011 displays two hold displays 07TM001 in the normal mode. .. At this time, when the first reserved storage number is 2 and the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, a new start prize is generated. 1 It is assumed that the number of reserved memories is 3.

As shown in FIG. 12-16 (A1), the effect control CPU 120 performs a change effect (hold change effect) as a look-ahead advance notice effect based on receiving a command indicating that the first hold storage number has increased. This is executed, and the hold display 07TM001B of a special mode is newly displayed in the hold display area 07TM011.

Further, in this example, in the start winning effect determination process (see FIGS. 12-6 and 12-7) accompanying the start winning generated at this time, the third look-ahead counter is set and the first reserved storage number is 3. Based on the above, 3 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 12-16 (A1), the effect control CPU 120 determines the timer display pattern of the timer effect to be the timer display pattern A, and is based on the fact that the timer standby effect is a look-ahead advance notice effect. Is executed, and the standby image 07TM300a (displaying the characters "preparing") is displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-16 (A2), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is set in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , The variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 07TM013 to display the active display 07TM003 in the normal mode and is displayed in the hold display area 07TM011 as the first reserved storage number becomes 2. The hold display 07TM001B and the hold display 07TM001 in the normal mode are shifted one by one to the active display area 07TM013 side. Further, 2 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 2.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 12-16 (A2), the effect control CPU 120 determines the timer display pattern of the timer effect to the timer display pattern A, and 2 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter. Based on the above, the timer standby effect, which is a look-ahead notice effect, is continuously executed, and the standby image 07TM300a (displaying the characters "preparing") is continuously displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-16 (A3), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is set in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , The variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 07TM013 to display the active display 07TM003 in the normal mode and is displayed in the hold display area 07TM011 as the first reserved storage number becomes 1. The hold display 07TM001B of is shifted by one to the active display area 07TM013 side. Further, 1 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 1.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 12-16 (A3), the effect control CPU 120 determines the timer display pattern of the timer effect to the timer display pattern A, and 1 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter. Based on the above, the timer standby effect, which is a look-ahead notice effect, is continuously executed, and the standby image 07TM300a (displaying the characters "preparing") is continuously displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-16 (A4), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol that is the object of advance notice, the effect control CPU 120 sets the symbol display area of the image display device 5. In 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, and in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the variation display of the small symbol is started.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 executes a change effect (active change effect) as a notice effect during fluctuation as the first reserved storage number becomes 0, and the active display area 07TM013 has a special mode of active display 07TM003B. Is displayed, and the hold display 07TM001B of the special mode displayed in the hold display area 07TM011 is deleted. Further, 0 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 0.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 12-16 (A4), the effect control CPU 120 determines the timer display pattern of the timer effect to the timer display pattern A, and 0 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter. Based on the above, a timer effect, which is a notice effect during fluctuation, is executed, and a timer image 07TM300 (displays the characters "00:59") is displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5 instead of the standby image 07TM300a. Let me.

(Timer display pattern B)
In the examples shown in FIGS. 12-16 (B1) to (B4), it is determined to execute the change effect in the start winning effect determination process (see FIGS. 12-6 and 12-7) accompanying the start winning. (Step S07TM1020), the change pattern 303 is determined (step S07TM1050), the timer effect is determined to be executed (step S07TM3020), and the timer display pattern of the timer effect is determined to be the timer display pattern B (step S07TM3150). ).

First, as shown in FIG. 12-16 (B1), when the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , The variable display of the decorative symbol is executed, and the variable display of the small symbol is executed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Further, the active display area 07TM013 displays the active display 07TM003 in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the hold display area 07TM011 displays two hold displays 07TM001 in the normal mode. .. At this time, when the first reserved storage number is 2 and the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, a new start prize is generated. 1 It is assumed that the number of reserved memories is 3.

As shown in FIG. 12-16 (B1), the effect control CPU 120 performs a change effect (hold change effect) as a look-ahead advance notice effect based on receiving a command indicating that the first hold storage number has increased. This is executed, and the hold display 07TM001B of a special mode is newly displayed in the hold display area 07TM011.

Further, in this example, in the start winning effect determination process (see FIGS. 12-6 and 12-7) accompanying the start winning generated at this time, the third look-ahead counter is set and the first reserved storage number is 3. Based on the above, 3 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 12-16 (B1), the effect control CPU 120 determines the timer display pattern of the timer effect to be the timer display pattern B, and the timer standby effect is a look-ahead advance notice effect. Is not executed, and the standby image 07TM300a is not displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-16 (B2), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is set in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , The variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 07TM013 to display the active display 07TM003 in the normal mode and is displayed in the hold display area 07TM011 as the first reserved storage number becomes 2. The hold display 07TM001B and the hold display 07TM001 in the normal mode are shifted one by one to the active display area 07TM013 side. Further, 2 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 2.

As shown in FIG. 12-16 (B2), the effect control CPU 120 determines the timer display pattern of the timer effect to be the timer display pattern B, and 2 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter. Based on this, the timer standby effect, which is the look-ahead notice effect, is not executed, and the standby image 07TM300a is not displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-16 (B3), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is set in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , The variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 07TM013 to display the active display 07TM003 in the normal mode and is displayed in the hold display area 07TM011 as the first reserved storage number becomes 1. The hold display 07TM001B of is shifted by one to the active display area 07TM013 side. Further, 1 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 1.

As shown in FIG. 12-16 (B3), the effect control CPU 120 determines the timer display pattern of the timer effect to be the timer display pattern B, and 1 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter. Based on this, the timer standby effect, which is the look-ahead notice effect, is not executed, and the standby image 07TM300a is not displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-16 (B4), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol that is the object of advance notice, the effect control CPU 120 sets the symbol display area of the image display device 5. In 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, and in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the variation display of the small symbol is started.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 executes a change effect (active change effect) as a notice effect during fluctuation as the first reserved storage number becomes 0, and the active display area 07TM013 has a special mode of active display 07TM003B. Is displayed, and the hold display 07TM001B of the special mode displayed in the hold display area 07TM011 is deleted. Further, 0 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 0.

As shown in FIG. 12-16 (B4), the effect control CPU 120 determines the timer display pattern B as the timer display pattern of the timer effect, and 0 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter. Based on this, the timer effect, which is the variable advance notice effect, is executed, and the timer image 07TM300 (displaying the characters "00:59") is displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5.

In this way, when the timer display pattern of the timer effect is the timer display pattern A, from the timing of the start prize based on the determination result at the time of the start prize, from the variable display corresponding to the start prize after the start prize. Until the timing when the variable display that is executed first ends (including the symbol confirmation stop period after the variable display ends), the timer standby effect, which is the look-ahead notice effect, is continuously executed, and the standby image 07TM300a is displayed in the lower right area of the screen. Is continuously displayed, and at the timing when the variation display (variation display that is the target of the timer effect) corresponding to the start prize is started after the start prize, the timer effect, which is a notice effect during fluctuation, is executed, and the lower right of the screen. The timer image 07TM300 will be displayed in the area instead of the standby image 07TM300a.

On the other hand, when the timer display pattern of the timer effect is the timer display pattern B, the timer standby effect is not executed (the standby image 07TM300a is not displayed), and the judgment result at the time of starting winning is used. At the timing when the fluctuation display corresponding to the start prize (variation display which is the target of the timer effect) is started after the start prize, the timer effect which is the notice effect during the change is executed, and the timer image 07TM300 is displayed in the lower right area of the screen. Has been done.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the special background flag (see step S07TM4060 and step S07TM4160), which will be described later, is set (step S07TM4000). If the special background flag is set (YES in step S07TM4000), the process ends as it is.

Here, the fact that the special background flag is set means that the special background effect has already been executed or the special background effect is executed for any of the variable displays different from the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize. In such a case, the execution of further special background effect is prohibited.

When the special background flag is not set (NO in step S07TM4000), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special background effect is executed in the execution / non-execution determination table of the special background effect (see FIG. 12-17 (A)). Is determined based on (step S07TM4010). That is, in the present embodiment, when the special background effect is not executed and it is not decided to execute the special background effect for any of the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize and the variable display different from the variable display, the special background effect is not executed. Background effect can be executed.

FIG. 12-17 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the execution / non-execution determination table of the special background effect. As shown in FIG. 12-17 (A), in this embodiment, determination values are assigned so that the execution ratio of the special background effect differs depending on the display result.

If the display result is "off" (that is, if the display result specified by the display result specification command is "off"), it is decided that the special background effect is not executed at a rate of 95%, and 5%. Decide to perform a special background effect at the rate of. On the other hand, when the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "big hit"), it is decided not to execute the special background effect at a rate of 85%. Decided to perform a special background effect at a rate of 15%.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the special background effect (step S07TM4020). If it is decided not to execute the special background effect (NO in step S07TM4020), the process ends as it is.

When it is determined to execute the special background effect (YES in step 07TM4020), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the effect restriction flag (see FIG. 12-19) described later is set (step). S07TM4030). If the effect restriction flag is not set (NO in step S07TM4030), the process proceeds to step S07TM4040 or later, and if the effect limit flag is set (YES in step S07TM4030), the process proceeds to step S07TM4140 or later. Proceed.

When the effect restriction flag is not set (NO in step S07TM4030), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image display pattern of the special background effect to the background image display pattern determination table of the special background effect (FIG. 12-17 (FIG. 12-17). B)) is used to determine the background image display pattern A (see FIG. 12-18) (step S07TM4040). Here, the background image display pattern A is special both when the variation display before the variation display corresponding to the start prize is executed and when the variation display corresponding to the start prize is executed. This is a background change pattern for displaying the background image 07TM400 (switching the background image from a normal background image to a special background image).

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the special background effect, it sets the fourth look-ahead counter (step S07TM4050) and sets the special background flag (step S07TM4060).

During the period when the special background flag is set, even if a new start prize is generated, it corresponds to the new start prize (new first hold memory) by determining YES in step S07TM4000 described above. No special background effect is performed. The special background flag is cleared when the variation display (so-called target variation) that is the target of the special background effect ends.

On the other hand, when the effect restriction flag is set (YES in step S07TM4030), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image display pattern of the special background effect to the background image display pattern determination table of the special background effect (FIG. 12-). 17 (B)) is used to determine the background image display pattern B (see FIG. 12-18) (step S07TM4140). Here, the background image display pattern B does not display the special background image 07TM400 when the variation display prior to the variation display corresponding to the start winning is executed (switching the background image as the normal background image). It is a background change pattern that displays the special background image 07TM400 (switches the background image from the normal background image to the special background image) only when the variable display corresponding to the start prize is executed. It is a background change pattern that corresponds to the notice effect during fluctuations that do not correspond.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the fourth look-ahead counter (step S07TM4150) and sets the timer flag (step S07TM4160) when it is determined to execute the special background effect.

(Background image display pattern for special background effect)
12-18 (A1) to (A4) are explanatory views showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the background image display pattern A is selected as the background image display pattern for the special background effect. 12-18 (B1) to (B4) show an example of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the background image display pattern B is selected as the background image display pattern for the special background effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows.

In the present embodiment, when it is decided to execute the special background effect in the start winning effect determination process accompanying the start winning, the first reserved storage number is n (n = 1, 2, 3, 4) at this time. Based on the existence, "n" is set as the value of the fourth look-ahead counter. When the background image display pattern of the special background effect is determined to be the background image display pattern A, the variable display (target variable display) in which the value of the fourth look-ahead counter becomes "0" is displayed from the timing of the start winning. The special background effect is continuously executed until the end timing (including the period when the pattern is fixed after the fluctuation is displayed), and the special background showing the landscape of the volcano including the night sky, mountains, and eruption as the background image of the decorative pattern. Image 07TM400 is continuously displayed. In this case, from the start winning timing, the timing at which the fluctuation display in which the value of the fourth look-ahead counter becomes "1" (the fluctuation display immediately before the target fluctuation display) ends (the symbol confirmation stop period after the fluctuation display) is set. The special background effect up to (including) corresponds to the pre-reading advance notice effect, and the timing (variation display subject to advance notice) when the variation display (target variation display) in which the value of the fourth look-ahead counter becomes "0" is started The special background effect after (the timing when is started) corresponds to the notice effect during fluctuation.

On the other hand, when the background image display pattern of the special background effect is determined to be the background image display pattern B, the timing at which the variable display in which the value of the fourth look-ahead counter becomes "0" is started (subject to advance notice). At the timing when the variable display is started), the special background effect is executed as the notice effect during the change, and the special background image 07TM400 is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern. That is, when the pattern of the special background effect is determined to be the background image display pattern B, the special background effect as the look-ahead notice effect is not executed unlike the case where the pattern is determined to be the background image display pattern A. , Only the special background effect as a notice effect during fluctuation will be executed.

(Background image display pattern A)
In the example shown in FIGS. 12-18 (A1) to (A4), it is decided to execute the change effect in the start winning effect determination process (see FIGS. 12-6 and 12-7) (step S07TM1020). , The change pattern 303 is determined (step S07TM1050), the special background effect is determined to be executed (step S07TM4010), and the background image display pattern of the special background effect is determined to be the background image display pattern A (step S07TM4040). ).

First, as shown in FIG. 12-18 (A1), when the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , The variable display of the decorative symbol is executed, and the variable display of the small symbol is executed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Further, the active display area 07TM013 displays the active display 07TM003 in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the hold display area 07TM011 displays two hold displays 07TM001 in the normal mode. .. At this time, when the first reserved storage number is 2 and the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, a new start prize is generated. 1 It is assumed that the number of reserved memories is 3.

As shown in FIG. 12-18 (A1), the effect control CPU 120 performs a change effect (hold change effect) as a look-ahead advance notice effect based on receiving a command indicating that the first hold storage number has increased. This is executed, and the hold display 07TM001B of a special mode is newly displayed in the hold display area 07TM011.

Further, in this example, in the start winning effect determination process (see FIGS. 12-6 and 12-7) accompanying the start winning generated at this time, the fourth look-ahead counter is set and the first reserved storage number is 3. Based on the above, 3 is set as the value of the fourth look-ahead counter.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 12-18 (A1), the effect control CPU 120 is special as a look-ahead notice effect based on the fact that the background image display pattern of the special background effect is determined to be the background image display pattern A. The background effect is executed, and at the timing of the start winning, the control for switching the background image of the decorative pattern from the normal background image to the special background image 07TM400 is executed, and the special background image 07TM400 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-18 (A2), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is set in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , The variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 07TM013 to display the active display 07TM003 in the normal mode and is displayed in the hold display area 07TM011 as the first reserved storage number becomes 2. The hold display 07TM001B and the hold display 07TM001 in the normal mode are shifted one by one to the active display area 07TM013 side. Further, 2 is set as the value of the fourth look-ahead counter based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 2.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 12-18 (A2), the effect control CPU 120 determines the background image display pattern of the special background effect as the background image display pattern A, and 2 is set as the value of the fourth look-ahead counter. Based on the setting, the special background effect is continuously executed as the look-ahead notice effect, and the special background image 07TM400 is continuously displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-18 (A3), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is set in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , The variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 07TM013 to display the active display 07TM003 in the normal mode and is displayed in the hold display area 07TM011 as the first reserved storage number becomes 1. The hold display 07TM001B of is shifted by one to the active display area 07TM013 side. Further, 1 is set as the value of the fourth look-ahead counter based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 1.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 12-18 (A3), the effect control CPU 120 determines the background image display pattern of the special background effect as the background image display pattern A, and 1 is set as the value of the fourth look-ahead counter. Based on the setting, the special background effect is continuously executed as the look-ahead notice effect, and the special background image 07TM400 is continuously displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-18 (A4), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol that is the object of advance notice, the effect control CPU 120 sets the symbol display area of the image display device 5. In 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, and in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the variation display of the small symbol is started.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 executes a change effect (active change effect) as a notice effect during fluctuation as the first reserved storage number becomes 0, and the active display area 07TM013 has a special mode of active display 07TM003B. Is displayed, and the hold display 07TM001B of the special mode displayed in the hold display area 07TM011 is deleted. Further, 0 is set as the value of the fourth look-ahead counter based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 0.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 12-18 (A4), the effect control CPU 120 determines the background image display pattern of the special background effect as the background image display pattern A, and 0 is set as the value of the fourth look-ahead counter. Based on the fact that it is set, the special background effect is continuously executed as the notice effect during the change, and the special background image 07TM400 is continuously displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern.

(Background image display pattern B)
In the examples shown in FIGS. 12-18 (B1) to (B4), it is decided to execute the change effect in the start winning effect determination process (see FIGS. 12-6 and 12-7) accompanying the start winning. (Step S07TM1020), the change pattern 303 is determined (step S07TM1050), the special background effect is determined to be executed (step S07TM4010), and the background image display pattern of the special background effect is determined to be the background image display pattern B. (Step S07TM4140).

First, as shown in FIG. 12-18 (B1), when the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , The variable display of the decorative symbol is executed, and the variable display of the small symbol is executed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Further, the active display area 07TM013 displays the active display 07TM003 in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the hold display area 07TM011 displays two hold displays 07TM001 in the normal mode. .. At this time, when the first reserved storage number is 2 and the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, a new start prize is generated. 1 It is assumed that the number of reserved memories is 3.

As shown in FIG. 12-18 (B1), the effect control CPU 120 performs a change effect (hold change effect) as a look-ahead advance notice effect based on receiving a command indicating that the first hold storage number has increased. This is executed, and the hold display 07TM001B of a special mode is newly displayed in the hold display area 07TM011.

Further, in this example, in the start winning effect determination process (see FIGS. 12-6 and 12-7) accompanying the start winning generated at this time, the fourth look-ahead counter is set and the first reserved storage number is 3. Based on the above, 3 is set as the value of the fourth look-ahead counter.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 12-18 (B1), the effect control CPU 120 is special as a look-ahead notice effect based on the fact that the background image display pattern of the special background effect is determined to be the background image display pattern B. The normal background image is continuously displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern without executing the background effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-18 (B2), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is set in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , The variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 07TM013 to display the active display 07TM003 in the normal mode and is displayed in the hold display area 07TM011 as the first reserved storage number becomes 2. The hold display 07TM001B and the hold display 07TM001 in the normal mode are shifted one by one to the active display area 07TM013 side. Further, 2 is set as the value of the fourth look-ahead counter based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 2.

As shown in FIG. 12-18 (B2), the effect control CPU 120 determines the background image display pattern of the special background effect as the background image display pattern B, and 2 is set as the value of the fourth look-ahead counter. Based on the above, the special background effect is not executed as the look-ahead notice effect, and the normal background image is continuously displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-18 (B3), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is set in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , The variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 07TM013 to display the active display 07TM003 in the normal mode and is displayed in the hold display area 07TM011 as the first reserved storage number becomes 1. The hold display 07TM001B of is shifted by one to the active display area 07TM013 side. Further, 1 is set as the value of the fourth look-ahead counter based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 1.

As shown in FIG. 12-18 (B3), the effect control CPU 120 determines the background image display pattern B as the background image display pattern for the special background effect, and 1 is set as the value of the fourth look-ahead counter. Based on the above, the special background effect is not executed as the look-ahead notice effect, and the normal background image is continuously displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-18 (B4), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol that is the object of advance notice, the effect control CPU 120 sets the symbol display area of the image display device 5. In 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, and in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the variation display of the small symbol is started.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 executes a change effect (active change effect) as a notice effect during fluctuation as the first reserved storage number becomes 0, and the active display area 07TM013 has a special mode of active display 07TM003B. Is displayed, and the hold display 07TM001B of the special mode displayed in the hold display area 07TM011 is deleted. Further, 0 is set as the value of the fourth look-ahead counter based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 0.

As shown in FIG. 12-18 (B4), the effect control CPU 120 determines the background image display pattern B as the background image display pattern for the special background effect, and 0 is set as the value of the fourth look-ahead counter. Based on the above, a special background effect is executed as a notice effect during fluctuation, and a special background image 07TM400 is displayed as a background image of a decorative pattern.

In this way, when the background image display pattern of the special background effect is the background image display pattern A, the start prize is corresponded to after the start prize from the timing of the start prize based on the determination result at the time of the start prize. The special background effect as the look-ahead notice effect is executed until the timing when the variable display ends (including the symbol confirmation stop period), which is executed before the variable display, and the special background image 07TM400 is displayed as the background image of the decorative symbol. Then, at the timing when the variable display corresponding to the start prize (variation display which is the target of the special background effect) is started after the start prize, the special background effect as the notice effect during the change is executed, and the background image of the decorative pattern is used. The special background image 07TM400 is continuously displayed.

On the other hand, when the background image display pattern of the special background effect is the background image display pattern B, the variable display corresponding to the start prize after the start prize is based on the judgment result at the time of the start prize (at the target of the special background effect). At the timing when a certain variation display) is started, a special background effect is executed as a notice effect during fluctuation, and a special background image 07TM400 is displayed as a background image of a decorative pattern. That is, when the background image display pattern B is determined, the special background effect is not executed unlike the case where the background image display pattern A is determined.

(Production determination process at the start of variable display)
When starting the variation display of the special symbol, the CPU 103 includes a display result specification command for specifying the display result, a variation pattern specification command for specifying the variation pattern, and a hold storage number subtraction specification command (first hold storage number subtraction designation). The command or the second hold storage number subtraction designation command) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

The effect control CPU 120 is a hold storage number subtraction designation command (first hold) that specifies that the hold storage number has been subtracted when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is started. Storage number subtraction specification command or second hold storage number subtraction specification command), display result specification command to specify the display result (big hit or miss, big hit type when it becomes a big hit), fluctuation time of special symbol and production content ( Based on receiving a set of commands called a variation pattern specification command that specifies (reach, pseudo-ream, etc.) from the game control microcomputer 100, the variation display of the special symbol is executed, and the special symbol is executed. It is possible to specify the fluctuation time and the content of the production (reach, pseudo-ream, etc.).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 receives a special symbol (first special symbol) from the game control microcomputer 100 when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the display result is confirmed. It is possible to identify that the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol) is completed and the display result is derived.

FIG. 12-19 is a flowchart showing an effect determination process executed at the start of fluctuation. The effect control CPU 120 executes the effect change start effect determination process shown in FIG. 12-19 in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-mentioned one set of commands accompanying the start of the variation display of the special symbol, the display result designation is the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol. An effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) for execution based on a command and a variation pattern specification command is set, and a decorative pattern based on the specified variation pattern is set. The effect to be executed (and the effect not to be executed) during the variation display is determined by the effect determination process at the start of the variation shown in FIG. 12-19.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern (variation pattern of the variation display to be executed from now on) specified by the variation pattern designation command is "normal reach" or "super reach" (step S07TM5000). .. If the fluctuation pattern is neither "normal reach" nor "super reach" (NO in step S07TM5000), the process ends as it is.

When the fluctuation pattern is either "normal reach" or "super reach" (YES in step S07TM5000), the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect restriction flag (step S07TM5010) and ends the process as it is.

As shown in FIGS. 12-6 and 12-7, during the period when the effect restriction flag is set, even if a new start winning is generated, it is determined as YES in step S07TM2030 described above, and the operation unit vibrates. Since the vibration pattern of the effect is the vibration pattern B, the operation unit vibration effect is not executed at the time of the new start prize, and the stick controller 31A remains in the non-special mode (non-vibration mode), and the new start prize is awarded. Even in the fluctuation display executed before the corresponding fluctuation display (variation display before the target fluctuation), the operation unit vibration effect is not executed, and the stick controller 31A remains in the non-special mode (non-vibration mode). Further, when YES is determined in step S07TM3040 described above and the timer display pattern of the timer effect becomes the timer display pattern B, the timer standby effect is not executed at the time of the new start winning, and the standby image 07TM300a is hidden. Even in the variation display executed before the variation display corresponding to the new start prize (variation display before the target variation), the timer standby effect is not executed and the standby image 07TM300a remains hidden. Further, if YES is determined in step S07TM4030 described above, the background image display pattern of the special background effect becomes the background image display pattern B, so that the special background effect is not executed at the time of the new start winning and the background image is the normal background. Even if the image remains and the variation display (variation display before the target variation) is executed before the variation display corresponding to the new start prize, the special background effect is not executed and the background image remains the normal background image. Is. The effect restriction flag is cleared when the variation display (variation display of the variation pattern accompanied by normal reach or super reach) in which the effect restriction flag is set ends.

(Example of production when the production restriction flag is not set)
Next, the effect restriction flag is not set, and the change effect is executed for the hold display corresponding to the variable display that is the judgment target at the start winning, and the operation unit vibration effect and the timer are executed by the judgment at the start winning. An example of the effect when it is decided to perform the effect and the special background effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-20 and 12-21.

FIG. 12-20 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the change effect, the operation unit vibration effect, the timer effect, and the special background effect, and FIG. 12-21 shows the change effect, the operation unit vibration effect, It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect image related to a timer effect and a special background effect.

In this example, in the effect determination process at the start of variation, the effect control CPU 120 is determined to be NO in step S07TM5000 based on the fact that the variation pattern of the variation display being executed is "non-reach out". It is assumed that it is decided not to set the production restriction flag.

Further, in this example, in the effect determination process at the time of starting winning, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the change effect in step S07TM1020, and determines that the change pattern is the change pattern 310 in step S07TM1050. It is decided that the operation unit vibration effect is executed in S07TM2010, the vibration pattern is determined to be the vibration pattern A in step S07TM2040, the timer effect is determined to be executed in step S07TM3020, and the timer display pattern is set in step S07TM3050. It is assumed that the timer display pattern A is determined, the special background effect is determined to be executed in step S07TM4010, and the background image pattern is determined to be the background image pattern A in step S07TM4040.

First, as shown in FIG. 12-21 (1), when the CUP 103 starts the variation display of the first special symbol (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 12-20), the effect control CPU 120 receives the variation pattern designation command. Based on the designated variation pattern, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5 are small. Start the variable display of the symbol. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 07TM003 in the normal mode corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed in the active display area 07TM013 of the image display device 5, and the first reserved storage number is 2. Correspondingly, two hold displays 07TM001 in the normal mode are displayed in the hold display area 07TM011 of the image display device 5. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 does not set the effect limit flag.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-21 (2), in the state where the first reserved storage number is 2, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Occasionally, it is assumed that a new start prize is generated and the first reserved memory number is 3 (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 12-20). In the start winning effect determination process accompanying the start winning generated at this time, the change prohibition flag is set, and 3 is set as the value of the first look-ahead counter based on the first reserved storage number being 3. Based on the fact that the change pattern of the change effect is determined to be the change pattern 310, the effect control CPU 120 executes the change effect (hold change effect) as the look-ahead advance notice effect, and the hold display area 07TM011 has a red mode of hold display. 07TM001A is newly displayed.

Further, in the start winning effect determination process accompanying the start winning generated at this time, the operation unit vibration flag is set, and 3 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter based on the fact that the first hold storage number is 3. set. The effect control CPU 120 determines the vibration pattern of the operation unit vibration effect to be the vibration pattern A, and based on the value of the second look-ahead counter being 3, executes the operation unit vibration effect as the look-ahead advance notice effect. The mode of the stick controller 31A is a special mode (vibration mode).

Further, in the start winning effect determination process accompanying the start winning generated at this time, the timer flag is set, and 3 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter based on the first reserved storage number being 3. .. The effect control CPU 120 determines the timer display pattern of the timer effect to be the timer display pattern A, and executes the timer standby effect which is the look-ahead notice effect based on the value of the third look-ahead counter being 3. The standby image 07TM300a (displaying the characters "preparing") is displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5.

In addition, a special background flag is set in the start winning effect determination process accompanying the start winning that occurs at this time, and 3 is set as the value of the fourth look-ahead counter based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 3. To do. The effect control CPU 120 determines the background image display pattern of the special background effect as the background image display pattern A, and executes the special background effect as the look-ahead advance notice effect based on the value of the fourth look-ahead counter being 3. However, the special background image 07TM400 is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-21 (3), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 12-20), the effect control CPU 120 is the image display device. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of 5, the combination of decorative symbols (“567” in this example) is fixedly stopped, and in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the small symbols are displayed. The combination (in this example, "567") is fixedly stopped. That is, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped.

At this time, during the symbol determination stop period, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the operation unit vibration effect, and the mode of the stick controller 31A is a non-special mode (non-vibration mode). On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the timer standby effect based on the fact that the timer display pattern of the timer effect is determined to be the timer display pattern A, and the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the timer standby effect in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. The standby image 07TM300a (displaying the characters "preparing") is continuously displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the special background effect based on the fact that the background image display pattern of the special background effect is determined to be the background image display pattern A, and the special background is used as the background image of the decorative pattern. Image 07TM400 is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-21 (4), when the CPU 103 starts the variation display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. The variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. (Timing of T4 shown in FIG. 12-20).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 07TM013 to display the active display 07TM003 in the normal mode and the red mode displayed in the hold display area 07TM011 as the first reserved storage number becomes 2. The hold display 07TM001A and the hold display 07TM001 in the normal mode are shifted one by one to the active display area 07TM013 side. Further, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 2, 2 is set as the value of the first look-ahead counter, the second look-ahead counter, the third look-ahead counter, and the fourth look-ahead counter.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 determines the vibration pattern A as the vibration pattern of the operation unit vibration effect, and based on the fact that 2 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter, the operation unit as the look-ahead notice effect. The vibration effect is executed, and the mode of the stick controller 31A is set as a special mode (vibration mode).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines the timer display pattern of the timer effect as the timer display pattern A, and based on the fact that 2 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter, the timer standby which is the look-ahead notice effect. The effect is continuously executed, and the standby image 07TM300a (displaying the characters "preparing") is continuously displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines the background image display pattern of the special background effect as the background image display pattern A, and based on the fact that 2 is set as the value of the fourth look-ahead counter, as a look-ahead notice effect. The special background effect is continuously executed, and the special background image 07TM400 is continuously displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-21 (5), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T5 shown in FIG. 12-20), the effect control CPU 120 is the image display device. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of 5, the combination of decorative symbols (“234” in this example) is fixedly stopped, and in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the small symbols are displayed. The combination (in this example, "234") is fixedly stopped. That is, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped.

At this time, during the symbol determination stop period, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the operation unit vibration effect, and the mode of the stick controller 31A is a non-special mode (non-vibration mode). On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the timer standby effect based on the fact that the timer display pattern of the timer effect is determined to be the timer display pattern A, and the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the timer standby effect in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. The standby image 07TM300a (displaying the characters "preparing") is continuously displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the special background effect based on the fact that the background image display pattern of the special background effect is determined to be the background image display pattern A, and the special background is used as the background image of the decorative pattern. Image 07TM400 is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-21 (6), when the CPU 103 starts the variation display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. The variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. (Timing of T6 shown in FIG. 12-20).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 07TM013 to display the active display 07TM003 in the normal mode and the red mode displayed in the hold display area 07TM011 as the first reserved storage number becomes 1. The hold display 07TM001A is shifted by one to the active display area 07TM013 side, and the hold display 07TM001 in the normal mode displayed in the hold display area 07TM011 is erased. Further, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 1, 1 is set as the value of the first look-ahead counter, the second look-ahead counter, the third look-ahead counter, and the fourth look-ahead counter.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 determines the vibration pattern of the operation unit vibration effect to be the vibration pattern A, and based on the fact that 1 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter, the operation unit as the look-ahead notice effect. The vibration effect is executed, and the mode of the stick controller 31A is set as a special mode (vibration mode).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines the timer display pattern of the timer effect to the timer display pattern A, and based on the fact that 1 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter, the timer standby which is the look-ahead notice effect. The effect is continuously executed, and the standby image 07TM300a (displaying the characters "preparing") is continuously displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines the background image display pattern of the special background effect as the background image display pattern A, and based on the fact that 1 is set as the value of the fourth look-ahead counter, as a look-ahead notice effect. The special background effect is continuously executed, and the special background image 07TM400 is continuously displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-21 (7), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T7 shown in FIG. 12-20), the effect control CPU 120 is the image display device. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of 5, the combination of decorative symbols (“345” in this example) is fixedly stopped, and in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the small symbols are displayed. The combination (in this example, "345") is fixedly stopped. That is, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped.

At this time, during the symbol determination stop period, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the operation unit vibration effect, and the mode of the stick controller 31A is a non-special mode (non-vibration mode). On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the timer standby effect based on the fact that the timer display pattern of the timer effect is determined to be the timer display pattern A, and the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the timer standby effect in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. The standby image 07TM300a (displaying the characters "preparing") is continuously displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the special background effect based on the fact that the background image display pattern of the special background effect is determined to be the background image display pattern A, and the special background is used as the background image of the decorative pattern. Image 07TM400 is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-21 (8), when the CPU 103 starts the variation display (target variation display) of the first special symbol that is the target of advance notice, the effect control CPU 120 , The variation display of the decorative symbol is started in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command, and the small symbol display area 5l of the image display device 5 is started. At 5c and 5r, the variation display of the small symbol is started (timing of T8 shown in FIG. 12-20).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the change effect (active change effect) as the change notice effect as the first reserved storage number becomes 0, and the active display area 07TM013 has a red aspect. The active display 07TM003A is displayed, and the hold display 07TM001A in the red mode displayed in the hold display area 07TM011 is deleted. Further, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 0, 0 is set as the value of the first look-ahead counter, the second look-ahead counter, the third look-ahead counter, and the fourth look-ahead counter, respectively.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 determines the vibration pattern of the operation unit vibration effect to be the vibration pattern A, and operates as a variable advance notice effect based on the fact that 0 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter. The partial vibration effect is executed, and the mode of the stick controller 31A is set as a special mode (vibration mode).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines the timer display pattern of the timer effect as the timer display pattern A, and based on the fact that 0 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter, the timer that is the variable advance notice effect. The effect is executed, and the timer image 07TM300 (displaying the characters "00:59") is displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines the background image display pattern of the special background effect as the background image display pattern A, and based on the fact that 0 is set as the value of the fourth look-ahead counter, the effect during fluctuation notice effect. The special background image 07TM400 is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern.

(Example of production when the production restriction flag is set)
Next, the effect restriction flag is set, the change effect is executed for the hold display corresponding to the variable display that is the judgment target at the start winning, and the operation unit vibration effect and the timer effect are executed by the judgment at the start winning. , And an example of the effect when it is decided not to execute the special background effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-22 to 12-24.

12-22 is a time chart showing the execution timing of the effect related to the change effect, and FIGS. 12-23 and 12-24 are explanatory views showing an example of the effect image related to the change effect.

In this example, in the effect determination process at the start of the variation, the effect restriction flag is set because the variation pattern of the variation display being executed is determined to be YES in step S07TM5000 based on the fact that the variation pattern is "out of normal reach". Suppose you decide

Further, in this example, in the effect determination process at the time of starting winning, the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the change effect in step S07TM1020, decides to set the change pattern as the change pattern 303 in step S07TM1050, and steps. It is assumed that it is decided not to execute the operation unit vibration effect in S07TM2010, it is decided not to execute the timer effect in step S07TM3020, and it is decided not to execute the special background effect in step S07TM4010.

First, as shown in FIG. 12-23 (1), when the CUP 103 starts the variation display of the first special symbol (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 12-22), the effect control CPU 120 receives the variation pattern designation command. Based on the designated variation pattern, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5 are small. Start the variable display of the symbol. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 07TM003 in the normal mode corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed in the active display area 07TM013 of the image display device 5, and the first reserved storage number is 2. Correspondingly, two hold displays 07TM001 in the normal mode are displayed in the hold display area 07TM011 of the image display device 5. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect limit flag.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-23 (2), the effect control CPU 120 displays the symbol of the image display device 5 at the timing when the reach state in the fluctuation pattern should be established (the timing of T2 shown in FIG. 12-22). The decorative symbol of "4" is stopped and displayed in the area 5L and the symbol display area 5R to bring it into a reach state, and the characters "reach !!" are displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5. At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the variable display of the small symbol is continued. That is, the small symbol is also stopped in the small symbol display area 5l corresponding to the symbol display area 5L in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the small symbol display area 5r corresponding to the symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. It is continuously displayed in a variable manner without being displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-23 (3), it is assumed that a new start winning is generated and the first reserved storage number is 3 in the state where the first reserved storage number is 2. (FIG. 12-22). (Timing of T3 shown in). In the start winning effect determination process accompanying the start winning generated at this time, the change prohibition flag is set, and 3 is set as the value of the first look-ahead counter based on the first reserved storage number being 3. Based on the fact that the change pattern of the change effect is determined to be the change pattern 303, the effect control CPU 120 executes the change effect (hold change effect) as the look-ahead advance notice effect, and holds and displays the special mode in the hold display area 07TM011. 07TM001B is newly displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-23 (4), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 12-22), the effect control CPU 120 is the image display device. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of 5, the combination of decorative symbols (“434” in this example) is fixedly stopped, and in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the small symbols are displayed. The combination (in this example, "434") is fixedly stopped. That is, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-23 (5), when the CPU 103 starts the variation display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. The variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. (Timing of T5 shown in FIG. 12-22).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 07TM013 to display the active display 07TM003 in the normal mode and is displayed in the hold display area 07TM011 as the first reserved storage number becomes 2. The hold display 07TM001B and the hold display 07TM001 in the normal mode are shifted one by one to the active display area 07TM013 side. Further, 2 is set as the value of the first look-ahead counter based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-23 (6), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T6 shown in FIG. 12-22), the effect control CPU 120 is the image display device. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of 5, the combination of decorative symbols (“234” in this example) is fixedly stopped, and in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the small symbols are displayed. The combination (in this example, "234") is fixedly stopped. That is, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-23 (7), when the CPU 103 starts the variation display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. The variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. (Timing of T7 shown in FIG. 12-22).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 07TM013 to display the active display 07TM003 in the normal mode and is displayed in the hold display area 07TM011 as the first reserved storage number becomes 1. The hold display 07TM001B is shifted by one to the active display area 07TM013 side, and the hold display 07TM001 in the normal mode displayed in the hold display area 07TM011 is erased. Further, 1 is set as the value of the first look-ahead counter based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-23 (8), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T8 shown in FIG. 12-22), the effect control CPU 120 is the image display device. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of 5, the combination of decorative symbols (“345” in this example) is fixedly stopped, and in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the small symbols are displayed. The combination (in this example, "345") is fixedly stopped. That is, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-24 (9), when the CPU 103 starts the variation display (target variation display) of the first special symbol that is the target of advance notice, the effect control CPU 120 , The variation display of the decorative symbol is started in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command, and the small symbol display area 5l of the image display device 5 is started. At 5c and 5r, the variation display of the small symbol is started (timing of T9 shown in FIG. 12-22).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes a change effect (active change effect) as a notice effect during fluctuation as the first reserved storage number becomes 0, and has a special aspect in the active display area 07TM013. The active display 07TM003B is displayed, and the hold display 07TM001B of the special mode displayed in the hold display area 07TM011 is deleted. Further, 0 is set as the value of the first look-ahead counter based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 0.

Next, when the effect restriction flag is set, the effect when it is decided to execute the change effect operation unit vibration effect, the timer effect, and the special background effect based on the judgment at the time of starting winning. An example will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-25 to 12-27.

12-25 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the change effect, the operation unit vibration effect, the timer effect, and the special background effect, and FIGS. 12-26 and 12-27 show the change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect image related to the operation part vibration effect, the timer effect, and the special background effect.

In this example, in the effect determination process at the start of the variation, the effect restriction flag is set because the variation pattern of the variation display being executed is determined to be YES in step S07TM5000 based on the fact that the variation pattern is "out of normal reach". Suppose you decide

Further, in this example, in the start winning effect determination process, it is decided to execute the change effect in step S07TM1020, the change pattern is determined to be the change pattern 303 in step S07TM1150, and the operation unit vibration effect is determined in step S07TM2010. Is decided to be executed, the vibration pattern is set to the vibration pattern B in step S07TM2140, the timer effect is decided to be executed in step S07TM3020, and the timer display pattern is set to the timer display pattern B in step S07TM3150. It is assumed that it is decided that the special background effect is executed in step S07TM4010, and that the background image pattern is set to the background image pattern B in step S07TM4140.

First, as shown in FIG. 12-26 (1), when the CUP 103 starts the variation display of the first special symbol (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 12-25), the effect control CPU 120 receives the variation pattern designation command. Based on the designated variation pattern, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5 are small. Start the variable display of the symbol. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 07TM003 in the normal mode corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed in the active display area 07TM013 of the image display device 5, and the first reserved storage number is 2. Correspondingly, two hold displays 07TM001 in the normal mode are displayed in the hold display area 07TM011 of the image display device 5. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect limit flag.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-26 (2), the effect control CPU 120 displays the symbol of the image display device 5 at the timing when the reach state in the fluctuation pattern should be established (the timing of T2 shown in FIG. 12-25). The decorative symbol of "4" is stopped and displayed in the area 5L and the symbol display area 5R to bring it into a reach state, and the characters "reach !!" are displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5. At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the variable display of the small symbol is continued. That is, the small symbol is also stopped in the small symbol display area 5l corresponding to the symbol display area 5L in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the small symbol display area 5r corresponding to the symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. It is continuously displayed in a variable manner without being displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-26 (3), it is assumed that a new start winning is generated and the first reserved storage number is 3 in the state where the first reserved storage number is 2. (FIG. 12-25). (Timing of T3 shown in). In the start winning effect determination process accompanying the start winning generated at this time, the change prohibition flag is set, and 3 is set as the value of the first look-ahead counter based on the first reserved storage number being 3. Based on the fact that the change pattern of the change effect is determined by the change pattern 303, the effect control CPU 120 executes the change effect (hold change effect) as the look-ahead notice effect, and holds the special mode in the hold display area 07TM011. Display 07TM001B is newly displayed.

In the start winning effect determination process accompanying the start winning generated at this time, the operation unit vibration flag is set, and 3 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter based on the first reserved storage number being 3. .. The effect control CPU 120 determines the vibration pattern of the operation unit vibration effect to be the vibration pattern B, and based on the value of the second look-ahead counter being 3, execute the operation unit vibration effect as the look-ahead advance notice effect. Instead, the mode of the stick controller 31A is a non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Further, in the start winning effect determination process accompanying the start winning generated at this time, the timer flag is set, and 3 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter based on the first reserved storage number being 3. .. The effect control CPU 120 determines the timer display pattern of the timer effect to be the timer display pattern B, and based on the value of the third look-ahead counter being 3, does not execute the timer standby effect which is the look-ahead notice effect. , The standby image 07TM300a is not displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5.

In addition, a special background flag is set in the start winning effect determination process accompanying the start winning that occurs at this time, and 3 is set as the value of the fourth look-ahead counter based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 3. To do. The effect control CPU 120 determines the background image display pattern B as the background image display pattern of the special background effect, and based on the value of the fourth look-ahead counter being 3, the special background effect as the look-ahead notice effect is performed. It is not executed, the special background image 07TM400 is not displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the normal background image is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-26 (4), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 12-25), the effect control CPU 120 is the image display device. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of 5, the combination of decorative symbols (“434” in this example) is fixedly stopped, and in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the small symbols are displayed. The combination (in this example, "434") is fixedly stopped. That is, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-26 (5), when the CPU 103 starts the variation display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. The variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. (Timing of T5 shown in FIG. 12-25).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 07TM013 to display the active display 07TM003 in the normal mode and is displayed in the hold display area 07TM011 as the first reserved storage number becomes 2. The hold display 07TM001B and the hold display 07TM001 in the normal mode are shifted one by one to the active display area 07TM013 side. Further, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 2, 2 is set as the value of the first look-ahead counter, the second look-ahead counter, the third look-ahead counter, and the fourth look-ahead counter.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 determines the vibration pattern of the operation unit vibration effect to be the vibration pattern B, and based on the fact that 2 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter, the operation as the look-ahead notice effect. The partial vibration effect is not executed, and the mode of the stick controller 31A is a non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines the timer display pattern of the timer effect as the timer display pattern B, and based on the fact that 2 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter, the timer standby which is the look-ahead notice effect. The effect is not executed, and the standby image 07TM300a is not displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines the background image display pattern of the special background effect as the background image display pattern B, and based on the fact that 2 is set as the value of the fourth look-ahead counter, as a look-ahead notice effect. The special background image 07TM400 is not displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the normal background image is displayed without executing the special background effect of.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-26 (6), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T6 shown in FIG. 12-25), the effect control CPU 120 is the image display device. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of 5, the combination of decorative symbols (“234” in this example) is fixedly stopped, and in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the small symbols are displayed. The combination (in this example, "234") is fixedly stopped. That is, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-26 (7), when the CPU 103 starts the variation display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. The variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. (Timing of T7 shown in FIG. 12-25).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 07TM013 to display the active display 07TM003 in the normal mode and is displayed in the hold display area 07TM011 as the first reserved storage number becomes 1. The hold display 07TM001B is shifted by one to the active display area 07TM013 side, and the hold display 07TM001 in the normal mode displayed in the hold display area 07TM011 is erased. Further, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 1, 1 is set as the value of the first look-ahead counter, the second look-ahead counter, the third look-ahead counter, and the fourth look-ahead counter.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 determines the vibration pattern of the operation unit vibration effect to be the vibration pattern B, and based on the fact that 1 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter, the operation as the look-ahead notice effect. The partial vibration effect is not executed, and the mode of the stick controller 31A is a non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines the timer display pattern of the timer effect as the timer display pattern B, and based on the fact that 1 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter, the timer standby which is the look-ahead notice effect. The effect is not executed, and the standby image 07TM300a is not displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines the background image display pattern of the special background effect as the background image display pattern B, and based on the fact that 1 is set as the value of the fourth look-ahead counter, as a look-ahead notice effect. The special background image 07TM400 is not displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the normal background image is displayed without executing the special background effect of.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-26 (8), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T8 shown in FIG. 12-25), the effect control CPU 120 is the image display device. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of 5, the combination of decorative symbols (“345” in this example) is fixedly stopped, and in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the small symbols are displayed. The combination (in this example, "345") is fixedly stopped. That is, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-27 (9), when the CPU 103 starts the variation display (target variation display) of the first special symbol that is the target of advance notice, the effect control CPU 120 , The variation display of the decorative symbol is started in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command, and the small symbol display area 5l of the image display device 5 is started. At 5c and 5r, the variation display of the small symbol is started (timing of T9 shown in FIG. 12-25).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes a change effect (active change effect) as a notice effect during fluctuation as the first reserved storage number becomes 0, and has a special aspect in the active display area 07TM013. The active display 07TM003B is displayed, and the hold display 07TM001B of the special mode displayed in the hold display area 07TM011 is deleted. Further, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 0, 0 is set as the value of the first look-ahead counter, the second look-ahead counter, the third look-ahead counter, and the fourth look-ahead counter, respectively.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 determines the vibration pattern of the operation unit vibration effect to be the vibration pattern B, and operates as a variable advance notice effect based on the fact that 0 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter. The partial vibration effect is executed, and the mode of the stick controller 31A is set as a special mode (vibration mode).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines the timer display pattern of the timer effect as the timer display pattern B, and based on the fact that 0 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter, the timer that is the variable advance notice effect. The effect is executed, and the timer image 07TM300 (displaying the characters "00:59") is displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines the background image display pattern of the special background effect as the background image display pattern B, and based on the fact that 0 is set as the value of the fourth look-ahead counter, the effect during fluctuation notice effect. The special background image 07TM400 is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern.

In the present embodiment, when a new start prize is generated and the hold display is displayed during the execution of the variable display accompanied by the reach effect or the super reach effect, the hold display can be displayed in a special mode, but the blue mode or It is not displayed in the red mode, and the operation unit vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect is not executed. If the operation unit vibration effect as a look-ahead notice effect is executed during the reach effect or super reach effect, the operation unit vibration effect suggests the display result of the variable display currently being executed. If there is, there is a possibility that the player misunderstands and misunderstands the reliability of the advance notice effect for the variable display currently being executed. In the present embodiment, the operation unit vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect is not executed during the execution of the reach effect or the super reach effect, thereby preventing such misidentification of the player.

Further, according to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the execution frequency of the pre-reading advance notice effect from becoming excessively high, and at the same time, an effect (reach) that suggests whether or not a big hit occurs in the variable display being executed. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the production (directing, super reach production). That is, it is possible to appropriately generate the interest of the look-ahead notice effect and the change notice effect. In particular, in the present embodiment, it is not prohibited to display the hold display in a mode other than the normal mode at all, and a mode suggesting that the hold display is changed to a special mode (a red mode having a high expectation of a big hit). By allowing the display with), the player can maintain the interest in the look-ahead notice effect and suggest whether or not a big hit will occur in the variable display being executed (reach effect, super reach effect). It is also possible to draw attention to.

In the present embodiment, the image display device 5 executes an effect of changing the display mode of the hold display or the active display. Further, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of the decorative symbol, and also executes the reach effect, the super reach effect, and the like in response to the variable display of the decorative symbol. Therefore, the player usually pays attention to the information displayed on the image display device 5. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the operation unit vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect can be executed by using the stick controller 31A, which is an effect device different from the image display device 5.

Here, if the image display device 5 is executing the reach effect or the super reach effect corresponding to the variable display being executed, the variable display whose execution is suspended (the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is set). When the operation unit vibration effect using the stick controller 31A corresponding to (variation display that is not established) is executed, the player's line of sight and consciousness are changed from the image display device 5 in which the reach effect or super reach effect is performed. It will move to the stick controller 31A. As a result, the degree of attention to the reach effect and the super reach effect corresponding to the variable display during execution is reduced.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as a look-ahead notice effect corresponding to the variation display (variation display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied) whose execution is suspended during the execution of the reach effect or the super reach effect. By restricting the execution of the vibration effect of the operation unit, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of such a problem and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a super reach effect (battle effect) and an expectation degree suggestion effect during the execution of the reach effect. As shown in FIG. 11-2 and the like, the timer effect is a variation corresponding to a battle effect, which is a kind of a notice effect during fluctuation, which suggests a display result of the variation display (variation display in which the start condition is satisfied) being executed. An example of a variable notice effect that corresponds to an expectation suggestion effect, which is a kind of variable notice effect that suggests the display result of the variable display (variable display that satisfies the start condition) that is being executed. But also. The timer effect is started at the timing n seconds before the battle effect is executed (developed into super reach). In the timer effect, the timer image 07TM300 is displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. At the timing when the timer image 07TM300 is displayed, the timer image 07TM300 shows an initial value n (in this example, the numerical value of "00:59" indicating 59 seconds). Therefore, the timer image 07TM300 can be displayed in response to the execution of the battle effect before the execution of the battle effect, which is a kind of the change notice effect, and before the execution of the expectation suggestion effect, which is a kind of the change notice effect. , The timer image 07TM300 can be displayed in response to the execution of the battle effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the execution of the timer effect is determined based on the determination result of the start winning decision based on the occurrence of the winning to the starting winning opening, the area where the timer image 07TM300 is displayed is displayed. It is possible to execute the timer standby effect for displaying the standby image 07TM300a that notifies (suggests) that the timer effect is executed in advance as the look-ahead advance notice effect. The standby image 07TM300a includes the characters "preparing", and then the timer image 07TM300 is displayed in the area to notify (suggest) that the timer effect is executed.

Here, as shown in FIG. 12-6, when the effect restriction flag set at the start of the variation display in which the variation pattern is "normal reach" or "super reach" is set, the timer effect is executed. When it is determined, the timer display pattern of the timer effect is determined to be the timer display pattern B. As described above, in the timer display pattern B, the timer standby effect, which is the look-ahead advance notice effect, is not executed from the timing when the start winning is generated until the variable display, which is the object of advance notice, is started, and the image display device 5 The standby image 07TM300a is not displayed in the lower right area of the screen. If the timer standby effect, which is a look-ahead notice effect, is executed during the execution of the reach effect or the super reach effect, the timer standby effect suggests the display result of the variable display currently being executed. There is a risk that the player may misunderstand and misunderstand the reliability of the advance notice effect for the variable display currently being executed. In the present embodiment, the timer standby effect, which is a look-ahead advance notice effect, is not executed during the execution of the reach effect or the super reach effect, thereby preventing such misidentification of the player.

Further, according to such a configuration, the execution frequency of the look-ahead notice effect becomes excessively high because the execution of the timer standby effect, which is the look-ahead notice effect, is restricted during the execution of the reach effect. It is possible to suppress and draw the player's attention to the effect corresponding to the variable display being executed. That is, it is possible to appropriately generate the interest of the look-ahead notice effect and the change notice effect. In particular, in the present embodiment, it is not prohibited to display the hold display in a mode other than the normal mode at all, and a mode suggesting that the hold display is changed to a special mode (a red mode having a high expectation of a big hit). By allowing the display with), the player can maintain the interest in the look-ahead notice effect and suggest whether or not a big hit will occur in the variable display being executed (reach effect, super reach effect). It is also possible to draw attention to.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the special background effect can be executed based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The special background effect is a look-ahead advance notice effect that displays a special background image 07TM400 as a background image of a decorative pattern. Here, as shown in FIG. 12-6, when the effect restriction flag set at the start of the variation display in which the variation pattern is "normal reach" or "super reach" is set, the special background effect is executed. When is determined to be, the background image display pattern of the special background effect is determined to be the background image display pattern B. As described above, in the background image display pattern B, the special background effect which is the look-ahead advance notice effect is not executed from the timing when the start winning prize occurs until the variable display which is the object of the advance notice is started, and the background of the decorative pattern The special background image 07TM400 is not displayed as an image, and the normal background image is continuously displayed. If a special background effect as a look-ahead notice effect is executed during the execution of the reach effect or the super reach effect, the special background effect suggests the display result of the variable display currently being executed. There is a risk that the player may misunderstand and misunderstand the reliability of the advance notice effect for the variable display currently being executed. In the present embodiment, such a misidentification of the player is prevented by not executing the special background effect as the look-ahead advance notice effect during the execution of the reach effect or the super reach effect.

Further, according to such a configuration, the execution frequency of the look-ahead notice effect becomes excessively high because the execution of the special background effect as the look-ahead notice effect is restricted during the execution of the reach effect. It is possible to suppress and draw the player's attention to the effect corresponding to the variable display being executed. That is, it is possible to appropriately generate the interest of the look-ahead notice effect and the change notice effect. In particular, in the present embodiment, it is not prohibited to display the hold display in a mode other than the normal mode at all, and a mode suggesting that the hold display is changed to a special mode (a red mode having a high expectation of a big hit). By allowing the display with), the player can maintain the interest in the look-ahead notice effect and suggest whether or not a big hit will occur in the variable display being executed (reach effect, super reach effect). It is also possible to draw attention to.

In the change pattern determination table B shown in FIGS. 12-11 and 12-12, when it is determined that the final display mode of the active display is the red mode, the hold display to be notified at the start winning is set in a special mode. Change patterns (change pattern 103, change pattern 106, change pattern 203, change pattern 206, change pattern 303, change pattern) that are displayed and do not change the mode of hold display from the special mode until the timing after the active shift including the active shift. Judgment values are assigned to 307, change pattern 403, and change pattern 407).

Therefore, a start prize occurs when the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach" or "super reach" is executed, and the hold display corresponding to the start prize (hold display that is the subject of the notice) is a special aspect. When is displayed, the mode of the active display that is the subject of the notice may change from the special mode to the red mode at a timing after the active shift including the active shift of the hold display.

According to such a configuration, even if the display result of the variable display accompanied by the reach effect or the super reach effect is "off", the player can display one of the hold displays in a special mode. As a result, after the hold display is shifted to the active display area (after becoming the active display), it can be expected that the display mode of the active display changes from the special mode to the red mode. It is possible to reduce the disappointment that did not become a big hit even though the super reach production was executed.

In the present embodiment, as shown in the change pattern determination table B, when the variable display accompanied by the reach effect or the super reach effect is executed at the time of the start winning, the hold display corresponding to the start winning is displayed (notice target). When the hold display) is displayed in a special mode, the mode of the active display that is the subject of the notice changes from the special mode to the red mode at a timing after the active shift including the active shift of the hold display. Here is an example of what you can do.

However, not limited to such a form, when a variable display accompanied by a reach effect or a super reach effect is executed at the time of starting prize, the hold display corresponding to the start prize (hold display subject to advance notice) is special. When displayed in the mode, the hold display to be announced may change from the special mode to the red mode at the timing of the hold shift. For example, when a variable display accompanied by a reach effect or a super reach effect is executed at the time of starting a prize, and a hold display corresponding to the start prize (hold display subject to advance notice) is displayed in a special mode, At the timing of the first hold shift, the hold display to be announced may change from the special mode to the red mode.

That is, during the period of the variable display accompanied by the reach effect and the super reach effect that were executed at the time of the start prize, the hold display corresponding to the start prize is not displayed in the red mode, but the reach effect and the super reach are not displayed. After the end of the variable display accompanied by the effect, the hold display corresponding to the start winning may change to a red mode. With such a configuration, even if the display result of the variable display accompanied by the reach effect or the super reach effect is "off", the player can display one of the hold displays in a special mode. By doing so, it can be expected that the display mode changes from the special mode to the red mode, so that it is possible to reduce the disappointment that the reach effect and the super reach effect were not a big hit even though the effect was executed. In addition, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to the restriction on the change of the hold display even after the end of the variable display, which is a factor that limits the look-ahead notice effect.

In addition, unlike the present embodiment, each time the hold display is shifted, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the hold display is changed, and the display mode after the change when the display mode of the hold display is changed. It may be a production determination method for executing a lottery process for the purpose. Then, when such an effect determination method is adopted, when a variable display accompanied by a reach effect or a super reach effect is executed at the time of the start prize, the hold display corresponding to the start prize (hold display subject to advance notice). ) Is displayed in a special mode, the display mode of the hold display may not be changed from the special mode at least at the stage of the hold display. As a result, it is not necessary to execute the lottery process for changing the display mode of the hold display from the special mode to another mode for each hold shift, and the control burden for determining the effect can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 12-6, when the effect limiting flag set at the start of the variation display in which the variation pattern is "normal reach" or "super reach" is set, it is decided to execute the operation unit vibration effect. When this is done, the vibration pattern of the operation unit vibration effect is determined to be the vibration pattern B. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 12-14 (B1) to (B4), the operation unit vibration effect is not executed from the timing when the start winning prize occurs until the variable display which is the target of the notice is started. The operation unit vibration effect is executed at the timing when the fluctuation display that is the target of the notice is started.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-6, when the effect restriction flag set at the start of the variation display in which the variation pattern is "normal reach" or "super reach" is set, it is decided to execute the timer effect. When this is done, the timer display pattern of the timer effect is determined to be the timer display pattern B. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 12-16 (B1) to (B4), the timer standby effect is not executed from the timing when the start winning prize occurs until the variable display which is the target of the notice is started, and the notice is given. The timer effect is executed at the timing when the target variable display is started.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-6, when the effect restriction flag set at the start of the variation display in which the variation pattern is "normal reach" or "super reach" is set, the special background effect is executed. When it is determined, the background image display pattern of the special background effect is determined to be the background image display pattern B. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 12-18 (B1) to (B4), the special background effect is not executed from the timing when the start winning prize occurs until the variable display which is the target of the notice is started. A special background effect is executed at the timing when the variable display that is the target of the notice is started.

That is, as a result of the start winning during the period when the reach effect or the super reach effect is being executed, the pre-reading notice effect corresponding to the start prize is executed (the hold display is displayed in the blue mode or the red mode, and the operation unit vibrations. Even if the execution of the effect, the execution of the timer standby effect, and the execution of the special background effect are restricted, the variable display based on the subsequent execution of the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize (active display) Can be displayed in blue or red mode, the operation unit vibration effect can be executed, the timer effect can be executed, and the special background effect can be executed).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the execution frequency of the operation unit vibration effect and the special background effect from being excessively reduced due to the limitation of the pre-reading advance notice effect, and even when the execution of the timer standby effect is restricted. The timer effect can be made executable. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disappointment when the display result is "off" even though the reach effect or the super reach effect is executed.

In the present embodiment, when the variation display accompanied by the reach effect or the super reach effect is executed at the time of the start winning, the operation unit vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect for the variation display corresponding to the start prize is performed. In both the special background effect and the timer standby effect, which is a look-ahead notice effect for the variable display corresponding to the start prize, the variable display (target variation display) corresponding to the start prize is executed from the start prize. An example is shown in which it is not executed until. Not limited to such a form, when a variable display accompanied by a reach effect or a super reach effect is executed at the time of starting a prize, an operation unit vibration effect as a look-ahead notice effect for the variable display corresponding to the start winning is performed. , Special background effect, and timer standby effect, which is a look-ahead notice effect for the variable display corresponding to the start prize, is after the end of the variable display accompanied by the reach effect and super reach effect, and corresponds to the start prize. It may be executed in the variation display (for example, the variation display immediately after the variation display accompanied by the reach effect or the super reach effect) before the variation display (the variation display of the target).

In addition, unlike the present embodiment, each time the hold display is shifted (every time the hold memory is digested and the change display is executed), the look-ahead notice effect is applied to the change display corresponding to the hold display after the shift. It may be an effect determination method that executes a lottery process for determining whether or not to execute (operation unit vibration effect, timer standby effect, special background effect). Then, when such an effect determination method is adopted, if a variable display accompanied by a reach effect or a super reach effect is executed at the time of the start winning, the variable display corresponding to the start winning (holding subject to advance notice). By not executing the lottery process itself for deciding whether or not to execute each look-ahead advance notice effect until the display) is executed, the control burden for determining the effect can be reduced.

(Other variants)
(1) In the above embodiment, an example of executing an operation unit vibration effect that vibrates the stick controller 31A is shown as a pre-reading advance notice effect and a variable advance notice effect using an effect device different from the image display device 5. Not limited to such a form, a look-ahead notice effect and a variable advance notice effect using another effect device (for example, a push button or a light emitting device) may be executed.

For example, a special light emitting effect using the game effect lamp 9 may be executed as a look-ahead advance notice effect and a variable advance notice effect. For example, the special light emitting effect may be an effect of causing the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in the same display color as the display color of the hold display or the active display, and when the hold display or the active display is displayed in a special mode, the game effect. The lamp 9 may be made to emit white light, and the game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in red when the hold display or the active display is displayed in the red mode. Further, as the pre-reading advance notice effect and the variable advance notice effect, a special sound effect effect using the speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting the sound effect and the like may be executed. For example, the special sound effect effect is an effect that outputs a special sound effect when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is super reach, or when the super reach effect (battle effect) is developed (when the expectation suggestion effect is executed). It may be.

(2) In the above embodiment, the changing notice effect corresponding to the battle effect and the expectation suggestion effect, which are the variable displays that suggest the display result of the variable display (variable display in which the start condition is satisfied) being executed. As an example, a timer effect accompanied by a numerical value subtraction operation (countdown operation) shown in the timer image is shown, but it is not limited to such a form and corresponds to a battle effect and an expectation suggestion effect. As a notice effect during the fluctuation, an effect of performing another operation may be executed.

For example, as a variable notice effect corresponding to a battle effect or an expectation suggestion effect, a present effect accompanied by an operation of opening a box (present box) decorated for a present may be executed. In the present production, after the image of the present box is displayed, the present box is opened and the image of the present (hereinafter referred to as "present image"), which is the contents of the present box, is displayed. For example, as a gift image, an image of a character according to the expectation of a big hit, an image of the character "change" corresponding to an active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display, and a "battle effect" corresponding to the super reach effect There is an image of the characters "Development".

Here, before the present effect is executed as the change notice effect, when the hold display corresponding to the change display that is the target of the present effect is displayed, the image of the present box before opening is displayed as the notice target. By displaying in the vicinity area of the hold display corresponding to the variable display (for example, directly above the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the notice target), any variable display (hold display) becomes the notice target for the player. It may be suggested (notified).

In this way, a notice suggestion effect (notifying) that a predetermined type of change notice effect (present effect) is executed (the image of the present box before opening is directly above the hold display corresponding to the target change display). If the variable display that is the target of the variable notice effect (present effect) of the predetermined type can be executed before the start of the variable display, the predetermined type of variable notice effect (present type) is judged at the time of starting winning. It is possible to execute the notice suggestion effect on condition that it is decided to execute the present effect) and the effect restriction flag is not set (the change display accompanied by the reach effect or the super reach effect is not executed at the time of starting winning). May be good. Then, the notice suggestion effect is continuously executed over a plurality of subsequent changes (the present box before opening is shifted and displayed together with the corresponding hold display), and the change that is the target of the change notice effect (present effect) of a predetermined type. In response to the start of the display (change display of the target), a predetermined type of change notice effect (present effect) is executed, the present box is opened, and the jackpot expectation of the change display (change display of the target) The present image corresponding to the degree may be displayed.

On the other hand, although it is decided to execute a predetermined type of changing notice effect (present effect) by the judgment at the time of starting prize, the effect restriction flag is set (variation display accompanied by reach effect or super reach effect at the time of starting prize). Is executed), the notice suggestion effect is not executed, and then the change display (target change display) that is the target of the predetermined type of change notice effect (present effect) is started. In response to this, a predetermined type of variable notice effect (present effect) is executed, the present box is opened, and a present image corresponding to the jackpot expectation of the variable display (target variable display) is displayed. To do.

Not limited to such an example, if it is decided to execute a predetermined type of variable advance notice effect (present effect) in the judgment at the time of starting prize, the effect restriction flag is set (starting prize). It may be possible to execute the variable notice effect regardless of whether or not the variable display accompanied by the reach effect or the super reach effect is sometimes executed). By adopting such a configuration, regardless of whether or not the variable display accompanied by the reach effect or the super reach effect is executed (whether or not the effect restriction flag is set) at the time of starting winning, the notice suggestion effect and It is possible to share the production control with the notification effect (present effect) during the change of a predetermined type.

(3) In the above embodiment, as an effect of changing the background image, an example of an effect of switching the background image of the decorative pattern from the normal background image to the special background image 07TM400 is shown, but the effect is not limited to such a form and is already displayed. An effect acting on the background image may be executed. For example, a specific display effect in which a specific display is superimposed and displayed on a part of the displayed background image may be executed. This specific display includes characters (for example, characters of "CHANGE") for notifying that the jackpot expectation is high. Further, for example, a freeze effect may be executed in which the entire screen of the image display device 5 is in a freeze mode. In the freeze effect, the reproduction of the effect image corresponding to the variable display being executed is stopped at the timing when the freeze effect is executed, and the state in which the visibility of the effect image is reduced is a predetermined period (for example, the change of the notice target). (Period until the display starts) Continues.

(4) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the final display mode of the active display is first determined, and the mode of the hold display is determined based on the change pattern determination table A / B including the common change pattern. , The mode of the hold display may be determined by another lottery method, not limited to such a form.

For example, the mode of the hold display at the time of the start winning is determined (normal mode, special mode, blue mode, red mode), and the mode of the hold display is to be displayed for each hold shift. You may decide.

If the effect restriction flag is not set, the mode of the hold display (normal mode, special mode, blue mode, red mode) at the time of starting winning is determined, and the hold display mode is set for each hold shift. A lottery is conducted to determine whether to display in the manner of For example, when the mode of the hold display that is the subject of the notice is the normal mode and the display result is "off", the display result does not change from the normal mode to the normal mode at a rate of 70%, and 20%. The ratio changes from the normal mode to the special mode, the ratio changes from the normal mode to the blue mode at a rate of 8%, and the normal mode changes to the red mode at a rate of 2%. When the display result is "big hit", the normal mode does not change from the normal mode to the normal mode at a rate of 40%, the normal mode changes to a special mode at a rate of 30%, and the normal mode changes at a rate of 20%. It changes from a mode to a blue mode and changes from a normal mode to a red mode at a rate of 10%.

On the other hand, when the effect restriction flag is set, the mode of the hold display (normal mode, special mode) at the time of starting winning is determined, and the mode of the hold display is set in any mode for each hold shift. A lottery will be held to see if it will be displayed. For example, when the mode of the hold display that is the subject of the notice is the normal mode and the display result is "off", the display result does not change from the normal mode to the normal mode at a rate of 70%, and 30%. When the normal mode changes to the special mode at the rate of, and the display result is "big hit", the normal mode does not change from the normal mode at the rate of 40%, and the normal mode changes to the special mode at the rate of 60%. Changes to.

(5) In the above embodiment, when the effect restriction flag is set, all types of pre-reading notices of the operation unit vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect, the timer standby effect, and the special background effect as the look-ahead notice effect An example of preventing the effect from being executed has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to this form, and when the effect restriction flag is set, the operation unit vibration effect, the timer standby effect, and the pre-reading advance notice effect as the look-ahead advance notice effect Although one or two types of pre-reading notice effects are not executed, the remaining types of pre-reading notice effects may be allowed to be executed. For example, when the effect restriction flag is set, the operation unit vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect may not be executed, while the timer standby effect and the special background effect as the look-ahead notice effect may be executable.

(6) In the above embodiment, when a start prize is generated when the variable display accompanied by the reach effect or the super reach effect is executed (the period during which the effect restriction flag is set), only at the time of the start prize. Instead, a change effect of a specific mode (a change effect in which the hold display changes to a red mode) is continuously targeted until the variation display corresponding to the start prize is started. , And the operation unit vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect, the timer standby effect, and the special background effect as the look-ahead notice effect are prohibited, but the present invention is not limited to such a form. The pre-reading notice effect of one or more of the above may be enabled (execution restriction is released) before the variable display corresponding to the start winning is started.

For example, if a start prize occurs while a variable display accompanied by a reach effect or a super reach effect is being executed (a period in which the effect restriction flag is set), the variable display accompanied by the reach effect or the super reach effect is displayed. After the end (for example, the next hold shift timing), a change effect of a specific mode (change effect in which the hold display changes to a red mode) for the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize, and a look-ahead notice effect. The operation unit vibration effect, the timer standby effect, and the special background effect as the look-ahead notice effect may all be executed (execution restrictions are released). In addition, if a start prize occurs while the variable display accompanied by the reach effect or super reach effect is being executed (the period during which the effect restriction flag is set), the variable display accompanied by the reach effect or super reach effect is displayed. After the end (for example, the next hold shift timing), a change effect of a specific mode (change effect in which the hold display changes to a red mode) for the variable display corresponding to the start prize, a timer standby effect, and look-ahead While the special background effect as the advance notice effect can be executed (execution restriction is released), the operation unit vibration effect as the look-ahead advance notice effect is not continuously executed (execution restriction is maintained). Good.

(7) In the above embodiment, when it is decided to execute the effects at the start winning prize for each type of effect of the change effect, the operation unit vibration effect, the timer effect, and the special background effect, the same type of effect is produced. Flags (change prohibition flag, operation unit vibration flag, timer flag, and special background flag) are provided to limit the execution of the variable display, and it is already set at the time of the subsequent start winning. Although the execution of the type of effect corresponding to the flag is restricted, the execution of other types of effect is not restricted.

However, not limited to such a form, when it is decided to execute any type of effect, not only the effect of the type but also the effect of another type is executed for the other variable display. You may also limit things. Specifically, a flag for restricting the execution of the effect may be shared for each type of effect of the change effect, the operation unit vibration effect, the timer effect, and the special background effect. In such a configuration, if it is decided to execute any type of effect at the time of starting prize, the common flag is set, and at the time of subsequent starting winning, the common flag is set. Based on this, it will not be decided to execute all types of effects (change effect, operation unit vibration effect, timer effect, and special background effect).

(8) In the above embodiment, when the variation display accompanied by the reach effect or the super reach effect is not executed at the time of starting winning (when the effect restriction flag is not set), the operation unit vibration effect, the timer effect, and When it is decided to execute any type of special background effect, the look-ahead notice effect corresponding to the type of effect immediately at the timing of the start winning prize (operation unit vibration effect as look-ahead notice effect, timer standby) An example of executing the production and the special background production as the look-ahead notice production) has been described. Not limited to such a form, when the variable display accompanied by the reach effect or the super reach effect is not executed at the start winning (when the effect restriction flag is not set), the reach effect or the super reach effect is performed at the start winning. In any case when the accompanying fluctuation display is executed (when the effect restriction flag is set), any type of effect such as operation unit vibration effect, timer effect, or special background effect is performed at the start winning prize. When it is decided to execute, it is decided at the time of the start prize at a timing after the timing of the start prize (for example, the first hold shift timing after the variation display executed at the time of the start prize ends). The look-ahead notice effect corresponding to the type of effect (operation unit vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect, timer standby effect, and special background effect as the look-ahead notice effect) may be executed.

With such an effect configuration, the jackpot expectation level depends on the timing at which the look-ahead notice effect (operation unit vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect, timer standby effect, and special background effect as the look-ahead notice effect) is executed. May be different. For example, the later the timing at which the look-ahead notice effect is started, the higher the expectation of a big hit. For example, the jackpot expectation is higher when the look-ahead notice effect is started immediately before the variable display which is the target of the look-ahead notice effect than when the look-ahead notice effect is started at the timing of the start prize. You may do so.

By adopting such an effect configuration, a look-ahead notice effect (operation unit vibration effect as a look-ahead notice effect, timer standby effect) after the end of the variable display accompanied by the reach effect or super reach effect (after the effect restriction flag is released) , And a special background effect as a look-ahead notice effect), it is decided whether it was started by canceling the effect restriction flag, or it will be executed at that timing in advance when the start prize is won. The player cannot grasp whether or not it has been done, and in the latter case, the expectation of a big hit will increase, so that the interest of the look-ahead notice production can be greatly improved.

(9) In the above embodiment, when a start prize occurs during execution of a variable display accompanied by a reach, a look-ahead notice effect (change effect, look-ahead notice effect) for the variable display corresponding to the start prize is used. An example is shown in which the operation unit vibration effect, timer standby effect, and special background effect as a look-ahead notice effect) are restricted, but the look-ahead notice effect with high expectation is executed at the time of starting prize, not limited to such a form. If, for example, the hold display is displayed in red, or a song that suggests (notifies) the occurrence of a big hit based on the fact that it was determined to be a big hit at the time of the start winning before the start winning. Corresponds to the start prize when the light emission effect with the special light emission pattern is executed based on the fact that it is determined to be a big hit at the start prize before the start prize. The look-ahead notice effect (change effect, operation unit vibration effect as look-ahead notice effect, timer standby effect, and special background effect as look-ahead notice effect) for variable display may be restricted.

In addition, if a start prize occurs during the execution of a notice effect during fluctuation (for example, a pseudo continuous effect or a light emission effect with a special light emission pattern), which is not limited to reach and has a high expectation of a big hit, the start prize is supported. The look-ahead notice effect (change effect, operation unit vibration effect as look-ahead notice effect, timer standby effect, and special background effect as look-ahead notice effect) for the variable display may be restricted.

(10) In FIGS. 12-9 to 12-12 described above, the hold display does not change from the normal mode to the red mode without going through the special mode, and does not change from the special mode to the blue mode. As shown, not limited to such a form, the hold display may change from the normal mode to the red mode without going through the special mode, and may change from the special mode to the blue mode. Here, the hold display changes from the special mode to the blue mode (first special mode) or the red mode rather than the rate at which the hold display changes from the normal mode to the blue mode (first special mode) or the red mode (second special mode). It is assumed that the rate of change to (second special aspect) is higher. That is, the special mode may be a display mode that suggests that the hold display changes to a special mode (first special mode (blue) or second special mode (red)).

Regarding the jackpot expectation of the special aspect, the jackpot expectation may be lower than that of the normal aspect, the jackpot expectation may be the same as that of the normal aspect, and the jackpot expectation may be lower than that of the normal aspect. May be higher. For example, when the final display mode of the active display is a special mode (when the variable display ends in the special mode), the final display mode of the active display is the normal mode (variable display in the normal mode). The jackpot expectation may be the same or lower than (when is finished).

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-8, the final display mode of the active display is a special mode depending on the case where the display result is "missing" and the case where the display result is "big hit". An example is shown in which the ratios are common (10% in each case), but not limited to such a form, the case where the display result is "missing" is the case where the display result is "big hit". The ratio of the final display mode of the active display to the special mode may be higher than that of the active display, and it is more active when the display result is "big hit" than when the display result is "missing". The ratio that the final display mode of the display becomes a special mode may be increased.

(11) In the above embodiment, when it is decided to execute the change effect (when it is decided to display the hold display or the active display in a display mode different from the normal mode), the change prohibition flag is set. Until the variable display that is the target is set and the target variation display is completed, the hold display and the active display corresponding to the new start winning prize are displayed differently from the normal mode by determining YES in step S07TM1010 in FIG. 12-6. The example of not being displayed in the mode has been described, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and even if it is decided that the change effect is executed (the hold display or the active display is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode). (Even if it is decided), the hold display and the active display corresponding to the subsequent new start winning may be displayed in a special mode (however, they may not be displayed in the blue mode or the red mode).

(12) In the above embodiment, even when the pre-reading notice effect of any type (change effect, operation unit vibration effect, timer standby effect, and special background effect as pre-reading advance notice effect) is executed. , When a start-up prize occurs, the variable display corresponding to the start-up prize is targeted (target of the look-ahead notice effect), and the type is different from the type of the look-ahead notice effect being executed (the type without the flag set). An example is shown in which the look-ahead notice effect of the look-ahead notice effect) is feasible, but it is not limited to such a form, and any type (change effect, operation unit vibration effect, timer standby effect, and look-ahead advance notice effect) When a start-up prize is generated when the look-ahead notice effect of (special background effect) is executed, the look-ahead notice effect being executed is targeted at the variable display corresponding to the start-up prize (target of the look-ahead notice effect). The look-ahead notice effect of a type different from the type of (a type of look-ahead notice effect for which the flag is not set) may also be restricted. For example, the pre-reading advance notice effect itself may not be executed at all regardless of the type of the pre-reading advance notice effect being executed, and only some types of pre-reading advance notice effects corresponding to the type of the pre-reading advance notice effect being executed may be executed. It may not be executed. For example, when the pre-reading advance notice effect being executed is a special background effect executed by the image display device 5, the change effect and the timer standby effect executed by the same image display device 5 are different while being executable. The operation unit vibration effect in which the effect device (stick controller 31A) is used may not be executed.

(13) In the above embodiment, when it is decided to execute the timer effect at the start winning, the timer standby effect is always executed and the standby image 07TM300a is displayed on condition that the effect restriction flag is not set. However, the timer standby effect may not be executed (the standby image 07TM300a is not displayed) even when it is decided to execute the timer effect, not limited to such a form. It may be. Here, when the timer standby effect is executed (standby image 07TM300a is displayed), the timer effect is executed (timer image) than when the timer standby effect is not executed (standby image 07TM300a is not displayed). 07TM300 is displayed) It is assumed that the ratio is high.

(14) In the above embodiment, when it is decided to execute the timer effect at the time of starting winning, the timer standby effect is executed on condition that the effect restriction flag is not set, and the area at the lower right of the screen ( When the standby image 07TM300a is displayed in the area common to the area where the timer image 07TM300 is displayed, the standby image 07TM300a is continuously displayed over a plurality of fluctuation displays, and then the target fluctuation display is started. The timer image 07TM300 (displayed as "00:59") in the initial state is displayed in the area instead of the standby image 07TM300a, and the timer value subtraction operation is started. Not limited to such a form, when it is decided to execute the timer effect at the start winning, the initial state ("00:59") is set in the lower right area of the screen on condition that the effect restriction flag is not set. The timer image 07TM300 (displayed as "00:59") is displayed, and after the timer image 07TM300 (displayed as "00:59") in the initial state is displayed continuously over multiple fluctuation displays, the target fluctuation display starts. When this is done, the timer image 07TM300 in the initial state (displayed as "00:59") that has been continuously displayed may be updated (the timer subtraction operation is started).

On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the timer effect at the time of starting winning, the timer image 07TM300 is displayed in the lower right area of the screen as in the above embodiment when the effect restriction flag is set. The timer image 07TM300 (displayed as "00:59") in the initial state appears in the lower right area of the screen when the variable display of the target is started without the standby image 07TM300a being displayed. Then, it may be updated (the timer subtraction operation is started).

(15) [Other examples of operation unit vibration effect]
In the above embodiment, when the determination at the time of the start winning is determined to execute the operation unit vibration effect that vibrates the stick controller 31A, the timing of the start winning and the timing of the hold shift (the starting winning) An example in which the operation unit vibration effect is executed at the timing (when the fluctuation display before the fluctuation display corresponding to) is started) and the timing when the fluctuation display (target fluctuation display) corresponding to the start prize is started. However, as in the example shown in FIGS. 12-28, the operation unit vibration effect may be executed at a plurality of timings during the execution period of the variation display. Further, as an aspect of the operation unit vibration effect, a plurality of modes in which the emission color of the operation unit LED, which is a light emitting device provided in the stick controller 31A, may be different may be provided. Further, as a mode of the operation unit vibration effect, a plurality of modes having different vibration times (vibration periods) of the stick controller 31A may be provided.

FIG. 12-28 shows the execution timing of the operation unit vibration effect when the variation display is executed in the jackpot variation pattern accompanied by the super reach effect (battle effect).

Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 starts the variation display of the decorative symbol based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command and the display result specification command (at the timing of T1 shown in FIGS. 12-28). , The first vibration effect can be executed as the operation unit vibration effect. In this first vibration effect, the presence / absence of execution and the execution mode may be determined based on the determination at the start winning (starting winning effect determination process), or the determination at the start of fluctuation (effect determination process at the start of variation). ) May be used to determine the presence / absence of execution and the mode of execution.

For example, it is assumed that the jackpot expectation degree differs depending on the emission color of the operation unit LED, which is a light emitting device provided in the stick controller 31A. For example, when the emission color is white, the display result of the variable display is a big hit at a rate of 60% or more, and when the emission color is red, the display result of the variable display is a big hit at a rate of 80% or more. Therefore, when the emission color is rainbow, the display result of the variation display is assumed to be a big hit at a rate of 100%.

For example, when the emission color of the operation unit LED is white, the timing at which the variation display is started for each variation display prior to the variation display (variation display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect) shown in FIGS. 12-28. Then, the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 200 ms (ON: 200 ms, 0FF: 200 ms cycle) was executed three times, and the variation display shown in FIGS. 12-28 (the variation display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect) was started. At the timing, it is assumed that the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 1500 ms is executed once.

For example, when the emission color of the operation unit LED is red, the timing at which the variation display is started for each variation display prior to the variation display shown in FIGS. 12-28 (the variation display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect). Then, the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 1500 ms is executed once, and at the timing when the variation display (variation display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect) shown in FIG. 12-28 is started, the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 3000 ms. Suppose that is executed once.

For example, even when the emission color of the operation unit LED is a rainbow, the variation display is started for each variation display prior to the variation display (variation display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect) shown in FIGS. 12-28. At the timing, the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 1500 ms is executed once, and at the timing when the variation display (variation display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect) shown in FIG. 12-28 is started, the stick controller 31A is vibrated for 3000 ms. It is assumed that the operation is executed once.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the second vibration effect as the operation unit vibration effect at the timing of establishing the reach state in the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command (timing of T2 shown in FIGS. 12-28). is there. This second vibration effect is determined based on the determination at the start of fluctuation (effect determination process at the start of fluctuation), and the execution mode is determined. In this example, the second vibration effect is executed only when the display result is a big hit. It shall be possible.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 vibrates the stick controller 31A in accordance with the execution period of the effect accompanying the establishment of the reach state. For example, the stick controller 31A is vibrated during the reproduction period of the reach effect video reproduced at the timing when the reach state is established. The period for vibrating the stick controller 31A may be limited to a predetermined fixed period (for example, 3000 ms) in the reproduction period of the reach effect video.

The emission color of the operation unit LED in the second vibration effect is rainbow color, and the player is notified that the big hit is confirmed by executing the second vibration effect.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 is immediately before the timing of super reach development in the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command (for example, the timing at which the battle effect is started and the timing of T3 shown in FIGS. 12-28). As the operation unit vibration effect, either the third vibration effect or the strong development effect can be executed.

For example, the third vibration effect is the timing when the special symbol displayed as "development" stops in the middle display area when the reach state is established, that is, it develops into super reach (shift to the battle effect). ) Is notified (for example, the timing of T3b shown in FIGS. 12-28). In the third vibration effect, the effect control CPU 120 vibrates the stick controller 31A in accordance with the execution period (for example, the stop period of the special symbol) of the image notifying the development of super reach. For example, the emission color of the operation unit LED in the third vibration effect is white, and when the third vibration effect is executed, a big hit occurs at a rate of 50% or more.

For example, in the strong development effect, when the reach state is established, the timing at which the movable accessory moves from the evacuation position to the advance position and a predetermined development image (for example, an image of a flame that covers the entire screen) are reproduced. It is executed at the timing (for example, the timing of T3a shown in FIGS. 12-28) when the effect that makes the player expect to develop into super reach, such as the timing of the evacuation, is executed. In the strong development effect, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces the execution period of the effect (for example, the period in which the movable accessory is in the advance position or a predetermined development image) that makes the player expect the player to develop into super reach. The stick controller 31A is vibrated in accordance with the period during which the stick controller 31A is used. For example, the emission color of the operation unit LED in the strong development effect is white, and when the strong development effect is executed, a big hit occurs at a rate of 40% or more.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 is immediately before (for example, the timing of winning / losing branching in the battle effect, the timing of T4 shown in FIGS. 12-28) when the effect result of the super reach effect is notified (for example, FIG. 12). At the timing of T4a shown in −28), the fourth vibration effect can be executed as the operation unit vibration effect. In this example, the fourth vibration effect can be executed only when the display result is a big hit.

For example, in the fourth vibration effect, in the battle effect in which the ally character and the enemy character battle, the stick controller 31A performs the final attack on the enemy character at the timing (the timing immediately before the victory or defeat of the battle is decided). Vibrate. The effect control CPU 120 vibrates the stick controller 31A for a predetermined vibration period (for example, 1500 ms or more). The emission color of the operation unit LED in the 4th vibration effect is rainbow color, and the player is notified that the big hit is confirmed by executing the 4th vibration effect, that is, the ally character wins the battle. Will be done.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 is at a timing (for example, the timing of T4b shown in FIGS. 12-28) when the player recognizes that a big hit occurs when the winning effect in which the ally character wins over the enemy character is executed. As the operation unit vibration effect, a blessing vibration effect to congratulate the occurrence of a big hit is executed. In this example, the blessing vibration effect is executed only when the display result is a big hit.

For example, in the blessing vibration production, the stick controller 31A vibrates at the timing when the ally character wins the enemy character and the jackpot symbols are aligned. The effect control CPU 120 vibrates the stick controller 31A for a predetermined vibration period (for example, 3000 ms or more). The emission color of the operation unit LED in the blessing vibration effect is rainbow color, and the player can confirm that the big hit has occurred by executing the blessing vibration effect.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 suggests the type of jackpot that occurs after notifying the occurrence of a jackpot by the result of the battle effect (winning effect) (at the timing of T5 shown in FIGS. 12-28). The production can be performed. In the jackpot type suggestion effect, it is suggested whether the jackpot type is a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) or a probability variation jackpot, and the number of rounds of the jackpot (the number of times the jackpot is opened). Here, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing the probability change notification effect as the operation unit vibration effect during the execution period of the jackpot type suggestion effect (the period of T5 to T7 shown in FIGS. 12-28).

For example, in the jackpot type suggestion effect, the character has a combination of even-numbered symbols (for example, "444") that is stopped as a jackpot symbol (but not a fixed stop) and a combination of odd-numbered symbols (for example, "777"). If the combination of even-numbered symbols changes to a combination of odd-numbered symbols as a result, the stick controller 31A is performed immediately before or at the same time as the change (at the timing of T7a shown in FIGS. 12-28). Vibrates. The effect control CPU 120 vibrates the stick controller 31A for a predetermined vibration period (for example, 3000 ms or more).

Here, when the number of rounds of the probability variation jackpot that occurs is not at least the minimum number of rounds (for example, 2R) (for example, when it is either 5R or 10R), the emission color of the operation unit LED becomes white, and the probability variation jackpot that occurs occurs. When the number of rounds is the maximum number of rounds (for example, 10R), the emission color of the operation unit LED is rainbow color. In this way, even after the player is notified that the jackpot will be a jackpot, the operation unit vibration effect can be executed, and the operation unit vibration effect suggests the type of jackpot to be controlled from now on (probability variation jackpot? Whether or not it is notified), and the mode of the operation unit vibration effect (emission color of the light emitting unit) also suggests the type of jackpot to be controlled (notifies the number of rounds). .. Therefore, the player will continue to be interested in whether or not the operation unit vibration effect (probability variation notification effect) is executed and the execution mode even after the notification that the big hit will occur.

Then, when the execution period of the jackpot type suggestion effect (the period of T5 to T7 shown in FIGS. 12-28) ends, the effect control CPU 120 finally receives the symbol confirmation designation command from the CPU 103. The combination of jackpot symbols is fixedly stopped (timing of T8 shown in FIGS. 12-28).

The above-described embodiment includes the following inventions relating to means A1 to means A7, inventions relating to means B1 to means B7, and inventions relating to means C1 to means C7.

For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-188256 (FIG. 42), when a fluctuation pattern accompanied by super reach is determined by the winning determination process, a specific hold display is displayed on the hold storage display unit at that time. The normal hold display is displayed without any notice, and after the change display based on the change pattern with super reach currently being executed is completed, the special continuous until the change display based on the hold display in which the notice target data is stored is started. The game machine on which the production is executed is disclosed. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-188256 (FIG. 42), when the variation display accompanied by super reach is executed, the player does not execute the look-ahead notice effect for other variation display. Although it is possible to concentrate the consciousness of the above on the super reach, there is a risk that the pre-reading notice effect for other variable displays will not be executed, which will reduce the interest. The inventions related to means A1 to means A7, the inventions related to means B1 to means B7, and the inventions related to means C1 to means C7 shown below are made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and the execution frequency of the effect is reduced. The purpose is to suppress the decline in interest caused by doing so.

The game machine of means A1
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display and control it to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
Hold storage means that can store information related to hold storage (random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for jackpot type determination, random numbers for fluctuation pattern determination, etc. extracted at the time of starting winning) as hold storage (1st special figure hold storage unit, 2nd special) Figure hold storage) and
A determination means for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state (CPU 103 that executes the special symbol normal processing in step S110) and
Before the determination by the determination means, the determination means (starting prize determination process (step S101)) for determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled, and
It is equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of controlling the effect.
The effect control means
A specific display (hold display) corresponding to the variable display can be displayed on the display means (image display device 5).
Based on the determination of the determination means, the specific display is divided into a normal mode (white circle display), a notice mode suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled (red circle display), and the notice mode. It is possible to display in any of the special modes (white triangle display) suggesting that it changes.
It is possible to execute a notification effect (reach effect) that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
Based on the determination of the determination means, a specific effect (operation unit vibration effect) can be executed by an effect means (stick controller 31A) different from the display means.
When the specific display (hold display, active display) is displayed in the special mode (white triangle display) and then the specific display changes to the notice mode (red circle display), the specific display is said. The rate of being controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) is higher than when the notice mode (red circle display) does not change.
When the specific effect (operation unit vibration effect) is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) is higher than when the specific effect (operation unit vibration effect) is not executed.
The effect control means
When displaying the specific display (hold display) corresponding to the variable display of the hold memory generated during the execution period of the notification effect (reach effect), the specific display (hold display) is changed to the advance notice mode (red circle display). It is possible to display the specific display (hold display) in the special mode (white triangle display) while restricting the display with.
The execution of the specific effect based on the determination of the determination means for the hold memory generated during the execution period of the notification effect is restricted (during the execution of the reach effect, a new start prize is generated and the hold display is displayed. At that time, the execution of the operation unit vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect is restricted, so that the mode of the stick controller 31A is restricted to a special mode (vibration mode)).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the specific display can be displayed in a special mode during the execution period of the notification effect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the restriction on the execution of the specific effect.

The game machine of means A2
It is a game machine of means A1 and
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
In the variable display after the variable display in which the notification effect (reach effect, super reach effect) is executed, the variable display of the hold memory generated during the execution period of the notification effect (reach effect, super reach effect) is supported. A gaming machine characterized in that the specific display (hold display, active display) of the special mode (white triangle display) can be changed to the notice mode (red circle display).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to expect the player to change the specific display of the special mode to the advance notice mode when the notification effect is executed but not controlled to the advantageous state, which is a pity for the player. The feeling can be reduced.

The game machine of means A3
A gaming machine of means A1 or means A2,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
When a specific display (hold display) corresponding to the variable display of the hold memory generated during the execution period of the notification effect (reach effect, super reach effect) is displayed, the notification effect (reach effect, super reach effect) is executed. A gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect (operation unit vibration effect) corresponding to the specific display (hold display, active display) can be executed in the variable display after the variable display.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the execution frequency of the specific effect from being excessively reduced.

The game machine of means A4
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A3.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
When the specific display (hold display) of the special mode (white triangle display) corresponding to the variable display of the hold memory generated during the execution period of the notification effect (reach effect, super reach effect) is displayed, the specific display (hold display) A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to change a specific display (active display) of a special mode to a notice mode (red circle display) when a variable display corresponding to (hold display) is executed.
According to such a configuration, when the specific display is displayed in the special mode during the execution period of the notification effect, it can be expected that the variable display of the special mode is changed to the notice mode after that.

The game machine of means A5
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A4.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
When a specific display (hold display) corresponding to the variable display of the hold memory generated during the execution period of the notification effect (reach effect, super reach effect) is displayed, the variable display corresponding to the specific display (hold display) is displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that when it is executed, the specific effect (operation unit vibration effect) corresponding to the specific display (hold display) can be executed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the execution frequency of the specific effect from being excessively reduced.

The game machine of means A6
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A5.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
During the execution period of the notification effect (reach effect), a plurality of types of advance notice effects (battle effect, expectation suggestion effect) can be executed.
Based on the determination of the determination means (starting prize determination process (step S101)), a predetermined display (lower right of the screen) corresponding to any kind of advance notice effect (battle effect, expectation degree suggestion effect) before the execution of the advance notice effect. The timer image 07TM300 and the standby image 07TM300a) displayed in the area of can be displayed.
When the advance notice effect (battle effect, expectation suggestion effect) is executed after the predetermined display (timer image 07TM300, standby image 07TM300a) is displayed, the predetermined display (timer image 07TM300, standby image 07TM300a) is displayed. The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) is higher than when the advance notice effect (battle effect, expectation suggestion effect) is executed without being displayed.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
Limiting the display of the predetermined display (standby image 07TM300a) based on the determination of the determination means (starting prize determination process (step S101)) for the reserved memory generated during the execution period of the notification effect (reach effect). A game machine featuring.
According to such a configuration, since the specific display can be displayed in a special mode during the execution period of the notification effect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the limitation of the display of the predetermined display.

The game machine of means A7
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A6.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
It is possible to execute a special effect (special background effect) for displaying a special display (special background image 07TM400) based on the determination of the determination means (starting prize determination process (step S101)).
When the special effect (special background effect) is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) is higher than when the special effect (special background effect) is not executed.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
Restricting the execution of the special effect (special background effect) based on the determination of the determination means (starting prize determination process (step S101)) for the reserved memory generated during the execution period of the notification effect (reach effect). A game machine featuring.
According to such a configuration, since the specific display can be displayed in a special mode during the execution period of the notification effect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the restriction on the execution of the special effect.

The game machine of means B1
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display and control it to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
Hold storage means that can store information related to hold storage (random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for jackpot type determination, random numbers for fluctuation pattern determination, etc. extracted at the time of starting winning) as hold storage (1st special figure hold storage unit, 2nd special) Figure hold storage) and
A determination means for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state (CPU 103 that executes the special symbol normal processing in step S110) and
Before the determination by the determination means, the determination means (starting prize determination process (step S101)) for determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled, and
It is equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of controlling the effect.
The effect control means
A specific display (hold display) corresponding to the variable display can be displayed on the display means (image display device 5).
Based on the determination of the determination means, the specific display is divided into a normal mode (white circle display), a notice mode suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled (red circle display), and the notice mode. It is possible to display in any of the special modes (white triangle display) suggesting that it changes.
It is possible to execute a notification effect (reach effect) that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
During the execution period of the notification effect (reach effect), a plurality of types of advance notice effects (battle effect, expectation suggestion effect) can be executed.
Based on the determination of the determination means (starting prize determination process (step S101)), any kind of advance notice effect (battle effect, expectation degree suggestion effect) is performed before the advance notice effect (battle effect, expectation degree suggestion effect) is executed. It is possible to display a predetermined display (timer image 07TM300, standby image 07TM300a displayed in the lower right area of the screen) corresponding to.
When the specific display (hold display, active display) is displayed in the special mode (white triangle display) and then the specific display changes to the notice mode (red circle display), the specific display is said. The rate of being controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) is higher than when the notice mode (red circle display) does not change.
When the advance notice effect (battle effect, expectation suggestion effect) is executed after the predetermined display (timer image 07TM300, standby image 07TM300a) is displayed, the predetermined display (timer image 07TM300, standby image 07TM300a) is displayed. The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) is higher than when the advance notice effect (battle effect, expectation suggestion effect) is executed without being displayed.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
When displaying the specific display (hold display) corresponding to the variable display of the hold memory generated during the execution period of the notification effect (reach effect), the specific display (hold display) is changed to the advance notice mode (red circle display). It is possible to display the specific display (hold display) in the special mode (white triangle display) while restricting the display with.
It is characterized in that the display of the predetermined display (standby image 07TM300a) based on the determination of the determination means (starting prize determination process (step S101)) for the hold memory generated during the execution period of the notification effect is restricted. Game machine.
According to such a configuration, since the specific display can be displayed in a special mode during the execution period of the notification effect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the limitation of the display of the predetermined display.

The game machine of means B2
It is a game machine of means B1
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
In the variable display after the variable display in which the notification effect (reach effect, super reach effect) is executed, the variable display of the hold memory generated during the execution period of the notification effect (reach effect, super reach effect) is supported. A gaming machine characterized in that the specific display (hold display, active display) of the special mode (white triangle display) can be changed to the notice mode (red circle display).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to expect the player to change the specific display of the special mode to the advance notice mode when the notification effect is executed but not controlled to the advantageous state, which is a pity for the player. The feeling can be reduced.

The game machine of means B3
A gaming machine of means B1 or means B2.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
When a specific display (hold display) corresponding to the variable display of the hold memory generated during the execution period of the notification effect (reach effect, super reach effect) is displayed, the notification effect (reach effect, super reach effect) is executed. A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined display (timer image 07TM300, standby image 07TM300a) corresponding to the specific display (hold display, active display) can be displayed in the variable display after the variable display.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the display frequency of the predetermined display from being excessively lowered.

The game machine of means B4
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B3.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
When the specific display (hold display) of the special mode (white triangle display) corresponding to the variable display of the hold memory generated during the execution period of the notification effect (reach effect, super reach effect) is displayed, the specific display (hold display) A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to change a specific display (active display) of a special mode to a notice mode (red circle display) when a variable display corresponding to (hold display) is executed.
According to such a configuration, when the specific display is displayed in the special mode during the execution period of the notification effect, it can be expected that the variable display of the special mode is changed to the notice mode after that.

The game machine of means B5
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B4.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
When a specific display (hold display) corresponding to the variable display of the hold memory generated during the execution period of the notification effect (reach effect, super reach effect) is displayed, the variable display corresponding to the specific display (hold display) is displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that when it is executed, the predetermined display (timer image 07TM300, standby image 07TM300a) corresponding to the specific display (hold display) can be displayed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the display frequency of the predetermined display from being excessively lowered.

The game machine of means B6
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B5.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
Based on the determination of the determination means, a specific effect (operation unit vibration effect) can be executed by an effect means (stick controller 31A) different from the display means.
When the specific effect (operation unit vibration effect) is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) is higher than when the specific effect (operation unit vibration effect) is not executed.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
The execution of the specific effect based on the determination of the determination means for the hold memory generated during the execution period of the notification effect is restricted (during the execution of the reach effect, a new start prize is generated and the hold display is displayed. At that time, the execution of the operation unit vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect is restricted, so that the mode of the stick controller 31A is restricted to a special mode (vibration mode)).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the specific display can be displayed in a special mode during the execution period of the notification effect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the restriction on the execution of the specific effect.

The game machine of means B7
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B6.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
It is possible to execute a special effect (special background effect) for displaying a special display (special background image 07TM400) based on the determination of the determination means (starting prize determination process (step S101)).
When the special effect (special background effect) is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) is higher than when the special effect (special background effect) is not executed.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
Restricting the execution of the special effect (special background effect) based on the determination of the determination means (starting prize determination process (step S101)) for the reserved memory generated during the execution period of the notification effect (reach effect). A game machine featuring.
According to such a configuration, since the specific display can be displayed in a special mode during the execution period of the notification effect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the restriction on the execution of the special effect.

The game machine of means C1
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display and control it to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
Hold storage means that can store information related to hold storage (random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for jackpot type determination, random numbers for fluctuation pattern determination, etc. extracted at the time of starting winning) as hold storage (1st special figure hold storage unit, 2nd special) Figure hold storage) and
A determination means for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state (CPU 103 that executes the special symbol normal processing in step S110) and
Before the determination by the determination means, the determination means (starting prize determination process (step S101)) for determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled, and
It is equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of controlling the effect.
The effect control means
A specific display (hold display) corresponding to the variable display can be displayed on the display means (image display device 5).
Based on the determination of the determination means, the specific display is divided into a normal mode (white circle display), a notice mode suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled (red circle display), and the notice mode. It is possible to display in any of the special modes (white triangle display) suggesting that it changes.
It is possible to execute a notification effect (reach effect) that notifies whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state.
It is possible to execute a special effect (special background effect) for displaying a special display (special background image 07TM400) based on the determination of the determination means (starting prize determination process (step S101)).
When the specific display (hold display, active display) is displayed in the special mode (white triangle display) and then the specific display changes to the notice mode (red circle display), the specific display is said. The rate of being controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) is higher than when the notice mode (red circle display) does not change.
When the special effect (special background effect) is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) is higher than when the special effect (special background effect) is not executed.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
When displaying the specific display (hold display) corresponding to the variable display of the hold memory generated during the execution period of the notification effect (reach effect), the specific display (hold display) is changed to the advance notice mode (red circle display). It is possible to display the specific display (hold display) in the special mode (white triangle display) while restricting the display with.
It is characterized in that the execution of the special effect (special background effect) based on the determination of the determination means (starting prize determination process (step S101)) for the hold memory generated during the execution period of the notification effect is restricted. Game machine.
According to such a configuration, since the specific display can be displayed in a special mode during the execution period of the notification effect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the restriction on the execution of the special effect.

The game machine of means C2
It is a game machine of means C1
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
In the variable display after the variable display in which the notification effect (reach effect, super reach effect) is executed, the variable display of the hold memory generated during the execution period of the notification effect (reach effect, super reach effect) is supported. A gaming machine characterized in that the specific display (hold display, active display) of the special mode (white triangle display) can be changed to the notice mode (red circle display).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to expect the player to change the specific display of the special mode to the advance notice mode when the notification effect is executed but not controlled to the advantageous state, which is a pity for the player. The feeling can be reduced.

The game machine of means C3
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
When a specific display (hold display) corresponding to the variable display of the hold memory generated during the execution period of the notification effect (reach effect, super reach effect) is displayed, the notification effect (reach effect, super reach effect) is executed. A gaming machine characterized in that the special effect (special background effect) corresponding to the specific display (hold display, active display) can be executed in the variable display after the variable display.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the execution frequency of the special effect from being excessively reduced.

The game machine of means C4
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C3.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
When the specific display (hold display) of the special mode (white triangle display) corresponding to the variable display of the hold memory generated during the execution period of the notification effect (reach effect, super reach effect) is displayed, the specific display (hold display) A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to change a specific display (active display) of a special mode to a notice mode (red circle display) when a variable display corresponding to (hold display) is executed.
According to such a configuration, when the specific display is displayed in the special mode during the execution period of the notification effect, it can be expected that the variable display of the special mode is changed to the notice mode after that.

The game machine of means C5
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C4.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
When a specific display (hold display) corresponding to the variable display of the hold memory generated during the execution period of the notification effect (reach effect, super reach effect) is displayed, the variable display corresponding to the specific display (hold display) is displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that when it is executed, the special effect (special background effect) corresponding to the specific display (hold display) can be executed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the execution frequency of the special effect from being excessively reduced.

The game machine of means C6
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C5.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
Based on the determination of the determination means, a specific effect (operation unit vibration effect) can be executed by an effect means (stick controller 31A) different from the display means.
When the specific effect (operation unit vibration effect) is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) is higher than when the specific effect (operation unit vibration effect) is not executed.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
The execution of the specific effect based on the determination of the determination means for the hold memory generated during the execution period of the notification effect is restricted (during the execution of the reach effect, a new start prize is generated and the hold display is displayed. At that time, the execution of the operation unit vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect is restricted, so that the mode of the stick controller 31A is restricted to a special mode (vibration mode)).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the specific display can be displayed in a special mode during the execution period of the notification effect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the restriction on the execution of the specific effect.

The game machine of means C7
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C6.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
During the execution period of the notification effect (reach effect), a plurality of types of advance notice effects (battle effect, expectation suggestion effect) can be executed.
Based on the determination of the determination means (starting prize determination process (step S101)), a predetermined display (lower right of the screen) corresponding to any kind of advance notice effect (battle effect, expectation degree suggestion effect) before the execution of the advance notice effect. The timer image 07TM300 and the standby image 07TM300a) displayed in the area of can be displayed.
When the advance notice effect (battle effect, expectation suggestion effect) is executed after the predetermined display (timer image 07TM300, standby image 07TM300a) is displayed, the predetermined display (timer image 07TM300, standby image 07TM300a) is displayed. The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) is higher than when the advance notice effect (battle effect, expectation suggestion effect) is executed without being displayed.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
Limiting the display of the predetermined display (standby image 07TM300a) based on the determination of the determination means (starting prize determination process (step S101)) for the reserved memory generated during the execution period of the notification effect (reach effect). A game machine featuring.
According to such a configuration, since the specific display can be displayed in a special mode during the execution period of the notification effect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the limitation of the display of the predetermined display.

[Explanation of feature 10TM]
Next, the feature portion 10TM will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-1 to 13-28. In the present embodiment, as shown in the above-mentioned [Explanation of the feature unit 07TM], in the game machine in which the set value can be changed, the operation unit (stick controller 31A) is vibrated to suggest the jackpot expectation. By vibrating the operation unit (stick controller 31A), it is possible to perform an effect of notifying that a big hit will occur. Each effect described in [Explanation of feature unit 10TM] can be executed together with each effect (particularly pre-reading notice effect) described in [Explanation of feature unit 07TM]. Further, each effect described in [Explanation of feature unit 10TM] can be executed in place of each effect described in [Explanation of feature unit 07TM].

(Display result judgment)
In the present embodiment, the display result determination table of FIG. 12-1 described above is referred to as the display result determination table referred to in the low accuracy state, and the display result determination table referred to in the high accuracy state is described above. The display result determination table shown in FIG. 12-2 shall be referred to.

(Big hit type judgment)
FIG. 13-1 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table [for the first special symbol] stored in the ROM 101, and FIG. 13-1 (B) is a jackpot type stored in the ROM 101. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination table [for the 2nd special symbol]. Of these, FIG. 13-1 (A) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when you do. Further, FIG. 13-1 (B) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is variablely displayed). It is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is set to "2R normal jackpot [100 times]" based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referred to for determining either "4R probability variation jackpot [next time]" or "10R probability variation jackpot [next time]".

Here, the jackpot type in this embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, the jackpot types are "normal jackpot" (also referred to as non-probability variable jackpot) in which only the time saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends and the state shifts to the low probability / high base state, and after the jackpot game ends. In, "probability change jackpot" is set in which high-accuracy control and time-saving control are executed to shift to a high-accuracy / high-base state.

The jackpot game state by "2R jackpot" is a normally open jackpot that is repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The big hit game state by "big hit" is a normally open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state which is advantageous for the player four times (so-called four rounds), and is repeatedly executed. The jackpot game state is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into a first state that is advantageous to the player.

The time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by "normal big hit [100 times]" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times. It ends when the game is in a big hit game state before the game is executed.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of "probability variation jackpot [next time]" are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the jackpot that occurs again is one of the types of "4R probability variation jackpot [next time]" and "10R probability variation jackpot [next time]", high accuracy control and time saving control are performed again after the end of the jackpot game state. Is executed, so that the jackpot game state is continuously generated without going through the normal state, which is a so-called consecutive villa state.

In the present embodiment, three types of jackpot types are provided as examples, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or less or four or more types of jackpot types are provided. May be good.

As shown in FIG. 13-1 (A), in the jackpot type determination table [for the first special symbol], when the set value is "1", 0 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2. ~ 104 are assigned to "2R normal jackpot [100 times]", 105 to 284 are assigned to "4R probability variation jackpot [next time]", and 285 to 299 are assigned to "10R probability variation jackpot [next time]". Is assigned to. When the set value is "2" to "6", the same determination value as when the set value is "1" is assigned in the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-1 (B), in the jackpot type determination table [for the second special symbol], when the set value is "1", the MR2 determination value ranges from 0 to 299. , 0 to 104 are assigned to "2R normal jackpot [100 times]", 105 to 149 are assigned to "4R probability variation jackpot [next time]", and 150 to 299 are assigned to "10R probability variation jackpot [10 times]". Next time] ”is assigned. When the set value is "2" to "6", the same determination value as when the set value is "1" is assigned in the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol, a common judgment value is assigned in the big hit type judgment table regardless of which set value is set. ing. Similarly, when a jackpot occurs in the special symbol game of the second special symbol, a common determination value is assigned in the jackpot type determination table regardless of which set value is set.

(Variation pattern judgment)
Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern. Based on the fluctuation pattern determination table, the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern to be one of the plurality of types described above according to the preliminary determination result.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for deviation used when it is determined in advance that the fluctuation display result is "missing", and the fluctuation display result is set to "big hit". A fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpots, which is used when is predetermined, is prepared in advance.

In the present embodiment, it is determined in advance that the [for loss] fluctuation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “out of” and the variation display result is “big hit”. It is assumed that the [for big hit] fluctuation pattern judgment table used at that time is prepared in advance.

[For out-of-reach] In the fluctuation pattern judgment table, for each fluctuation pattern of "non-reach out of reach", "normal reach out of reach", and "super reach out of reach", the fluctuation pattern judgment is random. A predetermined random value within the range that the numerical value MR3 can take is assigned as a determination value.

The "non-reach out-of-reach" variation pattern is a variation pattern in which the combination of decorative symbols indicating that the reach is not established and the variation display result becomes "out of reach" after the variation display is started is stopped and displayed. Since the effect that the reach is established is not executed, the variation display period when it is determined to be the variation pattern of "non-reach off" is the other effect that executes the effect that the reach is established when the variation display result is "out of reach". It is shorter than the fluctuation display period of the fluctuation pattern (“normal reach out of reach”, “super reach out of order”).

[For big hit] In the fluctuation pattern judgment table, for each fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach jackpot" and the fluctuation pattern of "super reach jackpot", a predetermined range of the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can be taken. Random value is assigned as a judgment value.

In the present embodiment, in the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the normal reach (“normal reach loss” and “normal reach jackpot”), the final display result is displayed without executing the super reach effect (battle effect) described later after the reach state is established. It will be fixedly stopped.

In the present embodiment, in the fluctuation pattern accompanied by super reach (“super reach off” and “super reach jackpot”), after the reach state is established, the ally character and the enemy character battle as a super reach effect. A battle effect is executed to notify whether or not a big hit has been won.

Then, when the final display result is "off", the effect of defeating the ally character to the enemy character (defeat effect) is executed. When the final display result is "big hit", the effect of the ally character winning over the enemy character (victory effect) is executed.

In the present embodiment, among the fluctuation patterns in which the final display result is "big hit", in the fluctuation pattern of "super reach jackpot", the winning effect of notifying the occurrence of the jackpot by the result of the battle effect and the jackpot symbol are stopped ( After the blessing effect that congratulates the fact that the swing is stopped (the victory effect is executed) is executed, the jackpot type suggestion effect that suggests the type of the jackpot is executed. Of the fluctuation patterns in which the final display result is "big hit", in the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach jackpot", the decoration symbols are aligned without going through the battle production, and the blessing to congratulate the jackpot symbol has stopped (swinging stop). After the effect is executed, the jackpot type suggestion effect that suggests the type of jackpot is executed. In the jackpot type suggestion effect, it is suggested whether the jackpot type is a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) or a probability variation jackpot, and the number of rounds of the jackpot (the number of times the jackpot is opened). During the execution period of the jackpot type suggestion effect, the probability change notification effect can be executed as an effect accompanied by vibration of the operation unit.

As shown in FIG. 13-2 (A), in the [for off] fluctuation pattern determination table, when the set value is "1", 1 to 898 out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997. Is assigned to the "non-reach out of reach" variation pattern, 899 to 967 is assigned to the "normal reach out of reach" variation pattern, and 968 to 997 is assigned to the "super reach out of reach" variation pattern. There is. Further, when the set value is any of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", the determination value of MR3 is the same as when the set value is "1". Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 898 are assigned to the "non-reach out of reach" variation pattern, 899 to 967 are assigned to the "normal reach out of reach" variation pattern, and 968 to 997 are assigned to the "normal reach out of reach" variation pattern. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach Off [Battle Draw]". In this way, when the display result is "off", the selection ratio of each of the plurality of fluctuation patterns is common regardless of the set value.

As shown in FIG. 13-2 (B), in the [for jackpot] fluctuation pattern determination table, when the set value is "1", the range of the determination values of MR3 is 1 to 50 out of the range of 1 to 997. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach jackpot", and 51 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "super reach jackpot". Further, when the set value is any of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", the determination value of MR3 is the same as when the set value is "1". Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 50 are assigned to the "normal reach jackpot" fluctuation pattern, and 51 to 997 are assigned to the "super reach jackpot" fluctuation pattern. In this way, when the display result is "big hit", the selection ratio of each of the plurality of fluctuation patterns is common regardless of the set value.

(Single vibration production)
In the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a single vibration effect based on the determination result at the start of fluctuation. The single vibration effect is an example of a notice effect in which the vibration operation of the stick controller 31A is performed for a predetermined period (the stick controller 31A is a special mode) at a predetermined timing in the execution period of the fluctuation display. As shown below, as a mode of the single vibration effect, a plurality of modes in which the emission color of the operation unit LED, which is a light emitting device provided in the stick controller 31A, may be different may be provided. Further, as shown below, as a mode of the single vibration effect, a plurality of modes having different vibration times of the stick controller 31A may be provided.

In the present embodiment, an effect using another effect device (for example, a notice by the image display device 5), which is executed after the unit vibration effect, is executed based on whether or not the unit vibration effect is executed and the effect mode of the unit vibration effect. Whether or not to execute the effect or the movable body motion effect by the movable body 10TM450) and the effect mode are not determined. That is, the presence / absence and mode of execution of the single vibration effect and the mode of execution of the effect using another effect device after the single vibration effect are determined independently. There is. Therefore, in the single vibration effect, the jackpot expectation is suggested only by the vibration operation of the stick controller 31A, the emission color of the operation unit LED provided on the stick controller 31A, and the vibration time of the stick controller 31A.

In the present embodiment, the first vibration effect, the second vibration effect, the third vibration effect, and the fourth vibration effect can be executed as the single vibration effect. These first vibration effect, second vibration effect, third vibration effect, and fourth vibration effect have different execution timings, effect modes, and jackpot expectations.

(1st vibration production)
When the effect control CPU 120 starts the variation display of the decorative symbol based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command and the display result designation command, the first vibration effect can be executed as a single vibration effect. This first vibration effect is a kind of advance notice effect in which the presence / absence of execution and the effect mode are determined based on the determination at the start of fluctuation (effect determination process at the start of fluctuation), and the display result is suggested.

In the present embodiment, as an effect mode of the first vibration effect, there are a plurality of effect modes in which the emission color of the operation unit LED, which is a light emitting device provided in the stick controller 31A, is different. When it is decided to execute the first vibration effect in the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation, the effect modes of the first vibration effect are "first mode", "second mode", and "third mode". Is determined to be one of the production modes.

In the first vibration effect of the first aspect, it is assumed that the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 1500 ms is executed once at the timing when the emission color of the operation unit LED becomes white and the fluctuation display is started.

In the first vibration effect of the second aspect, it is assumed that the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 3000 ms is executed once at the timing when the emission color of the operation unit LED becomes red and the fluctuation display is started.

In the first vibration effect of the third aspect, it is assumed that the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 3000 ms is executed once at the timing when the emission color of the operation unit LED becomes rainbow color and the fluctuation display is started.

As described above, the emission color of the operation unit LED is different (white in the first aspect, red in the second aspect) and the vibration time is also different between the first vibration effect of the first aspect and the first vibration effect of the second aspect. (1500 ms in the first aspect, 3000 ms in the second aspect). On the other hand, although the emission color of the operation unit LED is different between the first vibration effect of the second aspect and the first vibration effect of the third aspect (red in the second aspect and rainbow color in the third aspect), the vibration time is the same. (3000 ms in the second aspect, 3000 ms in the third aspect).

In FIG. 13-3, the aspect of the stick controller 31A is shown in the lower right of the effect diagram in correspondence with the effect diagram. FIG. 13-3 (1) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the aspect of the effect image and the stick controller 31A displayed on the image display device 5 before the start of the variable display, and FIG. 13-3 (2). 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an aspect of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the stick controller 31A when the first vibration effect is not executed at the start of fluctuation, and FIGS. 13-3 (A2) and (B2). ) And (C2) are explanatory views showing an example of the aspect of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the stick controller 31A when the first vibration effect is executed at the start of fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 13-3 (1), based on the fact that the CPU 103 has finished the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 has the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. In this example, the combination of decorative symbols (“246” in this example) is stopped and displayed, and the combination of small symbols (“246” in this example) is displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. ") Is stopped and displayed. That is, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "off" is stopped and displayed. At this time, the active display area 10TM013 is displaying the active display 10TM003 in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display that has been executed, and the hold display area 10TM011 is displaying the hold display 10TM001 in the normal mode.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 13-3 (1), the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A as a non-special mode (non-vibration mode). From this state, the state shifts to any one of FIGS. 13-3 (2), (A2), (B2), and (C2) in response to the execution of the next variation display.

First, in the example shown in FIG. 13-3 (2), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is set in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , The variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 10TM003 in the normal mode displayed in the active display area 10TM013, and shifts the hold display 10TM001 in the normal mode displayed in the hold display area 10TM011 to the active display area 10TM013. Shift. As a result, the active display 10TM003 in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 10TM013, and the hold display 10TM001 is not displayed in the hold display area 10TM011.

At this time, in the example shown in FIG. 13-3 (2), the effect control CPU 120 performs the first vibration effect at the start of the fluctuation based on the determination that the first vibration effect is not executed at the start of the fluctuation. The mode of the stick controller 31A is left as a non-special mode (non-vibration mode) at the timing when the variation display is executed without the execution.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 13-3 (A2), the effect control CPU 120 is determined to execute the first vibration effect of the first aspect at the start of the fluctuation, and the first vibration effect is performed at the start of the fluctuation. The first vibration effect of the embodiment is executed, and at the timing when the fluctuation display is executed, the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 1500 ms is executed once, and the operation unit LED is made to emit white light. That is, the first vibration effect of the first aspect is executed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 13-3 (B2), the effect control CPU 120 is determined to execute the first vibration effect of the second aspect at the start of the fluctuation, and is second at the start of the fluctuation. The first vibration effect of the embodiment is executed, and at the timing when the fluctuation display is executed, the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 3000 ms is executed once, and the operation unit LED is made to emit red light. That is, the first vibration effect of the second aspect is executed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 13-3 (C2), the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first vibration effect of the third aspect at the start of the fluctuation, and is based on the fact that the third vibration effect is executed at the start of the fluctuation. The first vibration effect of the embodiment is executed, and at the timing when the fluctuation display is executed, the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 3000 ms is executed once, and the operation unit LED is made to emit rainbow colors. That is, the first vibration effect of the third aspect is executed.

In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the jackpot expectation degree differs depending on the emission color of the operation unit LED which is the light emitting device provided in the stick controller 31A. As will be described in detail later, the degree of expectation that the display result of the fluctuation display will be a big hit is when the emission color of the operation unit LED is white <when the emission color of the operation unit LED is red <emission color of the operation unit LED. Is higher in the order of iridescent color. That is, the degree of expectation that the display result of the fluctuation display when the first vibration effect is executed becomes a big hit is higher in the order of the first aspect <second aspect <third aspect.

(Second vibration production)
The effect control CPU 120 can execute the second vibration effect as a single vibration effect at the timing when the reach state is established in the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. This second vibration effect is determined whether or not to be executed based on the determination at the start of fluctuation (effect determination process at the start of fluctuation), and in this example, it can be executed only when the display result is a big hit. It shall be.

In the second vibration effect, it is assumed that the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 3000 ms is executed once at the timing when the reach state is established. The stick controller 31A may be vibrated according to the reproduction period of the reach effect video reproduced at the timing when the reach state is established. The emission color of the operation unit LED in the second vibration effect is rainbow color, and the player is notified that the big hit is confirmed by executing the second vibration effect.

FIG. 13-4 shows the aspect of the stick controller 31A at the lower right of the effect diagram in correspondence with the effect diagram. FIG. 13-4 (1) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and a mode of the stick controller 31A before the reach state is established. Further, FIG. 13-4 (2) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an aspect of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the stick controller 31A when the second vibration effect is not executed at the timing of establishing the reach state. FIG. 13-4 (A2) shows an example of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the mode of the stick controller 31A when the second vibration effect is executed at the timing when the reach state is established. It is explanatory drawing.

As shown in FIG. 13-4 (1), based on the CPU 103 executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 has the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. In, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, in the active display area 10TM013, the active display 10TM003 in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is displayed.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 13-4 (1), the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A as a non-special mode (non-vibration mode). From this state, corresponding to the establishment of the reach state, the state shifts to any of the states shown in FIGS. 13-4 (2) and (A2).

First, in the example shown in FIG. 13-4 (2), the effect control CPU 120 has "7" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing when the reach state in the fluctuation pattern should be established. By stopping and displaying the decorative symbol of, the reach state is set, and the characters "reach !!" are displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5. At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the variable display of the small symbol is continued. That is, the small symbol is also stopped in the small symbol display area 5l corresponding to the symbol display area 5L in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the small symbol display area 5r corresponding to the symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. It is continuously displayed in a variable manner without being displayed.

At this time, in the example shown in FIG. 13-4 (2), the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the second vibration effect based on the determination that the second vibration effect is not executed at the start of the fluctuation. , The mode of the stick controller 31A remains the non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 13-4 (A2), the effect control CPU 120 executes the second vibration effect based on the determination that the second vibration effect is executed at the start of the fluctuation, and sticks. The operation of vibrating the controller 31A for 3000 ms is executed once, and the operation unit LED emits rainbow-colored light.

In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the second vibration effect is executed only when the display result of the variable display being executed is a "big hit", but the present embodiment is not limited to such an embodiment. Even if the display result of the variable display is "off", the second vibration effect may be executed. For example, as the production mode of the second vibration effect, the light emitting color of the operation unit LED when the reach state is established is red, and the light emission color of the operation unit LED when the reach state is established is rainbow color. When the second vibration effect is executed when the display result is "out of place", the first aspect (light emitting color: red) is selected at a rate of 100%, while the display result is When the second vibration effect is executed when is a "big hit", the first mode (light emitting color: red) is selected at a rate of 40%, and the second mode (issue color: rainbow color) is selected at a rate of 60%. ) May be selected. That is, when the second vibration effect of the first aspect is executed, it is not certain that the display result will be a big hit, and the display result will be a big hit only when the second vibration effect of the second aspect is executed. It may be confirmed that

(Third vibration production)
The effect control CPU 120 can execute the third vibration effect as a single vibration effect at the timing of super reach development (for example, the timing when the battle effect is started) in the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. This third vibration effect is a kind of advance notice effect in which the presence or absence of execution is determined based on the determination at the start of fluctuation (effect determination process at the start of fluctuation), and the display result is suggested.

In the present embodiment, the third vibration effect is the timing when the special symbol displayed as "development" is stopped in the middle display area (symbol display area 5C) when the reach state is established and then develops into super reach (the timing when the special symbol is developed into super reach It is executed at the timing when the battle production is started). In the third vibration effect, it is assumed that the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 3000 ms is executed once at the timing developed into the super reach. The stick controller 31A may be vibrated according to the reproduction period of the super reach effect video that is reproduced when the super reach is developed.

It should be noted that the stick controller 31A is vibrated at a timing before the development to the super reach (for example, the timing when the special symbol displayed as "development" stops in the middle display area when the reach state is established). May be good. The emission color of the operation unit LED in the third vibration effect is white, and the player is notified that the jackpot expectation is high by executing the third vibration effect.

FIG. 13-5 shows the aspect of the stick controller 31A at the lower right of the effect diagram in correspondence with the effect diagram. FIG. 13-5 (1) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and a mode of the stick controller 31A before developing into super reach. Further, FIG. 13-5 (2) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an aspect of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the stick controller 31A when the third vibration effect is not executed at the timing of developing into super reach. FIG. 13-5 (A2) shows an example of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the mode of the stick controller 31A when the third vibration effect is executed at the timing of developing into super reach. It is explanatory drawing.

As shown in FIG. 13-5 (1), when the reach state in the fluctuation pattern is established (the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 are decorated with “7”, the effect control CPU 120 When the reach state is established by the stop display of the symbol), at the timing when the decorative symbol should be stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped display) in the middle display area, the symbol display area 5C of the image display device 5 is set to ". The special symbol 10TM100 displayed as "development" is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped). At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the variable display of the small symbol is continued. That is, the small symbol is also stopped in the small symbol display area 5l corresponding to the symbol display area 5L in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the small symbol display area 5r corresponding to the symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. It is continuously displayed in a variable manner without being displayed. At this time, in the active display area 10TM013, the active display 10TM003 in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is displayed.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 13-5 (1), the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A as a non-special mode (non-vibration mode). From this state, it shifts to any of the states shown in FIGS. 13-5 (2) and (A2) in response to the development to super reach (the battle effect is executed).

First, in the example shown in FIG. 13-5 (2), the effect control CPU 120 executes the battle effect at the timing when it should be developed into the super reach in the fluctuation pattern. Here, as the battle effect is executed, the image display device 5 displays the ally character 10TM200A and the enemy character 10TM200B.

At this time, in the example shown in FIG. 13-5 (2), the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the third vibration effect based on the determination that the third vibration effect is not executed at the start of the fluctuation. , The mode of the stick controller 31A remains the non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 13-5 (A2), the effect control CPU 120 executes the third vibration effect based on the determination that the third vibration effect is executed at the start of the fluctuation, and sticks. The operation of vibrating the controller 31A for 1500 ms is executed once, and the operation unit LED emits white light.

In addition, a plurality of production modes may be provided as the production mode of the third vibration effect. For example, as the production mode of the third vibration effect, the first mode in which the emission color of the operation unit LED becomes white when it develops into super reach (or when it is notified that it develops into super reach) and the super reach There is a second mode in which the emission color of the operation unit LED becomes red when it develops (or when it is notified that it develops into super reach), and when the display result becomes "off", the third vibration effect is performed. When executed, the first aspect (emission color: white) is selected at a rate of 80%, the second aspect (emission color: red) is selected at a rate of 20%, while the display result is "big hit". In this case, when the third vibration effect is executed, the first aspect (emission color: white) is selected at a rate of 20%, and the second aspect (issue color: red) is selected at a rate of 80%. It may be. That is, the rate at which the display result becomes a big hit may be higher when the third vibration effect of the second aspect is executed than when the third vibration effect of the first aspect is executed. ..

(4th vibration production)
The effect control CPU 120 promotes the first operation immediately before the timing at which the effect result notification in the super reach effect (notification of whether or not the display result is a "big hit") is performed (for example, before the victory / defeat branch in the battle effect). At the timing when the display is displayed), the fourth vibration effect can be executed as the single vibration effect. In this example, the fourth vibration effect can be executed only when the display result is a big hit.

In the fourth vibration effect, in the battle effect in which the ally character and the enemy character battle, the ally character launches the final attack on the enemy character and operates the stick controller 31A (from the player toward the game machine). It is assumed that the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 3000 ms is executed once at the timing when the first operation promotion display for prompting the player to (pull) is displayed (the timing immediately before the victory or defeat of the battle is decided).

The period for vibrating the stick controller 31A in the fourth vibration effect is not limited to the above period. For example, the period from the display of the first operation promotion display until the stick controller 31A is operated is the stick controller 31A. May be continuously vibrated. The emission color of the operation unit LED in the fourth vibration effect is rainbow color, and the player is notified that the big hit is confirmed by executing the fourth vibration effect.

FIG. 13-6 shows the aspect of the stick controller 31A at the lower right of the effect diagram in correspondence with the effect diagram. FIG. 13-6 (1) is an explanatory diagram showing an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 before the first operation promotion display is displayed and an example of the mode of the stick controller 31A. Further, FIG. 13-6 (2) shows an example of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the aspect of the stick controller 31A when the fourth vibration effect is not executed at the timing when the first operation promotion display is displayed. 13-6 (A2) shows an effect image and a stick displayed on the image display device 5 when the fourth vibration effect is executed at the timing when the first operation promotion display is displayed. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the aspect of the controller 31A.

As shown in FIG. 13-6 (1), the effect control CPU 120 determines the winning / losing branch timing of the battle effect in which the ally character and the enemy character corresponding to the fluctuation pattern battle (the ally character makes the final attack on the enemy character). At the timing of setting), the ally character 10TM200A and the enemy character 10TM200B are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the battle effect image 10TM250 suggesting that the victory or defeat of the battle is decided is displayed. At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the variable display of the small symbol is continued. At this time, in the active display area 10TM013, the active display 10TM003 in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is displayed.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 13-6 (1), the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A as a non-special mode (non-vibration mode). From this state, the state shifts to any of FIGS. 13-6 (2) and (A2) in response to the display of the first operation promotion display (characters "close !!").

First, in the example shown in FIG. 13-6 (2), the effect control CPU 120 displays the first operation promotion display in a state where the ally character is launching the final attack on the enemy character in the effect effect. In this example, the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed in a state where the ally character 10TM200A and the enemy character 10TM200B are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the battle effect image 10TM250 suggesting that the victory or defeat of the battle is decided is displayed. Along with the first operation promotion display 10TM300, the time bar 10TM300T for notifying the remaining period during which the operation of the stick controller 31A is valid and the character "close !!" are displayed in the central portion.

The first operation promotion display 10TM300, the time bar 10TM300T, and the characters "close !!" are images having a higher display priority (the display layer is higher) than the background image and the super reach effect (battle effect) image. Therefore, it seems to the player that it is displayed in front of the background image and the super reach effect (battle effect) image.

At this time, in the example shown in FIG. 13-6 (2), the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the fourth vibration effect based on the determination that the fourth vibration effect is not executed at the start of the fluctuation. , The mode of the stick controller 31A remains the non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 13-6 (A2), the effect control CPU 120 executes the fourth vibration effect based on the determination that the fourth vibration effect is executed at the start of the fluctuation, and sticks. The operation of vibrating the controller 31A for 3000 ms is executed once, and the operation unit LED emits rainbow-colored light.

In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the fourth vibration effect is executed only when the display result of the variable display being executed is a "big hit", but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. Even if the display result of the variable display is "off", the fourth vibration effect may be executed. For example, as the fourth vibration effect effect mode, the first mode in which the emission color of the operation unit LED is red when the first operation promotion display is displayed, and the operation unit when the first operation promotion display is displayed. There is a second mode in which the emission color of the LED is rainbow color, and when the fourth vibration effect is executed when the display result is "off", the first aspect (emission color: red) is 100%. On the other hand, when the fourth vibration effect is executed when the display result is "big hit", the first mode (light emitting color: red) is selected at a rate of 40%, and the first mode is selected at a rate of 60%. Two modes (issue color: rainbow color) may be selected. That is, when the fourth vibration effect of the first aspect is executed, it is not determined that the display result will be a big hit, and the display result will be a big hit only when the fourth vibration effect of the second aspect is executed. It may be confirmed that

(Vibration notice production)
In the present embodiment, the vibration warning effect can be executed based on the determination result at the start of the fluctuation. The vibration notice effect is an active display corresponding to the fluctuation display being executed at a predetermined timing of the fluctuation display (in this example, the timing when 5000 ms has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation display). This is an example of a notice effect that is displayed in different operation modes. By displaying the active display in the operation mode, the active display appears to the player to vibrate up, down, left, and right. As a result, it is suggested (notified) to the player that the stick controller 31A vibrates.

In the present embodiment, the vibration notice effect is the active display in the normal mode (white circle display in this example) and the active display in the special mode (in this example, the active display in the normal mode) shown in FIGS. 12-9 to 12-12. The active display in any of the following modes: white triangle display), blue mode active display (blue circle display in this example), and red mode active display (red circle display in this example). It is feasible. Therefore, the player is interested not only in the shape and display color of the active display (first aspect) but also in the operation (second aspect).

In the present embodiment, by executing the vibration notice effect, any one of the various single vibration effects (first vibration effect, second vibration effect, third vibration effect, and fourth vibration effect) described above is executed. The player is notified that a kind of single vibration effect is executed. The single vibration effect, which is the target of the announcement by the vibration advance notice effect, will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 13-19 described later.

In the example shown below, when a plurality of types of single vibration effects are executed in one fluctuation display, the vibration notice effect is executed in response to any one type of single vibration effect. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and may be executed corresponding to each of a plurality of types of single vibration effects. That is, the vibration warning effect may be executed a plurality of times in one variation display.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the vibration notice effect is executed, an example is shown in which any kind of single vibration effect corresponding to the vibration advance effect is always executed, but the present invention is not limited to such a form. Even if the vibration notice effect is executed, the single vibration effect may not be executed. In addition, a plurality of production modes may be provided as the production mode of the vibration warning effect. For example, a first operation mode in which the hold display or active display (that is, a specific display corresponding to a variable display) vibrates vertically and horizontally is small, and a second operation mode in which the hold display or active display vibrates vertically and horizontally is large. And may be provided. Then, the ratio at which the single vibration effect is executed may be different depending on the effect mode of the vibration notice effect. For example, when the vibration notice effect of the first operation mode is executed, the single vibration effect corresponding to this is executed at a rate of 50%, but when the vibration notice effect of the second operation mode is executed. May execute a single vibration effect corresponding to this at a rate of 100%.

FIG. 13-7 shows the mode of the stick controller 31A at the lower right of the effect diagram in correspondence with the effect diagram. 13-7 (1) to (3) show an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and an aspect of the stick controller 31A when the vibration advance notice effect is executed when the advance notice target is the second vibration effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example.

As shown in FIG. 13-7 (1), based on the fact that the CPU 103 has started the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 has the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. In, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, in the active display area 10TM013, the active display 10TM003 in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is displayed.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 13-7 (1), the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A as a non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-7 (2), the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration warning effect at a predetermined timing of the variation display (in this example, the timing when 5000 ms has elapsed from the start of the variation display). In the active display area 10TM013, the active display 10TM003S of the operation mode is displayed. That is, the active display is changed from a stationary mode (a mode in which the white round display is stationary) to an operating mode (a mode in which the white round display is vibrating).

At this time, as shown in FIG. 13-7 (2), the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A as a non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-7 (3), the effect control CPU 120 sets "7" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing when the reach state in the fluctuation pattern should be established. By stopping and displaying the decorative symbol of, the reach state is set, and the characters "reach !!" are displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5. At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the variable display of the small symbol is continued. That is, the small symbol is also stopped in the small symbol display area 5l corresponding to the symbol display area 5L in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the small symbol display area 5r corresponding to the symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. It is continuously displayed in a variable manner without being displayed.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 13-7 (3), the effect control CPU 120 ends the vibration advance notice effect and executes the second vibration effect. That is, the active display 10TM003S of the operation mode (the mode in which the white round display is vibrating) displayed in the active display area 10TM013 is returned to the stationary mode (the mode in which the white round display is stationary). , The operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 3000 ms is executed once, and the operation unit LED emits rainbow-colored light.

(Preliminary notice during fluctuations accompanied by vibration of the operation unit)
In the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a notice effect during fluctuation accompanied by vibration of the operation unit, which is different from the single vibration effect, based on the determination result at the start of fluctuation. In the present embodiment, as a notice effect during fluctuation accompanied by vibration of the operation unit, a strong development effect suggesting that the display result is a big hit, and the big hit symbol is stopped (swing stop) (it will be controlled to the big hit game state from now on). It is possible to execute a blessing effect to congratulate (that) and a probability change notification effect to notify that the type of jackpot that occurs is a probability variation jackpot.

These strong development effects, blessing effects, and probability change notification effects all use the stick controller 31A (the operation unit LED of the stick controller 31A), unlike the above-mentioned single vibration effects (first vibration effect to fourth vibration effect). It is a production accompanied by a production by a production device different from (including). Specifically, an effect of displaying an effect image on the image display device 5, an effect of emitting a light emitting unit (for example, a frame LED around the game area) different from the operation unit LED, or an effect provided around the image display device 5. This is an example of a notice effect in which the vibration operation of the stick controller 31A is performed for a predetermined period of time along with the effect of operating the movable body and the effect of reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, the strong development effect, the blessing effect, and the probability change notification effect accompanied by the vibration of the operation unit are produced by an effect device different from the stick controller 31A (including the operation unit LED of the stick controller 31A) and the stick controller 31A ( This is an effect associated with the effect of vibrating the stick controller 31A (including the operation unit LED). The strong development effect, the blessing effect, and the probability change notification effect in the present embodiment have different execution timings, effect modes, and jackpot expectations.

(Strong development production)
The effect control CPU 120 vibrates the operation unit at a timing predetermined period before the timing of super reach development in the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command (for example, 40 seconds before the start of the battle effect). It is possible to execute a strong development effect as a notice effect during fluctuations accompanied by. This strong development effect is a kind of advance notice effect in which the presence or absence of execution is determined based on the determination at the start of fluctuation (effect determination process at the start of fluctuation) and suggests the display result.

13-8 (1) to 13-8 (6) are explanatory views showing the relationship between the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the aspect of the stick controller 31A when the strong development effect is executed. In FIG. 13-8, the aspect of the stick controller 31A is shown in the lower right of the effect diagram in correspondence with the effect diagram.

As shown in FIG. 13-8 (1), the effect control CPU 120 displays “7” in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing when the reach state in the fluctuation pattern should be established. By stopping and displaying the symbol, the reach state is set, and the characters "reach !!" are displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5. At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the variable display of the small symbol is continued. That is, the small symbol is also stopped in the small symbol display area 5l corresponding to the symbol display area 5L in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the small symbol display area 5r corresponding to the symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. It is continuously displayed in a variable manner without being displayed. At this time, in the active display area 10TM013, the active display 10TM003 in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is displayed.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (1), the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A as a non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (2), the effect control CPU 120 starts a timing (for example, a battle effect) that is a predetermined period before the timing of super reach development in the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. At the timing 40 seconds before it is done), a strong development effect is executed. In the strong development effect, first, the dark image 10TM400 is displayed as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5, thereby reducing the visibility of the background image, the decorative pattern, and the reach effect image, resulting in a difficult-to-see state. Perform a blackout effect.

Here, due to the blackout effect, the background image, the decorative pattern, and the reach effect image become difficult to see, but the active display 10TM003 and the small pattern in the normal mode remain visible. That is, while the visibility of the decorative symbol "7" that was stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R and the decorative symbol that was variablely displayed in the symbol display area 5C is reduced, the active display area The visibility of the active display 10TM003 of the normal mode displayed in 10TM013 and the small symbols variablely displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r is not deteriorated.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (2), the effect control CPU 120 keeps the mode of the stick controller 31A as a non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (3), the effect control CPU 120 continues the darkening image 10TM400 at the timing when a predetermined period (10 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the start of the strong development effect. In addition to displaying the image, an effect effect is executed in which the flame effect image 10TM410 and the characters "decisive battle" are superimposed and displayed on the dark image 10TM400. The flame effect image 10TM410 is an image having a higher display priority than the darkening image 10TM400 (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground), and the characters "decisive battle" are further displayed than the flame effect image 10TM410. This is an image with a high priority (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, from the front to the back, it seems to the player that the characters "decisive battle", the flame effect image 10TM410, and the darkening image 10TM400 are displayed in this order.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (3), the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the execution period of a predetermined effect (for example, the period in which the characters “decisive battle” are displayed) and the stick controller. The operation of vibrating 31A for 1500 ms (ON: 1500 ms, 0FF: 500 ms cycle) is executed 10 times, and the operation unit LED emits white light.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (4), the effect control CPU 120 tilts the movable body 10TM450 from the tilted position at the timing when a predetermined period (30 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the start of the strong development effect. Executes a movable body motion effect that operates in the standing position.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (4), the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the execution period of a predetermined effect (for example, the period in which the movable body 10TM450 is in the upright position) and the stick controller. The operation of vibrating 31A for 10000 ms is executed once, and the operation unit LED emits white light.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (5), the effect control CPU 120 is a movable body 10TM450 in an upright position at a timing when a predetermined period (40 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the start of the strong development effect. Is executed to return to the tilted position, thereby ending the movable body motion effect.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (5), the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A as a non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (6), the effect control CPU 120 ends the strong development effect at the timing when it should be developed into the super reach in the fluctuation pattern. With the end of the strong development production, the blackout production and the effect production will be terminated, and the battle production will be executed. Here, as the battle effect is executed, the image display device 5 displays the ally character 10TM200A and the enemy character 10TM200B.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (6), the effect control CPU 120 keeps the mode of the stick controller 31A as a non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

In this way, in the strong development effect, a series of effects including a blackout effect, an effect effect, and a movable body motion effect are executed, and during the execution period of the effect effect and the movable body effect, each of them takes a predetermined period (for example, 1500 ms). ) The stick controller 31A vibrates. The emission color of the operation unit LED in the strong development effect is white, and the player can confirm that the big hit expectation is high by executing the strong development effect.

In the strong development effect, the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A and the operation unit LED are made to emit light in accordance with the period during which the sound effects peculiar to the strong development effect are reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. It may be.

(Blessing production)
The effect control CPU 120 can execute a blessing effect as a notice effect during fluctuation accompanied by vibration of the operation unit at the timing when a victory effect in which a ally character wins over an enemy character is executed and the player grasps the occurrence of a big hit. Is. In this example, the blessing effect is executed only when the display result is a big hit.

13-9 (1) to 13-9 (3) are explanatory views showing the relationship between the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the aspect of the stick controller 31A when the blessing effect is executed. In FIG. 13-9, the aspect of the stick controller 31A is shown in the lower right of the effect diagram in correspondence with the effect diagram.

As shown in FIG. 13-9 (1), the effect control CPU 120 has an image in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 in which the ally character 10TM200A is launching the final attack on the enemy character 10TM200B, and the victory or defeat of the battle is shown. Operation of the first operation promotion display 10TM300 and the stick controller 31A in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 at the timing when the first operation promotion display should be displayed in the state where the battle effect image 10TM250 suggesting the decision is displayed. The time bar 10TM300T for notifying the remaining period during which is valid and the character "Close !!" are displayed.

Here, the first operation promotion display 10TM300, the time bar 10TM300T, and the characters "close !!" have a higher display priority than the background image and the super reach effect (battle effect) image (the display layer is higher). ) Since it is an image, it appears to the player that it is displayed in front of the background image and the super reach effect (battle effect) image. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variation display of the small symbol in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r. Further, in the active display area 10TM013, the active display 10TM003 in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is displayed.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (1), the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A as a non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (2), the effect control CPU 120 executes a victory effect at the timing when the player operates the stick controller 31A, and the ally character 10TM200A is displayed on the image display device 5. Displays an image of the state in which the character has won the enemy character 10TM200B, and displays the character "victory" in the center of the image display device 5, and the display result becomes "big hit" in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The combination of decorative patterns (“222” in this example) is oscillated and stopped. At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the variable display of the small symbol is continued.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (2), the effect control CPU 120 executes the blessing effect and executes a predetermined effect (for example, a period during which the combination of decorative symbols is stopped swinging). The operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 6000 ms is executed once in correspondence with the above, and the operation unit LED is made to emit rainbow colors.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (3), the effect control CPU 120 displays the display result as "big hit" in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at the timing when the decorative symbol in the variation pattern should be stopped and displayed. The combination of decorative symbols (“222” in this example) is stopped and displayed. At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the variable display of the small symbol is continued.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (3), the effect control CPU 120 ends the blessing effect, and the mode of the stick controller 31A is set to a non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

In this way, in the blessing effect, the stick controller 31A vibrates for a predetermined period (for example, 6000 ms) at the timing when the ally character wins the enemy character and the decorative symbols (big hit symbols) are aligned. The emission color of the operation unit LED in the blessing effect is rainbow color, and the player can confirm that the big hit has occurred by executing the blessing effect.

In the blessing effect, the stick controller 31A is vibrated and the operation unit LED is made to emit light in accordance with the period during which the sound effects peculiar to the blessing effect are reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. May be good.

(Probability change notification production)
The effect control CPU 120 can execute a jackpot type suggestion effect that suggests the type of jackpot that occurs after notifying the occurrence of a jackpot based on the result of the battle effect (winning effect). In the jackpot type suggestion effect, it is suggested whether the jackpot type is a normal jackpot (non-probability variable jackpot) or a probabilistic jackpot, and the number of rounds of the jackpot (the number of times the jackpot is opened). Here, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the probability change notification effect as a variable notice effect accompanied by vibration of the operation unit during the execution period of the jackpot type suggestion effect.

In the jackpot type suggestion effect, a combination of even-numbered symbols (for example, "222") that has stopped as a jackpot symbol (however, it has not been confirmed) is combined with an odd-numbered symbol (for example, "555", "777", etc.). A series of productions to change to are executed. In this series of effects, for example, (1) an effect in which an image with cracks is displayed on the screen, and (2) a second operation promotion display 10TM600 for urging the player to operate the push button 31B are displayed. The effect is included, and (3) an effect in which either an image in which the screen is cracked or an image in which the screen is not cracked in response to the player pressing the push button 31B is displayed.

As a result, when the combination of even-numbered symbols changes to the combination of odd-numbered symbols, an image in which the screen is finally split in (3) is displayed, so that the jackpot type is notified that the jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot. The stick controller 31A vibrates at the same time as the combination of decorative patterns changes. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 vibrates the stick controller 31A for a predetermined vibration period (for example, 3000 ms or more).

On the other hand, when the combination of even-numbered symbols does not change to the combination of odd-numbered symbols, the image in which the screen is not broken is finally displayed in (3), so that it is notified that the jackpot type is a normal jackpot. At this time, the stick controller 31A does not vibrate and remains in the non-special mode (non-vibration mode). That is, the probability change notification effect is not executed.

Here, in the present embodiment, as an effect mode of the probability change notification effect, a plurality of modes in which the light emitting color of the light emitting device (operation unit LED) provided in the stick controller 31A is different are provided. In this example, in response to the fact that the effect mode of the probability change notification effect is determined to be the "fourth aspect", the emission color of the operation unit LED becomes white, and the effect mode of the probability change notification effect is determined to be the "fifth mode". Correspondingly, the emission color of the operation unit LED becomes rainbow color. In the probability change notification effect of the fourth aspect, it is assumed that the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 3000 ms is executed once. Further, in the probability change notification effect of the fifth aspect, it is assumed that the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 4500 ms is executed once.

In the present embodiment, when the number of rounds of the probability variation jackpot that occurs is not at least the minimum number of rounds (2R in this example) (when it is either 4R or 10R in this example), the probability variation notification of the fourth aspect The effect can be executed, and the probability variation notification effect of the fifth aspect can be executed only when the number of rounds of the probability variation jackpot generated is the largest number of rounds (10R in this example).

In this way, even after the player is notified that a big hit will occur, it is possible to execute the probability change notification effect as a notification effect during fluctuation accompanied by vibration of the operation unit, and whether or not the probability change notification effect is executed will be controlled from now on. It suggests the type of jackpot to be performed (notifies whether or not it is a probability variation jackpot), and the mode of the probability variation notification effect (emission color of the light emitting part and execution period) also indicates the type of jackpot to be controlled from now on. It suggests (notifies the number of rounds). Therefore, the player will continue to be interested in whether or not the probability variation notification effect is executed and the effect mode even after the notification that the big hit will occur.

13-10 (1) to 13-10 (3) are explanatory views showing the relationship between the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the mode of the stick controller 31A when the jackpot type suggestion effect is executed. FIG. 13-10 (4) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the aspect of the stick controller 31A when the jackpot type suggestion effect is executed and the probability change notification effect is not executed. 13-10 (A4) and 13-10 (B4) show the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the mode of the stick controller 31A when the jackpot type suggestion effect is executed and the probability change notification effect is executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship of. In FIG. 13-10, the aspect of the stick controller 31A is shown in the lower right of the effect diagram in correspondence with the effect diagram.

As shown in FIG. 13-10 (1), the effect control CPU 120 has a decoration in which the display result is a "big hit" in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at the timing when the decorative symbol in the variation pattern should be stopped and displayed. The combination of symbols ("222" in this example) is stopped and displayed. At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the variation display of the small symbol is executed. At this time, in the active display area 10TM013, the active display 10TM003 in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is displayed.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (1), the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A as a non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (2), the effect control CPU 120 executes the jackpot type suggestion effect at the timing when the jackpot type suggestion effect in the fluctuation pattern should be executed, and the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, the transparent member (glass plate, etc.) constituting the screen of the image display device 5 is cracked while the combination of decorative symbols (“222” in this example) whose display result is “big hit” is stopped and displayed. The crack image (screen crack image 10TM500) of the entered mode is superimposed and displayed. The decorative pattern is an image having a higher display priority than the crack image (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, from the player's point of view, it seems that the decorative pattern and the crack image are displayed in this order from the front to the back. At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the variable display of the small symbol is continued.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (1), the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A as a non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (3), at the timing when the second operation promotion display should be displayed, the player is urged to operate the push button 31B at the center of the screen of the image display device 5. 2 Operation promotion display 10TM600 and a time bar 10TM600T for notifying the remaining period during which the operation of the push button 31B is valid are displayed. Since the second operation promotion display 10TM600 and the time bar 10TM600T are images having a higher display priority (the display layer is higher) than the screen crack image and the decorative symbol, the player sees the screen crack image and the decorative symbol. It seems that it is displayed in front of. At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the variation display of the small symbol is executed.

Next, when it is decided not to execute the probability change notification effect at the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (4), the effect control CPU 120 is operated by the player with the push button 31B. At the same timing, the combination of even-numbered symbols (“222” in this example) whose jackpot type is “2R normal jackpot” is continuously stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the image display device 5 is used. The characters "normal jackpot" are displayed in the center of the image display device 5 in a state where a crack image (screen crack image 10TM500) in which a crack is formed is superimposed and displayed on a transparent member (glass plate or the like) constituting the screen. Let me. At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the variation display of the small symbol is executed.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (4), the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A as a non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Further, when it is decided to execute the probability change notification effect of the fourth aspect at the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (A4), the effect control CPU 120 is the push button 31B by the player. The combination of even-numbered symbols (in this example, "222") whose jackpot type is "2R normal jackpot", which was stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at the timing of the operation, is the jackpot type. Is changed to a combination of odd-numbered symbols (“555” in this example) that becomes “4R probability variation jackpot”.

Further, the screen crack image 10TM500 is changed into an image in which the transparent member constituting the screen of the image display device 5 is cracked (screen cracked image 10TM500A), and the characters "probability variation jackpot" are displayed in the center of the image display device 5. Is displayed. Since the combination of odd-numbered symbols ("555" in this example) and the characters "probability variation jackpot" are images having a higher display priority (the display layer is higher) than the screen cracked image, the player Seems to be displayed in front of the cracked screen image. At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the variation display of the small symbol is executed. That is, the suggested jackpot type is changed from the normal jackpot to the probabilistic jackpot.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (A4), the effect control CPU 120 executes the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 3000 ms once in accordance with the execution of the probability change notification effect of the fourth aspect, and the operation unit LED. To emit white light.

Further, when it is decided to execute the probability change notification effect of the fifth aspect at the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (B4), the effect control CPU 120 is the push button 31B by the player. The combination of even-numbered symbols (“222” in this example) whose jackpot type is “2R normal jackpot”, which was stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at the timing of the operation, is selected as the jackpot type. Is changed to a combination of odd-numbered symbols (in this example, "777") in which "10R probability variation jackpot" is obtained.

Further, the screen crack image 10TM500 is changed into an image in which the transparent member constituting the screen of the image display device 5 is cracked (screen cracked image 10TM500A), and a "probability variation MAX jackpot" is displayed at the center of the image display device 5. Display characters. Since the combination of odd-numbered symbols ("777" in this example) and the characters "probability variation MAX jackpot" are images having a higher display priority (display layer is higher) than the screen cracked image, the player From here, it seems that it is displayed in front of the screen cracked image. At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the variation display of the small symbol is executed. That is, the suggested jackpot type is changed from the normal jackpot to the probabilistic jackpot, and the jackpot of the maximum number of rounds is notified.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (B4), the effect control CPU 120 executes an operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 4500 ms once in accordance with the execution of the probability change notification effect of the fifth aspect, and the operation unit LED. Lights up in rainbow colors.

In the probabilistic notification effect, the speakers 8L and 8R reproduce and output sound effects unique to the probabilistic notification effect (probability change notification effect of the fourth aspect: sound effect A, probability variation notification effect of the fifth aspect: sound effect B). The operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A may be executed and the operation unit LED may be made to emit light according to the period of time.

(Production determination process at the start of variable display)
When starting the variation display of the special symbol, the CPU 103 includes a display result specification command for specifying the display result, a variation pattern specification command for specifying the variation pattern, and a hold storage number subtraction specification command (first hold storage number subtraction designation). The command or the second hold storage number subtraction designation command) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

The effect control CPU 120 is a hold storage number subtraction designation command (first hold) that specifies that the hold storage number has been subtracted when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is started. Storage number subtraction specification command or second hold storage number subtraction specification command), display result specification command to specify the display result (big hit or miss, big hit type when it becomes a big hit), fluctuation time of special symbol and production content ( Based on receiving a set of commands called a variation pattern specification command that specifies (reach, pseudo-ream, etc.) from the game control microcomputer 100, the variation display of the special symbol is executed, and the special symbol is executed. It is possible to specify the fluctuation time and the content of the production (reach, pseudo-ream, etc.).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 receives a special symbol (first special symbol) from the game control microcomputer 100 when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the display result is confirmed. It is possible to identify that the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol) is completed and the display result is derived.

FIG. 13-11 is a flowchart showing an effect determination process executed at the start of fluctuation. The effect control CPU 120 executes the effect change start effect determination process shown in FIGS. 13-11 in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-mentioned one set of commands accompanying the start of the variation display of the special symbol, the display result designation is the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol. An effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) for execution based on a command and a variation pattern specification command is set, and a decorative pattern based on the specified variation pattern is set. The effect to be executed (and the effect not to be executed) during the variation display is determined by the effect determination process at the start of the variation shown in FIGS. 13-11.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first vibration effect is executed and the effect mode based on a table (see FIGS. 13-13) for determining whether or not the first vibration effect is executed and the effect mode (step). S10TM1000).

As shown in FIG. 13-13, in the first vibration effect execution / non-execution and effect mode determination table, the execution / non-execution and effect mode of the first vibration effect are determined according to the display result specified by the display result designation command. Judgment value is assigned.

When the display result is "off", the effect control CPU 120 determines that the first vibration effect is not executed at a rate of 90%, and the first mode (emission color: white, execution) at a rate of 7%. It is decided to execute the first vibration effect of the period: 1500 ms), and to execute the first vibration effect of the second aspect (emission color: red, execution period: 3000 ms) at a rate of 3%.

When the display result is "big hit", the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the first vibration effect at a rate of 50%, and executes the first mode (emission color: white, execution) at a rate of 15%. It was decided to execute the first vibration effect of the period: 1500 ms), and it was decided to execute the first vibration effect of the second aspect (emission color: red, execution period: 3000 ms) at a rate of 30%. It is decided to execute the first vibration effect of the third aspect (emission color: rainbow, execution period: 3000 ms) at a rate of%.

As described above, the expectation of a big hit is higher when the first vibration effect is executed than when the first vibration effect is not executed. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the first vibration effect is executed immediately after the start of the fluctuation.

Further, regarding the production mode of the first vibration effect, the second mode has a higher expectation of a big hit than the first mode, and the third mode has a higher expectation of a big hit than the second mode. There is. In particular, in this example, it is determined that the display result of the fluctuation display is a "big hit" because the first vibration effect of the third aspect is executed. That is, the first vibration effect of the third aspect is an example of the jackpot confirmation effect that suggests (notifies) that the display result of the fluctuation display has won the jackpot. As described above, regarding the effect mode when the first vibration effect is executed, the order of the first aspect (expectation degree: low) <second aspect (expectation degree: high) <third aspect (expectation degree: fixed) Expectations for big hits are high. Due to the existence of the plurality of effect modes in this way, when the first vibration effect is executed, the player also pays attention to the effect mode (emission color of the operation unit LED and the vibration period of the stick controller 31A). It will be.

If there are multiple models with different jackpot probabilities as game machines with a specific character or story as a motif (for example, as a game machine of the same series, the full spec with the lowest jackpot probability and the jackpot probability are intermediate. (When there is a middle spec and a light spec with the highest jackpot probability), the expectation of the first vibration effect in the model with the highest jackpot probability and the expectation of the first vibration effect in the model with the lowest jackpot probability. May be different, or may be common. For example, when using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 at the time of low probability, in the model of the middle spec that is designed to win the big hit at 1/199, the big hit of the first vibration effect of the first aspect is used. The expectation is 60% or more, the jackpot expectation of the first vibration effect of the second aspect is 80% or more, the jackpot expectation of the first vibration effect of the third aspect is 100%, and the set value 1 at the time of low probability is supported. When using the display result judgment table, the jackpot expectation of the first vibration effect of the first aspect is 50% or more, and the jackpot expectation of the second aspect is 50% or more in the full-spec model in which the jackpot is won at 1/319. The jackpot expectation of the first vibration effect may be 70% or more, and the jackpot expectation of the first vibration effect of the third aspect may be 100%.

Next, in the effect control CPU 120, the variation pattern determined at the start of the variation, that is, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern accompanied by a reach effect (“normal reach loss”, “super reach loss”, “super reach loss”, “ It is determined whether or not it is a "normal reach jackpot" or a "super reach jackpot") (step S10TM1010). If it is not a variation pattern accompanied by a reach effect (when the variation pattern is “non-reach out of reach”) (NO in step S10TM1010), the process proceeds to step S10TM1030.

When the fluctuation pattern is accompanied by a reach effect (when the variation pattern is "normal reach loss", "super reach loss", "normal reach jackpot" or "super reach jackpot") (YES in step S10TM1010), for effect control. The CPU 120 determines whether or not the second vibration effect is executed based on a table (see FIGS. 13-14) for determining whether or not the second vibration effect is executed (step S10TM1020).

As shown in FIG. 13-14, in the execution / non-execution determination table of the second vibration effect, determination values for determining the execution / non-execution of the second vibration effect are assigned according to the display result specified by the display result specification command. It has been.

The effect control CPU 120 determines that the second vibration effect is not executed at a rate of 100% when the display result is "off". When the display result is "big hit", the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the second vibration effect at a rate of 95%, and the second vibration effect (emission color: rainbow,) at a rate of 5%. Execution period: 3000 ms) is decided to be executed.

As described above, in this example, it is determined that the display result of the fluctuation display becomes a "big hit" by executing the second vibration effect. That is, the second vibration effect is an example of a jackpot confirmation effect that suggests (notifies) that the display result of the fluctuation display has won the jackpot.

Next, in the effect control CPU 120, the fluctuation pattern determined at the start of fluctuation, that is, the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is a fluctuation pattern accompanied by super reach (“super reach loss” or “super reach jackpot”). (Step S10TM1030). If the fluctuation pattern is not accompanied by super reach (if the fluctuation pattern is not "super reach out" or "super reach jackpot") (NO in step S10TM1030), the process proceeds to step S10TM1070.

In the case of a fluctuation pattern accompanied by super reach (when the fluctuation pattern is "out of super reach" or "super reach jackpot") (YES in step S10TM1030), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the strong development effect is executed. , The determination is made based on a table (see FIG. 13-15) for determining whether or not the strong development effect is executed (step S10TM1040).

As shown in FIG. 13-15, in the execution / non-execution determination table of the strong development effect, a determination value for determining the execution / non-execution of the strong development effect is assigned according to the display result specified by the display result specification command. There is.

When the display result is "off", the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the strong development effect at a rate of 80%, and decides to execute the strong development effect at a rate of 20%. When the display result is a "big hit", the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the strong development effect at a rate of 40%, and decides to execute the strong development effect at a rate of 60%.

In this way, the expectation of a big hit is higher when the strong development effect is executed than when the strong development effect is not executed. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the strong development effect is executed.

In addition, when there are multiple models with different jackpot probabilities as game machines with a specific character or story as a motif (for example, as a game machine of the same series, the full spec with the lowest jackpot probability and the jackpot probability are intermediate. If there is a difference between the expectation of strong development production in the model with high jackpot probability and the expectation of strong development production in the model with low jackpot probability in the middle spec and the light spec with the highest jackpot probability) It may be made to be possible, or it may be common. For example, when using the display result judgment table corresponding to the set value 1 at the time of low probability, the big hit expectation of the strong development effect is 40% in the middle spec model that wins the big hit at 1/199. With the above, when using the display result judgment table corresponding to the set value 1 at the time of low probability, even with a full-spec model that wins a big hit at 1/319, the big hit expectation of strong development production is 40. It may be% or more.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the third vibration effect is executed based on a table (see FIGS. 13-16) that determines whether or not the third vibration effect is executed (step S10TM1050).

As shown in FIG. 13-16, in the execution / non-execution determination table of the third vibration effect, determination values for determining the execution / non-execution of the third vibration effect are assigned according to the display result specified by the display result specification command. It has been.

When the display result is "off", the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the third vibration effect at a rate of 95%, and decides to execute the third vibration effect at a rate of 5%. To do. When the display result is "big hit", the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the third vibration effect at a rate of 30%, and the third vibration effect (emission color: white, at a rate of 70%). Execution period: 1500 ms) is determined to be executed.

As described above, the expectation of a big hit is higher when the third vibration effect is executed than when the third vibration effect is not executed. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the third vibration effect is executed.

In addition, when there are multiple models with different jackpot probabilities as game machines with a specific character or story as a motif (for example, as a game machine of the same series, the full spec with the lowest jackpot probability and the jackpot probability are intermediate. If there is a difference between the expectation of strong development production in the model with high jackpot probability and the expectation of strong development production in the model with low jackpot probability in the middle spec and the light spec with the highest jackpot probability) It may be made to be possible, or it may be common. For example, when using the display result judgment table corresponding to the set value 1 at the time of low probability, in the model of the middle spec that is designed to win the big hit at 1/199, the big hit expectation degree of the third vibration effect is 50. % Or more, and when using the display result judgment table corresponding to the set value 1 at the time of low probability, even with a full-spec model that wins a big hit at 1/319, the big hit expectation of the third vibration effect May be 50% or more.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fourth vibration effect is executed based on a table (see FIG. 13-17) that determines whether or not the fourth vibration effect is executed (step S10TM1060).

As shown in FIG. 13-17, in the execution / non-execution determination table of the 4th vibration effect, determination values for determining the execution / non-execution of the 4th vibration effect are assigned according to the display result specified by the display result specification command. It has been.

The effect control CPU 120 determines that the fourth vibration effect is not executed at a rate of 100% when the display result is "off". When the display result is "big hit", the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the fourth vibration effect at a rate of 95%, and the fourth vibration effect (emission color: rainbow,) at a rate of 5%. Execution period: 3000 ms) is decided to be executed.

As described above, in this example, it is determined that the display result of the fluctuation display becomes a "big hit" by executing the fourth vibration effect. That is, the fourth vibration effect is an example of a jackpot confirmation effect that suggests (notifies) that the display result of the fluctuation display has won the jackpot.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect, which will be described later, based on a table (see FIG. 13-18) for determining whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect (step S10TM1070).

The cut-in notice effect in the present embodiment is a kind of notice effect that suggests a display result, and is a predetermined timing when the battle effect is being executed (in this example, 5 seconds when the first operation promotion display is displayed). At the previous timing), the cut-in image 10TM700 in which the characters “extreme heat” are displayed is displayed in the entire central region in the vertical direction of the screen of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 13-24 (9)). From the player's point of view, when an image related to another effect is displayed, suddenly, a display mode having a higher priority than the image related to the other effect (the display layer is higher and is related to the other effect). Since the cut-in image (which appears to be displayed in front of the image) is displayed, it will be attracted to the screen change when the cut-in notice effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 13-18, in the execution / non-execution determination table of the cut-in notice effect, a determination value for determining whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect is assigned according to the display result specified by the display result specification command. It has been.

When the display result is "off", the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 80%, and decides to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 20%. To do. When the display result is a "big hit", the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 50%, and decides to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 50%. To do.

In this way, the expectation of a big hit is higher when the cut-in notice effect is executed than when the cut-in notice effect is not executed. Therefore, when the battle effect is being executed, the player pays attention to whether or not the cut-in notice effect is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the second vibration effect (determines whether or not to execute in step S10TM1020), the third vibration effect (determines whether or not to execute in step S10TM1050), or the fourth vibration effect (determines whether or not to execute in step S10TM1060). It is determined whether it is decided to execute any of the above (step S10TM1080). If it is decided not to execute any of the second vibration effect, the third vibration effect, and the fourth vibration effect (NO in step S10TM1080), the process proceeds to step S10TM1100.

When it is decided to execute any of the second vibration effect, the third vibration effect, or the fourth vibration effect (YES in step S10TM1080), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the vibration notice effect is executed. The notice target is determined based on whether or not the vibration notice effect is executed and the table for determining the notice target (see FIG. 13-19) (step S10TM1090).

As shown in FIG. 13-19, in the vibration advance notice effect execution / non-execution and advance notice target determination table, the vibration advance notice effect is executed or not and the vibration advance notice effect is executed according to the display result specified by the display result specification command. Judgment values for determining the type of single vibration effect (second vibration effect, third vibration effect, or fourth vibration effect) that is announced to be performed (subject to the advance notice) are assigned.

The effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration notice effect at a rate of 90% when the display result is "off" and the single vibration effect determined to be executed is the third vibration effect. It is decided not to do so, and it is decided to execute the vibration notice effect with the notice target as the third vibration effect at a rate of 10%.

The effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration notice effect at a rate of 80% when the display result is a "big hit" and the single vibration effect determined to be executed is the second vibration effect. It is decided not to do so, and it is decided to execute the vibration notice effect with the notice target as the second vibration effect at a rate of 20%.
The effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration notice effect at a rate of 70% when the display result is a "big hit" and the single vibration effect determined to be executed is the third vibration effect. It is decided not to do so, and it is decided to execute the vibration notice effect with the notice target as the third vibration effect at a rate of 30%.
The effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration notice effect at a rate of 80% when the display result is a "big hit" and the single vibration effect determined to be executed is the fourth vibration effect. It is decided not to do so, and it is decided to execute the vibration notice effect with the notice target as the fourth vibration effect at a rate of 20%.
The effect control CPU 120 has a rate of 80% when the display result is a "big hit" and the single vibration effect determined to be executed is the second vibration effect and the third vibration effect. It is decided not to execute the vibration notice effect, and it is decided to execute the vibration notice effect with the notice target as the second vibration effect at a rate of 20%.
The effect control CPU 120 has a rate of 80% when the display result is a "big hit" and the single vibration effect determined to be executed is the second vibration effect and the fourth vibration effect. It is decided not to execute the vibration notice effect, and it is decided to execute the vibration notice effect with the notice target as the second vibration effect at a rate of 20%.
The effect control CPU 120 has a ratio of 60% when the display result is a "big hit" and the single vibration effect determined to be executed is the third vibration effect and the fourth vibration effect. It is decided not to execute the vibration notice effect, and it is decided to execute the vibration notice effect with the notice target as the third vibration effect at a rate of 40%.
The effect control CPU 120 is used when the display result is a "big hit" and the single vibration effect determined to be executed is the second vibration effect, the third vibration effect, and the fourth vibration effect. , It is decided not to execute the vibration notice effect at a rate of 80%, and it is decided to execute the vibration notice effect with the notice target as the second vibration effect at a rate of 20%.

As described above, the expectation of a big hit is higher when the vibration notice effect is executed than when the vibration notice effect is not executed. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the vibration notice effect is executed.

In the present embodiment, when it is decided to execute a plurality of types of single vibration effects, an example in which the earliest single vibration effect to be executed when the vibration advance notice effect is executed is targeted for advance notice. However, not limited to such a form, when it is decided to execute a plurality of types of single vibration effects, when the vibration notice effect is executed, the second and subsequent single vibration effects are executed. It may be subject to notice. For example, when it is decided that the third vibration effect and the fourth vibration effect are to be executed, the vibration notice effect may be executed with the advance notice target as the fourth vibration effect.

Further, in the case where it is decided to execute a plurality of types of single vibration effects in this way, and when it is possible to execute the vibration notice effect for which the unit vibration effect to be executed later is the notification target, the first The jackpot expectation is higher when the vibration notice effect that targets the single vibration effect that is executed later is executed than when the vibration notice effect that targets the unit vibration effect that is executed later is executed. May be higher.

According to such a configuration, when a plurality of types of single vibration effects are executed, the player pays attention to which single vibration effect corresponds to the vibration notice effect. It is possible to further improve the interest of the single vibration effect and the vibration notice effect.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the third vibration effect (determines whether or not to execute in step S10TM1050), a strong development effect (determines whether or not to execute in step S10TM1040), or a cut-in notice effect (determines whether or not to execute in step S10TM1070). It is determined whether it is decided to execute any of them (step S10TM1100). If it is decided not to execute any of the third vibration effect, the strong development effect, and the cut-in notice effect (NO in step S10TM1100), the process proceeds to step S10TM1120.

If it is decided to execute any of the third vibration effect, the strong development effect, or the cut-in notice effect (YES in step S10TM1100), whether or not the timer effect described later is executed and the corresponding notice effect are displayed. , The determination is made based on a table (see FIG. 13-20) for determining whether or not the timer effect is executed and the corresponding advance notice effect (step S10TM1110).

In this embodiment, the timer effect can be executed based on the determination result at the start of fluctuation. The timer effect is an effect corresponding to any of the third vibration effect, the strong development effect, and the cut-in advance notice effect, which are a kind of the notice effect suggesting the display result, and the third vibration effect, the strong development effect, and the cut-in advance effect. This is an effect of displaying (notifying) the remaining time (number of seconds) until any of the cut-in notice effects is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the timer effect is the variation corresponding to the third vibration effect, which is a kind of the notice effect during the variation, which suggests the display result of the variation display (variation display in which the start condition is satisfied) being executed. It is an example of a medium-sized notice effect, and even an example of a variable-time notice effect that corresponds to a strong development effect, which is a type of variable-time notice effect that suggests the display result of the variable display (variable display that satisfies the start condition). Yes, it is also an example of the variable notice effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect, which is a kind of the variable notice effect that suggests the display result of the variable display (variation display in which the start condition is satisfied) being executed.

In this embodiment, the timer effect is started at a timing n seconds before any of the third vibration effect, the strong development effect, and the cut-in notice effect is executed. In the timer effect, the timer image 10TM800 is displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. At the timing when the timer image 10TM800 is displayed, the timer image 10TM800 shows an initial value n (for example, a numerical value of "00:30" indicating 30 seconds, a numerical value of "01:00" indicating 60 seconds) (FIG. See 13-23 (1)). Then, the numerical value indicated by the timer image 10TM800 (the numerical value displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5) is subtracted and updated by 1 every second, and the timing (00:00) is reached (00: 00). At the timing when the remaining 0 seconds are reached), one of the third vibration effect, the strong development effect, and the cut-in notice effect is executed (see FIG. 13-23 (7)). As described above, the timer effect is an effect of performing a subtraction operation (countdown operation until the start of the battle effect) of the remaining time (remaining n seconds to remaining 0 seconds) indicated by the timer image.

As shown in FIG. 13-20, in the table for determining whether or not the timer effect is executed and the corresponding advance notice effect, whether or not the timer effect is executed and its timer are determined according to the display result specified by the display result specification command. Judgment values for determining the advance notice effect (third vibration effect, strong development effect, or cut-in advance notice effect) corresponding to the effect are assigned.

The effect control CPU 120 does not execute the timer effect at a rate of 70% when the display result is "off" and the advance notice effect determined to be executed is the third vibration effect. It is decided to execute the timer effect corresponding to the third vibration effect at a rate of 30%.
The effect control CPU 120 does not execute the timer effect at a rate of 70% when the display result is "off" and the advance notice effect determined to be executed is a strong development effect. It is decided to execute the timer effect corresponding to the strong development effect at a rate of 30%.
The effect control CPU 120 does not execute the timer effect at a rate of 70% when the display result is "off" and the notice effect determined to be executed is the cut-in notice effect. It is decided to execute the timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 30%.
The effect control CPU 120 has a timer effect at a rate of 60% when the display result is "off" and the advance notice effect determined to be executed is the third vibration effect and the strong development effect. Decided not to execute, decided to execute the timer effect corresponding to the third vibration effect at a rate of 20%, and decided to execute the timer effect corresponding to the strong development effect at a rate of 20%. ..
The effect control CPU 120 timers at a rate of 60% when the display result is "off" and the advance notice effects determined to be executed are the third vibration effect and the cut-in notice effect. Decided not to execute the effect, decided to execute the timer effect corresponding to the third vibration effect at a rate of 20%, and to execute the timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 20%. decide.
The effect control CPU 120 has a timer effect at a rate of 60% when the display result is "off" and the advance notice effect decided to be executed is a strong development effect and a cut-in advance notice effect. Decided not to execute, decided to execute the timer effect corresponding to the strong development effect at a rate of 20%, and decided to execute the timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 20%. ..
The effect control CPU 120 is 55 when the display result is "off" and the advance notice effects determined to be executed are the third vibration effect, the strong development effect, and the cut-in advance notice effect. It was decided not to execute the timer effect at a rate of%, and it was decided to execute the timer effect corresponding to the third vibration effect at a rate of 15%, and the timer effect corresponding to the strong development effect was performed at a rate of 15%. It is decided to execute, and it is decided to execute the timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 15%.

The effect control CPU 120 does not execute the timer effect at a rate of 40% when the display result is a "big hit" and the advance notice effect determined to be executed is the third vibration effect. It is decided to execute the timer effect corresponding to the third vibration effect at a rate of 60%.
The effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the timer effect at a rate of 40% when the display result is a "big hit" and the advance notice effect determined to be executed is a strong development effect. It is decided to execute the timer effect corresponding to the strong development effect at a rate of 60%.
The effect control CPU 120 does not execute the timer effect at a rate of 40% when the display result is a "big hit" and the notice effect determined to be executed is the cut-in notice effect. It is decided to execute the timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 60%.
The effect control CPU 120 has a timer effect at a rate of 30% when the display result is a "big hit" and the advance notice effect determined to be executed is the third vibration effect and the strong development effect. Decided not to execute, decided to execute the timer effect corresponding to the third vibration effect at a rate of 35%, and decided to execute the timer effect corresponding to the strong development effect at a rate of 35%. ..
The effect control CPU 120 timers at a rate of 30% when the display result is a "big hit" and the advance notice effects determined to be executed are the third vibration effect and the cut-in notice effect. Decided not to execute the effect, decided to execute the timer effect corresponding to the third vibration effect at a rate of 35%, and to execute the timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 35%. decide.
The effect control CPU 120 has a timer effect at a rate of 30% when the display result is a "big hit" and the advance notice effect decided to be executed is a strong development effect and a cut-in advance notice effect. Decided not to execute, decided to execute the timer effect corresponding to the strong development effect at a rate of 35%, and decided to execute the timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 35%. ..
The effect control CPU 120 is used when the display result is a "big hit" and the advance notice effects determined to be executed are the third vibration effect, the strong development effect, and the cut-in advance notice effect. It was decided not to execute the timer effect at a rate of%, it was decided to execute the timer effect corresponding to the third vibration effect at a rate of 30%, and the timer effect corresponding to the strong development effect was performed at a rate of 30%. It is decided to execute, and it is decided to execute the timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 30%.

In this way, the jackpot expectation is higher when the timer effect is executed than when the timer effect is not executed. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the timer effect is executed.

In the present embodiment, when it is decided to execute a plurality of types of advance notice effects, when the timer effect is executed, the timer effect corresponds to any one of the plurality of types of advance notice effects. Although an example of executing the above is shown, the timer effect may be executed corresponding to each of a plurality of types of advance notice effects, not limited to such a form. For example, when it is decided to execute the third vibration effect and the cut-in notice effect as the notice effect, the first timer effect corresponding to the third vibration effect is executed and the cut-in notice effect is supported. The second timer effect may be executed. That is, it may be possible to execute a plurality of timer effects for different notice effects in one variation display. In this way, when the timer effect is executed a plurality of times in one variable display, the first timer effect and the second timer effect may be executed in parallel at the same time.

According to such an effect configuration, the second timer effect is executed when the player expects that one of the advance notice effects is executed due to the execution of the first timer effect. As a result, it becomes possible to expect that another advance notice effect is executed, so that the player's expectation can be gradually improved.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display result determined at the start of fluctuation, that is, the display result designated by the display result designation command is a "big hit" (step S10TM1120). If the display result specified by the display result specification command is not a "big hit" (NO in step S10TM1120), the process ends as it is.

When the display result specified by the display result specification command is "big hit" (YES in step S10TM1120), the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the blessing effect (step S10TM1130) and suggests the big hit type. It is decided to execute the production (step S10TM1040).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the probability change notification effect is executed and the effect mode based on a table (see FIG. 13-21) for determining whether or not the probability change notification effect is executed and the effect mode.

As shown in FIG. 13-21, in the probability change notification effect execution presence / absence and effect mode determination table, the probability change notification effect execution presence / absence and effect mode are determined according to the display result (big hit type) specified by the display result specification command. Judgment values for determination are assigned.

When the jackpot type is "2R normal jackpot", the effect control CPU 120 determines that the probability variation notification effect is not executed at a rate of 100%.

When the jackpot type is "4R probability variation jackpot", the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the probability variation notification effect at a rate of 50%, and the probability variation notification effect (emission color:) of the fourth aspect at a rate of 50%. White, execution period: 3000 ms) is decided to be executed.

When the jackpot type is "10R probability variation jackpot", the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the probability variation notification effect at a rate of 50%, and determines that the probability variation notification effect of the fourth aspect (emission color: It is decided to execute white, execution period: 3000 ms), and to execute the probability change notification effect (emission color: rainbow, execution period: 4500 ms) of the fifth aspect at a rate of 25%.

As described above, since the probability variation notification effect of the fifth aspect is executed only when the jackpot type is "10R probability variation jackpot", the player can maximize the probability variation notification effect of the fifth aspect. Know that you have won the probable change jackpot in the number of rounds. Further, since the probability variation notification effect of the fourth aspect can be executed when the jackpot type is "4R probability variation jackpot" and the jackpot type is "10R probability variation jackpot", the probability variation notification effect of the fourth aspect is possible. By executing, the player has a jackpot type of either "4R probability variation jackpot" or "10R probability variation jackpot", that is, "probability variation jackpot" (minimum round (2R) denial, normal jackpot denial). Understand that.

Here, when the jackpot type is "4R probability variation jackpot", the probability variation notification effect is not executed at a rate of 50%, and when the jackpot type is "10R probability variation jackpot", the probability variation is 50%. Since the notification effect is not executed, even if the probability variation notification effect is not executed in the jackpot type suggestion effect, the jackpot type may be "4R probability variation jackpot" or "10R probability variation jackpot". Therefore, the player can expect that the jackpot type is "4R probability variation jackpot" or "10R probability variation jackpot" even when the probability variation notification effect is not executed.

Here, when the jackpot type is "4R probability variation jackpot" or "10R probability variation jackpot" and the probability variation notification effect is not executed, a combination of even symbols is once used as the jackpot symbol ("222" in this example). Is fixedly stopped, and after displaying the characters "normal jackpot" in the center of the image display device 5, it is notified that the jackpot type is "4R probability variation jackpot" or "10R probability variation jackpot" during the jackpot round. You may perform promotion production and the like. The promotion effect during this round may be an effect that involves the vibration operation of the stick controller 31A and the light emission of the operation unit LED.

(Example of production of single vibration effect and effect of notice effect during fluctuation accompanied by vibration of operation part)
Next, in the determination at the start of fluctuation, the display result is determined to be "big hit", the jackpot type is determined to be "10R probability variation jackpot", and the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "super reach jackpot (battle production [winning production])". However, regarding the production example when it is decided to execute the single vibration effect, the vibration notice effect, the vibration notice effect, the cut-in notice effect, and the timer effect accompanied by the vibration of the operation unit in the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-22 to 13-24.

FIG. 13-22 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the single vibration effect, the variable notice effect accompanied by the vibration of the operation unit, the vibration notice effect, the cut-in notice effect, and the timer effect. -23 and FIGS. 13-24 are explanatory views showing an example of an effect image related to a single vibration effect, a variable notice effect accompanied by vibration of the operation unit, a vibration notice effect, a cut-in notice effect, and a timer effect.

In this example, in the effect determination process at the time of starting winning (see FIG. 12-6 of [Explanation of the feature unit 07TM]), the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display to the red mode in step S07TM1020. In step S07TM1050, it is assumed that the change pattern of the change effect is determined to be the change pattern (for example, change pattern 107) displayed in the active display in the red mode at the time of active shift.

Further, in this example, in the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation, the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the first vibration effect of the second aspect in step S10TM1000, and executes the strong development effect in step S10TM1040. Determined, it is decided to execute the third vibration effect in step S10TM1050, it is decided to execute the fourth vibration effect in step S10TM1060, it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect in step S10TM1070, and it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect in step S10TM1090. Decided to execute the vibration notice effect for which the third vibration effect is to be announced, decided to execute the timer effect corresponding to the third vibration effect in step S10TM1110, and execute the blessing effect in step S10TM1130. It is assumed that it is decided to execute the jackpot type suggestion effect in step S10TM1140, and to execute the probability change notification effect of the fifth aspect in step S10TM1150.

First, as shown in FIG. 13-23 (1), when the CUP 103 starts the variation display of the first special symbol (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 13-22), the effect control CPU 120 receives the variation pattern designation command. Based on the designated variation pattern, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5 are small. Start the variable display of the symbol. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 10TM013 of the image display device 5 to display the active display 10TM003A in a red mode corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes a timer effect corresponding to the third vibration effect, and displays the timer image 10TM800 (displays the characters "01: 00") in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes the first vibration effect of the second aspect, executes the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 3000 ms once, and causes the operation unit LED to emit red light.

In this example, the timing at which the timer image 10TM800 is displayed and the timing at which the first vibration effect is executed are common, but the timing is not limited to this, and the timer image 10TM800 is displayed after the first vibration effect is completed. It may be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-23 (2), at the timing when 5000 ms has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation display (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 13-22), the effect control CPU 120 notifies the third vibration effect. The vibration notice effect is executed, and the active display 10TM003AS of the red mode and the operation mode is displayed in the active display area 10TM013. That is, the active display of the red mode is changed from the stationary mode to the operating mode while maintaining the red mode of the active display.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the timer effect corresponding to the third vibration effect, and displays the characters of the timer image 10TM800 (“00:55”) in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. ) Is updated and displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 has completed the first vibration effect of the second aspect, and the aspect of the stick controller 31A is a non-special aspect (non-vibration aspect).

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-23 (3), at the timing at which the reach state in the fluctuation pattern should be established (the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 13-22), the effect control CPU 120 displays the symbol of the image display device 5. The decorative symbol of "2" is stopped and displayed in the area 5L and the symbol display area 5R to enter the reach state, and the characters "reach !!" are displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5. At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the variable display of the small symbol is continued. That is, the small symbol is also stopped in the small symbol display area 5l corresponding to the symbol display area 5L in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the small symbol display area 5r corresponding to the symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. It is continuously displayed in a variable manner without being displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the timer effect corresponding to the third vibration effect, and displays the characters of the timer image 10TM800 (“00:55”) in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. ) Is updated and displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A as a non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-23 (4), at a timing (for example, 40 seconds before the start of the battle effect) before the super reach development in the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command. Yes, at the timing of T4 shown in FIGS. 13-22), a strong development effect is executed, and the dark image 10TM400 is displayed as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5, so that the background image, the decorative pattern, and the like are displayed. In addition, a blackout effect is performed to reduce the visibility of the reach effect image and make it difficult to see.

Here, due to the blackout effect, the background image, the decorative pattern, and the reach effect image are in a visually difficult state, but the active display 10TM003AS and the small symbol in the red mode and the operation mode remain visible. That is, while the visibility of the decorative symbol "2" that was stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R and the decorative symbol that was variablely displayed in the symbol display area 5C is reduced, the active display area The visibility of the active display 10TM003AS of the red mode and the operation mode displayed in 10TM013 and the small symbols variablely displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r is not deteriorated.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the timer effect corresponding to the third vibration effect, and displays the characters of the timer image 10TM800 (“00:40”) in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. ) Is updated and displayed. In this way, the timer image 10TM800 is visible even during the period when the blackout effect is being executed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A as a non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-23 (5), the effect control is performed at the timing (the timing of T4A shown in FIG. 13-22) when a predetermined period (10 seconds in this example) has elapsed since the strong development effect was started. The CPU 120 continuously displays the blackout image 10TM400, and executes an effect effect of superimposing the flame effect image 10TM410 and the characters of "decisive battle" on the blackout image 10TM400. The flame effect image 10TM410 is an image having a higher display priority than the darkening image 10TM400 (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground), and the characters "decisive battle" are further displayed than the flame effect image 10TM410. This is an image with a high priority (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, from the front to the back, it seems to the player that the characters "decisive battle", the flame effect image 10TM410, and the darkening image 10TM400 are displayed in this order.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the timer effect corresponding to the third vibration effect, and displays the characters of the timer image 10TM800 (“00:30”) in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. ) Is updated and displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 vibrates the stick controller 31A for 1500 ms in response to a predetermined effect execution period (for example, a period in which the characters “decisive battle” are displayed) (ON: 1500 ms, 0FF: (Period of 500 ms) is executed 10 times to make the operation unit LED emit white light.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-23 (6), the effect control is performed at the timing (the timing of T4B shown in FIG. 13-22) when a predetermined period (30 seconds in this example) has elapsed since the strong development effect was started. The CPU 120 performs a movable body operation effect of operating the movable body 10TM450 from a tilted position to an upright position.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the timer effect corresponding to the third vibration effect, and displays the characters of the timer image 10TM800 (“00:10”) in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. ) Is updated and displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 once executes an operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 10000 ms in accordance with a predetermined effect execution period (for example, a period in which the movable body 10TM450 is in the upright position) to operate the effect control CPU 120. The unit LED emits white light.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-23 (7), the effect control is performed at the timing (the timing of T4C shown in FIG. 13-22) when a predetermined period (40 seconds in this example) has elapsed since the strong development effect was started. The CPU 120 executes an operation of returning the movable body 10TM450 in the upright position to the tilted position, and ends the movable body operation effect.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the timer effect corresponding to the third vibration effect, and displays the characters of the timer image 10TM800 (“00:00”) in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. ) Is updated and displayed. At this timing (timing of T4C shown in FIGS. 13-22), the remaining time indicated by the timer image 10TM800 is updated to 0. That is, it is notified that the timer image 10TM800 is updated to the final mode, and it is the timing when the highly expected effect (third vibration effect in this example) is started.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A as a non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-23 (8), at the timing to be developed into super reach in the fluctuation pattern (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 13-22), the effect control CPU 120 is accompanied by the end of the strong development effect. , End the blackout effect and effect effect, and execute the battle effect. Here, as the battle effect is executed, the image display device 5 displays the ally character 10TM200A and the enemy character 10TM200B. The effect control CPU 120 ends the vibration notice effect for which the third vibration effect is a notice target, and causes the active display area 10TM013 to display the active display 10TM003A in the red mode. That is, in response to the execution of the third vibration effect, which was the target of the vibration notice effect, the active display of the red mode is changed from the operation mode to the stationary mode while maintaining the red mode of the active display. It is changing (returning).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 ends the timer effect corresponding to the third vibration effect, and displays the characters of the timer image 10TM800 (“00: 00”) displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. ) Is deleted.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes the third vibration effect, executes the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 1500 ms once, and causes the operation unit LED to emit white light.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-24 (9), at the timing 5 seconds before the first operation promotion display is displayed (timing of T6 shown in FIG. 13-22), the effect control CPU 120 is the image display device. With the ally character 10TM200A and the enemy character 10TM200B displayed in the center of the screen of 5, the cut-in notice effect is executed, and the characters "extreme heat" are displayed in the entire central area of the image display device 5 in the vertical direction of the screen. The cut-in image 10TM700 is displayed. From the player's point of view, when an image related to another effect is displayed, suddenly, a display mode having a higher priority than the image related to the other effect (the display layer is higher and is related to the other effect). Since the cut-in image (which appears to be displayed in front of the image) is displayed, it will be attracted to the screen change when the cut-in notice effect is executed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A as a non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-24 (10), a battle effect image 10TM250 suggesting that the victory or defeat of the battle is decided while the ally character 10TM200A is launching the final attack on the enemy character 10TM200B in the battle production is displayed. At the timing when the effect control CPU 120 should display the first operation promotion display 10TM300 (the timing of T7 shown in FIGS. 13-22), the first operation promotion is performed at the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The display 10TM300, the time bar 10TM300T for notifying the remaining period during which the operation of the stick controller 31A is valid, and the characters "close !!" are displayed.

Here, the first operation promotion display 10TM300, the time bar 10TM300T, and the characters "close !!" have a higher display priority than the background image and the super reach effect (battle effect) image (the display layer is higher). ) Since it is an image, it appears to the player that it is displayed in front of the background image and the super reach effect (battle effect) image.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes the fourth vibration effect, executes the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 3000 ms once, and causes the operation unit LED to emit light in rainbow colors.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-24 (11), the effect control CPU 120 executes the winning effect at the timing when the stick controller 31A is operated by the player (the timing of T8 shown in FIG. 13-22). To do. In the victory effect, with the image display device 5 displaying the ally character 10TM200A that has won the enemy character 10TM200B, the characters "victory" are displayed in the center of the image display device 5, and the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed. In addition, the combination of decorative symbols (“222” in this example) whose display result is “big hit” is stopped swinging. At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the variable display of the small symbol is continued.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes the blessing effect and corresponds to the execution period of the predetermined effect (the period during which the combination of decorative symbols is stopped swinging (the period from T8 to T9 shown in FIGS. 13-22)). The operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 6000 ms is executed once, and the operation unit LED is made to emit rainbow-colored light.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 13-24 (12), at the timing at which the decorative symbol in the variation pattern should be stopped and displayed (the timing of T8A shown in FIG. 13-22), the effect control CPU 120 has the symbol display areas 5L and 5C. The combination of decorative symbols (“222” in this example) whose display result is “big hit” is stopped and displayed on 5R (however, it is not stopped until the final stop). At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the variable display of the small symbol is continued.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 ends the blessing effect, and the mode of the stick controller 31A is set to a non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 13-24 (13), at the timing at which the jackpot type suggestion effect in the fluctuation pattern should be executed (the timing of T9 shown in FIG. 13-22), the effect control CPU 120 performs the jackpot type suggestion effect. The image display device 5 is executed, and the combination of decorative symbols (in this example, the combination of even-numbered symbols "222") whose display result is "big hit" is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. A crack image (screen crack image 10TM500) in which a crack is formed is superimposed and displayed on a transparent member (glass plate or the like) constituting the screen. The decorative pattern is an image having a higher display priority than the crack image (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, from the player's point of view, it seems that the decorative pattern and the crack image are displayed in this order from the front to the back. At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the variable display of the small symbol is continued.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A as a non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-24 (14), at the timing when the second operation promotion display should be displayed (the timing of T10 shown in FIG. 13-22), the effect control CPU 120 moves the effect control CPU 120 to the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The unit displays a second operation promotion display 10TM600 for urging the player to operate the push button 31B, and a time bar 10TM600T for notifying the remaining period during which the operation of the push button 31B is valid. Since the second operation promotion display 10TM600 and the time bar 10TM600T are images having a higher display priority (the display layer is higher) than the screen crack image and the decorative symbol, the player sees the screen crack image and the decorative symbol. It seems that it is displayed in front of. At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the variation display of the small symbol is executed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A as a non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-24 (15), at the timing when the push button 31B is operated by the player (timing of T11 shown in FIG. 13-22), the effect control CPU 120 sets the symbol display area 5L. A combination of decorative symbols whose jackpot type is "10R probability variation jackpot" (in this example, a combination of odd-numbered symbols "777") is displayed on 5C and 5R, and the transparent member constituting the screen of the image display device 5 is cracked. The image of the mode (screen crack image 10TM500A) is superimposed and displayed, and the characters "probability variation MAX jackpot" are displayed in the central portion of the image display device 5. The combination of decorative symbols (in this example, the combination of odd-numbered symbols "777") and the characters of "probability variation MAX jackpot" are images having a higher display priority (display layer is higher) than the screen cracked image. Therefore, it seems to the player that it is displayed in front of the screen cracked image. At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the variation display of the small symbol is executed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes the probability change notification effect of the fifth aspect, executes the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 4500 ms once, and causes the operation unit LED to emit light in rainbow colors.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-24 (16), the effect control for receiving the symbol confirmation designation command at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the first special symbol (the timing of T12 shown in FIG. 13-22). The CPU 120 ends the jackpot type suggestion effect, and confirms and stops the final combination of decorative symbols (“777” in this example). At this time, the combination of small symbols (“777” in this example) is fixedly stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. That is, the combination of small symbols whose jackpot type is "10R probability variation jackpot" is fixedly stopped.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A as a non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, in the determination at the start of fluctuation, the display result is determined to be "off", the variation pattern is determined to be "out of super reach (battle effect [defeat effect])", and the single vibration is determined in the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation. An example of the effect when it is decided to execute the effect, the variable notice effect accompanied by the vibration of the operation unit, the cut-in notice effect, and the timer effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-25 to 13-27.

13-25 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the single vibration effect, the variable notice effect accompanied by the vibration of the operation unit, the cut-in notice effect, and the timer effect, and FIGS. 13-26 and FIGS. 13-27 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image related to a single vibration effect, a variable notice effect accompanied by vibration of the operation unit, a cut-in notice effect, and a timer effect.

In this example, in the start winning effect determination process (see FIG. 12-6 of [Explanation of the feature unit 07TM]), the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display to the red mode in step S07TM1020, and steps. It is assumed that the change pattern of the change effect is determined by the S07TM1050 as the change pattern (for example, the change pattern 107) displayed in the active display in the red mode at the time of active shift.

Further, in this example, in the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation, the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the first vibration effect of the first aspect in step S10TM1000, and executes the strong development effect in step S10TM1040. It is assumed that the decision is made, the cut-in notice effect is executed in step S10TM1070, and the timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect is executed in step S10TM1110.

First, as shown in FIG. 13-26 (1), when the CUP 103 starts the variation display of the first special symbol (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 13-25), the effect control CPU 120 receives the variation pattern designation command. Based on the designated variation pattern, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5 are small. Start the variable display of the symbol. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 10TM013 of the image display device 5 to display the active display 10TM003A in a red mode corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes a timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect, and displays the timer image 10TM800 (displays the characters "01:30") in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes the first vibration effect of the first aspect, executes the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 1500 ms once, and causes the operation unit LED to emit white light.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-26 (2), at the timing when the reach state in the fluctuation pattern should be established (the timing of T2 shown in FIG. 13-25), the effect control CPU 120 displays the symbol of the image display device 5. The decorative symbol of "2" is stopped and displayed in the area 5L and the symbol display area 5R to enter the reach state, and the characters "reach !!" are displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5. At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the variable display of the small symbol is continued. That is, the small symbol is also stopped in the small symbol display area 5l corresponding to the symbol display area 5L in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the small symbol display area 5r corresponding to the symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. It is continuously displayed in a variable manner without being displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect, and displays the characters of the timer image 10TM800 (“01:15”) in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. ) Is updated and displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 has completed the first vibration effect of the first aspect, and the aspect of the stick controller 31A is a non-special aspect (non-vibration aspect).

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-26 (3), the timing before the predetermined period of the super reach development in the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command (for example, the timing 40 seconds before the start of the battle effect). At the timing of T3 shown in FIGS. 13-25), the strong development effect is executed, and the darkened image 10TM400 is displayed as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5, so that the background image, the decorative pattern, and the reach are displayed. A blackout effect is performed that reduces the visibility of the effect image to make it difficult to see.

Here, due to the blackout effect, the background image, the decorative pattern, and the reach effect image are in a visually difficult state, but the active display 10TM003A in the red aspect and the small symbol are still in a visible state. That is, while the visibility of the decorative symbol "2" that was stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R and the decorative symbol that was variablely displayed in the symbol display area 5C is reduced, the active display area The visibility of the active display 10TM003A in the red mode displayed in 10TM013 and the small symbols variablely displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r is not deteriorated.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect, and displays the characters of the timer image 10TM800 (“01:10”) in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. ) Is updated and displayed. In this way, the timer image 10TM800 is visible even during the period when the blackout effect is being executed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A as a non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-26 (4), the effect control is performed at the timing (the timing of T3A shown in FIG. 13-25) when a predetermined period (10 seconds in this example) has elapsed since the strong development effect was started. The CPU 120 continuously displays the blackout image 10TM400, and executes an effect effect in which the flame effect image 10TM410 and the characters "decisive battle" are superimposed and displayed on the blackout image 10TM400. The flame effect image 10TM410 is an image having a higher display priority than the darkening image 10TM400 (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground), and the characters "decisive battle" are further displayed than the flame effect image 10TM410. This is an image with a high priority (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, from the front to the back, it seems to the player that the characters "decisive battle", the flame effect image 10TM410, and the darkening image 10TM400 are displayed in this order.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect, and displays the characters of the timer image 10TM800 (“01: 00”) in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. ) Is updated and displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 vibrates the stick controller 31A for 1500 ms in response to a predetermined effect execution period (for example, a period in which the characters “decisive battle” are displayed) (ON: 1500 ms, 0FF: (Period of 500 ms) is executed 10 times to make the operation unit LED emit white light.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-26 (5), the effect control is performed at the timing (the timing of T3B shown in FIG. 13-25) when a predetermined period (30 seconds in this example) has elapsed since the strong development effect was started. The CPU 120 performs a movable body operation effect of operating the movable body 10TM450 from a tilted position to an upright position.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect, and displays the characters of the timer image 10TM800 (“00:40”) in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. ) Is updated and displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 once executes an operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 10000 ms in accordance with a predetermined effect execution period (for example, a period in which the movable body 10TM450 is in the upright position) to operate the effect control CPU 120. The unit LED emits white light.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-26 (6), the effect control is performed at the timing (the timing of T3C shown in FIG. 13-25) when a predetermined period (40 seconds in this example) has elapsed since the strong development effect was started. The CPU 120 executes an operation of returning the movable body 10TM450 in the upright position to the tilted position, and ends the movable body operation effect.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect, and displays the characters of the timer image 10TM800 (“00:30”) in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. ) Is updated and displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A as a non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-26 (7), at the timing to be developed into the super reach in the fluctuation pattern (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 13-25), the effect control CPU 120 is accompanied by the end of the strong development effect. , End the blackout effect and effect effect, and execute the battle effect. Here, as the battle effect is executed, the image display device 5 displays the ally character 10TM200A and the enemy character 10TM200B.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect, and displays the characters of the timer image 10TM800 (“00:20”) in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. ) Is updated and displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A as a non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-26 (8), at the timing 20 seconds after the development into super reach (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 13-25), the effect control CPU 120 is the image display device 5. With the ally character 10TM200A and the enemy character 10TM200B displayed in the center of the screen, the timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect is continuously executed, and the timer image 10TM800 (""" is displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. The character "00:00" is displayed) is updated and displayed. At this timing (timing of T5 shown in FIGS. 13-25), the remaining time indicated by the timer image 10TM800 is updated to 0. That is, it is notified that the timer image 10TM800 is updated to the final mode, and it is the timing when the highly expected effect (cut-in notice effect in this example) is started.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A as a non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-27 (9), at the timing 5 seconds before the first operation promotion display is displayed (the timing of T6 shown in FIG. 13-25), the effect control CPU 120 is the image display device. The cut-in notice effect is executed with the ally character 10TM200A and the enemy character 10TM200B displayed in the center of the screen of 5. In the cut-in notice effect, the cut-in image 10TM700 in which the characters "extreme heat" are displayed is displayed in the entire central region in the vertical direction of the screen of the image display device 5. From the player's point of view, when an image related to another effect is displayed, suddenly, a display mode having a higher priority than the image related to the other effect (the display layer is higher and is related to the other effect). Since the cut-in image (which appears to be displayed in front of the image) is displayed, it will be attracted to the screen change when the cut-in notice effect is executed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 ends the timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect, and the timer image 10TM800 (displays the characters "00:00") displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. Erase.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A as a non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-27 (10), a battle effect image 10TM250 suggesting that the victory or defeat of the battle is decided while the ally character 10TM200A is launching the final attack on the enemy character 10TM200B in the battle production is displayed. At the timing when the effect control CPU 120 should display the first operation promotion display 10TM300 (the timing of T7 shown in FIGS. 13-25), the first operation promotion is performed at the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The display 10TM300, the time bar 10TM300T for notifying the remaining period during which the operation of the stick controller 31A is valid, and the characters "close !!" are displayed.

The first operation promotion display 10TM300, the time bar 10TM300T, and the characters "close !!" are images having a higher display priority (the display layer is higher) than the background image and the super reach effect (battle effect) image. Therefore, it seems to the player that it is displayed in front of the background image and the super reach effect (battle effect) image.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A as a non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 13-27 (11), the effect control CPU 120 executes the defeat effect at the timing when the stick controller 31A is operated by the player (the timing of T8 shown in FIG. 13-25). To do. In the defeat effect, with the ally character 10TM200A and the enemy character 10TM200B displayed on the image display device 5, the characters "defeat" are displayed in the center of the image display device 5, and the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed. , The combination of decorative symbols (“212” in this example) whose display result is “off” is stopped swinging. At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the variable display of the small symbol is continued.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A as a non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-27 (12), the effect control for receiving the symbol confirmation designation command at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the first special symbol (the timing of T9 shown in FIG. 13-25). The CPU 120 confirms and stops the final combination of decorative symbols (“212” in this example). At this time, the combination of small symbols (“212” in this example) is fixedly stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. That is, the combination of small symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A as a non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

(Single vibration production as a look-ahead notice production)
In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the single vibration effect (for example, the first vibration effect) is executed as an effect suggesting the display result of the variable display being executed, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. The vibration effect (for example, the first vibration effect) may be executed as a look-ahead advance notice effect that suggests a display result of the variable display whose execution is suspended. Specifically, the presence or absence of execution of the single vibration effect is determined based on the determination result of the start winning determination based on the occurrence of the winning to the starting winning opening (for example, the determination result at the start winning). When is a "big hit", it is decided to execute the single vibration effect at a higher rate than when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing").

For example, when the first vibration effect is executed as the look-ahead advance notice effect based on the determination result at the time of the start winning, the timing at which the variation display executed before the variation display corresponding to the start winning is started after the start winning. At (the timing when the hold memory is digested and the hold display is shifted), the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 200 ms (ON: 200 ms, 0FF: 200 ms cycle) is executed three times, and the fluctuation that is the target of the determination is executed. It is assumed that the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 1500 ms is executed once at the timing when the display (variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect) is started.

Then, when it is decided that the first vibration effect is executed as the look-ahead notice effect, the determination is made at a timing before the variation display (so-called target variation) that is the target of the determination is executed. The hold display corresponding to the fluctuation display (so-called target fluctuation) that is the target of is displayed in the operation mode (in this example, a round display with vertical and horizontal vibration movements or a triangular display with vertical and left and right vibration movements). The vibration notice effect to be displayed may be executed. That is, the vibration notice effect is the first vibration as a kind of look-ahead notice effect that announces the jackpot expectation of the variable display whose execution is suspended (the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied). The effect may be an effect that suggests that the effect is executed.

FIG. 13-28 shows the first vibration effect as a kind of pre-reading advance notice effect for notifying the jackpot expectation of the variation display (variation display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied) whose execution is suspended. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect image which is related to the vibration advance notice effect which announces the execution of the first vibration effect.

In FIG. 13-28, on the screen of the image display device 5, a hold display area 10TM011 for displaying the first hold storage number (0 to 4 hold display 10TM001) and an active display corresponding to the currently executing variable display are displayed. An active display area 10TM013 for displaying 10TM003 is provided.

When the first hold storage number is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays a hold display 10TM001 corresponding to the first hold storage number in the hold display area 10TM011. That is, in the hold display 10TM001, although the start condition (for example, winning the first start winning opening) is satisfied, the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed and the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. This is information corresponding to the variable display (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) of the first special symbol in which the second reserved memory number is 0 and the first reserved memory number is not 0). .. Here, when a plurality of hold display 10TM001 is displayed in the hold display area 10TM011, each area in which the hold display 10TM001 is displayed is arranged in an order close to the active display area 10TM013 (in order from the right when viewed from the player). The hold display area 10TM011a, the hold display area 10TM011b, the hold display area 10TM011c, and the hold display area 10TM011d are used.

Note that FIG. 13-28 is the center of each hold display area (hold display area 10TM011a, hold display area 10TM011b, hold display area 10TM011c, hold display area 10TM011d) for the purpose of explaining the position where the hold display is displayed. The center line is shown in.

In this example, in the effect determination process at the time of starting winning, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display to the normal mode, determines the change pattern of the change effect to the change pattern 201, and sets the first look-ahead notice effect. It is assumed that it is decided to execute the first vibration effect of the embodiment, and it is decided to execute the vibration notice effect for which the first vibration effect is the target of advance notice.

First, as shown in FIG. 13-28 (1), the effect control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 In the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the above, the variation display of the small symbol is executed, and the active display 10TM003 in the normal mode corresponding to the currently executing variation display is displayed in the active display area 10TM013 of the image display device 5. A new start prize is generated when the hold display 10TM001 in the normal mode is displayed in the hold display area 10TM011a of the image display device 5 corresponding to the display being displayed and the first hold storage number is 1. Then, it is assumed that the first reserved storage number is 2.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes a vibration advance notice effect targeting the first vibration effect, and newly displays the hold display 10TM001S in the normal mode (white circle display) and the operation mode in the hold display area 10TM011b. It is displayed. As a result, the player executes an effect of vibrating the stick controller 31A (first vibration effect) as a look-ahead notice effect corresponding to the hold display 10TM001S displayed (vibrating) in the operation mode. Will be expected.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 has finished the first vibration effect as a look-ahead advance notice effect, and the mode of the stick controller 31A is a non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-28 (2), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is set in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of decorative symbols ("246" in this example) is confirmed and stopped, and the combination of small symbols ("434" in this example) is confirmed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. Stop it. That is, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 sets the first vibration effect as a notice target when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the first special symbol (corresponding to the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command). The vibration notice effect is terminated, and the hold display 10TM001S displayed (vibrating) in the hold display area 10TM011b is set to the stationary mode. At this time, the hold display 10TM001S that was being displayed in the operation mode is stopped at the timing when the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation stop command, so that the hold display after the rest is the center of the hold display area 10TM011b. It may be displayed at a position deviated from the position (left and right center lines). In the example shown in FIG. 13-28 (2), at the timing when the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation stop command, the hold display that was the target of the vibration notice effect is the center of the hold display area 10TM011b (left and right center lines). ), The stationary hold display 10TM001 is displayed at a position shifted to the left from the center (left and right center lines) of the hold display area 10TM011b.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 has not yet executed the first vibration effect as the look-ahead advance notice effect, and sets the mode of the stick controller 31A as a non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-28 (3), when the CPU 103 starts the variation display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. The variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 10TM003 of the normal mode displayed in the active display area 10TM013 as the first hold storage number becomes 1, and also erases the hold display area 10TM011 (hold display). The hold display 10TM001 in the normal mode displayed in the area 10TM011a and the hold display area 10TM011b) is shifted one by one to the active display area 10TM013 side. As a result, the active display 10TM003 in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 10TM013, and one hold display 10TM001 is displayed in the hold display area 10TM011 (hold display area 10TM011a).

At this time, the hold display 10TM001 that was statically displayed at a position deviated from the center position (left and right center lines) of the hold display area 10TM011b is moved to the center position (left and right center lines) of the hold display area 10TM011a after the shift display. It will be displayed. Then, in this example, since the first vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect corresponding to the hold display 10TM001 displayed in the hold display area 10TM011a after the shift display is executed immediately after the shift (or at the same time as the shift display). It is assumed that the hold display 10TM001 after the shift display does not return to the operation mode while remaining in the stationary mode.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes the first vibration effect as the look-ahead advance notice effect, executes the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 200 ms (ON: 200 ms, 0FF: 200 ms cycle) three times, and executes the operation unit LED. To emit white light.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-28 (4), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is set in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of decorative symbols ("135" in this example) is confirmed and stopped, and the combination of small symbols ("135" in this example) is confirmed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. Stop it. That is, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 has finished the first vibration effect as the look-ahead advance notice effect, and the mode of the stick controller 31A is a non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-28 (5), when the CPU 103 starts the variation display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. The variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 10TM003 of the normal mode displayed in the active display area 10TM013, and at the same time, the hold display 10TM001 of the normal mode displayed in the hold display area 10TM011 (hold display area 10TM011a). Is shifted to the active display area 10TM013. As a result, the active display 10TM003 in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 10TM013, and the hold display 10TM001 is not displayed in the hold display area 10TM011.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes the first vibration effect as a notice effect during fluctuation, executes the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 1500 ms once, and causes the operation unit LED to emit white light.

In this way, when it is decided to execute the first vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect based on the judgment at the time of the start prize when the start prize occurs, the hold display corresponding to the start prize is displayed. By displaying in the operation mode (FIG. 13-28 (1)), it is possible to suggest that the first vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect corresponding to the hold display is executed. Further, after the execution of the first vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect, the first vibration effect as the change notice effect can also be executed at the timing when the fluctuation display targeted by the look-ahead notice effect is executed (). 13-28 (5)). As a result, for the common variation display, the first vibration effect as a look-ahead notice effect before the variation display is executed and the first vibration effect as a change notice effect when the variation display is executed. A series of continuous notice effects will be executed.

Here, in the present embodiment, the production mode of the first vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect and the effect mode of the first vibration effect as the variable advance notice effect are different. In the first vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect, the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 200 ms (ON: 200 ms, 0FF: 200 ms cycle) is executed three times to make the operation unit LED emit white light, whereas it fluctuates. In the first vibration effect as the middle notice effect, the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 1500 ms is executed once, and the operation unit LED emits white light. Therefore, during the period when the first vibration effect as the continuous advance notice effect is being executed, the player is executing the vibration of the stick controller 31A as the look-ahead advance notice effect, or is executed as the change notice effect. You can easily know if you are there.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a single vibration effect (the first vibration effect in this example) as a look-ahead notice effect (and a change notice effect), and a single vibration as a look-ahead notice effect (and a change notice effect). It is possible to execute a vibration notice effect that suggests that the effect (first vibration effect) is executed. In this way, it is possible to diversify the interests of the single vibration effect by making it possible to execute the single vibration effect corresponding to the variable display that is not executed, not limited to the variable display that is being executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the single vibration effect (the first vibration effect in this example) as a continuous advance notice effect including the pre-reading advance notice effect and the changing advance notice effect. When the single vibration effect (first vibration effect) is executed as the look-ahead notice effect, the single vibration effect (first vibration effect) as the variable notice effect that is executed after that is the first aspect (emission color: white). , Execution period: 1500 ms), the second aspect (emission color: red, execution period: 3000 ms), or the third aspect (emission color: rainbow, execution period: 3000 ms). As a look-ahead notice effect, the single vibration effect (first vibration effect) is common (emission color: white, execution period: 200 ms three times). According to such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the control regarding the pre-reading advance notice effect, and at the stage when the single vibration effect (first vibration effect) is executed, the player is changing in any mode. Since it is not possible to grasp whether the single vibration effect (first vibration effect) as the advance notice effect is executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the continuous advance notice effect.

When a single vibration effect is executed as the look-ahead notice effect, the stick controller 31A can be vibrated in the mode of the look-ahead notice effect over a plurality of fluctuation displays prior to the change display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect. In addition, it is possible to display the hold display in the operation mode over a plurality of variable displays prior to the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect.

For example, when the number of reserved memories becomes 3 when the start prize occurs and it is decided to execute the single vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect based on the judgment of the start prize itself, the third is in the hold display area 10TM011c. The hold display of is displayed in the operation mode. As a result, the hold display 10TM001S of the operation mode is displayed in the hold display area 10TM011c.

Then, at the timing when the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation designation command, the hold display 10TM001S of the operation mode is changed to the stationary mode. At this time, as described above, the hold display 10TM001 after stationary may be located at a position deviated from the center position (left and right center lines) of the hold display area 10TM011c. When the effect control CPU 120 receives a command at the start of fluctuation including a fluctuation pattern designation command from the CPU 103, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started and the hold display of the hold display area 10TM011c is shifted to the hold display area 10TM011b by the shift display. Then, a single vibration effect as a look-ahead notice effect is executed, and the stick controller 31A vibrates in the mode of the look-ahead notice effect (emission color: white, execution period: 200 ms three times). Here, the hold display 10TM001 shifted to the hold display area 10TM011b is at the center position (left and right center lines) of the hold display area 10TM011b at the time of shifting, but the single vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect has not been completed. Based on the above, the stationary mode is changed to the moving mode again. As a result, the hold display 10TM001S of the operation mode is displayed in the hold display area 10TM011b.

Then, at the timing when the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation designation command, the hold display 10TM001S of the operation mode is changed to the stationary mode. At this time, as described above, the hold display 10TM001 after stationary may be located at a position deviated from the center position (left and right center lines) of the hold display area 10TM011b. When the effect control CPU 120 receives a command at the start of fluctuation including a fluctuation pattern designation command from the CPU 103, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started and the hold display of the hold display area 10TM011b is shifted to the hold display area 10TM011a by the shift display. Then, the single vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect is executed again, and the stick controller 31A vibrates in the mode of the look-ahead notice effect (emission color: white, execution period: 200 ms three times). Here, the hold display 10TM001 shifted to the hold display area 10TM011a is at the center position (left and right center lines) of the hold display area 10TM011a at the time of shifting, but is a single vibration effect as a continuous advance notice effect (during notice effect). Changes from the stationary mode to the moving mode again based on the fact that is not completed. As a result, the hold display 10TM001S of the operation mode is displayed in the hold display area 10TM011a.

Then, at the timing when the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation designation command, the hold display 10TM001S of the operation mode is changed to the stationary mode. At this time, as described above, the hold display 10TM001 after stationary may be located at a position deviated from the center position (left and right center lines) of the hold display area 10TM011a. When the effect control CPU 120 receives a command at the start of variation including a variation pattern designation command from the CPU 103, the variation display of the decorative symbol (variation display that is the target of the continuous advance notice effect) is started and the hold display area 10TM011a The hold display of is shifted to the active display area 10TM013 by the shift display and displayed as the active display 10TM003, the single vibration effect as the variable notice effect (continuous notice effect) is executed, and the stick controller 31A is set to the variable notice effect. Aspects, that is, the first aspect (emission color: white, execution period: 1500 ms), the second aspect (emission color: red, execution period: 3000 ms), or the third aspect (emission color: rainbow, execution period: 3000 ms). It vibrates in any mode. Here, the active display 10TM003 shifted to the active display area 10TM013 is at the center position (left and right center lines) of the active display area 10TM013 after the shift, and is a single vibration effect as a variable advance notice effect (continuous notice effect). Is executed immediately after the shift (or at the same time as the shift display), so that the active display 10TM003 after the shift display does not return to the operation mode in the stationary mode.

It should be noted that the single vibration effect as the variable notice effect (continuous notice effect) is not executed immediately after the shift (or at the same time as the shift display), and after a predetermined period has passed from the shift display, that is, the continuous notice effect (look-ahead notice effect). If the configuration is such that the variable display that is the target of is executed after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the variable display, the active display is displayed in the operation mode during the predetermined period (the active display after the shift display is displayed). (Displayed in operation mode), even if the active display is changed from the operation mode to the stationary mode in response to the execution of the single vibration effect as the variable notice effect (continuous notice effect) after the lapse of a predetermined engine. Good.

In this way, by providing the pattern of the continuous advance notice effect in which the single vibration effect is executed over a plurality of variable displays, the interest of the single vibration effect can be further improved. In addition, in response to the execution of the continuous advance notice effect, the corresponding display (hold display and active display) corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the continuous advance notice effect is displayed as a single vibration effect over a plurality of variable displays. By displaying in a manner suggesting that is executed, the interest of the vibration notice effect can be diversified.

As shown above, in the present embodiment, as an effect suggesting that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state, the effect is configured only by changing the mode of the operation unit (including the light emitting unit provided in the operation unit). Changes in the modes of the single vibration effect (first vibration effect, second vibration effect, third vibration effect, fourth vibration effect) and the operation unit (including the light emitting unit provided in the operation unit) and the image display device. It is possible to execute a variable notice effect (strong development effect, blessing effect, probability change notification effect) in which the effect is composed of the information displayed in 5. This variable notice effect includes a blessing effect that notifies that a big hit will occur, and also includes a probability change notification effect that suggests (notifies) the type of big hit.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-13, 13-14, 13-16, and 13-17, a single vibration effect (first vibration effect, second vibration effect, third vibration effect, fourth vibration). When the effect) is executed, the expectation of a big hit is higher than when the single vibration effect is not executed (including the big hit confirmation effect). Here, as in the first vibration effect and the third vibration effect of the first and second aspects, although the big hit expectation is high, the display result may be "missing" (the big hit is not fixed). May be executed.

In addition, the single vibration effect is executed at any timing in the period before the player is notified that the display result is a "big hit" (the period T1 to T8 shown in FIGS. 13-22), and the blessing effect is performed. Is executed at any timing in the period after the player is notified that the display result becomes a "big hit" (the period after T8 shown in FIGS. 13-22). In this way, the timing at which the single vibration effect is executed is earlier than the timing at which the blessing effect is executed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 13-23 (3) to (8), one of the single vibration effects is executed before the single vibration effect (the third vibration effect in this example) is executed. A vibration notice effect is being executed to notify the player. Here, as shown in FIG. 13-19, the vibration notice effect is one of a single vibration effect (second vibration effect, third vibration effect, fourth vibration effect) (in this example, the third vibration effect). It is subject to notice, and the blessing effect accompanied by vibration of the operation unit after the big hit occurrence notification is not subject to notice. That is, the vibration notice effect does not give notice until [a blessing effect executed after being notified that a big hit will occur] is executed.

According to such a configuration, the tactile sensation of the player can be stimulated by the single vibration effect, so that the progress of the effect being executed in another effect device such as the image display device 5 which is not used in the single vibration effect can be determined. It is possible to raise the expectations of the player without depending on it. Further, since the single vibration effect can be executed at a timing not related to the progress of the effect being executed in the effect device different from the operation unit of the image display device 5 or the like, the effect is given unexpectedness. Can be done. Furthermore, since the vibration notice effect can be executed in response to such a single vibration effect, it is expected that the player will perform the single vibration effect before the single vibration effect is actually executed. The player's consciousness can be directed to the operation unit (stick controller 31A). Here, the vibration notice effect is intended only for a single vibration effect in which the big hit is not fixed, and is not intended for the blessing effect in which the big hit is fixed. Therefore, depending on the execution of the vibration notice effect, The player is not convinced that a big hit will occur. Therefore, the player's interest in the occurrence of the jackpot can be maintained even after the vibration warning effect is executed.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when there are a plurality of types of effects for vibrating the operation unit (stick controller 31A), the target of the vibration notice effect for notifying the vibration of the operation unit is a big hit. It is possible to appropriately generate the interest of each effect by limiting it to a single vibration effect that does not require an effect device different from the operation unit, which is an effect that is executed before the occurrence of is notified. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13-3, 13-4, and 13-6, the single vibration effect (the first vibration effect, the second vibration effect, and the fourth vibration of the third aspect). In the production), the operation unit LED may emit light in rainbow colors, and as shown in FIG. 13-9, the operation unit LED may emit light in rainbow colors even in a blessing effect accompanied by vibration of the operation unit (effect). In this example, the operation unit LED always emits rainbow color when the blessing effect is executed). Then, in both the single vibration effect and the blessing effect, it is confirmed that the big hit is generated by the operation unit LED emitting light in rainbow colors. Therefore, even when there are a plurality of types of effects that vibrate the operation unit as in the present embodiment, the player can make a big hit based on the common effect mode (rainbow-colored light emission of the operation unit LED). You can be confident that. As described above, the information suggested by the effect can be clarified by standardizing the effect mode when a big hit occurs regardless of the type of effect that vibrates the operation unit.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-3 and 13-5, in the single vibration effect (the first vibration effect of the first aspect, the first vibration effect of the second aspect, and the third vibration effect), the operation unit LED Is emitted in white or red, but as shown in FIG. 13-9, the emission color of the operation unit LED in the blessing effect accompanied by the vibration of the operation unit is only rainbow color. That is, there is an effect mode that is possible only in the single vibration effect, and a common effect mode in the single vibration effect and the blessing effect. In this way, by making the effect mode when the operation unit is vibrated different according to each effect, it is possible to further improve the interest of the effect of vibrating the operation unit.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13-3 to 13-6, in the single vibration effect, the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 1500 ms to 3000 ms is executed, while FIG. 13-9 shows. As shown, in the blessing effect, the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 6000 ms is executed. According to such a configuration, since the execution period of the operation of vibrating the operation unit differs between the single vibration effect and the blessing effect, the single vibration effect and the blessing effect can be clarified in the effect, and the effect of each effect is enhanced. be able to.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13-3 to 13-6, the execution timing of the first vibration effect is the timing at which the fluctuation display is started, and the execution timing of the second vibration effect is It is the timing of establishing the reach state, the execution timing of the third vibration effect is the timing of the development of the super reach, and the execution timing of the fourth vibration effect is the timing immediately before the notification of the effect result in the super reach effect is performed. .. Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-13, 13-14, 13-16, and 13-17, the first vibration effect of the first aspect, the first vibration effect of the second aspect, and the third vibration The effect is an effect that suggests that the display result of the variable display is highly expected to be a big hit, while the first vibration effect, the second vibration effect, and the fourth vibration effect of the third aspect are the effects. It is a big hit confirmation effect that notifies that the display result of the fluctuation display becomes a big hit (a big hit occurs). According to such a configuration, the jackpot expectation of the single vibration effect differs depending on the execution timing of the single vibration effect, so that the player is interested in the timing at which the single vibration effect is executed. Become.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13-7 and 13-28, when a start winning is generated, a single vibration effect corresponding to the hold storage (variation display) based on the starting winning is executed. Based on the decision, the vibration notice effect for displaying the specific display (active display, hold display) corresponding to the hold memory (variable display) in an operation mode different from the stationary mode is executed. It is suggested that the single vibration effect is executed for the variable display corresponding to the specific display. That is, when the specific display vibrates up, down, left and right, the player is reminded that the operation unit vibrates, and the operation unit vibrates for the specific display (for example, a single vibration effect as a look-ahead notice effect). , Or a single vibration effect as a notice effect during fluctuation) is expected to be executed by the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13-7 and 13-28, the specific display (active display, hold display) is returned from the operating mode to the stationary mode at the timing when the single vibration effect is executed. (The vibration notice production has been completed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the single vibration effect, which has been the target of the vibration notice effect, is executed (or has been executed).

In particular, in the present embodiment, since there are a plurality of timings at which the operation unit vibrates, when the vibration notice effect is executed, the single vibration effect that is the target of the vibration notice effect may be unclear. However, by ending the vibration notice effect when the unit vibration effect that is the target of the vibration notice effect is executed, the player's consciousness is directed to the operation unit, and the unit vibration that is the target of the notice is applied. It is possible to clarify the production and enhance the production effect.

In the above embodiment, an example of ending the vibration warning effect (returning the specific display from the operating mode to the stationary mode) before executing the single vibration effect that is the target of the vibration warning effect is shown. However, not limited to such a form, the vibration notice effect is terminated (returning the specific display from the operation mode to the stationary mode) at the timing when the single vibration effect that is the target of the vibration notice effect is executed. However, the vibration notice effect may be terminated (returning the specific display from the operation mode to the stationary mode) within the period during which the single vibration effect that is the target of the vibration notice effect is being executed. .. Further, after the single vibration effect that is the target of the vibration notice effect is completed, the vibration notice effect may be ended (the specific display is returned from the operation mode to the stationary mode).

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13-11, regardless of whether the specific display (active display in this example) is in the normal mode, the special mode, the blue mode, or the red mode. , It is possible to execute a single vibration effect (second vibration effect, third vibration effect, fourth vibration effect) corresponding to the specific display (variation display). Then, as shown in FIGS. 13-11 and 13-19, when the vibration notice effect is executed, the single vibration effect corresponding to the vibration notice effect (second vibration effect, third vibration effect, third vibration effect). 4 Vibration effect) is always executed. As described above, when the specific display is displayed in the operation mode, the ratio of the single vibration effect being executed is higher than that when the specific display is displayed in the stationary mode.

According to such a configuration, since the execution ratio of the single vibration effect differs depending on the display mode of the specific display, the player can pay attention to the display mode of the specific display.

Further, in the present embodiment, by displaying the specific display (holding display, active display) corresponding to the variable display in a suggestion mode (blue mode, red mode) different from the normal mode, the jackpot expectation degree regarding the variable display is displayed. The specific display (hold display, active display) displayed in the suggestion mode (blue mode, red mode) is changed from the stationary mode to the operation mode (vibrating up, down, left and right). By doing so, it is possible to suggest that a single vibration effect targeting the fluctuation display is executed. In this way, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a jackpot depending on the display mode of a common specific display, and it is also possible to suggest that a single vibration effect is executed. It is possible to diversify the production by display and further improve the interest of the production by specific display.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-20, the timer effect corresponds to any of the third vibration effect, the strong development effect, and the cut-in advance notice effect. Then, when the notice effect (third vibration effect, strong development effect, cut-in notice effect) is executed after the timer effect is executed (after the timer image is displayed), the timer effect is executed. The jackpot expectation is higher than when the notice effect is executed without (without displaying the timer image).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-23 (7) and (8), when the timer effect corresponding to the third vibration effect is executed, the timer image 10TM800 is set to the final mode (“00: 00”). Immediately after the update, the third vibration effect is executed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 13-26 (8) and 13-27 (9), when the timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect is executed, the timer image 10TM800 is the final mode (“00:”. Immediately after the update to "00"), the cut-in notice effect is executed. In this way, as the effect pattern of the timer effect, the timer image is updated to the final mode when the single vibration effect is executed, and the timer image is updated to the final mode when the cut-in notice effect is executed. There is a pattern to be displayed.

According to such a configuration, when the timer effect is executed, the player cannot grasp whether the single vibration effect is executed in response to the timer effect or the cut-in notice effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the effect at the timing when the timer image is updated to the final mode, and to direct the player's consciousness to the operation unit at the timing when the timer image is updated to the final mode. it can. As a result, when the single vibration effect is executed in response to the timer effect, the effect of the single vibration effect can be further enhanced.

(Other variants)
(1) In the above embodiment, the single vibration effect is an effect composed only of the modes of the stick controller 31A including the operation unit LED (vibration presence / absence, vibration period, vibration frequency, emission color of the operation unit LED). An example in which the mode of another effect device such as the image display device 5 is not included in the effect component has been described, but the stick controller including any kind of single vibration effect is not limited to such a form. Not only the mode of 31A (whether or not there is vibration, the period of vibration, the number of vibrations, the emission color of the operation unit LED), but also the mode of another effect device such as the image display device 5 may be included in the effect component.

For example, as in the fourth vibration effect described above, the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 3000 ms is executed once at the timing when the first operation promotion display for prompting the player to operate the stick controller 31A is displayed. When a single vibration effect is executed, the mode of the first operation promotion display is changed to a special mode related to the vibration of the stick controller 31A (for example, the first operation promotion display vibrates up, down, left and right). Aspects). That is, the fourth vibration effect may be an effect including the vibration operation of the stick controller 31A and the first operation promotion display of a special aspect corresponding to the vibration operation of the stick controller 31A.

(2) In the above embodiment, an example of executing the single vibration effect as an effect suggesting the expectation of the big hit is shown, but the single vibration effect is not limited to such an embodiment and suggests the expectation of the big hit. In addition to the effect, it may be executed as a setting suggestion effect that suggests the currently set setting value. For example, when the first vibration effect of the third aspect is executed and the final display result is "off", at least the set value is either "5" or "6" (at a high set value). Yes) may be confirmed. As described above, the first vibration effect of the third aspect, which is a single vibration effect, may be a high setting suggestion effect that suggests (notifies) that the set value is a high set value.

(3) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which a timer effect can be executed as a change advance notice effect based on the determination result at the start of the change, but the determination result at the start winning is not limited to this form. A timer effect may be executed as a look-ahead notice effect based on. That is, the timer effect may be executed as a look-ahead notice effect that suggests the display result of the variable display whose execution is suspended.

For example, as described above, the first vibration effect is a kind of look-ahead advance notice effect that announces the jackpot expectation of the fluctuation display (variation display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied) whose execution is suspended. When executed, the timer effect may be an effect that is executed before the first vibration effect and foretells the execution of the first vibration effect.

(4) In the above embodiment, in the fluctuation pattern (“normal reach jackpot” and “super reach jackpot”) in which the final display result is “big hit”, a blessing effect for congratulating the occurrence of the jackpot is always executed. An example is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and there may be a variation pattern in which the final display result is a “big hit” or a variation pattern in which the blessing effect is not executed. For example, in the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach jackpot", the blessing effect may not be executed.

(5) In the above-described embodiment, in the effect of vibrating the stick controller 31A, a plurality of effect modes having different vibration times may be provided for each emission color of the operation unit LED provided on the stick controller 31A.

For example, in the first aspect of the first vibration effect, the emission color of the operation unit LED is white, and the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 1500 ms is executed once (the first vibration pattern of the first aspect). It is assumed that the light emitting color of the operation unit LED is white, and the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 3000 ms is executed once (the second vibration pattern of the first aspect). Further, in the second aspect of the first vibration effect, the emission color of the operation unit LED is red, and the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 1500 ms is executed once (the first vibration pattern of the second aspect). It is assumed that the light emitting color of the operation unit LED is red, and the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 3000 ms is executed once (the second vibration pattern of the second mode).

At this time, the degree of expectation that the display result of the fluctuation display when the first vibration effect is executed is a big hit is the first vibration pattern (short vibration time) <first mode (white) of the first aspect (white light emission). 2nd vibration pattern (long vibration time) of 2nd mode (long vibration time) <1st vibration pattern (short vibration time) of 2nd mode (red light emission) <2nd vibration pattern (long vibration time) of 2nd mode (red light emission) It is getting higher. That is, when the emission color of the operation unit LED is red, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the emission color of the operation unit LED is white regardless of the vibration time, and in the case of the same emission color, There is a relationship that the expectation of a big hit is higher when the vibration time is long than when the vibration time is short.

The degree of expectation of each effect mode is not limited to this relationship, and for example, the first vibration pattern (short vibration time) of the first mode (white light emission) <the first vibration pattern (short light emission) of the second mode (red light emission). Vibration time) <The second vibration pattern (long vibration time) of the first aspect (white light emission) <The second vibration pattern (long vibration time) of the second aspect (red light emission). May be good. That is, when the vibration time is long, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the vibration time is short, regardless of the emission color of the operation unit LED, and when the vibration time is the same, the operation unit LED emits light. There is a relationship that the jackpot expectation is higher when the color is red than when the emission color of the operation unit LED is white.

(6) In the above embodiment, as an effect corresponding to the advance notice effect, an example in which a timer effect accompanied by a numerical value subtraction operation (countdown operation) shown in the timer image is executed is shown. However, as an effect corresponding to the advance notice effect, an effect of performing other operations may be executed. For example, as an effect corresponding to the advance notice effect, a present effect accompanied by an operation of opening a box (present box) decorated for a present may be executed. In the present production, after the image of the present box is displayed, the present box is opened and the image of the present (hereinafter, "present image") which is the contents of the present box is displayed. For example, as a present image, an image of a character according to the degree of expectation of a big hit, an image of the character "change" corresponding to an active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display, and an image of an operation unit corresponding to a single vibration effect ( For example, there is an animation image of a vibrating stick controller 31A).

(7) In the above embodiment, the vibration notice effect shows an example in which any of the single vibration effects (first vibration effect, second vibration effect, third vibration effect, and fourth vibration effect) is targeted for advance notice. However, the vibration advance notice effect is not limited to such a form, and an effect different from the single vibration effect may be a notice target. For example, the vibration notice effect may be an effect for which a strong development effect, which is a kind of a variable advance notice effect accompanied by vibration of the operation unit, is targeted as a notice target, in addition to the single vibration effect.

(8) In the above embodiment, when a vibration warning effect for displaying a specific display (hold display, active display) in an operation mode is executed, the operation unit (stick controller 31A) is set in response to the vibration notification effect. An example is shown in which a vibrating effect (for example, at least one of a second vibration effect, a third vibration effect, and a fourth vibration effect) is always executed, but the vibration notice effect is not limited to such a form. Even if this is done, there may be times when the effect of vibrating the operation unit is not executed (for example, none of the second vibration effect, the third vibration effect, and the fourth vibration effect is executed). However, the ratio of the effect of vibrating the operation unit (for example, at least one of the second vibration effect, the third vibration effect, and the fourth vibration effect) when the vibration notice effect is executed is the vibration notice effect. It is assumed that the ratio of the effect of vibrating the operation unit (for example, at least one of the second vibration effect, the third vibration effect, and the fourth vibration effect) is executed when is not executed.

(9) In the above embodiment, when the timer effect is executed, when the display of the timer image 10TM800 reaches the final mode (display of "00: 00"), a predetermined effect corresponding to the timer effect (first). An example is shown in which 3 vibration effect, strong development effect, and one of cut-in notice effect) are always executed, but the timer effect is executed not limited to such a form, and the display of the timer image 10TM800 is the final mode. Even when (display of "00: 00"), the predetermined effect (one of the third vibration effect, the strong development effect, and the cut-in notice effect) may not be executed. However, the rate at which the predetermined effect is executed when the timer effect is executed is higher than the rate at which the predetermined effect is executed when the timer effect is not executed.

(10) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13-28, when the vibration notice effect for displaying the hold display in the operation mode is executed, the target effect (operation) that is the target of the vibration notice effect is executed. An example in which the hold display changes from the operating mode to the stationary mode in response to the execution of the effect of vibrating the part has been described. The vibration notice effect in this case is executed at the stage of the hold display instead of the active display, and the target effect (the effect that vibrates the operation unit) that is the target of the vibration notice effect is also the hold display instead of the active display. It is being executed in stages. Therefore, the vibration notice effect in this case and the target effect (the effect of vibrating the operation unit) that is the target of the vibration notice effect are both executed before the start of the fluctuation display that is the effect target. , Both are effects corresponding to the look-ahead notice effect that "suggests the occurrence of a big hit before the variable display is executed".

(11) When the vibration notice effect for displaying the hold display in the operation mode is executed, the target effect (effect that vibrates the operation unit) that is the target of the vibration notice effect is displayed in the operation mode. It is executed after the hold display is shifted to the active display area (after the active display of the operation mode is displayed), and the active display is changed from the operation mode in response to the execution of the target effect (effect that vibrates the operation unit). It may be changed to a stationary mode. The vibration notice effect in this case is executed at the stage of the hold display instead of the active display, but the target effect (the effect of vibrating the operation unit) that is the target of the vibration notice effect is executed at the stage of the active display. Has been done. Therefore, since the vibration notice effect in this case is executed before the start of the variation display, which is the effect target, it corresponds to the look-ahead advance notice effect that "suggests the occurrence of a big hit before the variation display is executed". It is a production. On the other hand, in this case, the target effect (the effect of vibrating the operation unit), which is the target of the vibration notice effect, is executed after the start of the variation display, which is the effect target, and therefore, "during the execution of the variation display, It suggests that the display result will be a big hit. ”This is an effect equivalent to the notice effect during fluctuation.

(12) Further, when the vibration notice effect for displaying the hold display in the operation mode is executed, the target effect (the effect for vibrating the operation unit) that is the target of the vibration notice effect is executed at the stage of the hold display. At the same time, the hold display is continuously displayed in the operation mode (vibration notice effect is continued), and after the hold display displayed in the operation mode is shifted to the active display area (after the active display of the operation mode is displayed). In addition, the target effect (the effect of vibrating the operation unit) that is the target of the vibration notice effect is executed, and the active display is displayed from the operation mode in response to the execution of the target effect (the effect of vibrating the operation unit). It may be changed to a stationary mode. In this case, the vibration notice effect is executed before the start of the variable display that is the effect target and the variable display that is the effect target. Therefore, "before the variable display is executed and the variable display is displayed. It is a production equivalent to a continuous notice production that "suggests the occurrence of a big hit when executed". In addition, the target effect (the effect of vibrating the operation unit) that is the target of the vibration notice effect in this case is also executed before the start of the variation display that is the effect target and the variation display that is the effect target. Therefore, it is an effect corresponding to a continuous advance notice effect "suggesting the occurrence of a big hit before the variable display is executed and when the variable display is executed".

(13) In the above embodiment, the specific display (hold display, active display) corresponding to the variable display is the first suggestion mode (blue mode, red mode) that suggests that a big hit occurs or the display mode changes. , A special mode (triangle)) can be displayed, and a second suggestion mode (operation mode) suggesting that the operation unit vibrates can also be displayed. Specifically, the specific display of 1 is displayed in a normal mode (white circle resting mode) that is neither a first suggestion mode nor a second suggestion mode, and a second suggestion mode. A display mode that is not a suggestion mode (blue circle rest mode, a red circle rest mode, a triangle rest mode) and a display mode that is a second suggestion mode but not the first suggestion mode (white). A display mode that is both a first suggestion mode and a second suggestion mode (a display mode that combines the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode), for example, blue. An example is shown in which there are cases where the display is performed in a round operation mode, a red round operation mode, and a triangular operation mode). Not limited to such a form, the specific display (hold display, active display) is displayed in either the first suggestion mode or the second suggestion mode, and is a display that combines the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode. It may not be an aspect. Specifically, the specific display of 1 is a normal mode (white round stationary mode) that is neither a first suggestion mode nor a second suggestion mode, and a display mode that is a first suggestion mode but not a second suggestion mode. (Blue round rest mode, red round rest mode, triangular rest mode), display mode (white round motion mode) that is the second suggestion mode but not the first suggestion mode. It may be displayed as.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A 1st special symbol display device 4B 2nd special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

It is a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Equipped with a production control means to control the production
The effect control means
It is possible to execute a plurality of types of advance notice effects suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled.
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to a predetermined type of advance notice effect including a predetermined vibration effect that vibrates the operation unit.
When executing the predetermined type of advance notice effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect that changes the specific display to a specific mode.
The case where the predetermined type of advance notice effect is executed after the specific display is displayed is controlled to the advantageous state as compared with the case where the predetermined type of advance notice effect is executed without displaying the specific display. High percentage
When the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed.
As the effect pattern of the specific effect, the first effect pattern in which the specific display changes to the specific mode when the predetermined vibration effect is executed, and the advance notice effect different from the predetermined vibration effect are executed. A gaming machine characterized in that there is a second effect pattern in which a specific display changes to the specific mode.

Images